Columbia (Bnitier^ttp 
 
^^ 
 
 '^M 
 
 ^^«i^i^jiX^ 
 
 J^-^jJj 
 
 !^^ fe^ 
 
 ^'^M^ 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 ^^^^ 
 
 «^ 
 
 l^i 
 

Digitized by tine Internet Arciiive 
 
 in 2010 with funding from 
 Columbia University Libraries 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/567usefulhintsfo00stee 
 
Useful Hints 
 
 FOR THE 
 
 BUSY DENTIST. 
 
 WM. H. STEELE, D.D.S. 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 THE WILMINGTON DENTAL M'K'G CO. 
 No. 1413 Filbert Street, Philadelphia. 
 
 1895- 
 
l^.Ks:-^; 
 
 Entered according to Act of Congress, in the j'ear 1895, by 
 
 The Wilmington Dental M'f'g Comtaxy, Philadelphia, P.-v 
 
 in the OflBce of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington, D. C. 
 
AUTHOR'S NOTE. 
 
 IXtliis volume, I have endeavored to cany out the same 
 principle embodied in my first work; namely, to pre- 
 sent to the busy, practical dentist, the latest and best 
 methods of our most skilled operators, and best writers, 
 arranged in such a manner as to be accessible at a moment's 
 notice. 
 
 This volume contains much more original matter than 
 the first; illustrations have been employed, which will add 
 greatly to the value of the work as a book of ready refer- 
 ence. 
 
 In otfering this second little volume to the profession, I 
 have many acknowledgments to make for the generous and 
 friendly reception given to the first ; and it is hoped this 
 efl:brt will prove as acceptable, and meet with the same indul- 
 gent welcome. 
 
 WILLIAM II. STEELE. 
 
 For.EST City, Iowa. 
 
DEPARTMENT A. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 
 
 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 ]. Health in the Office." — Since health is the corner- 
 stone of all good work, either of boch^ or mind, we venture 
 on a few suggestions as to how this may be secured in our 
 office surroundings. 
 
 Pure, fresh air is of prime importance to health, j^ethow 
 little value seems to be attached to it, if we may judge from 
 the close unhealthy atmosphere of many of our dental oper- 
 ating-rooms, charged with the concentrated emanations from 
 iodoform, creosote, and half a dozen more ill-smelling com- 
 pounds, and mixed with the perfumes of dead pulps and foul 
 teeth. Though the operator may exist in these improper 
 surroundings for a long time, yet nature, insulted by such 
 treatment, finally rebels, and protests in the form of head- 
 aches, backaches, weakened eyes, and the like. 
 
 To secure a healthy office we must have good light and 
 good ventilation. 
 
 In regard to light, north, south, and east each, has its 
 advantages and disadvantages. 
 
 The north is a clear, steady light, but is not strong; and 
 in the short winter months and cloudy weather its defects 
 are clearly seen and felt. 
 
 The east is a good morning light, but is weakest in the 
 closing hours of the day, just Avhen one is tired and wants 
 the best light possible. 
 
 A south light is the strongest and longest, and if prop- 
 erlj'- regulated by white curtains in the middle of the day, 
 the best. 
 
 A west light should never be chosen if either of the 
 others can be had, as it will be weak in the morning and bad 
 
 * Read at tlie semi-annual meeting of the Massacluisetls State T>ental So- 
 cietv. 
 
8 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 in the afternoon, even if you are protected from the direct 
 rays by a necessary curtain. 
 
 The dental operating-room shauld not be a small one, or 
 a box partitioned off from an ordinary room, without appar- 
 ent thought of air or ventilation. This condition of aiFairs 
 is often seen in our large cities, sometimes several of these 
 "stalls" being found in one end of a room. On the con- 
 trary, the operating-room should be of good size and separate 
 from the parlor or anteroom. The laboratory should be a 
 commodious, light sunny room, not the little back pantry- 
 closet or dark, damp cellar often seen. 
 
 Sun and air must be had if either good health or good 
 work is expected. 
 
 Then, have all medicines in glass-stoppered bottles, in a 
 case, so as to keep the office as free as possible from disagree- 
 able odors. 
 
 It is notatall necessary to have one's office, instruments, 
 or person so saturated with creosote and iodoform as to ad- 
 vertise one's calling. This is neither gentlemanly nor agree- 
 able. 1^0 professional man is so likely to neglect ^I'roper 
 exercise asthedentibt, with his tired back calling him to the 
 lounge or easy chair ; but air and exercise must be had, either 
 by riding, driving, or walking. To this end it is well to 
 have the office separate from the dwelling, so that in vv^alking 
 back and forth the eye may be allowed to take in fresh 
 scenes and the lungs fresh air, thus refreshing both mind and 
 body.— H. B. Noble, D.D.S. 
 
 2. Separating Teeth. — I think the separator is a dan- 
 gerous instrument. It is in rare cases only, where good and 
 sufficient space may be thus acquired, and in unskilful 
 hands, especially young practitioners, the probability of fail- 
 ure at the cervical border is, in my opinion, increased ten- 
 fold. If a tooth is to be filled, the first and most important 
 point is that the completed filling shall be perfect. There 
 are few men who can put in as good a filling in a space 
 barely admitting an instrument, and there are fewer still 
 conscientious enough to do it, even granting them the skill. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 9 
 
 The best teaching tlien for the 3'ouiig, and I think for the 
 old as well, is to depend on the rubber or wooden wedge. 
 There is a trick in the application of each. When using 
 rubber allow a bit of it to protrude below the cutting ends 
 of the teeth. This part, by contraction as the teeth move, 
 will swell, and the rubber is prevented from pressing up 
 against the gum. To apply the wooden wedge, proceed thus: 
 The wedge is trimmed to the proper width and should 
 approach a taper very gradually. • If it is then made smooth 
 with a bit of sandpaper it will be less likely to split. Lastly, 
 it should be soaped.. A second wedge should be made quite 
 thin, and have a shoulder which will prevent it from passing 
 between the teeth beyond that point. This, also soaped, is 
 placed between the teeth next to the gum temporarily, Now, 
 when the permanent wedge is forced into position, this one, 
 iirst placed, prevents it irom hurting the gum, and oiFers a 
 slippery surface for it to slide against. The wedge in place 
 and trimmed to suit, the temporary slip is removed, and this 
 relief of pressure against the gum is gratefully acknowledged 
 by the patient. At the next sitting, supposing the teeth 
 separated but quite sore, gutta-percha should be put between 
 them and worn for several daj^s. — ^Dr. Ottolengui, in Brook- 
 lyn Dental Society. 
 
 3. Application of Rubber-dam. — Probably no denti3t 
 will admit that he is not master of so simple a thing as the 
 rubber-dam ; and yet how often does the dam become the 
 master of the dentist merely because some unforeseen acci- 
 dent occurs in the midst of an operation. There is the tiniest 
 tear through which mucus will ooze; the dam did not pass 
 entirely down between the teeth, and moisture is creeping 
 toward our work; the clamp slips; we have not allowed 
 quite enough margin to the rubber to cover the mouth ; we 
 thought we had, but when we applied the clamp we discov- 
 ered our error, and so on ad infinitam; through some little 
 oversight we have failed in that seemingly simple operation, 
 the application of the dam. So much annoyance has occurred 
 in this manner that perhaps you will pardon me if I think it 
 
10 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 important enough to tell you all the little tricks which I 
 have learned in this connection. 
 
 For comfortable work, the rubber, when in position, 
 should embrace at least four teeth ; on dark days it is not 
 amiss to take in twice as many. It should lay over the face 
 without a wrinkle, and should not cover the nostrils ; it 
 should, however, completely cover a moustache, as the hairs 
 often intervene between our eyes and work. To accomplish 
 this, a piece of dam of sufficient size should be stretched over 
 the parts which it is intended to cover, so that the proper 
 position for the holes may be ascertained, allow^ance being 
 made for the stretching which will be made by the clamp. 
 In this position the cusps of the teeth will show through the 
 rubber, and a mark over each may be best made with an 
 excavator, a pencil not answering as well. If because of the 
 loss of a tooth a space must be spanned, the rubber should 
 not be stretched at that point ; if this is not considered it 
 will be found that when the dam is stretched over the teeth 
 it will not hug the necks of the teeth at this point. In fact, 
 this rule holds for all spaces great or small ; the rubber should 
 be wide enoug-h. In cuttino; the holes use a device which 
 makes a perfectly round hole, this being the least likely to 
 tear. Make the holes sufficiently large ; don't force a molar 
 through a hole wdiich would be just right for a bicuspid. 
 Where the teeth are in close contact, soap a bit of waxed 
 floss silk and pass it between all the teeth first; then soap 
 the edges of the holes in the dam ; in this manner there is 
 seldom any difficulty about forcing the rubber between the 
 teeth. Occasionally, even this will not serve. Your prede- 
 cessor has left a filling with ragged edges, which tear the 
 rubber. In this case the teeth in question should be w^edged 
 with soaped w^ood, as will be described later. The least 
 spreading allows the rubber 1o pass between, when the 
 wedges may be removed. This is better than trying to 
 force the dam between the teeth with silk. That method 
 not unfrequently tears the rubber, and accounts for the mys- 
 terious oozing Avhich occurs whilst the filling is in progress, 
 and is largely responsible for the failure so often reported at 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 11 
 
 the cervical border. If the dam has been properly adjusted, 
 it can be removed in perfect condition. How often have 
 you noticed, after removal, that in addition to the holes 
 made by your punch there are several others, satellites, as it 
 were, about the greater orbs. — B. A. R. Ottolengui, D.D.S., 
 in Brooklyn Dental Society. 
 
 4. Applying Rubber-dam Clamps. — Select the one to 
 be used before applying the dam. Choose one which will 
 grip the teeth tightly. Throw away all clamps which would 
 not hurt you if put on your finger. A clamp without a 
 spring is no better than a clock in the same condition. In 
 applying the clamp to a molar in the upper jaw a little trick 
 is found to be most valuable. We begin by slipping the 
 rubber over a central incisor, then over the lateral cuspid 
 and bicuspid, and finally over the first molar, let us say. 
 We endeavor to apply the clamp and find little room, and 
 the patient flinches. The cause is this : The middle finger 
 is the one we use to adjust the dam ; it protrudes into the 
 mouth, and as we work toward the molar region we gradu- 
 ally fold the angle of the mouth inward so that at last it is 
 held back b}^ the tip of the finger, and it is diflicult to find 
 room for the clamp. 
 
 Just at this point, take the handle of a burnisher or 
 other instrument and free the cheek, so that the finger passes 
 into the mouth, the cheek slipping forward ; then it will be 
 found that, not being crowded back, its elasticity gives us 
 sufiicient room to apply the clamp without pain. This one 
 point has been of inestimable value to me, and to mj^ patients 
 in saving pain. 
 
 Where the gum has receded and a large festooned cavity 
 is present, tiie space on either side of the hole which is to 
 embrace the tooth to be filled should be wider than ordina- 
 rily made ; otherwise, when stretched so far up on the gum, 
 there will be leaking about the edges. — B. A. R. Ottolengui, 
 D.D.S., in Brooklyn Dental Society. 
 
 5. Ligation of Rubber-dam. — Ligatures should be dis- 
 pensed with as much as possible. They are frequently the 
 
12 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 cause of more pain than any other part of an operation. 
 It is rarely necessary to ligate more than two teeth, and fre- 
 quently no ligature at all is needed. The trick is done by 
 inverting the edge of the rubber so that it slips under the 
 maro-in of the ffum ; if the root is at all conical, the elasticity 
 will cause the rubber to crawl up and tuck itself under nicely. 
 If a ligature must be used, a little cocaine is useful. There 
 will come to us cases where the ligature is absolutely neces- 
 sary, and where it seems almost impossible to place it so that 
 it will not ride up around the crown rather than remain at 
 the gum margin. Let us suppose such a case in connection 
 with an upper lateral incisor. The cavity is in the palatal 
 sulcus, therefore the ligature must be forced up. The trick 
 is to tie a good knot in your silk first ; placed about the 
 tooth, this knot must come at the center on the palatal side ; 
 it makes a good point of resistance for the instrument, and 
 is pressed up under the margin of the gum, carrying the 
 rubber with it ; the gum contracting holds it, and when 
 tightly tied on the labial side holds securely. This is the 
 first point I ever picked up at a clinic, and, as I have never 
 seen it at one since, I would have lost a great deal of satis- 
 faction which it has brought me had I been absent from that 
 clinic. 
 
 I alluded to leaking. In a very wet mouth, after the 
 best precautions, ligatures well placed, it will sometimes 
 happen that moisture will creep in around the neck of the 
 tooth. Take a piece of spunk, dip it in gum sandarach, 
 being careful not to get an excess, and i3ack it in a rope 
 around the neck of the oflPender. Then apply a second liga- 
 ture which shall tie the spunk in place. The leak will be 
 stopped. If an instrument has slipped and torn a small 
 hole, it may be stopped with a bit of sponge dipped in sand- 
 arach. Where the leak is about a clamp, the clamp should be 
 taken off carefully, a fairly large piece of spunk, treated as 
 described, placed along the edge of the rubber, and the clamp 
 reapplied so that it bites the middle of the spunk holding it 
 in place. As to the slipping of a clamp, it sometimes occurs 
 because the dam is held too tight by the rubber strap which 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 13 
 
 passes around the head, or there is a strain from the diin\ 
 weights. — B. A. R. Ottolengui, D.D.S., in Brooklyn Dental 
 Society. 
 
 6. Napkins for Excluding Moisture. — In some cases it 
 will be found impossible to apply the dam at all. There is a 
 way of using the napkin which may not have occurred to all. 
 A small mouth napkin is rolled into a narrow fold, and 
 placed about the tooth in the shape of the letter " U," the 
 ends forward. It is so arranged that the folds extend slightly 
 upon the sides of the tooth, where it is firmly held in place 
 with a clamp. There is a special clamp made for this pur- 
 pose by Dr. Ivory, but any clamp of suitable form will 
 answer. — B. A. R. Ottolengui, D.D.S., in Brooklyn Dental 
 Society. 
 
 7. To Quiet Nervous Patients. — In casting about for 
 means to effectually and safely quiet the disagreeable nerv- 
 ousneps of many patients, without taking up t«o much time, 
 I began to try nitrous oxid gas. After having used it more 
 or less for about four years, I have adopted the following 
 method : After having opened cavity with chisel, get instru- 
 ments I wish to use all ready, dry cavity with an absorbent, 
 administer from three to six inhalations of gas ; this, as you 
 know, is a very small dose or almost no dose at all, yet it is 
 sufficient to have a very quieting and delightful effect upon 
 the nervous system. The patient does not lose conscious- 
 ness, but seems to lose that nervous dread or apprehension so 
 often described by saying that the tooth felt as it the instru- 
 ment was going clear through to the pulp. When asked if 
 they felt any pain, the patient will usually say no; or per- 
 haps it may be as a lady said to me a few days since, when 
 I inquired if she felt any pain, she replied, "Yes, a little, but 
 I felt so calm and restful that I did not mind it in the 
 least." 
 
 The gas should not be given in sufficient quantities to 
 produce anfesthcsia, but simply enter the first stage, called 
 by Professor Guilford, the exhilarating system. Two admin- 
 
14 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 istrations as described will enable the operator to prepare the 
 sensitive portion of an ordinary cavity. IVfany people refuse 
 to take it, being afraid of the gas. I never insist on it 
 except in the case of very nervous persons. If there be any 
 danger in the use of nitrous oxid gas as here proposed, I 
 have been unable to find either from the history of the anees- 
 thetic or from practice ; if there is any let us hope it may be 
 made apparent in the discussion of the demerits of this rather 
 disconnected and incomplete paper. — Dr. W. H. Dwindle, 
 in Cosmos. 
 
 8. Mixing Cements. — Many times in using oxyphos- 
 phate there was difiiculty in letting go the patient's mouth 
 to mix the filling. He had found such a contrivance as he 
 now showed very useful in overcoming the difiiculty. It 
 consisted of a glass bottle with a large mouth, the stopper of 
 which consisted of a glass bulb and tube, the powder being 
 in the bulb of the stopper instead of in the bottle, and the 
 bulb being open at the top and covered over with India-rub- 
 ber, so that by pressure of the rubber the desired quantity of 
 powder was forced through the tube. A similar arrange- 
 ment contained the liquid, so that the whole operation of 
 mixing the phosphate could be easily conducted with one 
 band. — Dr. Ilumby, in British Journal-. 
 
 9. To Prevent a Slip in Dental Operations. — 1st. 
 Almost always the rubber-dam should be applied before 
 operations are begun. There are exceptions where the diffi- 
 culty of its application, and the pressure of clamps on the 
 gum, more than balance the benefits to be derived from its 
 use, when it should be discarded. 
 
 2d. It is essential that the head of the patient be steadily 
 supported. He will be less likely to move his head, volun- 
 tarily or involuntarily, if his position be made fairly easy 
 and comfortable. 
 
 3d. The position and height of the chair should be ad- 
 justed to the easiest and freest movement on the part of the 
 operator. The "arm"' is a necessary adjunct to the chair. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 15 
 
 that one forearm and the hand may be firmly supported 
 while steadying the head or lower jaw of the patient. With 
 tliese precautions, the possibilities of a "slip" are greatly 
 reduced. 
 
 4th. For the engine, a poor hand-piece, one which fails 
 to grasp and hold the bit firmly, should not be tolerated. 
 
 5th. All cutting instruments should be sharp — they 
 can be used more accurately, delicately and speedily. 
 
 6th. The operator, while lie may work rapidly, should 
 never be in baste, but rather deliberate ; making sure, espe- 
 cially, that each instrument he selects be adapted to the 
 work in hand. Of all things, he should avoid the habit of 
 jerkiness or fussiness in the handling of tools. — Dr. G. New- 
 kirk,, m Review. 
 
 10. Pericemental Inflammation. — The peridental 
 membrane being so abundantly supplied with vitality is fre- 
 quentl}' subject to inftammation, and I know of no disease 
 presented to the dental practitioner that is so annoying and 
 perplexing as the one under consideration. 
 
 The peridental membrane is an elastic, velvet-like cush- 
 ion, entirel}" lining the alveolar cavity of each root of the tooth. 
 It has just enough of elasticity to allow the tooth a slight 
 movement in any direction, when it resumes its normal posi- 
 tion as the pressure is removed. This peculiar membrane is 
 supplied with blood-vessels and nerves, as is the pulp of the 
 tooth at the apical foramen just before entering the pulp 
 canal, these vessels separate, and a branch continues along 
 the side of each root, or ftmg, of the tooth, supplying the per- 
 icemental membrane. By the aid of this membrane we are 
 enabled to distinguish the touch of the tooth, and Professor 
 Black sa3's, " This is the onl}^ organ of touch possessed by 
 the tooth, and this is so delicate that the least pressure of the 
 tongue conveys the sensation to the tooth." By means of 
 this delicate membrane we are enabled to distinguish this 
 disease (pericementitis) from pulpitis and other diseases of 
 the tooth that come to our notice — percussion producing 
 pain and flinching, which is not the case in pulpitis. 
 
16 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 Inflammation of the peridental membrane is ushered in 
 and distinguished by redness of the gums, heat, pain and 
 tumefaction or swelling. In diseases of this membrane we 
 are in a measure confined to local applications to the gums — 
 after* removing the cause of disturbance, and here let me 
 state that all inflammations are caused by an irritant in per- 
 icementitis, the irritant may be a putrescent pulp — may be 
 from a blow, or some irritant around the gingival border of 
 the alveolus-salivary calculus, for instance; and I have seen 
 considerable inflammation of the membrane by the overlap- 
 ping of an amalgam filling — probably inserted by myself — 
 impinging on the peridental membrane at the neck of the 
 tooth. ]^ow, before any therapeutic treatment will avail 
 much, the cause of the irritation must be removed. 
 
 The treatment most relied on for jDcricementitishas been 
 counter-irritation and stimulating the absorbents. Aconit 
 and iodin have been largely depended on for this purpose, 
 and I have always used the aconit and chloroform as a local 
 application applied by means of a napkin, at frequent inter- 
 vals, followed b}^ painting the gums with iodin ; the iodin 
 seems to be more readily absorbed and carried to the place 
 where most needed, when the chloroform and aconit is first 
 used ; aconit paralyzes the sensory nerves, arterial tension 
 is lessened, the inflammatory process being thus held in check 
 until resolution ensues. Iodin acts also as a counter-irri- 
 tant, and excites the absorbents, thus whipping up these lit- 
 tle scavengers, enabling them to carry off any eftete matter 
 accumulating in any local part of the body and diffusing it 
 through the system ; it has been extensively used in inflam- 
 mation of the peridental membrane and of the gum. tissue. 
 
 But it maybe inquired, " How are these external reme- 
 dies brought to bear upon deep-seated and internal inflam- 
 mations?" I answer that the beneficent author of our 
 existence formed us so that there exists an intimate relation, 
 a close sympath}' between internal parts and the external sur- 
 face immediately opposite or over them, and physicians have 
 all along availed themselves of its advantages in treatment 
 of internal or deep-seated diseases. This treatment, to be 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 17 
 
 effective, may liave to be repeated for several days to secure 
 control of the conditions. In my own practice I have found, 
 in addition to the local applications, great benefit in adminis- 
 tering aconit in one to two-drop doses, every hour, for six 
 or eight hours; or in the use of gelseminum in tive-drop 
 doses. These are great depressors of the heart's action, and 
 should not be administered by ignorant or careless prac- 
 titioners. — Dr. W. H. Sedgwick, in Dental Register. 
 
 11. Protecting Teeth While Erupting. — For many 
 years it has been my habit with soft teeth, that are just erupt- 
 ing to wash out the fissures and put a pat of oxyphosphate 
 in them, even if they are not softened at all. If they are 
 dried out, the filling will usually stay, even if no cutting has 
 to be done. This serves as a protection while the gums lie 
 over the ends of the teeth, and while they are still unused in 
 mastication. When the tooth gets well through, and is an- 
 tagonized and used, the danger of softening of fissure is 
 greatly lessened. When the upper molars are through, they 
 are treated in the same way. — Dr. Perry, Ohio Dent. Jour. 
 
 12. Pyorrhea Alveolaris and its Treatment. — What 
 is it ? iSTo one knows definitely, but it is a disease of frequent 
 occurrence, and when advanced to the stage of pus discharge 
 requires speedy and heroic treatment. A cure can be efiected 
 in a large majority of cases when the disease has not ad- 
 vanced so far as to cause the teeth to be loose in their sockets. 
 The first step in treating a case well advanced, is to test well 
 the condition of the alveola support of the teeth. As a rule, 
 it is a good practice to advise patients to have all teeth ex- 
 tracted that have lost two-thirds of their alveolar support; 
 as not one time in twenty can a tooth be retained with satisfac- 
 tion, if as much as two-thirds of the process has been destroyed 
 by the disease. The next step in treatment (and very import- 
 ant) is to remove from the teeth all accessible deposits, when 
 deposits are so located on roots of teeth as not to be reached 
 and dislodged with scalers ; the tooth or teeth containing 
 such should be extracted ; a cure cannot be efiected so Ions 
 
18 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 as deposits (however small in quantity) remain on roots of 
 teeth. To remove deposits successfully and without detri- 
 ment to surface of cementum with ultimate injury to gum 
 tissues, and to make a cure possible and sure, smooth edge 
 scalers must be used. Success in treatment of the disease 
 depends very much upon the style of scalers used, and how 
 used ; the chief consideration, the thorough removal of all 
 deposits possible to be reached; after which, the application 
 of sulphuric acid (dilute) to suit respective cases. In old 
 subjects, with disease far advanced, one of acid to six, eight, 
 or ten of water is not too strong ; with younger persons, and 
 disease not advanced to medium stage, one of acid to fifteen, 
 twenty, or thirty of water is suitable strength. The acid is 
 always beneficial and never injurious. 
 
 The patient can now take charge and conduct trpatment 
 until a normal state of the gums is restored, which ordinarily 
 can be accomplished to satisfaction in a week or a fortnight, 
 according to extent of disease, age of patient, prosecution of 
 manipulative treatment as advised ; free use of tooth-brush, 
 tooth-pick (quill)^ and finger pressure on gums after meals, 
 daily for a week or two, or until cure is definite. 
 
 When a cure has been accomplished and treatment dis- 
 continued, patient must be instructed to use tooth-brush and 
 pick systematically, and with regularity, after meals. It is a 
 cleanly, wholesome practice, and should be regarded an 
 agreeable privilege, and if freely indulged will prove a safe- 
 guard against return of the disease in a very large majority 
 of cases. 
 
 My experience justifies the assertion that the disease is 
 curable, and it can be easily cured when treated as above indi- 
 cated and instructions to patients are respected and faithfully 
 practiced. 
 
 The disease is well-defined and easy to diagnose, no need 
 mistaking it for any other disease. There has been much 
 speculative theory on the subject of cause, but so far nothing 
 definite is known. The disease always commences at the 
 margin of the gum, and gradually advances toward the alve- 
 olar process; if treated early, cure is speedy and permanent. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 19 
 
 If not treated and checked, tlie advance is to the apex of" the 
 roots of the teetli involved (sometimes slow and sometimes 
 rapid), causing loss of the teeth ; then the disease ahates, and 
 the soft tissues assume a normal state. 
 
 Tlie disease dates far back, and very probablj^ has never 
 changed type. The idea that splinters from tooth-picks or 
 other foreign substances imbedded in the gum tissue can and 
 do produce the disease (as some contend) is too absurd to 
 be entertained. Less theory as to cause of the disease and 
 more conservative treatment for cure would be best for suf- 
 fering patients. 
 
 In the treatment of pyorrhea, as in most diseases pertain- 
 ing to the dental structure, but few remedies are requisite. 
 With less than a dozen well selected remedies successful prac- 
 tice can be conducted, and Avith them all can be accomplished 
 for the check and cure of disease possible or deservable. 
 
 Our safest and best teacher and guide in practice is ex- 
 perience and careful observation of results. Pj^orrhea alveo- 
 laris is a curable disease. — B, F. Arrington, D. D. S. 
 
 13. Inflammation After Extraction. With exostosis, 
 and large and divergent roots, the force necessary for their 
 removal is sometimes equal to all the strength the operator 
 can bring to bear, and it is unreasonable to suppose that this 
 amount of strain can be aj^plied without some inflammation 
 following. Here is where the systemic condition of the 
 patient must be considered. There are many so constituted 
 that any wound heals readilj^ by first intention. If no broken 
 or displaced process has been allowed to remain to cause irri- 
 tation, the place will soon heal, and will be materially aided 
 by the use of antiseptic and astringent lotions. But in a 
 great number of people local disturbance so severe as the 
 extraction of a tooth of this kind is sure to be followed by 
 an exhibition of the inflammatory process, more or less seri- 
 ous, according to the severity of the operation and the 
 systemic condition of the patient. — Dr. Thomas, Ohio Deii. 
 Jour. 
 
20 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 14. Silk for Squeezing Mercury from Amalgam. — 
 Dr. C. E. Kells uses China silk in which to squeeze out mer- 
 cury from amalgam. It leaves no fibers adhering to the 
 material, as from the use of chamois skin. — Ohio Journal. 
 
 15. Gold-capped Cement Fillings. — * * * j 
 prepare beforehand a piece of gold of the size and proxi- 
 mate shape of the opening of the cavity, by condensing a 
 few cohesive cylinders on a serrated steel plate. I then 
 fill two-thirds of the cavity with an oxyphosphate cement, 
 place the prepared piece of gold on the cement while it is 
 yet soft^ and finish the filling by putting on more cohesive 
 gold, until the desired fullness is arrived at, I claim to have 
 good results with these fillings and to save a great deal of 
 labor. — Dr. Oltramore, Swiss Odontological Society. 
 
 16. Useful Right Angle Points. — A very serviceable 
 addition to right angle points of the engine is a number of 
 small screw-pointed mandrels mounted with the smaller 
 wheels and cones. In grinding to fit bands these mounts 
 will enable the operator to turn many an angle with ease 
 that otherwise would be an afiliction to the patient and him- 
 self.— Dr. F. E. Battershell, Ohio Ben. Jour. 
 
 17. Necrosis of Superior Maxillary. — About three 
 months ago a young woman applied to me for treatment, 
 and I found her suflering from an alveolar abscess. After 
 the usual symptoms being manifested, fluctuation was de- 
 tected. A free incision was made with a scalpel, and quite a 
 quantity of pus flowed through the opening, much to the 
 patient's relief. 
 
 The superior left central incisor, which was the oflending 
 cause, was then extracted, and the patient, who was in an 
 extremely anasmic condition, was put on tonic treatment. 
 
 The opening made by the scalpel quickly healed, and 
 the patient seemed entirely well. About four weeks later 
 she again applied to me for treatment, complaining of severe 
 pain about the seat of the former abscess. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 21 
 
 A horribly offensive odor was issuing from the mouth, 
 and on making an examination a sinus was discovered. On 
 probing, necrosed bone was found. Fearing that unless 
 treatment was decided upon the patient would again suffer 
 with alveolar abscess, I decided to operate. 
 
 All the instruments to be used were boiled and placed 
 in a solution of carbolic acid. The patient's face and mouth 
 were washed with a solution of bichlorid of mercury. My 
 own hands were disinfected with a similar sohition. 
 
 The patient was then anaesthetized with chloroform 
 By means of a circular engine-saw and a surgical engine a 
 free opening was made on the outer side of the right central 
 and the left lateral incisor teeth almost an inch deep. The 
 bone and tissue were then cut away by means of bone-forceps. 
 
 The wound was then washed out and disinfected with a 
 solution of bichloride of mercury. A dressing of carbolized 
 lint was then packed into the opening and secured by liga- 
 tures to the adjacent teeth. This dressing was changed 
 twice daily for one week, when it was removed entirely. 
 
 A mouth-wash, consisting of boracic acid, ten grains 
 to the ounce of water, was given, to be used every hour. In 
 two weeks after the operation the wound had healed, and 
 there was little or no soreness. 
 
 An impression of the mouth was then taken and a plate 
 made, with a left superior central incisor attached to it, to- 
 gether with a piece of rubber running up into the space left 
 by the removal of the necrosed bone. 
 
 So far the patient has felt no uneasiness, and I have 
 every right to believe that the operation has been a success. 
 — B. D. Friedenwald, D.D.S., in Ohio Journal. 
 
 18. Vascular Growths on the Gums. — A very un- 
 comihon affection is a npevoid or vascular tumor of the gum. 
 Such usually occur in adult or middle life, and are most 
 commonly situated in the upper jaw, between the incisors 
 and canines. They are generally of small size, about as large 
 as a pea, and are often more or less pedunculated. They tend 
 to increase in size ; they are compressible, and can thus be 
 
22 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 reduced to the level and color of the gums. They are of a 
 bright red color, and bleed readily on pressure, etc. Hemor- 
 rhage is indeed their most important symptom ; it usually 
 occurs at night, when in the recumbent posture, and consists 
 in a general oozing from the whole surface of the growth. 
 In rare cases this may be very severe, and on this account 
 they may require removal, though they are perfectly inno- 
 cent, and do not return when carefully eradicated. This is 
 best done by freely excising with the knife, iucluding, at the 
 same time, a small portion of the subjacent vascular and 
 spongy bone. Cold and pressure will usually check any 
 hemorrhage. Any subsequent sprouting granulations should 
 be touched with nitrate of silver. Before resorting to exci- 
 sion, you might first try the effects of ligating the growth, or 
 of destroying it by caustics. — Frank Lankester, L.R.C.P., 
 M.R.C.S., L.D.S., in Ohio Journal 
 
 19. Gold Backing Eroded Teeth. — Upon examination, 
 I found that not only had the cutting edges of the four incis- 
 ors been much broken down, but that the enamel was also 
 eroded or dissolved from the entire lingual surfaces of the 
 four incisors (excepting a small part of the right lateral), 
 most of the lingual surface of the left cuspid was stripped 
 of enamel, and the right cuspid had also suffered from the 
 same cause, but to a slight degree only. 
 
 Whatever may have been the etiology of the case, the 
 treatment was as follows : Rubber-dam being applied to the 
 incisors and forced well under the gum so as to effectually 
 exclude all moisture, a narrow groove was drilled along the 
 cutting edge of the right central and extended around the 
 lingual surface of the tooth, as near as possible to its periph- 
 ery. Several similar grooves were next cut across the lin- 
 gual surface parallel with the long axis of the tooth, but not 
 connected with the circumvallating groove. 
 
 The grooves were made as deep as circumstances would 
 permit, and were slightly undercut. They were then care- 
 fully filled with Williams' cylinders of cohesive gold foil, 
 thoroughly condensed by hand pressure. When the grooves 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 23 
 
 were all filled, gold was built across trom one groove to an- 
 other till all of the interstices were bridged, and the pol- 
 ished surfixce of dentine entirely covered. This golden surface 
 Avas then built on till a sufficient and uniform thickness 
 was attained. The gold on the cutting edge was carried 
 over a short distance on the labial surface and also built 
 down sufticiently to give the tooth a somewhat natural out- 
 line, but not enough to endanger the stability of the work 
 or to disfigure the mouth with an unpleasant gleam of gold. 
 The gold extended also in those small proximal cavities 
 from which the remains of soft gold fillings had been re- 
 moved. The Avhole was then carefully finished^ making a 
 strong but delicate armor for the defenseless tooth. 
 
 The operation was repeated the next day on the left 
 central, and at subsequent sittings both laterals were similar- 
 ly treated. The pulps of these teeth were alive, but that of 
 the left cuspid was dead. The root of this tooth therefore, 
 after treatment, was filled with gutta-percha, the cavity of 
 decay with gold, and the whole of the lingual surface 
 sheathed with gold in the manner before described. The 
 appearance of the lingual surfaces after treatment is shown 
 in the accomj)anying figure. 
 
 \^^ 
 
 I have recently examined these teeth and replaced some 
 smaller portions of gold about the cutting edges and one 
 corner of a lateral. Once before,' since the primary opera- 
 tion, were some very slight additions of gold needed, but, 
 as -a whole, the work has remained intact for eleven years. 
 During this time the teeth have been subjected to the severest 
 tests of mastication, the patient being a New York business 
 
24 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 man now in robust health. Time is the crucial test of den- 
 tistry, and it has proved the usefulness and permanence of this 
 operation. — Dr. Henry jST. Dodge, in International Journal. 
 
 20. Securing Loosened Incisors. — On one occasion 
 the temptation to attempt the retention of such teeth was- 
 increased by the pleadings of the patient, a gentleman about 
 seventy years of age, in good health, and. of good physique, 
 who had more than the usual horror of artificial teeth, assur- 
 ing me that he would bear any fatigue, put up with any dis- 
 comfort, if I would, but save his natural teeth. 
 
 The teeth had, as nsual, elongated, considerably, and. 
 when the jaws were closed, the four inferior incisors would 
 sometimes shut inside and sometimes outside the upper ones, 
 though the roots were long and still had quite an attachment 
 to the gum. 
 
 The first step was to grind down the elongated teeth 
 with corundum stones until they would clear the upper ones 
 when closed. An impression was taken, and upon the dies 
 obtained a cap of pure gold, about number 30, was swaged 
 to fit the upper two-thirds of the lingual surfaces of the six 
 teeth, and extending over the tops of the teeth to a point, 
 perhaps, one-fourth of the distance down the labial surface. 
 This cap, being carefuUj'' fitted, was cemented in place June, 
 1891, with zinc phosphate, and the edges of the cap burn- 
 ished to the teeth wherever possible. The teeth were then 
 thoroughly scaled and cleaned. 
 
 This pure gold cap has become loose, I think, twice 
 since it was put on, but it is easily readjusted, and has in 
 every way fulfilled my expectations, for the teeth are pre- 
 served, and, I think, can be indefinitely. — S. E. Davenport, 
 Ext. International. 
 
 21. Hints on Giving Gas. — It would be better for the 
 profession if dentists would use gas more than they do, and 
 not talk heart, lungs, etc., to scare patients when they do go 
 to a dentist who uses it. 
 
 Get the confidence of your patient, then be sure the 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 25 
 
 clothes are loose, to give free play to the diaphragm. Tell 
 the patient to rest the hands on arms of chair, and be sure 
 that they don't take hold tight; then there will not be the 
 tired and exhausted feeling from nerve and muscular ten- 
 sion. "Don't try to get too many teeth during one adminis- 
 tration ; better administer it three or four times at one sit- 
 ting. Some use a mouth prop; but I never do. 
 
 I find that the gas-bags that have the outlet at end of 
 bag is the cause of checking the free flow of gas, when it 
 bends by pulling on outlet tubing, at the small point of the 
 bag. To overcome this trouble, I have had a six-gallon bag 
 made, with outlet coupling put on the side of the bag, which 
 surely gives a free flow of gas. — Wm. C. C. Ball, in Items. 
 
 22. Repairing Bicuspids with Porcelain. — A young 
 lady patient, having broken ofi:' the buccal cusp from her first 
 upper bicuspid, had it built out by a brother operator with 
 OS-artificial, which had failed to stand the force of mastica- 
 tion. I advised her to have it built out with gold. But, 
 on removing the filling, I found that decay had made such 
 ravages On the proximal surfaces that it was impossible to 
 put the rubber-dam on sufliciently close to keep off" the secre- 
 tion or to prevent hemorrhage during the necessarily tedious 
 operation. Thinking of Dr. Bonwill's suggestion, I took an 
 artificial bicuspid, ground it down flat, and, removing the 
 pins, cut it oft" and fitted it nicely ; then cut a deep dove- 
 tailed groove lengthwise in its lingual surface ; then warmed 
 gutta-percha, and fitted it so as to perfectly replace the miss- 
 ing cusp. ]!Text I took an impression and fitted a band very 
 closely around the whole tooth ; removed the band and gutta- 
 percha ; made good retaining points in the remaining cusp ; 
 placed the porcelain cusp in position, and again forced the 
 band over the tooth ; kept it firmly in position, and packed 
 the cavity between the cusps with the best amalgam, allow- 
 ing it to harden for forty-eight hours. I then removed the 
 band and polished the amalgam. The young lady has eaten 
 every meal on it since, and it would take an expert to tell the 
 artificial from a natural cusp. — E. G. Smith, D.D.S., in Cosmos. 
 
26 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 23. To Make Gold Stick.— Dr. Storey, of Dallas, Tex., 
 said when bis sold would not stick he passed it through 
 tincture of iodin and then the flame, and it would stick like 
 ISTorth Carolina resin. — West. Dent. Jour. 
 
 24. Mirrors and Lamps for the Forehead. — I hav6 
 found a mirror attached to the forehead by a tight elastic 
 band a convenience in working. Many dentists, the writer 
 among the number, work much with the chair tipped ba<3k, 
 and depend upon the image reflected from a small mouth 
 mirror. The surface of this mirror being turned from the 
 window frequently does not get enough light to make the 
 cavity as bright as might be wished, and if an attempt is 
 made to reflect light on its surface, from a mirror placed 
 above and behind the patient, the operator's head frequently 
 prevents this from being eflicient, as it comes between and 
 cuts oft" the light. 
 
 Ey placing a light mirror on the forehead increased 
 illumination can be obtained, either by throwing the light 
 directly upon the cavity or reflecing it upon the small mouth 
 mirror. 
 
 A small electric lamp worn in the same position, though 
 somewhat warm, answers well enough for this purpose, where 
 the electricity can be taken from the street, but is entirely 
 out of the question where the ibrce must come from a factory ; 
 and beside is rather bright for the patient's eyes. 
 
 I think if some of the readers of the Practitioner will 
 try this simple device they will like it. Many flllings fail 
 because the cuttino- was done in a light which failed to show 
 that the decay was not entirely removed. — William Herbert 
 Rollins, D.D.S., The Dental Practitioner. 
 
 25. Care of the Engine. — To obtain the best results 
 from our encrine, and other dental machinerv, it must be 
 properly oiled and cared for. . ISTo engine or other delicate 
 mechanism will be at its best unless properly oiled and cleaned 
 when needed. Few dentists have any idea of the injury done 
 their machinery by neglect. The engine, plugger, lathe-head, 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 27 
 
 fan, and all other machines used, should he oiled frequently 
 with the finest of oil, and only a little quantity put on at a 
 time, as often as once a week. The engine hand-piece, 
 plugger, etc., should be taken apart, wiped off and fresh oil put 
 on. Do not use enough oil so it will overflow, causing dirt 
 and dust to collect, which not only soils the hands, but in- 
 terferes with the working of the machine. A little attention 
 to these matters will be well repaid. — Wm. PI. Steele, D.D.S. 
 
 26. Extracting to Implant. — In extracting teeth which 
 are to be replanted, or implanted, the crown should always 
 be protected with sheet lead or sheet tin. — L. G. Bryan, in 
 Ohio Dental Journal. ^ 
 
 27. To Stop Holes in Rubber-dam. — In case holes are 
 made in rubber-dam by accident, use short cylinders of cork, 
 a little larger than the tear in the rubber. A groove is cut 
 round the circumference of the cork, so that the edges of the 
 rubber slip into it and hold in position. — D. Y. Beacock, in 
 Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 28. Filling Undercuts. — Difficulties often occur with 
 proximal cavities. You will frequently find extensive caries 
 under the enamel cusps. You will have large undercuts, and 
 such undercuts are difficult to fill with gold. It is good prac- 
 tice to fill these spaces first with oxychlorid or oxyphosphate 
 of zinc, and I prefer the former, making the cavity more sim- 
 ple for the gold. — Dr. Grouse, Illinois Society. 
 
 29. Contouring with Amalgam. — I have been able to 
 get as good proximal, contour fillings in the molars and 
 bicuspids with amalgam as I often see of gold, hy using for a 
 matrix a piece of metallic finishing strip, held in place by the 
 Booth matrix clamp, which consists of a steel wedge hol- 
 lowed out so as to fit the contour of the crown, one of which 
 is at each end of a strong clamp. This applied outside the 
 strip matrix holds it solid and wedges the teeth apart at the 
 same time. 
 
28 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 Use a good amalgam as dry as possible, pack solid, wip- 
 ing out the excess of mercury with pellets of cotton or bibu- 
 lous j^aper, finishing with amalgam that is hot enough to 
 expel the mercury. 
 
 Remove the clamp and draw the strip out sidewise, and 
 finish with a thin strip between. The result is a beautiful" 
 contour, knuckling as close to the other tooth as though it 
 had been built of gold, thus preserving the interdental space. 
 Though I do not claim that amalgam is as good as gold, yet 
 with care good results can be accomplished. — C. II. West, in 
 Denial Review. 
 
 30. Treatment of Fractured Roots. — In the treatment 
 of fractured roots I first tie a ligature around the pot, bring- 
 ing the parts closely together ; then make an application of 
 compound tincture of benzoin to the inflamed gums, and 
 wait twenty-four to forty-eight hours. As soon as the sore- 
 ness has sufliciently subsided, I drill a small hole through 
 the fractured portions of the root near the gum and insert a 
 gold screw. If there is a filling, it is replaced with Weston's 
 cement, and care is taken that the opposing tooth does not 
 strike the fracture in the act of mastication. The ligature 
 can then be removed. After the parts are held together awhile 
 by the screw and cement, the inflammation ought to entirely 
 subside. The crown or remaining portion can then be re- 
 moved or so shaped as to receive a band or cap. This 
 method applies to fractures extending some distance above 
 the gum. If, however, the fracture does not extend too far 
 above the gum, I remove it, and in fitting the band, cut it so 
 as to completely enclose the space made by the removal of 
 the fractured piece. — Dr. Banfield, in International. 
 
 31. Burning the Holes in Rubber-dam. — Burning the 
 holes in the rubber-dam makes it less liable to tear. An old 
 broken excavator answers the purpose, and by using a taper 
 ing point the holes can be made any size. — Dr. Thompson. 
 
 32. Getting Mold for Inlays. — Taking, for example, a 
 neck cavity in an upper central incisor, it is first necessary 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 29 
 
 to prepare the margin of the cavity, that is, to carry this 
 back till an unbroken line of healthy tissue is obtained ; for 
 till this is effected it cannot be expected a perfect adaptation 
 between the cavity wall and the glass inlay will result, for 
 after the inlay has been fused, no alteration of the margin 
 line must be made. Having obtained this, a small quantity 
 of the deeper caries should be removed ; but in no instance 
 should any sensible undercuts exist, as they are likely to 
 prevent the mold being withdrawn. To obtain a mold, gold 
 foil, or platinized gold, of twelve grains should be employed, 
 and I may here mention a difference that exists between the 
 two metals. Platinized gold does not fuse at the same tem- 
 perature as ordinary gold foil, and it does not apply itself so 
 readily to the margins of the cavity, having a tendency to 
 spring from its increased hardness. Having cut a square 
 piece of foil large enough to exceed the cavity to a consider- 
 able extent, it is folded hito four and then opened ; by this 
 means we obtain an apex which will j^ass to the bottom of 
 the ciavity. "With the index finger of the left-hand, the foil 
 is held at the margin of the cavity, and with a small pellet 
 of cotton wool held in the dressing forceps in the right-hand, 
 the wool is firmly pressed against the gold, and continued 
 till it has been adapted completely to the margin of the 
 cavity. The index finger of the right-hand may then be 
 freely pressed against the wool and the overlapping gold foil, 
 till it applies itself against the entire cavity, part of the gum, 
 and surrounding tooth. If the gold is not previously folded, 
 it is liable to burst by the pressure of the cotton wool, thus 
 affording a leakao;e when the glass is beino; fused. — Journal 
 British Association. 
 
 33. Broken Instruments as Plugger Points. — Broken 
 cone socket excavators make the vevy best plugger points for 
 the Snow and Lewis automatic pluggers. They just fit, and 
 the newly fractured points are better than serrations. — Geo. 
 M. Merritt. 
 
 34. Abscess Evacuator. — Dr. R. Walter Starr's device 
 for evacuating an alveolar abscess by means of a flanged glass 
 
30 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 tube and a compressible bulb was an improvement in the 
 right direction, and I liave supplemented and simplified it 
 ])y adapting Dr. J. B. Wood's patented polishing-cups to the 
 like uses. My method is to take one of these cups, say No. 
 2 (see illustration), and plug the mandrel hole 
 with a piece of gutta-percha, which must not pro- 
 ject on the inside of the cup. Then wet the inside 
 of the cup, and place it Over the gum so as to cover the 
 opening into the abscess. Gently press the cnp flat on 
 the gum, and on removing the finger, the elasticity of 
 the cup will cause sufficient suction to fill the cup with the 
 contents of the abscess, which, by repeatedly applying the 
 cup, may be completely evacuated. Medicaments placed in 
 the tooth-cavit}^ may likewise be drawn through the sac and 
 sinus, and immediate root-filling be practiced with greater 
 prospect of success than by any other means. — Thomas M. 
 Hunter, D.D.S., in Cosmos. 
 
 35. Root Canal Treatment. — The canal is prepared, 
 the rubber-dam applied, and thoroughly dried ; as for an}' 
 other method. IS'ow place some bi-chlorid of mercury on a 
 glass slab, add carbolic acid to form a thin paste ; roll a small 
 canal probe in it and thoroughly smear the entire length of 
 the canal. Heat one of the home-made canal driers'^ hot and 
 pass up into the canal, and carefully sear all parts of it. The 
 root should be wiped out with absorbent paper cones, and 
 the process repeated. — H. S. West, D.D.S. 
 
 36. To Remove Broken Points From Root Canals. — 
 
 To remove broken instruments from root canals, pump euca- 
 lyptus oil into the canal, which so softens its walls that the 
 instrument can be readil}" removed. — T. P. Williams, in 
 Catching' s Compendiam. 
 
 37. A Temporary Filling. — Heat red or white gutta- 
 percha on a porcelain disk or slab till sufficiently soft to 
 be kneaded full of zink fillings; this will make excellent 
 temporary fillings. — Archives of Dentistry. 
 
 * Described on another page. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 31 
 
 38. A New Matrix — T consider the matrix one amono- 
 
 & 
 
 our greatest time, labor, and patience (patient's) savers, and 
 do not think any one who has become accustomed to using 
 them would like to do without their aid ; yet many of those 
 now in use are not what they should be. A matrix that 
 presents a flat, unyielding surface to the tooth is useless, as 
 is also a band matrix that encircles the tooth and only has 
 one or two points of contact. A matrix to be a success 
 should hug firmly all. icalls of the cavity to be operated on; 
 and should yield enough to allow of giving the tooth its 
 natural contour, Avithout being displaced. For years I have 
 used thin German silver, such as is used by stencil cutters for 
 making linen markers. Take a piece of the metal, double it, 
 and cut in shape 
 shown in cut A. 
 
 Take a strip of 
 
 rubber-dam, and "^ fig. i. 
 
 fold as many thicknesses as will pass tightly between the 
 teeth ; open the two plates of the metal and put the strip 
 of dam between, as shown in B, and bring a single thick- 
 ness under the lip C. To adjust the matrix, take hold of 
 each end of the rubber and stretch it, at the same time care- 
 fuUj^ force the matrix down between the desired teeth, 
 till the lower edge of the metal is below the bottom of the 
 cavity; when through with the filling, cut off the lingual 
 part of dam close to the metal ; grasp the other end of the 
 rubber with one hand, hold the matrix in place, stretching 
 the rubber, carefully withdraw it ; it can be removed with- 
 out displacing the metal; and with a little care this can be 
 done without injury to the softest amalgam filling. — Wm. 
 IT. Steele, D.D.S., in Ohio Deiiial Journal. 
 
 39. "Warm Instruments. — No dental instrument should 
 be used at a lower temperature than the blood. This may 
 seem a small matter, but constant daily use has shown me 
 that it is a source of comfort to patients. It is necessary 
 that the means used to warm the instruments sl^ould be sim- 
 ple and automatic, otherwise it will not be done. I have a 
 
32 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 closed copper vessel with flat top, measuring twenty by thirty 
 inches, by one inch in depth. In one corner of the upper 
 surface is a small upright pipe like the neck of a bottle, which 
 is closed with a cork. This fiat' vessel covers the top of my 
 operating case, one end projecting enough to allow a gas- 
 burner to be placed under it without risk of burning the 
 wood-work of the case. 
 
 Before use, the vessel is half filled with water and the 
 cork put in. A simple automatic regulator turns down the 
 gas when the temperature has reached the proper point, and 
 maintains it there all day. I select the instruments to be 
 used, and jDut them on the pan, where they warm in a few 
 minutes. In addition to the instruments, six small glasses 
 of water are kept on the closed pan ; in one of these is a 
 small chemical thermometer, which shows that the temper- 
 ature is right ; in another I keep the syringe for washing 
 out the decayed cavities. The other glasses are for the use 
 of patients in rinsing the mouth. . If for no other purpose, 
 it would be worth while to have such an apparatus to furnish 
 a supply of properly warmed water without any care or atten- 
 tion. There is, moreover, not the least doubt that properly 
 warmed instruments hurt less than when used at the tem- 
 perature of the operating-room. My warming vessel was 
 made by Peter. Gray, 12 Marshall street, Boston. — -Rollins, 
 in International Journal. 
 
 40. To Rotate a Tooth. — Dr. R. B. Adair has a plati- 
 num band, to which is soldered a little cylinder ; one end of 
 a coil of very fine piano-wire is placed in the cylinder ; the 
 other is flattened and passed between the teeth. Almost 
 any tooth can be thus rotated in two or three days with very 
 little soreness or annoyance. — International Journal. 
 
 41. Vent Fillings. — Exigencies in practice sometimes- 
 require the adoption of methods not consonant with what 
 would be esteemed the correct modes if time or other cir- 
 cumstances would permit. For example, a patient will, 
 within a few hours, take train or steamer, to be absent sev- 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 
 
 33 
 
 eral months. A lower molar has, by the patient's neglect, 
 become pulpless. In such a case it has been the practice of 
 the writer to properly prepare the cavity for filling, as, for 
 instance, in Fig. 1. From a box of common cooking gela- 
 tin select or cut a strip like A, Fig. 2 ; slightly warm it, 
 and bend it into the bow-shape of B, Fig. 2. Insert the end 
 of one such bow in the distal and put another bow in the 
 mesial root-canals, as shown in Fig. 3. Out of the larger 
 pieces of gelatin bows may be cut to suit the operator's pur- 
 pose in any given case. It is, of course, assumed that proper 
 preparation means drying as well as shaping the cavity, be- 
 ing careful to keep from the root canals anything that would 
 obstruct them. The cavity is then filled with cement or 
 amalgam, taking care not to displace the gelatin bows from 
 the canals. So soon as the filling becomes hard enough to 
 allow the admission of saliva, the gelatin will quickly soften 
 so that the filling on that side may be finished flush, and the 
 edges of the prospective openings be very slightly smoothed 
 with a suitable round bur. The completed filling, as in the 
 present instance, will appear as represented in Fig. 4, wherein 
 B B indicate the vent openings. 
 
 Fig. 1. Fig. 2. Fig. 3. 
 
 A 
 
 Fig. 4. 
 
 The patient may be at once dismissed, and the dentist 
 be confident that in a few hours the gelatin plugs will have 
 been completely dissolved, and the root-canals have free vents 
 through the sinuses thus made, as is clearly shown by the 
 section through the crown, filling, and mesial root represented 
 by Fig. 5. It is remarkable that by this simple method the 
 artificial sinus maybe given a flattened or a curved form, 
 and have its entire course through the filling, thus avoiding 
 
34 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 any danger of decay by contact of the outflow with the crown 
 •or with the root, as in the Hullihen operation. Another 
 noteworthy advantage is that in whatever tooth a vent may 
 be thus provided, the discharge can be directed downward 
 so that the opening will not be liable to become choked by 
 the gravitation of food debris. The opening may, moreover, 
 be located at any desired point on the face of an}^ filling. 
 There is also a certainty that the internal mouth of the arti- 
 ficial sinus will open directly into the canal. 
 
 By the described method all the risks and uncertainties 
 of ordinary rhizodontrypy are avoided, and the positive ad- 
 vantages before mentioned obtained. 
 
 In cases of this kind the patient should always be plainh^ 
 told that the operation is but an expedient for the temporary 
 preservation of the tooth, which is at the first opportunity to 
 be subjected to painless treatment and the roots and crown 
 permanently filled. The precise nature of the temporary 
 fillino" should in every case be so carefully explained that 
 the patient will be able to exactly describe it to the dentist 
 who may be called on to complete the operation. — W. S. H., 
 171 Cosmos. 
 
 42. To Remove Stains From Teeth. — ^Peroxid of hy- 
 droo-en made into a solution of the strength of five per cent, 
 mixed with powdered pumice and well rubbed over the teeth 
 removes most stains. The teeth should afterward be well 
 cleansed with tepid water, but the application given above 
 is harmless. — British Journal Dental Science. 
 
 43. Finishing Gold Fillings. — The finishing of gold 
 fillings, especially of proximal surfaces, is very easily ac- 
 complished after they have been properly prepared with 
 abrasive disks. Take strips of Japanese bibulous paper, from 
 a half to an inch in width, by four or five inches in length ; 
 sprinkle the surface with precipitated chalk, fold the material 
 two or three times to retain the chalk in place ; then twist 
 the folded paper into a string, and use the same as finishing 
 tape. This makes one of the finest finishing materials, and 
 
USEFUL HINTS. • 85 
 
 can be used even when the teeth are in close proximity, — 
 Gustavus North, D.D.S., in Cosmos. 
 
 44. Pumice Carrier. — Dr. G. B. Clement says, take 
 ■ any shape wood point and, when inserted and revolving in 
 
 the engine, wrap it tight w^ith a piece of absorbent cotton. 
 This dampened makes a splendid carrier of pumice stone or 
 powders. — Southern Journal. 
 
 45. Capping Teeth. — A gentleman whose upper molars 
 and second bicuspids were gone, called to consult me in 
 regard to the eight remaining anterior teeth. I found them 
 worn down about 3^2" of ^^ inch, and very sensitive. I 
 repaired them as follows: With a retain in g-point drill 
 I made a hole on each side of the pulp in the cuspids and 
 incisors, and about one-quarter of an inch deep. A piece of 
 24-karat plate was burnished to fit the worn and irregular 
 surface of the tooth. The position of the holes showing in 
 the gold, a pointed instrument was forced through, and pins 
 made of platinum wire, long enough to project a little, were 
 inserted. The gold remaining in place, a piece of stiff wax 
 was made to adhere, and trimmed to exactly represent the 
 tip to be supplied. This was removed with the gold and 
 invested in Teague's Compound, gold down; the investment 
 covering the wax up to the cutting edges. Melting out the 
 wax, I fused the plate scrap in mold till it was a little more 
 than full, and, while it was in a molten state, pressed it 
 quickly with the blade of a spatula. This caused it to take 
 the exact shape of the wax model. With but little dressing 
 it was a perfect fit. I prepared six of these, and for the 
 bicuspids I made shell crowns. Placing each piece and the 
 crowns in position, I took an impression, and transferred 
 them to a plaster and asbestos model. With 20-karat solder 
 I tacked them all together on the palatine surface. The 
 piece was set with gutta-percha ; so far it seems perfect. 
 The work looks as though it had been built up in the usual 
 manner, and it took but five hours to do it. — Dr. S. F. Gil- 
 more, in Items. 
 
36 
 
 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 46. Hand-piece Protector. — In the use of mandrels 
 carrying abrading materials, especially when wet powders 
 are employed, the gritty substances are apt to work along 
 
 the shank and into the nose of the hand-piece, which thereby 
 becomes worn out of true. To avoid this injury, and also to 
 keep out the saliva when using burs on lower teeth not 
 inclosed by the rubber-dam, I slip over the bur or mandrel 
 shank one of the small (No. 1) rubber caps used for polishing 
 purposes, and find it to perfectly protect the hand-piece, as 
 is made apparent by the illustrations. — J. D. Ennis, in Cosmos. 
 
 47. Palm for Separating Teeth. — Take a handle of a 
 palm-leaf fan ; cut into wedge shape ; insert the wedge be- 
 tween the teeth, gradually increasing the size of the wedge 
 inserted every two or three days, till the desired space is 
 obtained, which will be accomplished without soreness or 
 pain. — Herald of Dentistry. 
 
 48. New Treatment for Abscess. — There can be no 
 alveolar abscess unless there is absorption of the alveolus, 
 and that this absorption makes a cavity which must be dis- 
 posed of, to effect a cure. The plan of procedure the writer 
 recommends in such cases is : As soon as there is an abscess 
 formed, it will be found that the root of the tooth, after ex- 
 traction, has become denuded of its periosteum where the 
 sac is attached. The point is to get rid of the abscess, and 
 restore to a healthy condition. 
 
 The writer recommends the plan of filling the whole of 
 the abscess cavity and root canal with a solution of gutta- 
 percha in chloroform. To make this, take a portion of gutta- 
 percha; cut in small pieces and put in a bottle containing 
 chloroform, enough to make a paste of the consistency of 
 thin cream. Clean the pulp chamber, root canal and abscess 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 37 
 
 cavity thoroughly — exhausting all the pus from the sac at 
 and around the roots — wash with alcohol and water, equal 
 parts, or with peroxid of hj^drogen ; dry as well as possible. 
 Then with one of Donaldson's little bristles, made for cleans- 
 ing root canals, with cotton fibers wrapped around it, dip 
 in the gutta-percha solution and introduce in the pulp 
 chamber and roots, using the cotton-wrapped broach as a 
 piston to pump the solution through the root canal into the 
 cavity of the abscess, continuing to force the solution through 
 the root till it makes its appearance at the sinus opening. If 
 it is found coming too freely, lay the finger on the opening, 
 thus causing the solution to be forced into any and every 
 place around the root where the sac is, in this manner strangu- 
 lating it and preventing the gathering of lymph, to be sub- 
 sequently decomposed into pus. The abscess is thus destroyed. 
 The gutta-percha, being an inert substance, becomes encysted ; 
 nature, thus assisted, goes on and closes up the sinus ; and 
 you will have no more fear than if there had never been an 
 abscess. It has one more recommendation — to the patient, 
 at least, it is painless. — Dr. D. E.. Jennings, in Dental Register. 
 
 49. Root Canal Dryer. — One of the latest and best in- 
 ventions for use in dentistry has recently been gotten out by 
 Dr. J. H. Woolley, of Chicago. It is a root canal dryer, 
 and consists of a handle, similar to that of a plugger. To 
 the end of this is screwed a cone of copper, to which a copper 
 broach of any size can be attached. The cone is heated in 
 the flame till quite hot, then the instrument is ready for 
 use ; the heat being steadily conducted from the cone to the 
 end of the broach. "With it a root can be thoroughly dried 
 to its apex. The instrument acts also as a disinfectant, de- 
 stroying, as it does by heat, any microbes within the cavity. 
 It has been highly indorsed by prominent dentists. — Office 
 and Laboratory. 
 
 50. Twisted W^ire for Regulating a Protruding Upper 
 Jaw. — The teeth articulated well with the lower as far for- 
 ward as the first bicuspid, and the lower arch in the bicuspid 
 
38 DEPARTMENT A. . 
 
 region was broad enough to conform to and jDermit the 
 teeth to articulate with those of the upper jaw. An appli- 
 ance was made, consisting of a rubber plate, which covered 
 the upper back teeth. In the right side of the plate was 
 vulcanized one end of half-round platinum wire, which was 
 passed around in front of the incisors and terminated at a 
 loop in the free end. Two little hooks were soldered to the 
 front of the band in such a way as to catch over the ends .of 
 the centrals when the plate was in the mouth, and prevent 
 the wire slipping up against the gums. In the left side of 
 the plate a staple was vulcanized. 
 
 When the plate was in position a copper wire was passed 
 through both the loop and staple, and had its ends brought 
 together and twisted, this producing pressure on the cen- 
 trals, laterals and cuspids. 
 
 From time to time another twist was given to the cop- 
 per wire, till at the end of seven weeks the teeth were in 
 the desired position, 
 
 A retaining fixture was then placed, consisting of a strip 
 of pure gold, ISTo. 5 to No, 6 Stubbs, and French gauge, so 
 bent and soldered as to form a loop at each end. 
 
 Having previously separated the teeth with linen tapes ; 
 the looped strips were covered inside with thick chloro- 
 percha and passed around the anchor-teeth, allowing the 
 loops to be on the outer side. 
 
 Copper wire was passed through these loops, and the ends 
 of the wire were brought together and twisted till the pure 
 gold bands were perfectly s wedged to the convexity of the 
 crowns, forcing the superfluous chloro-percha out at all points 
 and making an accurate fit, (These bands did not move 
 till taken off" four months later,) 
 
 Copper wires were fastened to the loops left in the baud 
 at the buccal surfaces of the teeth, and brought around the 
 front teeth, from both sides, and twisted together at the cen- 
 trals. This drew the six front teeth to their exact places. 
 The twisted ends were then bent over the cutting-edges of 
 the centrals, to protect the gums from the wire. All rough 
 places on the sides were then covered with gutta-percha. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 39 
 
 The patient was instructed to remove the plate while 
 eating, and by so doing a very good articulating of the finish 
 Avas secured. 
 
 Positive and intermittent force is secured by such a use 
 of twisted wires as above indicated. The principle involved 
 is that of the inclined plane, which is also the principle 
 made use of in the screw. 
 
 Appliances dependent on twisted wire for the appli- 
 cation of force are easily made and applied, and possess 
 many obvious advantages over the screw in very many 
 cases. Wire of silver, galvanized iron, or copper, owing to 
 their pliability, strength, and cheapness, will be found very 
 easily applied and successful. — W. S. Davenport, in Cosmos. 
 
 51. Hint on Treating Pulp Canals. — Properly to treat 
 pulp canals requires that the saliva should be kept out of 
 them, and this is sometimes very difficult when the cavity 
 of decay occurs above the gum line. In such instances it is 
 impossible to so adjust the rubber-dam that moisture will 
 not creep in. These troublesome cases have caused to many 
 much trouble and annoyance. 
 
 When the cavity is dried thoroughly — and it will re- 
 quire some time and patience to do this — warm a piece of 
 gutta-percha of suitable size, and pack it in the bottom of 
 the cavity till it fills the whole to a point above the line of 
 the gum margin. Apply the rubber-dam as soon as it is 
 cold, and with a hot instrument remove that part which fills 
 the pulp chamber and obstructs the entrance to the canal. 
 It will require care to do this without disturbing the rest 
 of the filling, but it can be done if the instrument is 
 used hot. 
 
 This will form an effectual barrier against the intrusion 
 of saliva when the rubber-dam is in place. The gutta-percha 
 is to be left in position till the treatment is d6ne. If it is 
 necessary to put in more gutta-percha to seal up the cavity, 
 during the periods between visits, adherence to the gutta- 
 percha barrier is ]3revented by anointing the latter with 
 vaseline. — Practitioner and Advertiser. 
 
40 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 52. Phosphor-Necrosis. — About one-seventieth grain 
 phosphorus is contained in each match-head. In the dipping 
 and packing rooms is where the danger of phosphor-necrosis 
 is greatest. Here they are handled more, and in damp 
 weather fumes are given oft*. The effects of phosphorus are 
 local. In my ten cases, all started from unsound teeth. 
 Gums kept from the teeth by tartar is also a cause. It is 
 generally thought that the patient must have been exposed 
 for a long time to the fumes of the phosphorus. I know one 
 girl who was exposed only two years. The physician rarely 
 sees it in the initial stage. Generally the patient comes a 
 few days after having a painful carious tooth extracted. He 
 wishes to know why he still has pain. 
 
 Treatment. — Tincture of myrrh is good. Deep incisions 
 liave not been so successful in my hands. I am a firm be- 
 liever in the early operation. 
 
 Prevention. — First, allow none to work in the dipping 
 and packing departments who have not sound teeth. Second, 
 good ventilation. Third, operators not allowed to eat din- 
 ner in their work-rooms, and compelled to keep their hands 
 clean. Fourth, keep a solution of the alkaline carbonates 
 near, as a mouth-wash. — W. C. Jacobs, M.D., in Report in 
 3fedical and Surgical Reporter. 
 
 53. Effect of Hot Air on Cements. — I have noticed 
 that when a jet of heated air is directed on a filling of oxy- 
 phosphate which is undergoing the process of crystallization, 
 the resulting mass becomes friable, with a tendency to gran- 
 ulate, owing to the increased rapidity brought about by the 
 high temperature. It would seem better, therefore, to use a 
 current of cold air or that of ordinary room temperature on 
 such fillings rather than a hot blast. — H. G. Register, in 
 Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 54. Before Introducing Syringe Needle. — Before in- 
 troducing the syringe needle into the gums, it should be 
 dipped into a strong solution of carbolic acid, then washed 
 in a five per cent, solution of the same, which should not be 
 
USEFUL HINTS. ' 41 
 
 wiped off; but if a drop remains on the point when it touches 
 the gum, it will paralyze the tissue so that the needle will 
 not hurt when inserted. — N. S. Hoff, in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 65. Nitrate of Silver in Canal. — If it is desirable to 
 introduce silver nitrate into a root canal, heat a platinum 
 wire and the crystals will adhere to it, and may be carried 
 anywhere. — A. M. Holmes, in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 56. Amalgam Finisher. — In many places a narrow 
 strip of rubber-dam, used as a tape, will serve admirably for 
 the purpose of smoothing down to the borders and polishing 
 amalgam fillings on proximal surfaces of the bicuspids and 
 molars, and is especially good for removing any particles that 
 may adhere to the gum between the teeth. — Dental Office and 
 
 . Laboratory. 
 
 57. To Splice a Broken Tooth. — Some five years ago 
 a lady had the labial surface of an upper bicuspid split en- 
 tirely ofif, from the central depression to just below the gum. 
 The pulp was alive and well, but the tooth presented a most 
 unsightly appearance. The means adopted for remedying 
 the difiiculty were suggested by the case itself. I have used 
 the same device a number of times since with great satisfac- 
 tion, sometimes even instead of pivot teeth. A cuspid plate 
 tooth with long pins was chosen. With a minim corundum 
 stone, a socket was ground into the broken tooth just above 
 the margin of the gum, in which socket the thin upper 
 edge of this porcelain tooth could fit. After the porcelain 
 tooth was fitted to its place and properly shaped, a strip of 
 gold plate one-sixteenth of an inch wide was soldered across 
 from pin to pin like a bridge, leaving about one-sixteenth of 
 an inch between it and the tooth. (See Fig. 1.) The loop 
 thus formed was fitted over a projecting portion of the den- 
 tine, and a slot was ground into the dentine to receive it. 
 {See Fig. 2.) 
 
 A little dovetailing slot was also ground in on either 
 side of the remaining dentine. A ring of very thin platinum 
 
42 
 
 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 was then made, nearly as broad as the length of the tooth 
 crown, Thi^ ring was j)laced around the broken natural 
 tooth, the upper edge passing just beneath the gum. The 
 
 Fig. 1. 
 
 Fig. 2. 
 
 Fig. 
 
 Fig. 4. 
 
 porcelain tooth was then placed inside the ring, w^hich held 
 it steadily in position, the loop passing over the projection 
 of dentine. The pressure exerted by the porcelain tooth was 
 sufficient to fill out the ring in all parts and adapt its thin 
 edges to the varying size of tooth and root. 
 
 This ring, serving as a matrix, was then filled with 
 amalgam, malleted in around the pins and dovetails in the 
 natural tooth. On cutting the ring off the next day and 
 polishing the filling, I found all sensitiveness had disap- 
 peared, and with the restoration of a perfectly natural ap- 
 pearance of the tooth and its contour, I had a serviceable 
 organ, which has continued to do duty ever since. In cases 
 of pulpless teeth I have inserted a gold and platinum or 
 platinum screw firmly in the root, and passed the loop 
 formed by the two pins and the cross-bar over the screw, 
 thus adding greatly to its strength. (See Fig. 3.) The amal- 
 gam, properly mixed, has no surplus mercury to attack a 
 gold and platinum screw. I have replaced in this manner 
 quite a number of teeth that were broken off level with or 
 below the gum. By passing the drill through the loop of 
 the porcelain tooth held exactly in the desired position, 
 when drilling the hole for the screw, a most accurate adapta- 
 tion can be obtained. An incisor can be made irregular to 
 lap over its neighbor, and be varied otherwise to simulate 
 the freaks of nature. A bicuspid root can be dovetailed 
 inside the flattened pulp chamber. The amalgam driven 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 43 
 
 in this dovetail not only helps to retain the screw in posi- 
 tion, but prevents its unscrewing, and assists in supporting 
 the crown, and all this in a cleanly and inoffensive man- 
 ner. In cases where the break in the natural tooth is not 
 extensive, especially where it does not pass below the gum, 
 phosphate of zinc may sometimes be used with advantage in 
 this process. But this is seldom advisable, on account of 
 the unreliable character of the material. 
 
 The bridge from pin to pin may also be shaped to lock 
 in the dovetail slots previously mentioned, employing like- 
 wise the ring as a matrix for the amalgam investment. See 
 Fig. 4, in illustration of the plate tooth and natural tooth 
 thus prepared. — E. A. Bogue, M.D., D.D.S., in Cosmos. 
 
 58. To Keep Cavities Dry. — "While filling, it is neces- 
 sary to resort to a great many expedients, according to the 
 situation and other circumstances. With many small cavi- 
 ties, a piece of spunk or string, or a roll of paper, crowded 
 under the free margin of the gums, will serve the purpose 
 admirably ; cut the gums loose a little way, if necessary. — 
 Items of Interest. 
 
 59. Diamond Powder for Polishing. — A year or two ago 
 I commenced practicing with diamond powder for a variety of 
 purposes. A little diamond powder goes a good way. I use 
 a very little of it mixed with Hindoostan powder, and find 
 it very effective. I use it with a copper point, or take an old 
 bur, heat and soften it, and take oft' the bur part so I have 
 simply a rounded part, dip it in oil of cloves or oil of winter- 
 green, and use it, and it is astonishing how rapidly it works, 
 and what a bright, clean surface it gives. It is cheaper than 
 you think, because you mix it with the other powder, and 
 that saves it to a great extent, and it saves time enough to 
 make the value of the diamond dust a very small matter. 
 The ordinary Hindoostan powder will scratch ; but the S. S. 
 White Company, at my suggestion, have made two or three 
 grades by precipitation, and the finer ones will cut and polish 
 without scratching. Believe me, it is a matter of no small 
 
44 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 moment to finish oiFa filling or roughened tooth-surface with- 
 out scratching. I believe these diiFerent grades of Hindoo- 
 stan powder are the best powders in the market for dental 
 use. — Dr. George Evans, in International. 
 
 60. Celluloid Top Bracket-table. — I have used a cellu- 
 loid sheet, instead of a towel or cloth, for the top of mj table 
 and my bracket. It is absolutely clean, is wiped off without 
 the slightest difficulty, and it seems to meet all the require- 
 ments for a covering of that kind. The greatest objection 
 to it is, that if you happen to let a match fall on it, it will 
 burn very rapidly. It will warp a little if the sun shines 
 on it ; but practically it has no serious objection, and I 
 would not be without it. It is cheap and economical, and a 
 sheet will last two or three years. If you let sulphate of 
 iron or iodin fall on it, it will, of course, stain ; but for 
 neatness and cleanliness I know of nothing that is its equal. 
 I think enough to cover a bracket would cost about sixty 
 or seventy cents. It comes by the yard or by the sheet, in 
 all sizes, shapes and colors. You can get it at the Celluloid 
 Company in Newark. — George Evans, in Internaiional. 
 
 61. To Detect Dead Teeth. — To distinguish a livinar 
 from a dead tooth we have a very simple test in ammoniacal 
 carmine stain. A dead tooth, or dead portions of the tooth, 
 such as remnants of the pulp of the crown and the zone of 
 dentine bordering the pulp-chamber, will never assume our 
 carmine stain. — Carl Heitzmann, in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 62. To Fill Roots with Chloro-percha. — To fill a root 
 with chloro-percha or any liquid, dip the points of a pair of 
 Dr. Flagg's dressing tweezers, while closed, in the liquid. 
 Carry them, charged with the liquid, well up the root. If 
 they are then carefully withdrawn, and at the same time are 
 allowed to open, the liquid will be left in the root. — W. E. 
 Royce, in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 63. Setting Inlays Hot.— Dr. Green, New Albany, sug- 
 gests that in setting a porcelain inlay in cement, the piece 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 45 
 
 of tooth be made as hot as can be held in the fingers before 
 pressing home in the" cement. The cement will set much 
 harder. — International Journal. 
 
 64. Oil Dressing for Root Canals. — Oily dressing in a 
 root canal, as the essential oils of cajeput, caraway,' pepper- 
 mint, etc., are pleasant to taste and smell, are both disinfect- 
 ant and anodyne, are not dissipated by fluids, and do not 
 impair the efl&ciency of cementum or pericementum. — Harlan, 
 in Office and Laboratory. 
 
 65. Polishing Teeth After Cleaning. — If the pumice 
 or other polishing material used for polishing the teeth after 
 removing calculary deposits, be mixed with peroxid of 
 hydrogen instead of water, it will be found much better. — 
 Wm. IL Steele. 
 
 QQ. Injecting Alveolar Abscess. — Dr. E. C. Brownlee 
 gives his method of treatment as follows : First fill the cavity 
 of a pulpless tooth with a packing of common vulcanizable 
 rubber ; charge the hypodermic syringe with carbolic acid 
 and alcohol ; push the pipe through the rubber, and inject 
 the abscess without any leakage around the pipe. — Cosmos. 
 
 67. Amalgam That Will Not Shrink or Tarnish. — I 
 am confident that many of our young practitioners jDlace too 
 much confidence in the claims of makers, for these qualities. 
 Any one who has thoroughly investigated the manufacturing 
 of alloys, knows very well that the best combination of 
 metals, most thoroughly prepared, can be made to shrink, 
 expand, or quickly tarnish, under some conditions. I would 
 advise the young, starting out in practice, to select one of 
 the best alloys, then learn its peculiarities, and always, under 
 all circumstances, work it just as carefully and thoroughly 
 as though it were gold. — Wm. II. Steele. 
 
 68. Using the Electric Mallet. — If in using the electric 
 or Bon will mallet on teeth that are sore from wedg-ino; or 
 
46 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 any other cause, operators (wlio have not before practiced 
 it) would press firmlj against the tooth or filling, in the di- 
 rection of the hloii\ while condensing the gold, they would in 
 many instances save their patients unnecessary pain, and be 
 enabled thereby to make better fillings, because of the greater 
 amount of thoroughness the patient would be able to endure 
 with comparative comfort. Try it, and your patients will 
 bless you for the relief that thoughtfulness in this and like 
 trifles will bring them. — H. D. H., in Cosmos. 
 
 69. Operating on Labial Cavities. — Labial cavity in a 
 lower cuspid, the gums and alveolar border had receded so 
 that the cavity extended nearly one-eighth of an inch below 
 the margin of the alveolar border on the opposite side of the 
 tooth. This is perplexing to fill with gold. But take a 
 piece of hard w^ood, shape it like a wood-carver's gage, only 
 let each corner project that it may pass between the teeth, 
 fitting it to the position on the tooth. Before applying the 
 dam, saturate a thin piece of spunk with a 20 per cent solu- 
 tion of cocain, and lay it on the gums for five or ten minutes ; 
 do not have too much of the solution, lest it mix with the 
 saliva. ISow apply the rubber-dam ; also the ligature, tied 
 loosely for the present. Pull the rubber and ligature down- 
 ward in front of the tooth, so as to expose the entire cavity 
 and margin of the gums above the rubber. Place the stick 
 in position and hold the rubber below the cavity -firmly ; let 
 loose the rubber, and Avith a thin instrument carefully work 
 the rubber to its place. In this an assistant may be of great 
 service by tightening the ligature gently while holding the 
 stick firmly in place with the left-hand. The cavity may 
 now be prepared and filled entirely with the right-hand. — I. 
 Douglas, in Ohio Journal. 
 
 70. White's Plate for Regulating. — Dr. S. A. White, 
 in regulating, uses the same shaped plate for every kind of 
 irregularity, a vulcanite plate having a band running outside 
 of the incisors and covering the bicuspids and molars, and 
 also a band on the palatine surface. — International Journal. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 47 
 
 71. Rubber Overcoat for Sensitive Teeth. — A patient 
 came complaining of hypersensibility of the second right 
 upper molar. It stood alone, occluding with its fellow below, 
 was slightly loose, had no decay, but so sensitive to heat and 
 cold — on account of the roots being denuded — that eating 
 and drinking were simply misery. I tried all the means I 
 knew to reduce the sensibility, but without avail. Killing 
 the pulp or extracting the molar were means I hesitated to 
 employ except as a last resource. 
 
 The suggestion of wearing artificial teeth did not meet 
 with his approval, by which means the tooth would have 
 been covered with the plate, and would have no doubt im- 
 proved the situation. I took, as an experiment, cotton-wool 
 and mastic, and tied a strand around the molar ; the result 
 being satisfactory, I took an impression of the molar with 
 wax — being preferable to modeling compound, on account 
 of the temperature necessary — and made a very thin shell of 
 vulcanite, perfectly fitting the tooth to the margin of the 
 gums, leaving the crown exposed for the purpose of articula- 
 tion. 
 
 The shell or overcoat, cemented on with oxyphosphate, 
 has been in wear a month, and has completely frustrated 
 contact with heat or cold. I may say it has proved a success. 
 By such simple means I have been enabled to save the molar 
 alive and receive the thanks and confidence of my patient. — 
 H. H. Edwards, in International. 
 
 72. Extracting for Nervous Persons. — In extracting 
 teeth for very nervous perso7is, I find that sulfuric ether, used 
 on a small piece of sponge, and rubbed on the face, near the 
 lobe of the ear, quiets them, and appears to lessen the pain. 
 This is good, in conjunction with electricity; but don't use 
 it too often on the same person. — Dr. Penny, in Southern 
 Journal. 
 
 73. Regulating Studs. — Vulcanite and other fixtures 
 for regulating teeth often require the attachment or inser- 
 tion of studs or hooks, from which rubber rings may be 
 
48 
 
 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 stretched on the teeth that are to be put in place. I 
 have made such studs of celluloid or hard rubber in form 
 like that shown in Fig. 1, drilled and tapped through its 
 center as shown in the section, Fig. 2. This stud I readily 
 fix on the plate or bar by means of the screw, and a section 
 through the stud, screw, and plate (see Fig. 3) makes evi- 
 
 © 
 
 Fig. 1. 
 
 Fig. 2. 
 
 Fig. 3. 
 
 Fio. 4. 
 
 dent the security of the attachment. In Fig. 4 is seen a 
 plate in place, and a rubber ring stretched from the stud to 
 the lateral, which is being pulled into position. The size of 
 the stud-shank is such that the ligature will not be cut by 
 the strain, and the stud-head is round and smooth, and over- 
 laps the ligature, so that the tongue will neither be chafed nor 
 interfered with to any appreciable degree during the pro- 
 gress ■ of the regulating operation. — S. J. Shaw, Boston, 
 Mass., in Cosmos. 
 
 74. Gas Cylinders Exploding. — It ought to be gener- 
 ally known, if it is not, that nitrous oxid gas cylinders are 
 liable to explode by undue expansion of their contents if 
 exposed to heat. All who use or handle these cylinders 
 should be careful to keep them at as low a temperature as 
 possible, and never allow their exposure to the direct action 
 of the sun. The bursting force of compressed gas under too 
 high a temperature is tremendous — equal to a bombshell. — 
 I. C, in Cosmos. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 49 
 
 75. Use of the Burnisher. — The barnislier is one of 
 the most important instruments in gold-filling. However 
 well the filling has been inserted, the thorough burnishing 
 of the surface is of prime importance. "But it makes the 
 surface uneven." Yes, in proportion to the faulty packing. 
 " But severe burnishing, especially with a globe-point, makes 
 necessary much filing, and thus the destruction of contour." 
 Better have no contour than leave pits and parts of softly- 
 packed gold. Do even, thorough, solid work throughout, 
 and you will not have much filing away as the result of very 
 severe burnishing; and there is nothing like this for pro- 
 curing a long-lived filling. 
 
 76. Celluloid Matrix for Cement. —As a matrix for 
 cement fillings there is nothing like celluloid. It is the only 
 thing that is fit for a matrix w^hen you are using phosphate 
 of zinc. You can fill one side, or put the matrix in between 
 and throw the cement in on both sides ; let the cement 
 harden with that matrix in there, then slip it out and you- 
 have got a perfectly polished surface ; it is just as smooth as 
 glass. — Dr. Shulze, in Ohio Denial Journal. 
 
 77. Cotton, to Remove from Pliers. — A device for 
 cleaning pliers of refuse cotton balls, which I have found 
 convenient, is a small square of carding wire mounted on a 
 ball of wood. I keep it on my bracket table, and when I 
 wish to remove cotton, simply touch the wire, and pliers are 
 at once freed, thus doing away with throwing the balls of 
 cotton on the floor, or reaching across patient to deposit them 
 in the cuspidor. It is but an instant's work to clean the 
 wire after each operation is finished. — Dr. Alice Jarvis, in 
 Items of Interest. 
 
 78. Mirror for Reflecting Light. — I Avant to show here 
 a device I have had made for holding a little mirror, which 
 is to be used as a mouth-mirror, or for the purpose of reflect- 
 ing light in an obscure cavity. It is attached to a pedestal 
 which is to stand on the 0]3erating tray, and has a projecting 
 
50 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 arm about seventeen inches long. In height it is adjustable, 
 and can be made to vary from live to nine inches. 
 
 It has also a hinge-joint, which makes it still more 
 ?idjustable. Inside of the projecting rod or arm, which is 
 liollow, runs a smaller rod, to which is attached a ratchet, 
 which tightens or loosens the ball-and-socket joint at the 
 other end. To this ball the mirror is attached. The move- 
 ment of the glass is very free, and it can be placed at any 
 ano"le and securely held there by clamping with the ratchet. 
 By this device the cavity may be seen by looking in the 
 mirror, or light can be reflected to any given point, and yet 
 both hands can be free. 
 
 The liberation of the left-hand is a great point gained. 
 This gives the opportunity for the use of instruments for 
 holding the dam above the cervical edge of cavities, and for 
 the holding of matrices and rubber-dam depressors, and for 
 holding in place the first pieces of gold in filling. — E. A. 
 Bogue, in International Journal. 
 
 79. Use of Screw in Extracting Roots. — Having latel}" 
 had rather a stubborn customer to deal with, in the shape of 
 an upper bicuspid root, we propose to relate how we accom- 
 plished its removal with a small wood screw, when all our 
 eftbrts with th,e forceps failed. 
 
 The root was almost covered by the gum, and though 
 w^e took the precaution of passing a gum lancet entirely 
 around the root, so that there would be no impediments to 
 the insinuation of the beaks of the forceps, still there was so 
 little sound substance on the root to grasp that the forceps 
 kept chipping oft" pieces of the root at each etibrt at extrac- 
 tion, besides inflicting considerable pain. Feeling sure that 
 we would fail with these eftbrts, we searched for the 
 nerve canal with a probe. This being found, we 
 o-radually increased its size with dift'erent sized spear 
 drills in the dental engine, after which we introduced 
 a small screw in the enlarged canal b}^ holding this 
 "^'^" ^' Avithin the beaks of a pair of incisor forceps. ' When 
 the screw was well inserted in the root, we seized the head 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 
 
 51 
 
 of the screw with the same pair of forceps, when the root 
 came away with little effort or force. Fig. 1 illustrates the 
 screw inserted in the root. — Theodore F. Chupein, D.D.S., 
 in Office and Laboratory. 
 
 80. Cutting Off Roots with Saws. — When a tooth is 
 so broken that it is desirable to level down the remainder to 
 the gum, there are several ways of doing this, — grinding, 
 filing, and incising. If a saw could be arranged to do this 
 work it would save time and some jar to the root. To pro- 
 vide a saw for this purpose has been an object with me, and 
 the one here figured answers the purpose. It differs from 
 the ordinary saws used in the mouth in having the blade so 
 arranged that it can be revolved around the longitudinal 
 axis of the instrument and fixed at any angle. A cheaper 
 form of blade-holdei- for amputating roots can be made by 
 
 turning the ends of one of Dr. Clapp's saw-frames to an angle 
 of ninety degrees. The frame figured is made to take saws 
 of almost a fixed length, but to make it adjust itself to saws 
 of varying lengths it is only necessary to continue one end 
 of the gripping attachment through the handle and adjust 
 the distance by means of a nut. This increases the cost of 
 the instrument, and so the frame is figured in a simple form. 
 — William Herbert Rollins, Boston, Mass., in Cosmos. 
 
 81. Extracting Imprisoned "Wisdom Teeth in Low^er 
 Jaw, — My method is when the face of the tooth is looking 
 toward and pressing against the posterior part second molar, 
 80 it is considered hazardous to use the elevating forceps, to 
 split the gum back of the wisdom tooth, take the dental en- 
 gine and with a sharp drill remove the bone, so the tooth can 
 
52 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 be raised upward and backward. You will find the bone 
 easier cut than to cut tooth one-fourth away with disks in 
 separating it from the molar, though it is sometimes best 
 to separate with disks. By combining both methods we can 
 extract such teeth without breaking jaw bones. — A. Eubank. 
 
 82. Copper Pulp-Caps. — The essayist said that in his 
 search for a pulp-capping that should possess the qualities of 
 a non-conductor, an unyielding protector, and that should 
 cause no irritation ; he had adopted a concave cap of copper, 
 varying in size to meet the indications. Such a cap, if prop- 
 erly adjusted, came nearest to his ideal of what a pulp-cap 
 should be than anything else he had ever used. The method 
 he employed is as follows: After thoroughly cleansing the 
 cavity he wiped it out with eucalyptol and cotton to disinfect, 
 and then with oil of cloves to soothe the pulp. Then, select- 
 ing a cap of proper size, he dips it in a thick solution of 
 sandarac, which makes it adhere to the place where it is ap- 
 plied. He then mixes a paste of oxid of zinc and oil of 
 cloves, which he w^orks down around the edges and over the 
 cap, which makes it non-conducting. He makes the caps by 
 roiling down a strip of copper or copper wire to the thick- 
 ness of thick writing-paper, and with a hollow punch, the 
 copper strip being laid on a block of lead, strikes up the cap, 
 which takes the concave shape of the punch. He had been 
 using this method for about a year, and the results had been 
 entirely satisfactory. — Dr. A. J. Parker, in Cosmos. 
 
 83. Crouse's Method of Treating Abscess. — Dr.Crouse's 
 method of treating alveolar abscess is as follows: Prepare 
 your cavity ; it is not necessary to give the details, except 
 that care must be taken not to force the broach in the pulp- 
 canal, or get the cavity clogged with foreign matter ; take a 
 piece of soft India-rubber ; cut it as near the size and shape 
 of the cavity as you can ; fill the cavity with carbolic acid ; 
 place the India-rubber in the cavity, and with it force the 
 carbolic acid out through the fistulous opening. This is 
 readily done with a blunt instrument and sudden force against 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 58 
 
 the rubber, such as is used in packing gold by hand pressure. 
 One such treatment is generally suflicient, to eftect a cure. — - 
 Items of Interest. 
 
 84. Pain Caused by Biting on Fillings. — The pain 
 caused hy biting on a filled tooth when eating, whether the 
 filling be gold or amalgam, comes from the hypersensitive 
 condition of the dentine itself. My practice is to remove 
 the filling, clean the cavity thoroughly, swabbing it out with, 
 carbolic acid — ninety-five per cent — and then refilling the 
 tooth. — Dr. Marshall, in Items of Interest. 
 
 85. Teeth Sensitive to Changes. — Exposure of the 
 dentine causes an irritation of the dentine febrils, as indi- 
 cated by an uncomfortable sensation in the use of cold and 
 warm drinks. To counteract this, use a stimulating anti- 
 septic. — Items of Interest. , 
 
 86. For Inflammation of the Pulp. — Use bicarbonate 
 of soda, applied to the cavity on a loose pledget of cotton, 
 and covered with sandarac. The surrounding parts to be 
 saturated with chloric ether. — Dr. Williams, in Items of 
 Interest. 
 
 87. Burnishing Cement Fillings. — Cement fillings after 
 having set, can be very much improved ; rubbing a burnisher 
 over with white wax, and then burnishing the filling. — Items 
 
 OF Interest. 
 
 88. Polishing Cement Fillings. — I have found by ac- 
 tual experience that cement fillings finished as follows are 
 more impervious to moisture, and take a better polish, and 
 are more durable, than by any other method I have ever 
 tried: Give the cement time enough to fully harden, then 
 dress it down with strips or fine sandpaper disks. jS'ow to 
 polish, put on a fine cuttle-fish disk, run the edge of the disk 
 against a piece of white wax till coated ; hold this against 
 the filling lightly, and run at a vei^y high speed, to heat the 
 
54 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 wax into the surface of the cement. While polishing, lastly 
 finish with agate burnisher. — William H. Steele. 
 
 89. Packing Amalgam in Frail Teeth.— One of the 
 best ways I have found to pack amalgam, especially where 
 the tooth is frail, is to use an engine burnisher of proper 
 size, rotating quite rapidly ; this not only packs the amalgam 
 harder but draws the excess of mercury to the surface, where 
 it can easily be taken up with a piece of tin-foil. — William 
 Jennings, D.D.S. 
 
 90. Determining Curve of Root Canals. — If you take 
 a jSTo. 5 fine Donaldson nerve-canal cleanser, and pass it up a 
 buccal root, and it simply goes half an inch, you may know 
 it has. not reached the apex; we know there are few buccal 
 roots that are not more than half an inch long. Then 3^ou 
 are confronted directly with a crooked root. If the instru- 
 ment does not go three-quarters of an inch before meeting an 
 obstruction, and if, after a gently vigorous turn, it does not 
 go further, you know that you have a curved root. You 
 could not turn the instrument very much before it would 
 catch in the curve, and you would know there was something 
 wrong. But what is the direction of that curve? The root 
 is liable to turn in any direction ; some branch out, others 
 come together. How do you know which way it turns ? 
 Insert a No. 5 instrument, and it catches a little bit at a 
 slight turn. The instrument being round, you can turn it 
 without danger of breaking it ofi". A¥hen you turn it, hold 
 the instrument between your thumb and forefinger verj^ 
 tightly, and remove it.' When the point is visible, you find 
 a slight turn in the end of the instrument, and that turn 
 will be e:j^actly in the direction of the curve of the root, if 
 you have held the instrument firmly. Then put the instru- 
 ment in the root, and use an upward and downward motion, 
 and the instrument enters in the curve ; press it gently in 
 the direction of the curve, and you will find the instrument 
 going farther and farther up. That curve is determined 
 most positively by the instrument catching when j^ou first 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 55 
 
 "begin to turn it. When you tind it catching, turn it gently, 
 and, holding the instrument firmly, remove it, and you will 
 see the direction of the curve. Putting it back in the' root 
 in the same position, and moving it gently up and down, it 
 Avill go farther and farther. — JSF. T. Shields, in Cosmos. 
 
 91. Applying Rubber-dam to Labial Cavities. — In 
 applying the rubber-dam to labial cavities under the gum, 
 take a small-sized sewing needle, at the distance of, say, 
 three-quarters of an inch from the point, and bend it in the 
 form of an S, the point of the needle forming the long leg ; 
 stick the point in the neck of the tooth below the rubber- 
 dam, just above the edge of the cavity; lift the upper edge 
 of dam over the eye end of the needle, and the resiliency of 
 the rubber will keep the needle in place, and the cavity dry. 
 It is far ahead of any clamp for the above purpose. To pre- 
 vent the eye of the needle penetrating the dam, put a little 
 bead of shellac on the end. — D. V. Beacock, in Dom. Journ. 
 
 92. Failure of Fillings from Frail Walls.— -The fault 
 of many a bad filling is in tlie frailty of some part of its wall. 
 By pressure of the i:>lugger, or by blows from the mallet in 
 filling, or by after-service, a check may be made in the 
 enamel. It may not show till discolored, but it is almost 
 sure to increase and loosen the filling, or make a break that 
 cannot be successful!}^ repaired. The tooth which is frail, 
 either from thin or brittle walls, should be nearly filled with 
 oxyphosphate, and finished with gold or alloy. But even if 
 it is to be thus filled, it is better to break down such parts 
 of the wall liable to become afterward defective. And yet, 
 thouo'h we should be thus cautious not to leave such faultv 
 walls, we should be equally careful not to cut away strong 
 enamel that would be a protection to the filling, and prevent 
 the unnecessary display of gold. — Dr. T. B. Welch. 
 
 93. Replacing Dislocated Lower Jaw. — Hoth {Lancet, 
 No. 3626, 1893) describes the following method of reducing 
 luxation of the lower jaw : 
 
56 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 The patient is seated in an ordinary cane-bottomed 
 chair ; the operator stands before him with one foot placed 
 slight!}' to the right side and the other just in front of the 
 23atient and in the middle line. The operator is thus on a 
 lirm basis, with the legs well apart and fully extended. He 
 then Ilexes himself at the hips, and asks the j^atient to le.an 
 forward and to place his forehead in the middle of the ster- 
 num of the operator's chest (but this position varies with the 
 size of the patient's head). The operator now flexes his head 
 so that his chin grips the patient's head about the upper 
 part of the occipital bone ; he thus acquires a firm hold, and 
 has the head well under control between his chin and chest. 
 The thumbs, protected in the usual manner, are placed in 
 the patient's mouth, and the fingers of both hands grasp the 
 lower jaw. In this position reduction is facilitated, and the 
 advantages over the ordinarj^ methods are as follows: 1, the 
 operator has the head under perfect control and perfectly 
 fixed ; 2, the line of force exerted by the operator's hands 
 acts in the same line as the resisting force exerted by the 
 operator's chin ; 3, the operator's elbows being well flexed, he 
 can exert a greater p)ower by the force acting through the 
 thumbs being close to the shoulders, and it will be found 
 that he has greater power of muscular action in the terminal 
 p)halanges of the same ; 4, the patient's head is also in a bet- 
 ter position for replacing a dislocated jaw ; 5, the operator 
 needs no assistant, and does not inconvenience his patient by 
 the excessive pushing and pulling about of the head during 
 the reduction. — Therajpeuiic Gazette. 
 
 94. Napkins in the Office. — Always keep a good assort- 
 ment of nice clean napkins ; they are not needed as much at 
 the chair as they were before the introduction of rubber- 
 dam, but can be found very useful in many operations, and 
 often will be found preferable to the dam in short opera- 
 tions. — Wm. H. Steele. 
 
 95. Operating Stool. — If you have never knoAvn the 
 comfort and luxury of an operating stool do not go without 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 57 
 
 one another clay; mine cost about $1.90, and here it is: 
 Buy of the furniture dealer an ordinary book-keeper's stool, 
 €ut oft' the legs to the required height. ISTow huy of a 
 music dealer a cheap piano stool ; bore a hole through the 
 top, or seat, of the first stool, and attach the adjusting screw 
 ^nd seat of the piano stool.— Wm. H. Steele. 
 
 96. Tooth and Gum Protector. — A useful device for 
 protecting an adjoining tooth, or filling in the same, when 
 ■cutting out a proximal cavity or removing a filling may be 
 . easily made as follows : 
 
 Take an old mouth mirror, remove the o;lass and holder 
 iind with a fine saw, or thin flat file, slit the metal shank, 
 joining handle and mirror, about one-eighth of an inch, and 
 in this slot solder a piece of thin flexible steel about one 
 
 inch long and one-third of an inch wide, with corners nicely 
 trimmed and rounded. Press between the teeth and hold in 
 jiosition while shaping cavity next to adjoining tooth. Or 
 use the shanks of broken burs, solder the thin strips at differ- 
 >ent angles to facilitate holding easily in various locations, 
 ^nd use the Kaeber engine-bur holder as a handle ; or use 
 for a handle a slit broach holder or a jeweler's slit pin vise, 
 insert and clamp thin steel at any angle desired without 
 soldering. This instrument will be found useful in many 
 ways. May be used as a matrix for plastics, and also for 
 smoothino- oft' the material at cervical mar2;in or removing' 
 any pieces that may be left beneath the gums, between the 
 teeth, etc. — W. M. Jennings, D.D.S. 
 
 97. To Prevent Finishing Burs Clogging. — In finish- 
 ing a gold filling you can prevent the plug finishing bur 
 from clogging up with the metal by dipping in a little 
 sweet oil. It also makes it cut better. — W. M. Jennings, 
 D.D.S. 
 
58 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 98. Restoring Articulation of Tipping Molars.'-' — The 
 observing dentist must repeatedly, in his daily practice, be 
 reminded of how acceptable such an operation will be, and 
 why he should continue to pound gold into cavities of teeth 
 so tipped out of position as to be useless, without attempting 
 to better their articulation, is hard to understand. With- 
 this operation, as in all contour work, anchorage is of first 
 importance. Without ample anchorage, smooth, strong mar- 
 gins and clean surroundings count for nothing. 
 
 In most mouths where the first molars have been out 
 long enough for the consequent changed position of the second 
 molars to offer an excuse for this operation, you will find 
 cavities already existing. If none offer a welcome anchor- 
 age, then with engine drill and bur make liberal retaining 
 grooves, commencing in fissures and cutting with a heroic 
 hand. It is better to bring these teeth into service at such 
 a cost than permit them to remain of no use themselves^ 
 and in the way of any appliance that might be serviceable. 
 In the preparation of the crown surface use the corundum 
 wheels freely on cusps, or to prevent thin, over-lapping edges 
 anywhere. Before beginning the operation, notice whether 
 other movements besides tipping have taken place in either 
 upper or lower molars. Aim to have the upper, as a rule^ 
 articulate one-quarter or one-third its surface outside the 
 lower to prevent biting the cheek. The articulation of the- 
 other teeth must determine whether the articulating surface- 
 of the contour is to be a flat surface parallel with the general 
 line of articulation, or an inclined plane. Shape these grind- 
 ing surfaces so they may be constantly in contact in the act 
 of masticating as the lower jaw moves from side to side- 
 Cut out and fill any depression in a molar that may be in 
 position, if necessary, to give a good articulation to an oppos- 
 ing contour. Attempt only to secure the millstone effect. 
 Do not attempt the restoration of cusps, for though they 
 are ideal, the material we use is faulty, and no amount of 
 good wishes will add to its strength or wearing qualities. 
 
 Read before the Michigan State Dental Society, June, 1SS9. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 59 
 
 In filling the excavation nse any method or style of gold 
 "with Avhich you succeed best. My preference is for heavy 
 foil when strength is of importance, folding back and forth 
 ribbons of No. 60, and making most of the contour at least 
 of gold and platinum foil, shade 2. Anneal carefully; con- 
 dense thoroughly; finish well. — Dr. J. C. Walton, in Ohio 
 Journal. 
 
 99. Facial Fistula. — When a fistula has opened on the 
 outside of the face, on account of poulticing or from other 
 cause, do not extract the ofl[ending tooth till you make an 
 artificial fistula inside the mouth. The outside fistula will 
 heal by granulation. If you extract the tooth before doing 
 so, the tissue certainly will be greatly depressed, and an 
 uglier scar result. — Office and Laboratory. 
 
 100. Hint on Mixing Cements. — I have noticed opera- 
 tors put the powder on the slab first, then use the cork of the 
 liquid bottle to dip the liquid to the mixing slab. In doing 
 this a little of the powder gets on "the cork and is carried to 
 the bottle containing the liquid, and will ruin the cement 
 for future use. — William H. Steele. 
 
 101. On the Use of Pluggers. — A dentist who is going 
 to make use of non-cohesive gold is not likely to make use 
 of a broad foot-shaped plugger. He should use a wedge- 
 shaped plugger to carry the gold toward the wall of the cav- 
 ity. And if he is going to use cohesive gold, he can obtain 
 the best results by the use of a fine-serrated, broad plugger, 
 in proportion to the size of the cavity. If a dentist is going 
 to fill a large cavitj^, his plugger ought to be correspondingly 
 large; if he wants to fill a small cavity, his plugger ought, 
 to be suitable for such a cavity, and his instruments should 
 be selected in some general forms, and various sizes of these 
 forms. By doing this he will be able to accomplish that 
 which he desires much more rapidly, satisfactorily and skil- 
 fully than he can by using pluggers made without any 
 special reference to their size and form. It is painful to see 
 
60 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 a good operator take a little fine pointed plugger and plug 
 away, using cohesive gold, and taking an hour and a half to 
 do what he ought to accomplish in half an hour if he used 
 proper instruments and proper gold, and pluggers of the 
 proper size. — -Extract Review. 
 
 102. Detecting Pulp-stones. — How can pulp-stones be 
 detected, and what is the cause of the trouble ? You can- 
 not advise the extraction of a tooth if you can find nothing 
 about it to give trouble ; but there is one thing I have used 
 in my practice to satisfy my own mind, and that is, if 3'ou 
 will take the finger-nail and scratch, producing a vibrating 
 sensation, it will produce pain in the tooth ; or use an exca- 
 vator to scratch with, and if there be irritation by pulp-stones, 
 it will respond to the vibration produced on the outside of 
 the tooth. — Dr. Thomas, in International. 
 
 103. Amalgo-gold Fillings. — Steurer's plastic gold, 
 worked in the surface of a soft amalgam filling, in large 
 proximal cavities, gives the appearance and edge strength of 
 gold, with the care of manipulation of gold. — D. M. Clapp, 
 in Office and Laboratory. 
 
 104. To Sterilize Softened Dentine. — Dry thoroughly 
 and apply: Carbolic acid, 1 ; oil of cassia, 2 ; and oil of cloves, 
 3 parts. Insert permanent filling at once. — Dr. II. A. Smith, 
 in Items of Interest. 
 
 105. How to Dry a Cavity. — After applying absolute 
 alcohol to the cavity, use a solution of sandarac and ether, 
 line the cavity ; dry this with hot air, which forces it in 
 
 .the ends of the tubules, completely sealing them; then 
 proceed with the filling. — Dr. J. C. Templeton, in Items of 
 Interest. 
 
 106. Patching Gold Fillings with Alloy. — I remember 
 performing some very extensive operations with JSTos. 60 and 
 120 gold for one patient who was undergoing a good many 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 
 
 61 
 
 constitutional changes, and these conditions manifested them- 
 selves in the teeth. He came to me in 1880 or 188 1 with gold 
 fillings on the- buccal surfaces of the teeth and decay had 
 recurred. I thous-ht the best thins: I could do was to cut 
 out and fill with amalgam. I did so. After a year I found 
 extensive decay on the proximate and lingual surfaces. I 
 cut that out and filled in the same way, following right 
 around at difierent times, till now I have gone entirely 
 around the teeth. I saw the gentleman four or five weeks 
 ago, and he spoke particularly of the manner in which I had 
 saved his teeth. I consider it was due to the combination 
 of metals. — Dr. Geo. A. Mill, in N. Y. Odontological Society. 
 
 107. Anchor-Pins for Fillings. — Dr. L. West, of Mar- 
 ionville, Mo., suggests the use of double-headed platinum 
 pins as anchoring bolts for proximal fillings; that further- 
 more form more or less of the o-rindino; surfaces of some 
 molars and bicuspids, and are, therefore, liable to be dis- 
 lodged by hard usage in mastication. The illustrations ex- 
 emplify cases of that kind which have been made secure by 
 buildiilg anchor-pins into the fillings, as suggested by Dr. 
 West. The crown view and section of a bicuspid, Fig. 1, 
 make clear the character of the operation; the anchor-pin 
 being also shown separately, and magnified for more perfect 
 representation. Fig. 2 is a' similar illustration of the use of 
 the anchor-pin in a filling which extends from side to side 
 over the crown. 
 
 It is, however, a some- 
 what difficult matter to 
 j)roperly place the anchor- 
 pin, because pressure on 
 one hand in packing the 
 material around it is likely 
 to lift the other head from 
 its bed, and this is espe- 
 cially liable to occur when 
 the filling-material is amalgam. Instead of the headed pin, 
 therefore, it is suggested that a section of platinum anchor- 
 
 FlG. 1. 
 
 Fig. 
 
 Fig. 
 
 Fig. 4. 
 
62 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 screw wire may be more readily built in and more securely 
 bolt the matrices together. This is made evident by Fig. 3, 
 the detached screw-bolt being shown magnified for its better 
 definition. A curved section of screw-wire may likewise be 
 employed, as seen in Fig. 4. It is obvious that the screw- 
 wire, unlike the smooth pin, will resist a parting strain at 
 every point of its length, and special forms may be given 
 the wire sections to meet any peculiar case. 
 
 The examples given will serve to place the several sug- 
 gestions fairly before the profession as means for meeting 
 emergencies in the class of dental operations for which they 
 will probably be found occasionally useful. — S. H. W., in 
 Cosmos. 
 
 108. Disks and Strips, Soap on, — In separating teeth, 
 or cutting down fillings with sandpaper disks, first run both 
 sides against a piece of dry soap. You will be surprised and 
 pleased to see how nicely they will go between the teeth, and 
 how much better they will cut the gold. Sandpaper and 
 emerj^ strips treated in the same way will cut better, and 
 never catch or tear the dam. It is also more pleasant for the 
 patient. 
 
 109. To Protect Cement or Percha Fillings. — Cut and 
 file a piece of gold plate of the size and shape of the surface 
 of the cavity. Now solder to its under surface the center of 
 a narrow strip of gold and bend up the ends. As soon as 
 the filling is placed in the tooth and while' it is soft, press 
 this cap on the surface. A gutta-percha filling maybe made 
 quite durable in this way, though of course the cap must be 
 pressed on while hot. — Dr. Welch, in Items of Interest. 
 
 110. For Offensive Cuspadores. — Dr. E. 0. Peck, of 
 Morristown, N. J., uses a tablespoonful of copperas to coun- 
 teract the ofiensiveness of liis cuspador. This has been our 
 practice for many years. We are not sure but we got our 
 idea from Dr. Peck some fifteen years since. — Items of In- 
 terest. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 03 
 
 111. Gutta-percha Heater. — To heat gutta-percha, 
 make a little oven of soapstone. When in use,* you light 
 the spirit-lamp and place it under the end of the stone ; at 
 the same time the instruments to be used are passed through 
 the opening at the end of the oven, over a wire loop, a wire 
 netting inside, to the flame of the lamp, so that the instru- 
 ments to be used and the gutta-percha will be warming at 
 the same time. The slab is hollowed out, so that the small 
 pieces of gutta-percha will not roll off. The stone heats 
 gradually, and the amount of heat required can be regulated, 
 to a nicety by the size of the flame on the portion of the 
 stone the gutta-percha is placed on. A piece of mica on the 
 side enables you to see the flame and tell where you place 
 jour points, and get them as near the flame as you desire. 
 The mica also prevents the flame from blowing out, if you 
 are working in summer with the cloors open and are in a 
 draft. There is no danger of overheating the gutta- 
 i:)ercha, and. I find dry heat better than wet.-^Dr. Geo. S. 
 Allen, in Items of Interest. 
 
 112. For Drying Root Canals. — Use a solution of 
 bichlorid. of mercury and ether for drying out root canals ; 
 it is better than alcohol. — L. J. Mitchell, in Ohio Dental 
 Journal. 
 
 113. Treatment for "Wounded Pulps. — Where the 
 pulp has been wounded, I should simply touch it with 
 camphor; the alcohol in the camphor will evaporate, leaving 
 the camphor itself, which is very healing and cleansing. 
 One may follow the camphor treatment with a little oxy- 
 phosphate, or cover it with gutta-percha, and go on with his 
 filling. — Dr. Spaulding, in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 114. Dressing Down Inlays. — Those who practice 
 porcelain inlaying have no doubt often found how diflicult 
 it is to grind down and smoothly finish inlays on the proxi- 
 mal surfaces of the teeth, when the space is too small to 
 admit even the thinnest corundum disk. The ordinarv emcrv 
 
64 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 paper disks cut them down wonderfully fast indeed, almost 
 as fast as 'tliey do gold. They are even to be preferred to 
 the corundum wheel on labial and some buccal surfaces when 
 a great deal of grinding is not required, and for fine finish- 
 ing are superior. For the final polish I use the ordinary 
 cuttle-fish bone. — J. Girdwood, in Cosmos. 
 
 115. Splint for Supporting Teeth. — As the planting of 
 teeth is now becoming so common an operation, and probably 
 destined to become more so, the importance of furnishing 
 some means whereby a planted tooth may be firmly held and 
 supported while it is becoming firm in its new position can- 
 not be over-estimated. Lack of proper support is probably 
 the cause of a large percentage of failures. 
 
 Fig. 1 illustrates a very simple and efiicient splint for 
 this purpose. It is easily and quickly applied, and may be 
 worn any length of time without inconvenience to the patient. 
 On each side of the space in which the tooth 
 is to be planted is selected a suitable tooth. 
 A strip of band material is made in the 
 form of a loop, slipped over the tooth and 
 drawn tightly about the same with a pair of 
 fiat-nosed pliers. It is then removed and soldered at the 
 point of union, and the ends clipped ofi". Delicate pipes are 
 now soldered to each of these bands, on the labial side and 
 parallel to the axis of the tooth. After carefully drying the 
 teeth, the bands are cemented in position. This may be done 
 several hours or even days in advance of the operation of 
 planting. 
 
 The tooth to be planted is banded and piped in the same 
 manner already described, only the pipe is soldered to the 
 band at right angles to the tooth. A piece of the gold wire 
 of suitable length is cut to exactly fit these pipes. It is 
 slipped through the pipe on the tooth to be planted, and 
 each end is bent at right angles. The tooth is slipped in 
 the socket already prepared, the ends of the wire are slipped 
 through the pipes on the anchor teeth, and, as they pass 
 through, are nipped off w^ith a pair of wire cutters. This 
 
USEFUL IIIKTS. 65 
 
 will also llutteii the ends slightly, ■which will prevent the 
 splint from coming out of the pipes. 
 
 I have freqnentlj dispensed with the band and pipes 
 which encircle the planted tooth, using instead a silk ligature, 
 tying the same tightly around both tooth and splint. This 
 simplifies the operation, and in most instances is quite 
 sufficient. 
 
 Dr. John II. Martindale, of this city, has used this form 
 of splint with success in a number of cases for the support of 
 teeth which have been loosened by alveolar necrosis or pyor- 
 rhea. — Dr. Edward II. Angle. 
 
 116. How to Use Matrix Metal. — In filling proximal 
 cavities with amalgam I use a matrix made of matrix metal 
 or silver composition strip. Cut ofi'a piece of sufficient length 
 and wide enough to extend from cervical border of cavity to 
 coronal surface ; cut ofi" corners and shape as shown in Fig. 1. 
 
 The cavity being ready to fill, place 
 the matrix in position as shown in 
 Fig. 2, being sure the lower edge 
 extends below the cervical border 
 of the Cavity. To hold it in place 
 push in a small orange wood wedge, shaped like a pen-knife 
 blade, thin on the upper edge and the lower edge thick 
 enough to fill the space. Use two matrices with a wedge 
 between them where two cavities are to be filled in adjoin- 
 ing teeth. When through with- the operation, draw^ out the 
 wedge and the metal can be easily removed without disturb- 
 ing the filling. — T. A. Gormly. 
 
 117. To Prevent "Wedges Slipping. — To prevent a 
 wedge slipping or working loose wliile filling or separating 
 teeth, dip it in sandarac varnish just before tapping it in 
 place.— D. ^y. Barker, ^[.D.S. 
 
 118. Substitute for Floss Silk. — A good and cheap 
 substitute for floss silk is harness maker's linen, thread Xo. 
 3. It is as strong as silk, has very little twist, so that it 
 
66 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 passes between the teeth easily and only costs 8 cents per 
 ball.— D. W. Barker, M.D.S. 
 
 119. Incompatibility of Gold. — It has been maintained 
 by many operators that gold is absolutely incompatible with 
 soft tooth-structure, but that teeth of hard structure can be 
 filled with gold, and satisfactory and permanent results 
 obtained. According to ray practice, the first assertion is a 
 great mistake. For example, take a large proximal cavity 
 in a bicuspid. I always combine a large proximal cavity 
 v^ith the grinding-surface fissure, because if 3^ou leave the 
 fissure or fill it separately you place the thin structure be- 
 tvreen the two fillings in a fine condition to break, which 
 will make one or both fillings defective, and decay will 
 surely follow. Leave no frail overlapping edges, but break 
 them in from the grinding-surface, and, when finished, the 
 space between the teeth will necessarily be Y-shaped; like- 
 wise break in the frail edges on the grinding-surface, and 
 leave not a trace of the fissure, because if the filling should 
 end in a fissure a pit is compelled to result, and this pit will 
 hold acids, and decay will follow. When the cavity is thus 
 prepared, the whole cavity will likewise be V-shaped, which 
 is exactly the reverse of the usual mechanism. N^ow make 
 retaining points at the cervical margin and in the grinding- 
 surface, then with great care build up with cohesive gold. 
 Build up this tooth exactly to its anatomical contour, which 
 will restore the grinding surface. This filling, if properly 
 done, will finish without a flaw, and the adaptation of the 
 gold to the tooth will be perfect. — N, T. Shields, in Cosmos. 
 
 120. To Remove Deciduous Teeth. — If you wish to 
 remove a deciduous tooth, and, through fear, the child will 
 not permit it, slip a piece of rubber tubing over the crown 
 down to the neck of the tooth, and in a few days the tooth 
 will be so loose that it can be extracted with the fingers. — 
 Dr. W. H. Eames. 
 
 121. Large Compound Filling. — Large compound cav- 
 ities involving the proximal and crown surfaces of molars 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 67 
 
 and bicuspids: Prepare the cavity and set a screw post as 
 shown ill cut ; put on the matrix and fill two-thirds 
 with alloy, leaving about one-third the screw pro- 
 " jecting above the tilling. At a subsequent sitting 
 complete the operation with gold, and finish nicely, burnish- 
 ing all the edges down smooth. — Wm, H. Steele, in Items 
 OF Interest. 
 
 122. Facing Alloy Fillings with Gold. — My general 
 practice is to restore the normal contour of the tooth with 
 amalgam, at the first sitting, and subsequently cut away such 
 portions of the amalgam as may be deemed desirable, re- 
 placing the same with gold, so that when finished, especially 
 with the anterior teeth, nothing but gold shall appear to 
 ordinary observation. This is not a difficult task in any save 
 the most extreme cases. Good anchorage may be secured in 
 and around the amalgam. A sort of chemical union takes 
 place between the gold and amalgam, so that from a com- 
 paratively slight point of anchorage the gold may be built 
 up and carried Avell over a slightlj^-rounded edge of amalgam, 
 thus hiding it from view. — Dr. C. T. Tockwell, in Cosmos. 
 
 123. Welding Gold and Alloy. — Occasionally it occurs 
 that gold must be added to or built over amalgam previously 
 inserted. It is very important that all surfaces which come 
 in contact with gold be touched with mercury, so that the 
 gold may be soldered to the amalgam ; the two metals, thus 
 united, never show the joint by wear or chemical action, 
 because the mercury, thin as the coating is, becomes an 
 amalgam containing gold of higher potential or finer than 
 the body of the plug. Practically, the gold element passes 
 over the line of union in the body of the amalgam. — Dr. 
 S. B. Palmer, N. Y. Odontological Society, 
 
 124. Points on Nitrous Oxid Gas. — There is a stage 
 Avhen patients refuse to inhale more gas. There is a convul- 
 sion of respiratory muscles and deep stertorous breathing. 
 It is dangerous to go farther, for the patient is in what may 
 
68 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 be considered an asphyxiated state. I begin operations here 
 regardless of other symptoms. Some patients will take more, 
 others less, before this stage is reached, and I get out as many 
 teeth as possible during the period of unconsciousness. Some- 
 times it may be but one tooth, again it may be the whole 
 upper set. The appearance of patient is usually as follows: 
 Jaws set, eyes protruding and rolled back (when not closed), 
 and a bluish or purple color about lips and face,. Respiration 
 is at first shallow, then deep and stertorous. There is always 
 a very alarming and death-like appearance, which usually 
 frightens the novice, and especially the friends of the patient 
 who may be standing near; but this appearance usually 
 passed away before the operation is completed. I consider 
 nitrous oxid perfectly safe. Have administered it hundreds 
 of times and have never seen an alarming symptom, though 
 I have had my share of " fun " with fractious patients. I 
 am satisfied the effects produced on different patients is due 
 entirely to individual temperaments and idiosyncrasies. The 
 most troublesome patients are of highly nervous organisms 
 and excitable dispositions. Many possess a mortal dread of 
 pain, and they come in with their nerves worked up to a 
 concert pitch of excitement. Many can make themselves do 
 what is required of them, if they have a strong will power, 
 but soon as this will power is overcome by the effects of gas, 
 their terrible dread of pain gains the mastery, and imme- 
 diately produces an involuntary resistance; hence the degree- 
 of anesthesia is usually in proportion to hoAv much the patient 
 dreads pain. — ^Malcolm W, Sparrow, D.D.S., in Items of In- 
 terest. 
 
 125. Using Elevating Forceps. — In using the elevating 
 forceps in extracting under third molars, a piece of sheet tin 
 or other substance should cover the back edge of the second 
 molar to prevent its fracture. — American Journal cf Dental 
 Science. 
 
 126. Contour Fillings.— It may be laid down as the 
 rule that the contour of all fillings which will be subjected 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 69 
 
 to great strain, should be such as to most fully protect them 
 from any force of impact that would tend to dislodge them, 
 or to drive them away from the walls of the cavity. 
 
 This rule, of course, only applies after the restoration of 
 such natural contour as may be essential for hj^gienic or 
 esthetic reasons, and ma}^ be more profitably followed in 
 proximal and crown surfaces in molars and bicuspids. 
 
 In these, where the decay extends below the point of 
 natural contact of the proximal sides, it is essential to repro- 
 duce the natural contour to such an extent that the fillings 
 may, when finished, touch again at the same point. This is 
 necessary to preserve the interproximal space toward the 
 necks of the teeth, and also to prevent food from crowding 
 between the teeth and on the gums, where it sometimes causes 
 serious disturbance. 
 
 Beyond this point a restoration of natural contour is 
 rarely, if ever, to be tolerated. 
 
 From the point at which restoration of the natural con- 
 tour on the proximal sides ceases to be essentially up to the 
 termination of the filling in the crown, the surface should 
 gradually slope; or, to reverse the statement, the surface of 
 the filling should slope downward from its most remote edge, 
 either mesiall}^ or distally, to the point at which it is desir- 
 able to commence the restoration of the original contour on 
 the proximal surfaces. 
 
 The anchorage of such fillings should be made as strong 
 as possible without weakening the tooth. There should be, 
 if possible, a strong, square base at the cervical portion of 
 the tooth — a firm seat, that shall be at a right angle with a 
 perpendicular line drawn on the proximal surface, and the 
 walls should be made as nearly parallel as possible. 
 
 Unless the walls are extremely thick and the dentine 
 very firm, it is better not to make an}- undercuts or grooves, 
 but to rel}^ entirely on the proper seat and thorough anchorage 
 in the crown. If they are thin, or the dentine of poor quality, 
 grooves and undercuts must not be made. If the square 
 seat cannot be obtained, as large retaining pits should be 
 drilled as can be done without endangering the pulp. Of 
 
70 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 course, this is only a general rule, and subject to such modi- 
 fications as the peculiarity of each may render necessar3^ 
 
 Where such shapes as have been described are given to 
 fillings of this character, the force of impact tends to slide 
 over the surface and not to drive the filling away from its 
 seat. 
 
 If, on the contrary, the filling is built up so that its 
 grinding surface presents a horizontal plane, even the force 
 of mastication will tend constantly to drive it outward from 
 the center of the tooth. If the restoration of the original 
 contour is carried still further, and the marginal ridge is 
 raised in the normal form, the strain on the filling will be 
 much greater, and its value correspondingly impaired. 
 
 Now, in many cases, where the cusps of the natural 
 teeth which antagonize the gold filling are very long, it is 
 necessary to grind them off', as well as to shape the surfaces 
 of the fillings as above described. Without thus o-rindino; 
 oft' the cusps, it would, in some instances, be impossible to 
 get sufficient thickness of gold to insure any stability of the 
 filling. 
 
 It will undoubtedly be urged by some that such extreme 
 precautions are not necessary, if cohesive gold is solidly built 
 up, as it can be, from a secure anchorage made at all possible 
 points. 
 
 Such a defense of the practice of restoring the natural 
 contour in situations that have been considered, can only 
 come from a want of knowledge of the materials we have to 
 deal with and the principles on which our operations are 
 based. 
 
 If two fillings could be placed in precisely corresponding 
 situations by the same hand, one contoured as laid down in 
 the above rule, and the other contoured proximately to the 
 original shape of the tooth, and we could be assured there 
 would be no recurrence of decay, of the first it might be 
 predicted with assurance that it would last indefinitely ; 
 while of the second, it could positively bo asserted that it 
 Avould fail. The latter might, under favorable conditions, 
 last for some years, but it would eventually be certain to 
 
USEFUL HIXTS. 71 
 
 give way simply through the agency of mechanical force. 
 Yet it has heen my experience that the tooth is exceedingly 
 sensitive around and under that filling. I have had a differ- 
 ent experience from some of the gentlemen, inasmuch as in- 
 stead of finding the fillings soft, so they could be taken out 
 with a spoon excavator, they seem to me to be as hard as 
 steel. It is difiicult to make the two things agree. I have 
 come to one conclusion in reo;ard to this amalo-am, and that 
 is, never to use it except in cases where we have very soft, 
 white teeth, where the saliva is inclined to be acid. Take, 
 for instance, teeth which are pearly white, and in which the 
 deca}^ is rapid. I have seen many where it has been in such 
 mouths for several years, and doing beautifully, as black as 
 ink, the lines perfect, no sign of decay. I met a case of that 
 kind a few days ago, and I was pleased to see how beauti- 
 fully the teeth were being saved, but I think such are ex- 
 ceedingly rare. 
 
 The cases thus far considered are the most important, 
 and those most likely to fail from improper contouring, but 
 there are others where the observance of this same principle 
 wijl prove of great value, though it can be carried out to 
 only a limited degree. 
 
 In the building down of incisors where a considerable 
 portion of the labial wall has been lost, it is desirable to 
 slightly slope the cutting edge of the filling from its most 
 distant mesial or distal proximal corner up to the point of 
 contact with the tooth. This would unquestionably lengthen 
 the usefulness of such fillings as compared with those that 
 were absolutely restored to their original contour. In all 
 such restorations — sharp corners should always be slightly 
 rounded. 
 
 With regard to the anchorasfcof suchfillino;s — the same 
 rule holds good as given before. 
 
 There is one other situation in whicli the restoration of 
 natural contour would be undesirable, and that is in proximal 
 fillings in the upper incisors, where the palatal angle of the 
 filling should be cut away so as to leave a self-cleansing sur- 
 face. — J. W. Corman}", in JReview. 
 
72 
 
 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 127. Fillings Below Gum Margin. — I have never found 
 a process, or material, that gives as good satisfaction in these 
 cases as combinations of alloy and gold. These cavi- 
 ties nearly always occur on the proximal or labial 
 surfaces. My method is to remove the decay ; get 
 smooth edges to the cavity ; put on a band matrix, reach- 
 reaching from the lower edge (or part under the gum) 
 of the cavity, half way to the crown of the tooth, ^ow adjust 
 the rubber-dam and fill the cavity one- third fall — or to a point 
 a little above the gum line — with white gold and platina 
 alloy; and plug the balance of the cavity with gutta-percha. 
 At a subsequent appointment, adjust the rubber-dam, smooth 
 off the filling, drill two or three retaining pits; and com- 
 plete the operation with felt gold and hand pressure. 
 The whole filling should be nicely smoothed and polished. 
 Fig. 3, shows a labial cavity in a bicuspid complete. — Wm. 
 H. Steele. 
 
 128. Capping Exposed Nerves. - — In order to attain suc- 
 cess in an operation w^hich has for its object the preservation 
 of vitality in an exposed tooth pulp, it is necessary that the 
 pulp be healthy, and that it be so protected as to maintain 
 this condition. Place the rubber-dam on the tooth to be ope- 
 rated on, and one or two adjacent teeth, in order to have 
 plenty of room and light to work. The rubber being in 
 place, and the cavity properly prepared, take a piece of very 
 thin copper, place it on a block, and with the round end of 
 a small instrument, or a suitable size ball burnisher, press it 
 down into the wood, making a shallow cup like disk. IsText, 
 take a general view of the cavity and exposure, to determine 
 the size and shape to cut the disk, the diameter of which 
 should be such as to permit the edges of the disk to rest on 
 the sound dentine that forms the border of the exposed 
 orifice. 
 
 Mix fine powdered asbestos with carbolized resin, to 
 form a thin paste ; put a small quantity of this on the sunken 
 
 * Extract from paper read before the Iowa State Dental Society, May, 1894. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 73 
 
 side of the disk, and [)lace quick!}' and carefully in position 
 over the exposed nerve. 
 
 Now, with some good cement, till in around the sunken 
 edges of the disk, building up even with the highest part, 
 making as nearly as possible a level bottom to the cavity, 
 and holdino- the cap firmly in position. It is very imjjortant 
 that the cavity of decay should be cleared of all loose parti- 
 cles before setting the cap. This should be done by gently 
 syringing out the cavity with warm water, containing a few 
 drops of listerin, before setting the cap. — William H. Steele. 
 
 129. Preparing and Using Tin for Filling. — Tin may 
 be worked in various forms. When the cohesive properties 
 are to be relied on, there is perhaps no better method than 
 rolling the foil in a loose rope, and cutting in pieces of 
 various lengths. In cavities surrounded by strong walls, the 
 tin should be folded into tape or made in cylinders, and time 
 will be saved by introducing it in the cavity. Shavings of 
 tin turned from a revolving ingot of the metal in the lathe 
 work with a softness which makes it a pleasure to use them. 
 I have only a word to say about tin shavings and the wheel 
 from which they are turned. 
 
 An ordinary corundum wheel, one-half inch thick and 
 two inches in diameter, is used as a model, and is molded in 
 sand. The tin is melted in a ladle and poured in the sand, 
 after which a hole is drilled in the center of it, so that it 
 can be mounted on an arbor and turned in the lathe. A 
 chisel on the side-rest is used as the tool, and these shavings 
 are turned otf the thickness desired. 
 
 Pure tin freshly cut from the wheel in the form of shav- 
 ings is quite cohesive, and packs beautifully. When tin and 
 gold are combined in the same filling, I think there should 
 be at least two leaves of gold to one of tin. 
 
 My habit is to put one leaf of ISTo. 4 tin between two 
 leaves of jSTo. 5 soft gold foil, then fold it and cut into nar- 
 row pieces. 
 
 I am not particular what kind of an instrument I use to 
 pack the tin with. An ordinary excavator with the point 
 
74 DEPARTMENT A. 
 
 dulled or broken is as good as anything. The tin is so 
 cohesive that it works as well as cohesive gold foil. — Dr. E. 
 T. Darby, in Cosmos. 
 
 130. Extracting Third Molar.* — When once the de- 
 cision is made that the comfort and well-being of the patient 
 would be favored by the absence of one of these bad third 
 molars, it should be removed with such heroism of operation 
 as the case requires. If the ordinary instruments and pro- 
 cedures for extracting teeth cannot be brought to bear, or 
 will not answer, it should be made a surgical operation 
 w^ith such appliances as will suffice. The extent and diffi- 
 culty of these operations are not out of proportion to the 
 seriousness of the troubles to be relieved ; and dentists are 
 the ones to operate. The instruments and the details of 
 the operation are to be determined by the peculiarities of 
 each case. Ordinarily, the more difficult of these operations 
 are not to be undertaken Avithout that deliberation and con- 
 trol which are commanded by full etherization. N"otwith- 
 standing the patient's inability to open the jaws more than a 
 small fraction of an inch, full opening of the mouth is rarely 
 difficult to accomplish under ether with lever- or screw- 
 power, and a firmly fixed prop seems to retain the opening. 
 
 For a third molar, tipped forward and impinging firmly 
 agairist the distal surface of the second molar, a most helpful 
 next step is the freeing all of that contact by grinding from 
 the third molar with a corundum disk with the engine. 
 This very greatly facilitates the extraction of the third 
 molar, and efiiectually guards against the dejDlorable accident 
 — which has occurred — of extracting both second and third 
 molars in the eflibrt to remove tlie third. The frequent 
 backward curve of the roots of the lower third molar is to 
 be remembered. With the anterior surface free simple 
 lever-power, cautiously applied with a suitably-shaped ele- 
 vator, may suffice to dislodge the tooth, or to so break up 
 its attachment that the after-removal is easy. Sometimes 
 the process at the sides and overlying the back of the tooth 
 
 * Kead at the meeting of the Academy of Dental Science. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 75 
 
 is so thick and strong as to hinder grasping the tooth with 
 a forceps or to prevent its being lifted — a condition of things 
 particularly embarrassing when the tooth is frail,, dee^)!}'- 
 decayed, tunneled, and brittle. In such instances, after 
 suitable dissection of the soft tissues, the bone should be cut 
 away with sharp engine-burs till the difficulty is overcome. 
 Considerable experience has confirmed the conviction that 
 ingenuity and an earnest persistence on the part of the ope- 
 rator, with co-operation on the part of the patient, may sur- 
 mount the difficulties attendant on the removal of almost 
 any third molar. —Dr. C. A. Brackett. 
 
 131. Papillary Growths on the Gums come next on 
 our list. These may occur on the gums, but are exceedingly 
 rare. They consist simply of hypertrophied papille, and are 
 really unimportant. Caustics sometimes arrest or cure the 
 growths, but a free excision is usually the best treatment, 
 though even after this they sometimes tend to recur. — Frank 
 Lankester, L.R.C.P., M.R.C.S., L.D.S., in Ohio Journal 
 
 132. Warty Growths on the Gums are also very rarely 
 met with, but they do occur, and much resemble the ordi- 
 nary cauliflower excresences so frequently seen on the hands, 
 etc. They are quite innocent, but there is often very consid- 
 erable difficulty experienced in getting rid of them, just as 
 is the case when they occur on the hands. At the same 
 time, there is the liability for them to take on a malignant 
 character. They are of a pale whitish color, and contrast 
 very strongly with the surrounding red gum. — Frank Lan- 
 kester, L.R.C.P., M.R.C.S., L.D.S., in Ohio Journal 
 
DEPARTMENT B. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 79 
 
 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 133. Suggestions about Plaster. — Plaster will set more 
 rapidly if tepid (not hot) water is used, than if we take cold. 
 A clean smooth cup is the most convenient vessel in which 
 to mix plaster, rubber bowls being especially unsatisfactory 
 to one who has become accustomed to the thin cups. 'New 
 cups should be obtained as often as the surfaces become 
 checked so that the plaster is difficult to remove. If an excess 
 of material has been used, scrape it out in the waste box, 
 and what little there is left in the cup will easily come away 
 when hard, by filling the cup with water. 
 
 To mix plaster, put in the cup at the outset about as 
 much w^ater as judgment indicates will be needed. To add 
 water later is a mistake. Drop in the plaster a little at a 
 time, allowing it to disappear below the surface before adding 
 any more ; repeat this till the plaster protrudes above the 
 water, which refuses to take up any more. Then stir vigor- 
 ously with a smooth clean knife, and a mixture moderately 
 stiff and perfectly smooth will reward you. The more it is 
 stirred the more quickly it will set, and the stitfer it gets. 
 Use it for the purpose in hand when it has reached the re- 
 quired consistency. If on mixing it is found that a miscal- 
 culation has been made, as the mass is thin, do not add more 
 plaster ; such a step will ruin everything. Pour off any excess 
 of water, and then stir till stiffening begins. Mix enough 
 plaster at the outset, because to mix a second batch, especially 
 in flasking, gives a mass one part of which will set sooner 
 than the other, wdiich is often very undesirable. In taking 
 an impression of a large surface, this sometimes becomes 
 necessarj^ Then mix the first batch quite thin and flow it 
 over the entire surface of the object of which a duplicate is 
 desired. Then add other plaster till the impression is as 
 
80 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 thick as needed. By the time the last lot has set, the first 
 will usually be hard, and all will be well. 
 
 In mixing for impressions of the mouth, use fine plaster, 
 add a little salt and a little powdered pigment; Venetian red 
 or Spanish brown serve admirably. This will produce a 
 quick setting tinted impression material, which can be read- 
 ily detected from the model which is to be poured in it. 
 The plaster must be mixed as described, care being taken 
 not to have it too thick. Do not stir till in the presence of 
 the patient. 
 
 Then stir till it can be felt that the mass has begun to 
 stiften. Fill the cup rapidly, carry it to place firmly and 
 hold it there motionless. If there is a high roof put some 
 plaster in the vault with the knife. If it is feared that the 
 buccal portions of the molar teeth may not be reached, place 
 plaster there also, before inserting the tray. As soon as the 
 plaster begins to set in the cup, chop it up so that it may be 
 more readily removed when the cup is to be cleaned. As 
 soon as the material in the cup will fracture sharply, remove 
 tbe impression regardless of possible fracturing. If this does 
 occur, collect all of the pieces from the mouth ; they may be 
 replaced so as to form a practically perfect model. I have 
 made up an impression from thirty odd pieces and secured 
 good adaptation. 
 
 To procure a lower impression, put but little plaster in 
 the tray, place plaster around the teeth in the mouth with 
 the knife, being sure to cover all surfaces of the teeth ; then 
 quickl}^ insert the tray and let the mass harden, and remove 
 as before. In very difiicult cases, where the teeth are long 
 and perhaps loose, dispense with the tray altogether. When 
 the material is sufliciently set, split it into sections with a 
 sharp pen-knife, and afterward join the fractured pieces to- 
 gether as before. 
 
 To pour a model, use a shaving brush, and with soap- 
 lather thoroughly soap the surface of the impression, espec- 
 ially in the pits for the teeth, and be careful to wash all the 
 suds off afterward ; otherwise the surface of the model will 
 be pitted. Mix the plaster moderately thin. Have the sur- 
 
USEFUL HINTS. ' 8L 
 
 face of the impression saturated, aiid'a little water in the pits 
 for the teeth. Start the plaster in the last molar and let it 
 fill up and run over in the other pits, forcing out the water 
 ahead of it till all are filled. Then turn the impression 
 over and shake the plaster oat of the impression back in 
 the cup. This insures a thin film of plaster over the entire 
 surface. If the process is now repeated and the impression 
 slowly built up without turning it over, the result will be a 
 most accurate model. 
 
 Where the model is to be used for gold work, and dies 
 must be made ; if there are any teeth present, a pin should be 
 placed in each. In doing this cut the heads oii', and later 
 the plaster teeth ma}^ all be broken otf, the pins withdrawn, 
 the dies made, and the teeth readilj' returned to position, 
 where they may be again fastened by using a camel's-hair 
 brush and plaster very thin. In repairing models in this 
 way, take a saucer with a little water and drop in a little 
 plaster, but do not stir it. The j^h^^ter may be taken up 
 with the brush; placed along the joint between tooth and 
 model, and as it soaks in, the excess must be wiped away 
 with the brush filled with water. 
 
 When it becomes desirable to trim a model, after it has 
 lain around a day or two, and so become quite hard, dip it in 
 water for a few minutes, and it may be readily cut with a 
 sharp pen-knife. If an impression is filled and allowed to 
 stand over night, drop it in hot water, and the steam gen- 
 erated will make separation more easy. Models should al- 
 Avays be well soaked before more plaster is added to them. 
 If, however, it is desired to preserve a model, on which a 
 plate is to be vulcanized, it may be readily done by soaping 
 it slightly and flasking it as dry as possible. With care, after 
 vulcanization, the investment may be removed without injury 
 to the model, which, if then allowed to dry, may be separated 
 from the plate. 
 
 ■ To mix plaster and sand for investment of gold pieces^ 
 drop sand in water, and without stirring pour ott' as much 
 water as will run out. If now half the quantity of plaster 
 be added, vigorous stirring will produce a mass of the proper 
 
82 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 •consistency. At first it' will appear stift", but by stirring, the 
 ■sand will soon yield enough water to saturate the plaster, 
 when the whole will become incorporated. 
 
 Never varnish plaster under any circumstances, except for 
 moulding in sand. — Rodrigues Ottolengui, in Dental Mirror. 
 
 134. Axioms of Prosthetic Dentistry. — 1. If many 
 teeth have been lost, and the patient has reached that con- 
 dition when an artificial denture must be worn, the first 
 thing to be considered is: " "What must be done to make the 
 denture as useful and comfortable as possible ?" If the ex- 
 traction of other teeth will secure this result, extract them. 
 
 2. AVhen artificial teeth are required, there is nothing 
 in which skill is so important to personal appearance, health 
 and comfort. Remind your patient of this when she is " shop- 
 ping " for them. 
 
 3. The more difficult it may be to secure an impression, 
 the greater the necessity for the use of plaster. 
 
 4. There are more failures from faulty articulation than 
 from misfits. 
 
 5. Never allow the front teeth to meet, except in the 
 rare cases where the protrusion of the lower jaw brings the 
 upper teeth inside. 
 
 6. Never allow a lower second or third molar, which 
 has been thrown forward, so its crown stands at an angle of 
 about 45°, to be met on its face by an upper tooth. 
 
 7. When the cuspids have been extracted a year, there 
 is always room and necessity for the plate to be w^orn higher 
 and the gum fuller, to restore the contour of the lip. 
 
 8. There is no necessity for vacuum cavities in full upper 
 dentures, whatever the shape or condition of the alveolar 
 ridge and palate. 
 
 9. The nearer the karat of the solder to that of the 
 plate, the more satisfactory will be the results. No lower 
 karat than 18 need be, nor should be, used. 
 
 10. A full set of single gum teeth, soldered to a gold 
 plate, in these days of rubber attachments and continuous 
 gum wH^rk, is an abomination from every point of view. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 83 
 
 11. " Combination " dentures of any kind which can. 
 not be repaired without making almost a new denture (and 
 there are such) are an imposition on the patient. — Dr. L. P. 
 Haskell, in Items of Interest. 
 
 l:-^5. Gas-fitting in Laboratories. — In these, the gas sup- 
 ply pipes should always be very much larger than is ever 
 required. It is not a question of the possibility of obtaining 
 sutficient gas, but that the supply shall be large enough to ad- 
 rait of great variations in the demand without interfering 
 with operations in progress, and the area of pipes given for 
 specific supplies must be at least doubled for laboratory use. 
 In addition to this, a good governor of ample size is a prime 
 necessity, as, without it, exact work is impossible. Few lab- 
 oratories are properly arranged for precision in the gas sup- 
 ply, and this entails not only a very great waste of time, but 
 prevents exact work being done. A laboratory with a defi- 
 cient and ungoverned gas supply lacks the one element of pre- 
 cision, without which, experimental work is of little value. 
 
 Atmospheric Burners. — All atmospheric buuners de- 
 pend on three parts, which must be in definite proportion to 
 each other; any alteration which reduces the capacity or 
 power of any one of these parts, reduces the whole power of 
 the burner in proportion. These points are: The size of 
 the gas outlet, the diameter and length of the mixing tube, 
 and the area of outlet for burning the mixture. Approxi- 
 mately, the diameter of the outlet in the gas nipple must 
 not exceed one-eighth of the diameter of the burner tube 
 for 16- or 18-candle gas ; the length of blank tubes for mix- 
 ing must not, in horizontal burners, be less than five times 
 the bore, and in vertical burners eight times the bore. The 
 total area of outlets, either of holes or area between the 
 meshes of gauze, must not exceed the area of the tube 
 itself. 
 
 Burners Lightin(J Back. — If a burner which has once 
 been satisfactory commences to light back at the jet, the 
 cause will probably be found in an obstruction of the gas jet, 
 which alters the proportion of gas and air, or if the burner 
 
84 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 is a gauze one, a perforation or imperfection in the gauze. — 
 Thos. Fletcher, in Items of Interest. 
 
 136. Artificial Dentures. — -To secure good results in 
 an artificial denture, a correct impression is first in order 
 and first in importance. Plaster of Paris is, in our estima- 
 tion, the only material with which a normal impression can 
 be obtained. The various other materials used for the pur- 
 pose force the muscles and soft tissues out of position, result- 
 ing in an inaccurate cast. Having secured a normal impres- 
 sion — the negative fi'om which a positive is to be obtained — 
 it should be considered as representing merely the outlines ; 
 the conditions to be noted after a carefal study of the parts. 
 With the patient in the chair and the cast in hand, the con- 
 ditions may be indicated by a series of characters and fig- 
 ures penciled on the cast. For instance,, the thickness of 
 the tissues may be represented by figures 64, 32, 16, 8 ; the 
 sixty-fourth, the thirty-second, the sixteenth, and the eighth 
 of an inch in thickness. F, will indicate flexible ; R, 
 rigid, etc. With such a record an intelligent idea can be 
 formed of the requirements in the particular case, and the 
 necessary modifications will be easily comprehended and 
 accomplished ; the adaptation to the hard and soft, rigid and 
 fle;xible, parts secured ; the pressure obtained just where 
 wanted — most in the soft parts, and least in the rigid. In 
 order to trim a cast judiciously, one must have a thorough 
 understanding of the individual mouth. A very important 
 consideration is to so conform the plate to atmospheric 
 pressure principles, that in its use the soft parts of the mouth 
 will be moulded by the denture. The movements of the 
 tongue and the direct pressure of the lower jaw contribute 
 largely to bring about this result. The fact that the mouth 
 does thus conform to the denture shows the importance of a 
 careful preparation of the cast, in order that pressure may 
 be brought to bear where it is most efiicient and least dis- 
 tressing, and to secure atmospheric pressure in establishing 
 adaptation and retaining the plate. 
 
 The surface of the plate should always be finely finished ; 
 
USEFUL HIJ^TS. 
 
 85 
 
 a rough and uneven surface prevents nice adaptation, 'and is 
 unclean and unhealthy. "With air or any foreign substance 
 between the denture and the surface of the mouth covered 
 by it, perfect contact is prevented. If both rubber and 
 celluloid plates were more highly finished before insertion 
 in the mouth, there would be less complaint of these vege- 
 table bases for artificial dentures. 
 
 At the level of the sea the atmospheric pressure is said 
 to be fifteen pounds to the square inch, but no such amount 
 of pressure is required to retain a properly fitting artificial 
 
 denture. The saliva or fluids of the mouth are also of srreat 
 importance in retaining, a denture in position. If the plate 
 and mouth were made perfectly drj^, it would not be easy to 
 secure such adaptations as would be required to hold the plate 
 in position. The utilit}^ of the atmosphere is not, however, 
 fully demonstrated in the retention of a plate till an air- 
 space is created by means of an air chamber. This air- 
 chamber should cover at least four-fifths of the palatine arch, 
 and include certain parts of the aveolar walls. AYith this 
 provision and a judicious trimming of the plaster cast on 
 
86 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 the outer portion of the alveolar ridge, a large part of the 
 denture is made to act as an air-chamber, and this should be 
 understood as but a temporary means in assisting the mouth 
 to conform more readily to the denture ; the result will be 
 vacuum by complete contact, which does not take place 
 till all the air is excluded, and the air-space filled up by 
 the mouth conforming to it. 
 
 To insure a comfortable adaptation, the pressure must be 
 so equalized that, as the alveolar ridge recedes, undue stress 
 will not be brought on the hard palate. For this reason an 
 air-space, covering almost the entire surface of the palatine 
 arch is desirable, as thus the pressure is better distributed 
 and brought to bear directly on the alveolar ridge, where 
 there will be the least danger of injuring the mouth, and 
 thus avoiding the riding or rocking of the plate on the hard 
 palate. The conventional air-chamber, with its acute angles 
 invariab]}' placed on the most rigid portion of the hard 
 palate, soon outlines itself in the tissues, demonstrating a 
 failure to properly utilize atmospheric pressure, and injuring 
 the mouth by inducing absorption unnecessarily. 
 
 The illustration is an exact copy of a mouth for which 
 I am now preparing a set of continuous-gum teeth. The 
 conditions may be indicated by letters A, A, A, 64, 4, mean- 
 ing that within these outlines the tissue is about the sixty- 
 fourth part of an inch in thickness atone end and one-fourth 
 of an inch at the other ; R, R, R, very rigid ; C, C, C, 16, 
 the one-sixteenth of an inch in thickness ; B, B, B, very 
 sensitive to pressure ; 32,16, 32, mean parts of an inch in 
 thickness. On the side A, A, A, a large piece of the process 
 had been torn away in extracting the first molar, which 
 accounts for its peculiar condition. — C. H. Land, in Cosmos. 
 
 137. Insertion of Impression Tray. — The insertion of 
 the tray in taking an impression may seem a trifle to the 
 operator, but is frequently not so to the patient. Few lips 
 will admit an impression-tray direct without an amount of 
 stretching, at once inconvenient and painful ; and, in some 
 cases, to secure a correct impression without subjecting the 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 87 
 
 patient to serious discomfort will require no little care and 
 expertness on the part of the operator. Unusual width of 
 the jaw is not infrequently associated with a contracted com- 
 missure, and, in addition, the muscles of the mouth may be 
 rigid and unyielding. Another ditKculty is in the common 
 attempt of the patient to open the mouth wide in an effort 
 to assist the operator. The patient should he directed to 
 guard against this by allowing the jaw and the lips to be 
 entirely under the control of the operator, who, standing to 
 the right of, behind and over the patient, should present the 
 tray obliquely to the mouth ; one side resting against and 
 pressing outward the corner of the mouth, while the oppo- 
 site corner should be extended with the lirst and second 
 lingers of the left-hand ; the tray should then be passed in 
 with ii rotatory movement to bring it in line. — Dr. J. W. 
 White, in Cosmos. 
 
 138. Perfect Plaster Partial Impressions. — To take an 
 accurate impression of the mouth for a partial upper set of 
 teeth, smear plaster over the roof of the mouth with the 
 finger ; take a string about one foot in length ; tie the ends 
 together ; put the tied end of the loop in the plaster on the 
 roof of the mouth, and add more plaster to thoroughly imbed 
 the knot, leaving the loop of string hanging down. In 
 placing the plaster in the mouth, care should be taken to 
 have it come full half-way over the grinding surfaces of 
 molars and bicuspids and cutting edges of the front teeth ; 
 then trim the plaster and varnish the trimmed surfaces. 
 The plaster should be so trimmed that it will fill up fully 
 one-half of all spaces between the teeth ; then cover all the 
 remaining surface of the mouth and teeth with plaster, being- 
 very careful to have the teeth well covered and spaces filled 
 in, putting on plaster for the buccal and labial surfaces. 
 When set, the plaster impression readily parts where it has 
 been varnished, the palatal portion is dislodged with the 
 help of the string used, and the pieces are then placed to- 
 gether and model made. If a tooth is irregular, use model- 
 ing compound about it and trim suitably ; then apj^ly the 
 
»» DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 plaster. When removing, it breaks where joined ; then re- 
 move compound, place in position in the impression, and 
 pour the model. — J. G. Templeton, D.D.S., in Ohio Dental 
 Journal. 
 
 139. To Remove Impression from Tray. — Directly 
 after removing the impression from the mouth, trim away 
 all surplus plaster which will bind the impression to the 
 tray, place a Bunsen burner on the center of a folded towel, 
 and over the flame of the burner move the impression, cup 
 down, till it pops loose. This result is efi:ected by the gen- 
 eration of steam between the tray and the impression, and 
 is accomplished in less than a minute's time. The impres- 
 sion falls off unbroken on the folds of the towel. — Dr. F. E. 
 Battershe'll, in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 140. To Finish High-arch Plates.— Dr. M. D. Bush, 
 Canton, uses a tuft of cotton tw^isted on a screw mandrel. 
 It makes an effective finisher, carries the powder well, and 
 adapts itself to the surface of the plat^. It is particularly 
 useful in cases of high and very narrow arches. — Ohio Dental 
 Journal. 
 
 141. Articulating Artificial Teeth. — In articulating an 
 upper set to lower natural teeth, the impression is taken with 
 plaster and model made from it ii* the usual way ; then soften 
 modeling composition, flatten it out till it is about a quarter 
 of an inch thick, press it on the model while warm, cut^and 
 trim to make a trial plate on which to take the bite, being 
 careful to have it fit the model accurately ; melt a little wax 
 around on the ridge, then press a roll of softened wax so 
 that it covers all the alveolar part of trial plate ; the wax is 
 then trimmed to give artistic or natural expression, which 
 may be changed after trying in the mouth and a satisfactory 
 expression of the features obtained, always being careful to 
 have the wax show the desired length of the front teeth. 
 The wax should be so cut on its articulating surface that all 
 the lower natural teeth will strike it at the same time when 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 89 
 
 tried in the mouth; then remov^e and soften articulating 
 surface of wax slightly over a flarae and replace in the 
 mouth, and do not let the patient bite in it till you have the 
 head drawn well hack, so as to put the anterior muscles of 
 the neck to a full stretch ; then have the patient bite a little 
 on the wax, to get a slight impression of the cutting edges 
 and cusps of the lower teeth, l^ext, take an accurate im- 
 pression of the lower teeth, from which make a plaster model 
 that will fit in the slight impressions of the teeth made in 
 the bite taken ; then place in any good articulator that can 
 be set to maintain its relative positions (the best articulators 
 are those made of plaster). ISTow remove the bite and you 
 are ready to set the teeth to a correct articulation, and if 
 all has been carefully done, the teeth, when finished, will 
 properly articulate in the mouth without any subsequent 
 grinding. 
 
 For a double set (upper and lower) make plates of mod- 
 eling composition to take the bite on, putting a piece of stifl:" 
 wire in the lower to strengthen it ; wax the ridges as previ- 
 ously described ; place a roll of softened wax on the upper 
 trial plate; place the lower plate in the mouth, being careful 
 to see that it is in proper place, and hold it there while put- 
 ting in the upper plate with the wax on it. Do not allow 
 the patient to bite till the head is drawn back as previously 
 directed; then have the patient bite and keep the jaws 
 closed ; press the wax well against the trial plate, and mark 
 the center or median line ; then have patient close the lips, 
 and with a small, straig-ht instrument mark the heio;ht of 
 lower lip ; this mark should extend from one angle of the 
 mouth to the other, and will show the length of upper lip, 
 also serves as a guide in making the wax expression plates 
 or models. After taking the bite, place the plaster model 
 in the trial plates and slightly fasten in any articulator. 
 You are now ready to make the antagonizing models. The 
 writer's method of doing this is to press a lump of soft wax 
 on the upper model in such a way that an accurate fit is ob- 
 tained of all the parts the artificial plate is to cover; then 
 trim, first the height the rim is to be, leaving it as high as 
 
90 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 possible over the region ot' the canine teeth, frsenum, and 
 over the bicuspids; also have that portion over second molar 
 as high as the model will permit; then cut the wax to the 
 desired length for the teeth, taking as a guide the mark 
 made on the bite, to show the line of lip closure, Next, 
 trim labial and buccal surfaces, the general contour of which 
 when trimmed should conform with the outer portion of the 
 alveolar ridge of lower plaster model ; then cut a portion of 
 the wax out of the center, leaving an articulating surface all 
 around the riclge, which need not be so wide in front as at 
 each side. We now have the wax, antagonizing model and 
 plate all in one piece. The lower antagonizing model is 
 easily and quickly made ; having upper wax on plaster 
 model, oil its articulating surface, and press a roll of soft 
 wax to the ridge of lower plaster model; then press upper 
 model down against it as far as the set of the articulator 
 will allow; trim the lower wax to the contour of upper wax, 
 and w^e have the antagonizing models ready for trial in the 
 patient's mouth, which we always do before proceeding fur- 
 ther, carefully noting and making any changes thought nec- 
 essary to give a natural expression to the face, being very 
 particular to have the articulating surfaces come together at 
 the same time all the way around, and also that our models 
 give the proper length to the lower third of the face, lohich 
 must be ill exact proportion with the upper two-thirds. 
 
 After being satisfied that we have obtained the best 
 results possible with the case, we mark the medium line, 
 and make other marks across the line of closure; so that we 
 can put them together again in the same position out of the 
 mouth. ]^ow an exact articulator becomes a necessity, one 
 that will not vary a hairs breadth, and to get that we must 
 make it of plaster, using our antagonizing models to get 
 the proper relation of its parts. We now scarify back end 
 of the plaster models, and place the upper antagonizing 
 model on upper plaster model ; fill the concave space betw^een 
 articulating surfaces with wet paper; spread plaster on a 
 piece of glass ; set upper plaster model in the soft plaster, 
 and build the plaster extension; which should be about nvo 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 91 
 
 inches in length from back end of model, and built as high 
 as the articulating surface of wax antagonizing model. Now 
 then trim plaster and cut two V-shaped grooves, crossing at 
 right angles in the center of extension ; coat lightly with 
 thin varnish and oil, or, what is better, apply a coating 
 of soap with camel's-hair pencil. Next place lower antago- 
 nizing model in position, as indicated by marks made. in the 
 mouth, and fasten together with two or three small staples, 
 cut from tin plate; then put lower plaster model in its place, 
 make the plaster extension attachment a 'id trim to upper 
 extension. When plaster has well set, separate the parts ; 
 then place lower antagonizing model on lower plaster model ; 
 fill inside space with wet paper, not allowing any of it to 
 cover articulating surface; soap the extension and spread 
 plaster over all, which should be about one-fourth of an inch 
 thick on articulating surface and a little thicker on exten- 
 sion ; then trim to the contour of the wax, and the center 
 line marked to correspond with that on the wax ; we now 
 have what we call a lower articulating plate, which has an 
 impression of the articulating surface of lower antagonizing 
 model, against which the lower teeth are to be set ; following 
 the order of nature, we always set the lower teeth first, set- 
 ting the front teeth a little in, about a line and a half from 
 front edge of lower articulating plate, at the medium line, 
 having the cuspids and all those back of them come nearly 
 to the edge of articulating plate ; then the upper teeth when 
 set will not stand out further than the contour of the upper 
 antagonizing model. After setting the lower teeth the 
 lower articulating plate is laid aside, and the upper plaster 
 model is placed in position ; the upper teeth articulated to 
 the lower ones already set. 
 
 If the pfates are to be of vulcanite, saw otf the articu- 
 lating extensions, when ready for flasking. If all these di- 
 rections are carefully carried out, the teeth, when finished, 
 will articulate in the mouth perfectly icUhoiU any grinding 
 to make them come together ; such has been our experience 
 with this method for twenty-five years. The best results ; in 
 fact the whole science of constructing double or upper and 
 
92 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 lower sets of teeth, lies in the proper adjustment of the an- 
 tagonizing models ; to do this artistically, a knowledge of 
 the physical law of forces is absolutely necessary ; hence, 
 when preparing these, the dentist must always keep in mind 
 that they should be made so that when the teeth are set in 
 accordance with them, the force of mastication should come 
 against the center of the alveolar ridges^ in order to have them 
 remain firmly in place when in use. — J. G. Templeton D.D.S. 
 
 142. Obtaining Even Plates. — The ordinary way of 
 bending up wax by w^arming and pressing it on the model 
 with the thumb, is open to the objection that the thumb, 
 being harder and more unyielding than the soft wax, tends 
 to press it very thin over the rugse, and not at all in the 
 interstices of the teeth. This may be avoided and the rugae 
 brought prominently and evenly on the surface, by heating 
 some modeling composition in water, rendering the wax pli- 
 able by dipping it for an instant in the water with the com- 
 position, then placing the wax roughly in position on the 
 model, and with the soft composition knead it well down in 
 place ; on parting the composition from the wax, the latter 
 will be found to represent on the surface -almost a duplicate 
 of the surface of the model. 
 
 The composition has, of course, a tendency to stick to 
 the wax, if too hot. Should this give trouble, dry the com- 
 position first, and smear the surface of it with a little French 
 chalk. In subsequently setting up the teeth and preparing 
 for the flask, care should be taken that the surface of the 
 wax is not cut or scratched ; when finally ready for the flask, 
 the surface of the wax should be polished by lightly rubbing 
 it with the finger tip or cotton wool. — British Journcd. 
 
 143. To Make Gold Plates Without Dies.— Dr. W. G. 
 Browne describes his greatly simplified method of making 
 gold plates with rubber attachments without dies. He uses 
 ]M"o. 30 gauge pure soft gold, burnishing it directly on the 
 plaster model, and stifiening by soldering a platinum wire 
 all around the pieces, and flowing solder over to make a 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 93 
 
 smooth surface. In a lower parital plate, when the eight 
 anterior teeth were in position in the mouth, he makes the 
 portion of the plate extending across the anterior teeth of a 
 double plate of gold, with bits of platinum between the two 
 gold plates, soldering the two plates only at the points where 
 he placed the aluminum pieces. The rubber covering the 
 lingual surface of the piece entering between the two thick- 
 nesses of gold made a very strong piece, without SAvaging or 
 using dies in its construction. — Dr. W. G. Browne, in Items 
 OF Interest. 
 
 14-4. Model Plates for Partials. — In mounting anterior 
 teeth, on partials, where they are to be mounted without 
 gums, it is very necessary to have a strong, rigid material 
 for the model plate, that can be made thin, and yet hold the 
 teeth permanently in place, no matter how^ close they are 
 made to hug the natural gum. I have been using the red 
 vulcanite gutta-percha for this lately, and "find it the best 
 for the purpose. The model should be hard, then rubbed 
 over with soapstone, the gutta-percha softened in water, 
 pressed to place, and held till set. If properly worked, the 
 plate will come out ready for sandpaper and polish. — Wm. 
 H. Steele. 
 
 145. To Restore Color to Black Rubber Plate. — Often 
 after a black rubber plate is polished it presents a very in- 
 ferior color, a grayish-black. This may be removed by the 
 application of carbon bisulphide. Dampen a cloth with the 
 solution, and rub the plate vigorously wherever required. 
 It is Avell to wash the plate thoroughl}'^ after the use of this 
 solution, as there might otherwise be a tendency to nausea. 
 — S. Burns, in Items of Interest. 
 
 146. Care of the Vulcanizer. — The occasional reports 
 of dental vulcanizers, accompanied as they are by damage to 
 property, and imminent risk of personal injury, make the 
 question of their avoidance one of considerable interest. 
 Their entire prevention is an impossibility, so long as the 
 
94 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 management of the vuleanizer is entrusted to boys, or per- 
 sons who know nothing, and care less, about the properties 
 of steam, or the rules on the observation of which depend 
 the safety and proper operation of the boiler committed to 
 their charge. It is seldom, that an inquiry into the circum- 
 stances attending a vuleanizer exploding, fails to elicit the 
 fact that it was the consequence of gross carelessness or 
 ignorance. The safety apparatus is often deliberately put 
 out of order, and all the chances of an accident which may 
 happen from a few moments" forgetfulness are taken by the 
 operator, who probably knows about as much of the proper- 
 ties of steam as a Christian scientist does of human physiology. 
 
 It is projiosed, in the present article, to touch on a few 
 points of the proper care of vulcanizers, and more especially 
 to show how and when they become unsafe by use. It seems 
 to be the opinion of some dentists that a vuleanizer should 
 remain good indefinitely ; but often one returned to the 
 maker, for supposed trivial repairs, is found to be in such a 
 condition that its further use would be attended with great 
 risk. 
 
 Vulcanizers, as they leave the manufacturer's hands, 
 may be depended on as strong enough to withstand a press- 
 sure three or four times as great as that incident to the vul- 
 canizing process, l^o house, having any care for its reputa- 
 tion, can afford to put out one unless it is of undoubted 
 strength. They are also provided with ample safeguards, 
 by means of which they will be relieved from over-pressure, 
 if it should occur. But no such appliance can be made that 
 cannot be — either ignorantly or designedly — put out of 
 order; neither can a vuleanizer be made so strong that it 
 will be safe under any attainable pressure. It must be care- 
 fully and intelligently managed to insure safety. 
 
 Vulcanizers are gradually weakened, and eventually 
 destroyed, by corrosion and strain. 
 
 When the sides of the vuleanizer are weakened by cor- 
 rosion to any great extent, the fact is easily ascertained by 
 tapping them lightly with a small hammer. If the metal is 
 thick and strong, it will be elastic, and the hammer will 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 95 
 
 rebound from a light blow ; though, of course, copper would 
 yield to a heavy one. When the metal is quite thin, the 
 sensation will be as though the blow was delivered on lead. 
 There v/ill be little, if any, rebound, and the metal will be 
 driven in and dented by a very light blo\A'. 
 
 Corrosion occurs to some extent from exposure of the 
 vulcanizer to air and moisture. Indeed, it is by no means 
 sure that the greater part of it does not thus take place. It 
 is good practice to clean the vulcanizer pot, and wipe it dry, 
 before laying it away after use. 
 
 Another cause of failure in vulcanizers, one which 
 happil}" occurs but seldom, is the cracking of the metal near 
 the corner of the bottom. As the bottom is usuallj^ covered 
 with scale, it may crack, and even give way, before the ex- 
 istence of any defect is suspected. This fact forms another 
 argument for keeping the vulcanizer clean, as before men- 
 tioned. 
 
 When a screw fastening like that of the Whitney vul- 
 canizer is employed, mischief is often done by the inordinate 
 use of black lead or soapstone powder on the packing joint, 
 and incidentally on the screw. The particles of which either 
 of these powders are composed are hard enough to wear 
 away metal if placed between two rubbing surfaces, and in 
 consequence the screw threads of vulcanizers are sometimes 
 so worn that they have not sufficient hold on each other .to 
 retain the cover, which, on some fine day, mounts to the 
 ceiling, and disappears in the lath and plaster, much to the 
 surprise and disgust of the owner. — George B. Snow, D.D.S., 
 in Dental Advertiser. 
 
 147. Use of the Blow-pipe. — Dentists who come to our 
 school often remark that they have found it difficult to use 
 the mouth blow-pipe, but very soon learn to use it successfully 
 with proper instruction ; and the new beginner can succeed 
 better with it than with the automatic blow-pipe. 
 
 The primary difficulty lies in the instrument itself. The 
 blow-pipes sold at the dental depots, and which are used uni- 
 versally, are made for jewelers' use, who use low grades of 
 
96 . DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 solder and do not have to heat up and keep hot plaster invest- 
 ments. The dentist using 18-, 20- and 22-karat solders, and 
 needing to keep hot investments, needs a larger blow-pipe. 
 
 The mouth-piece of the small pipe has 1o be taken inside 
 the lips, and the eftect to use it tires the muscles. The large 
 mouth-piece is pressed against the lips. The aperature at the 
 other end needs to be sufficiently large to take in the large 
 flame of a proper soldering burner, either gas or alcoliol. 
 
 For many years I constructed a soldering burner by 
 Avinding fine wire over the end of a gas-pipe, to the size of a 
 hen's egg. This gave a flame like the wick of a lamp. A 
 few years since Dr. Mcintosh, of this city, constructed for 
 me an excellent burner, consisting of a brass bulb filled with 
 fine wire gauze. These can be screwed on to the end of the 
 ordinary gas-pipe, which should be of two twelve-inch pieces 
 with a universal joint, so as to be placed in a convenient 
 position on the bench. 
 
 The blow-pipe must be held in such position as to control 
 the entire flame, always remembering that the flame must be 
 made blue, or sufficient heat will not be secured. Do not 
 blow too hard, only enough to control the flame as it comes 
 from the burner. In order to keep a steady blast, do not 
 allow all the air to escape from the lungs, but keep the 
 diaphragm constantly distended; and using the cheeks for bel- 
 lows and the tongue for a valve, the process is an easy one. 
 
 A blow-pipe, such as I have described, is furnished b}^ 
 some of the dental depots, and is known as the " Haskell 
 blow-pipe." If the curved end is more than two inches 
 long, cut it off" to that length, and see that the hole is one- 
 sixteenth inch in diameter. . 
 
 The solder should be cut small, and laid where it is 
 needed, so as not to have to " draw " it from one place to- 
 another. The borax and solder should be applied before the 
 case is heated up, so there may be no delay when ready for 
 the blow-pipe. Of course, I am referring to the soldering of 
 teeth on plates or. bridges. Heat up the case over a large 
 gas-burner as hot as possible ; a convenient soldering pan 
 for such cases can be made of sheet iron ; a half circle,. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 97 
 
 three-inch diameter upon the straight side, with rim three- 
 fourths inch wide ; handle, twelve inches, fastened diagonally 
 to the straight side. 
 
 Place the case so the heat shall be thrown from front to 
 rear, in order to heat the plate first, so it shall be hot as the 
 backings when the heat is thrown upon the solder. — L. F. 
 Haskell, in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 148. Swedging with Screw Press. — I think for the 
 past eighteen years I have never struck a blow on a gold 
 plate to swedge it. The press I use is made of wrought iron, 
 except the base. It is made with a screw of steel, engine- 
 turned. In swedging a gold metal plate you cannot be as 
 sure of results in any other way as with the press that carries 
 it home without rebound, there being no resistance. On the 
 last pressure place a thin piece of cotton cloth underneath 
 your plate, as yonr first work will expand your counter-die, 
 and the cloth makes up for expansion and makes a perfectly 
 tight counter-die; your plate will be driven home, and a 
 perfect adaptation the result. — Dr. E. G. Leech, in Odonto- 
 logical Society cif Pennsylvania. 
 
 149. Clasps on Rubber Plates. — The use of clasps of 
 gold on rubber plates, when properly made, I most heartily 
 recommend. My method is to make an impression of the 
 tooth or teeth to be clasped, pour the impression with Mel- 
 lotte's or other easy flowing metal ; this, when separated from 
 the impression, will give you the tooth to be clasped, in 
 metal ; over this metal die bend your clasp until it fits the 
 
 • largest diameter ; now remove and bed or push the clasps 
 in charcoal, or pumice and plaster, about half the width ; 
 now solder a good strong lug on this band by laying the 
 lug against the band, using at least 14-karat solder ; remove 
 and place the clasp on the tooth in the mouth ; see that it 
 does not bear upon the gums ; remove and flow a little hard 
 wax — a little resin added to beeswax will make it — on the 
 inside of the clasp ; and while warm place it over the tooth ; 
 be sure it is placed and held where you want it to remain in 
 
98 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 the plate ; on' this point your success or failure depends, the 
 clasp must remain immovable when the impression is being taken ; 
 now you are ready for the impression. I take it in plaster 
 alone : many use stiff wax first. Cut out around the clasp, fill 
 with plaster and reinsert. I prefer plaster alone; this method 
 applies to all parts of the mouth. It is simply incredible, 
 what this method will occasionally do, especially on lower 
 plates. — Gr. A. McMillen, in Review. 
 
 150. Preventing Odor in Casting Dies. — The odor 
 arisino; from casting; a die in sand mixed with oil can be 
 overcome by placing over the molding ring a tin can, the 
 vapor of oil is condensed by the cold can, and prevented from 
 escaping in the room. — Dental Tribune. 
 
 151. Plate Springing in Swaging. — Sometimes in 
 swaging a partial or full plate there will be a spring in the 
 plate, which it seems almost impossible to get out, and after 
 spending half a day in vain to remove it, one is often tempted 
 to throw it away and commence anew. Should you ever get 
 a spring in a case of this character, all the pounding you can 
 give it in a day will not remedy it. I treat such cases in the 
 following manner : Take the plaster model which is used in 
 making the dies, and set the plate on it, and in as nearly a 
 correct position as possible, and on the side of the model, cut 
 some small grooves at different points. Force the plate down 
 in the face of the model, in the desired position, and at 
 the same time pass over it a piece of copper wire (size 21 of 
 standard gage), carry the ends of this wire around the 
 model, bringing them together and twist them until the wire 
 binds down the plate to the model. Use as many wires as 
 are necessary to bring down the plate all around. Then heat 
 the plate to cherry-red, and allow it to cool slowly. After 
 removing the wires, you will find that the spring has de- 
 parted. This same method can be applied to plates with 
 teeth, by investing in sand and plaster after having applied 
 the wires, and then slowly heat the mass upon a lamp or 
 furnace before using the blow-pipe. — Dr. Bartlett, in Archives. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 99 
 
 152. Mending Cracked Plates. — In repairing a cracked 
 plate I use what is known to jewelers as ear-ring wire (brass 
 wire gold plated), and after proceeding the usual way till about 
 to pack in the new rubber, when I make a hole sufficiently 
 large to receive the wire on each side of the crack, bending 
 each end of the wire at right angles, placing it through the 
 holes, sometimes through the plate, cutting ofi'the ends after 
 vulcanization, — Dr. Abbott. 
 
 153. To Prevent Borax Frothing. — When soldering, 
 the addition of a minute quantity of gum arable rubbed up 
 with borax and water on a slate will prevent the borax from 
 frothing. — Carl J. Gramm. 
 
 154. Burnishing Aluminum. — -A mixture of equal 
 parts of olive oil and rum is recommended for the burnishing 
 of aluminum, after which it is buffed. — Dr. Haskins, in Re- 
 
 view. 
 
 155. To Line Plates with Black Rubber. — Plates can 
 be lined with black rubber, without its showing through the 
 red, by dissolving black rubber in chloroform, and painting 
 the model two or three good coats. Wait a few minutes be- 
 fore packing other rubber on the black. — G. A. Yant, in 
 Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 156. Celluloid Blanks for Countersunk Teeth. — Dr. 
 M. II. Cryer devised the filing of notches in celluloid blanks 
 as in Fig. 1, when the countersunk tooth-crowns are to be 
 mounted in this material. The suggestion is a practical one, 
 and obviates the defects which "I have found to attend the 
 mounting of these teeth in the usual way, for the confined 
 air in the cups commonly prevents the celluloid from enter- 
 ing far enough to more than half fill them, and thus the pins 
 are left untouched. As a consequence one is^ disagreeably 
 surprised by the teeth coming off in the process of finishing; 
 or, what is worse, by the return of the patient with one or 
 more detached teeth in the hand. This has not occurred 
 
100 
 
 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 since tryinsj Dr. Cryer's method, and an experimental case 
 from which the teeth were purposely broken showed all the 
 cups or countersinks perfectly filled, as seen in the cut, 
 Fig. 2, copied from that case. That was a demonstration of 
 the effectiveness of the plan which provides for the escape of 
 
 Fig. 3 
 
 Fig. 4. 
 
 the air, while the plastic promontories enter the counter- 
 sinks and surround the pins, by means of which the teeth 
 are firmly secured to the plate, on which they thus have so 
 strong a grip that the labial necks of the crowns may, for 
 conformity to the adjacent natural teeth, be quite uncovered 
 by the celluloid (see Fig. 3), and the mount be yet a strong 
 one, as is evidenced by the section through plate and crown. 
 Fig. 4. In this instance the short celluloid festoons (see Fig 
 3) lie close on the gum, which they much more nearly re- 
 semble than the dark vulcanite. — H. S. W., in Cosmos. 
 
 157. Shaping Plates When Muscles Interfere. — The 
 very fact that the tissues and the muscles tend to drop toward 
 the maxilla after it has become absorbed and occupy these 
 spaces, make^it ofttimes quite a difficult thing to retain that 
 place for any length of time. I think this is largely due to 
 the fact that dentists do not shape the borders and the buccal 
 and labial surfaces of the artificial dentures properly. We 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 101 
 
 find in almost every instance in which artificial dentures are 
 constructed, instead of taking the natural shape of the origi- 
 nal gums, that they take or assume a shape that is entirely 
 unnatural — a bulging out, if you please, of the surface of 
 the plate, both anteriorly or along the border. You take 
 any lower denture and insert it in the mouth, if the mus- 
 cles have been in the habit of dropping in that surface in- 
 stead of hitting the plate, the tendency of the muscles is to 
 drop underneath the plate and lift it up ; whereas, if it had 
 a depression at that point the muscles would fold in on it 
 and tend not only by their influence in holding it in position, 
 but would produce an atmospheric force that tends always 
 to hold a plate — because the air does not extend beyond. — 
 C. S. Case, in Dental Review. 
 
 158. To Prevent Air-holes in Flasking. — When filling 
 the upper ring of a flask, in repairing vulcanite work, it 
 will generally be found that a large air-hole is frequently 
 formed in the plaster just poured in. This is caused by the 
 plaster in the lower ring being dry, and the air escaping 
 from it forms the air-hole. To avoid this, after the case is 
 invested in the lower part of the flask, trimmed and varn- 
 ished ready for the investment of the upper ring, grease the 
 whole surface and place in a bowl of water while you mix 
 the plaster for the upper ring. By this manipulation you 
 will avoid what at times is very tantalizing in repair cases. 
 The same procedure may be observed for new as well as re- 
 pair cases. — Chupein, in Dented Office and Laboratory. 
 
 159. Skeleton Plates. — I send you herewith a sketch 
 of a skeleton plate that I made a short time ago, it being 
 the second one that I have made, and as they proved so 
 satisfactory to both patients and myself, I concluded that 
 I would be jiistified in giving the profession the benefit of 
 my method of making such plates. The cuts are good illus- 
 trations of the last plate made. 
 
 The patient, a lady, extremely nervous, and having lost 
 the left cuspid, second cuspid and first molar, applied to me 
 
102 
 
 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 Full view of palate surface. 
 
 to have them 'inserted. Having had some experience with 
 her, I feared she could not tolerate a plate in the roof of the. 
 
 mouth, and I did 
 not deem it advis- 
 able to attach the 
 teeth by banding, 
 hence I concluded 
 to make the skele- 
 ton plate. The pro- 
 cess is very much 
 the same as 
 making an ordi- 
 nary gold plate. 
 After you have 
 your dies, cut a 
 narrow strip of 
 gold or platinum 
 plate large enough 
 to form a saddle 
 where teeth are to 
 be inserted, extend- 
 ing up on the buc- 
 cal surface of the 
 gum as high as you 
 want it to make a 
 finish, and inside 
 on the palatine 
 urface, just far 
 nough to solder 
 \ our stays for fas- 
 tening the teeth on 
 with rubber. Next 
 take two strips of 
 heavy spring gold, 
 about N'o. 22 thick, 
 and 3-16 to ^ inch 
 wide, lay each one 
 on your zinc die 
 
 Diagonal view from left upper hand molar. 
 
 Note.— The dark shade at the base of the first molar 
 on the buccal side is intended to show vrhere pink rubber 
 has been used to meet the natural gum. The light shade 
 represents the gold of the skeleton plate as well as the 
 clasps. The second bicuspid on the left side of the cut 
 represents a gold crown, and is, therefore, not used to 
 clasp to. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 103 
 
 from one sitle to the other from the teeth you intend to clasp ; 
 then sweclge them up, each one separately ; then place gold 
 saddle and both bars on zuic in their proper places; swedge 
 again, then by holding one end of one of the bars in its proper 
 place on the saddle with tweezers, solder it there ; the other bar 
 the same waj^ ; then the ends of the bars together, or to a 
 saddle on opposite side, if there be one ; swedge lightly again. 
 Xow place it in the mouth, so that the bars fit to roof of 
 mouth and the saddle to the gums, if all is right. !N"ow take 
 an impression with plaster if you can, or composition if you 
 must. 
 
 After obtaining cast, cut and fit your clasps and solder 
 in the usual way. After the clasps are on, place the skeleton 
 in the mouth again, take the "bite," articulate, grind on 
 your teeth, Iyj in the mouth again, to see if there is any 
 doubt about the bite ; if all right, invest and vulcanize, finish 
 up and polish, and you will have the satisfaction of having 
 done a neat piece of work and given yowY patient the best 
 appliance that could be made, not excepting a bridge. Xow, 
 I have not written this for the benefit of those who have 
 made these same skeleton plates for the last ten, twenty or 
 thirty years and kept it to themselves, but for those who 
 may wish to know that such an appliance can and has been 
 made, and has proven a success. — Dr. H. H. Gantz,in Dental 
 Office and Laboratory. 
 
 160. Proper Fitting of Clasps. — The metal should be 
 platinized gold only, without any lining of pure or twenty- 
 two-karat gold soldered on it next to the crown. The metal 
 should be loosely fitted to the crown on the plaster cast, and 
 afterward fitted in the mouth directly on the tooth and 
 made to touch in at least four places. It should not fit 
 accurately every inequality of the surface. 
 
 If a clasp fits minutely all the surface of the crown, it 
 makes of the minute space between the crown and clasp a 
 capillary surface, and keeps the mucous secretions, as well as 
 the fine food, forever in contact and with no space for circu- 
 lation of the saliva. AVhereas, if the band touches but a few 
 
104 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 places on the tooth crown, it will rest just as firmly, if it has 
 been well fitted in the mouth and allowed to take its own 
 position when tried on the crown. 
 
 Capillary power made by surfaces very closely proxi- 
 mated is the surest means of producing caries. "Where a 
 space is left ; the points that do touch are in absolute contact, ' 
 and, aside from a slight wear on the tooth, the surface can- 
 not decay as when there is an actual and close fitting. If 
 made of pure soft gold, there would always be danger. 
 
 The width of clasp should be as great as can be made, 
 and to steady the plate without grasping it firmly. 
 
 iN'ext to the clasp in importance is to know where it 
 should be soldered to the plate; and on which side of the 
 crown to allow it to go on and off, where the crown is very 
 much out of perpendicular. The gold amalgam does not 
 discolor to any considerable extent. 
 
 I prefer to allow the edge of the filling to stand outside of 
 the clasp and not rest underneath it, at the top or next to the 
 grinding-surface ; and I do not hesitate to use the corundum 
 wheel on the enamel where slight projections interfere 
 with a clasp resting securely. ]^o harm can result where the 
 cut surface is polished. If caries should occur at any point 
 thereafter from accumulation of food, I should fill with 
 amalgam. But this need not often result when cleansed 
 after each meal. 
 
 Each case must be thoroughly studied after the plaster 
 cast is made, or the result will not be satisfactory. The 
 points on the clasp and plate where the plate is soldered to 
 connect them are the vital jmrts^ and, unless judiciously chosen 
 and the bar made of platinized gold wire and the base plate 
 of two pieces of gold soldered together to stiften it, and the 
 clasp of proper width and thickness, the strain placed on 
 the mechanism will break it. The bar holding the clasp 
 and plate must always be on the side of the tooth where 
 there will be least resistance. Take a second inferior molar 
 that has tipped forward very much and also inclines to the 
 tongue. Here the solderino; should be done as far back on 
 the buccal side of the clasp as can be accomplished. Then 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 105 
 
 the spring of the clasp is not needed for the buccal side, but 
 for the anterior and lingual sides, where projecting from a 
 perpendicular. If soldered from the lingual side, it would 
 be impossible to get the clasp on or oft'. 
 
 In the upper cases it is generally the reverse, though 
 there are many exceptions, and no rigid rules can be laid 
 down. Each one must be especially studied, or no good 
 results. Nor can you rely on fitting plate and clasp to the 
 plaster-cast and soldering from that— -no, never do it ! Take 
 the trouble to take impression of both plate and clasp in the 
 mouth, and then solder from that. — W. G. A. Bonwill, 
 in International Journal. 
 
 161. Flexible Rubber Plates. — Herewith I give you 
 the result of a little experiment in thin, flexible rubber 
 plates : Wax up the case in the usual manner. After trying 
 in the mouth to see that it is correct, fasten the outer rim 
 solidly to the cast with wax, then cut out the wax from 
 palatal portion and burnish tea lead in its place, letting it 
 come up well around the teeth. Flask as usual, and after 
 washing out the wax and removing the lead, apply dry heat 
 to the case to dry the surfaces, then paint with liquid silex ; 
 the heat of the case will soon dry the silex. Make a good 
 large gate at heel for surplus rubber, and pack the same as 
 for thick plate, using black rubber for palatal portion. Care 
 must be exercised in cutting away surplus, not to split the 
 thin rubber. The polishing can be done with brush and 
 cotton wheels. N'o scraping or sandpapering necessary. This 
 makes a much pleasanter plate to wear in the mouth, and gives 
 better satisfaction to the wearer. — W. G. Stowell, in Review- 
 
 162. Replacing Pinless Gum Sections. — We frequently 
 have a plate brought in, with a front block broken off; the 
 section being all perfect, but minus part of the pins, or, per- 
 haps, all of them. I have found the following method very 
 useful and a success in such cases : Put a rubber corundum 
 disk, style D, in the engine, and cut channels in the old 
 block, as shown in the cuts; keep the disk well wet; and be 
 
106 DEPARTxMENT B. 
 
 governed in depth of the channels somewhat by the shape 
 and amount of material in the tooth, or section. ]^o\v cut 
 away on the plate for the new 
 rubber, deep enough so that it *l ^/^^~\r-u. 
 will easily reach, and flow in 
 the channels ; replace block on 
 the plate, wax up, flask, pack and vulcanize as usual. — Wil- 
 liam H. Steele, D.D.S., in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 163. Soldering Small Pieces. — As the saving of time 
 is an object to most dentists, I will describe a process of 
 soldering small pieces of gold work, which, though not new 
 to all, may be of service to many. If you have a plate with 
 two or three teeth which you wish to attach by means of 
 solder, back the teeth and fasten in position by means of 
 hard wax; then take molding-sand and wet it thoroughly, 
 till it is of the consistency of soft putty; place this on your 
 soldering block, press the plate in it, and bring the sand 
 well up around the teeth. Now take your blow-pipe and 
 throw a broad, gentle flame around the outer edges of the 
 sand, taking care not to let the flame touch the plate or teeth 
 till the water is driven off" and the wax begins to blaze ; 
 then direct the flame on the wax and burn it ofl*. Scrape 
 well the parts on which you wish the solder to flow; then 
 place on the solder and borax, and proceed as usual. Partly 
 till a sauce-pan with water, and place it over a gas or oil- 
 stove, and when it boils hold the case, wrapped (investment 
 and all) in a cloth, over the steam for half a minute close to 
 the water ; then drop it in, remove and take out the piec'e. 
 Clasps and small regulating pieces are held together and sol- 
 dered by this process very quickly. 
 
 I have yet to crack my flrst tooth by soldering in this 
 manner, which, I think, is due to the fact that the expansion 
 by steam heat is more uniform than by dry. 
 
 Sand which has been used for molding purposes is 
 dangerous to use, as particles of zinc or lead may be present^ 
 and thus become alloyed with the gold. — J. Bond Littig, in 
 International Journal. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 107 
 
 164. Uses for Mellotte's Moldine. — I have found mold- 
 ine very useful in repairing gold and silver-plate and bridge- 
 work. The tooth or teeth and plate can he invested by 
 moldino; the moldine over and around the parts to be sol-- 
 dered, and the work at once heated up, thus saving much 
 time and trouble usually resulting from the use of wet mix- 
 tures as investients. Impromptu crucibles for small melts of 
 any kind can also be made of moldine. A thick gold collar 
 or ring, or cross-bar, or any small article, can be cast in a 
 moldine mold, which is easily and quickly formed from a 
 suitable model, and is ready for use as soon as made. — F. B., 
 in Cosmos. 
 
 165. Rubber Head for Riveting Hammer, — Slip a 
 rubber tip, such as is used on the little glass drop tubes, over 
 point or face of your small riveting hammer, tie it fast with 
 a piece of wire twisted round ; you can hammer away at a 
 plaster model without defacing it, when fitting in an air- 
 chamber pattern or any piece of gold, or other metal, to the 
 model. — D. V. Beacock, in Dam. Jour. 
 
 166. Watt's Metal Cusps for Short Bites. — I saw re- 
 cently in The Items an article by Dr. Ticknor on this point, 
 and will give my method of making them: Cut out a piece 
 of thick base-plate wax, as large as will go in a Watt's flask ; 
 warnina piece of thick glass and lay the warm wax plate on 
 it ; press in it plain single bicuspids and molars of the sizes 
 and shapes desired, as close together as practicable all over 
 the wax. Now, with a warmed spatula make a little channel 
 from crown to crown, for gates ; place bottom half of the 
 flask on the glass ; slightly oil the wax, and fill the flask with 
 Teague's Impression Compound. When set, remove the wax; 
 varnish and oil the surface ; put on the other half of the flask 
 and fill with the compound. Separate when set, and with 
 a sharp, straight-edged plaster knife remove all the project- 
 ing cusps and channels from the first half of the flask ; close 
 and clamp ; dry out all moisture, and pour with Watt's 
 metal. Old tooth-pins can be put in by setting them in the 
 
108 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 plaster, opposite the crowns desired, before pouring the 
 metal ; or the crowns can be roughened with a graver for 
 attaching to rubber plate. As many as desired can be made 
 from one mold. — William H. Steele, D.D.S., in Ohio Dental 
 Journal. 
 
 167. To Duplicate Models and Impressions. — Take 
 printers' roller composition, melt in a water-bath till dis- 
 solved. Grease the model slightly with lard, and place it 
 the same as if to mold a met9,l die, cover with a metal ring, 
 (a tin can opened at both ends will do) and pour the melted 
 composition over the model. Let this stand over night. By 
 morning: the material is hardened and the model can be with- 
 drawn. The composition being elastic it retains its shape, 
 and a hundred models ma}^ be poured if necessary. Impres- 
 sions may be duplicated in the same manner, by using im- 
 pression instead of model. — J. G. Templeton, D.D.S., in Ohio 
 Dental Journal. 
 
 168. Thin Rubber Plates. — To secure the maximum 
 strength without increasing the thickness of vulcanite plates, 
 it is necessary to make the mold so smooth that the rubber, 
 when removed from the plaster, needs only the brush wheel 
 to finish it. To accomplish this, first saturate the model 
 with water, then dip it in a vessel of clean melted base-plate 
 wax, and lift it out in such a way as to allow the wax to 
 flow oft' easily. I find that it is best to dip the back of the 
 model downward. The surface of the wax in the vessel 
 should be free from bubbles. If the first dip should not se- 
 cure a smooth surface, the wax may be peeled oft', and the 
 process repeated till it is satisfactory. After which repeat 
 the dipping process till the deposit has the desired thickness. 
 It is well, however, to leave it thinner than the desired plate 
 till after the set is articulated, then after waxing up care- 
 fully, so that one more dip will give the desired finish to the 
 base-plate, dip it in water so that the teeth shall be wet be- 
 fore immersing it in the melted Avax. The wax deposited on 
 the teeth will peel off" easily. Cool the wax, and, with a 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 109 
 
 sharp instrument, trim around the teeth and the edges of the 
 hase-plate, and it is ready for the flask. With a little care 
 the surface of the hase-plate may he made as smooth as glass, 
 and the lahor of finishing the rubber will be much reduced. 
 A little practice in dipping a model will give one all the 
 skill that is necessary to perform the work quickly and 
 easily. — A. N". Dick, in Items op Interest. 
 
 169. To Remove Teeth From Plate. — To remove teeth 
 from a rubber plate, lay it teeth down on a piece of asbestos 
 board, then hold the board over a flame till the rubber 
 softens. — Odontological Journal. 
 
 170. Manilla Paper for Swaging. — Thin manilla tissue 
 wrapping paper, about two thicknesses, will be found to an- 
 swer admirably in causing a metal plate to leave the lead 
 counter die after swaging, and if used in from four to six 
 folds an extra counter die will be unnecessary, its use pro- 
 ducing a sharp definition not excelled by either tin or Bab- 
 bitt metal. — Ex. 
 
 171. Three Rules for Articulation. — Three rules cover 
 essentially the ground. Never allow pressure on the six an- 
 terior teeth ; never, in full upper plates, allow the pressure 
 to be greater on one side than the other ; never allow a second 
 or third lower molar which has projected forward so that its 
 face shows to meet an artiflcial tooth at that angle, as it will 
 surely crowd forward the upper plate, the same as the meet- 
 ing of the anterior teeth. 
 
 As a rule, a full lower plate is more comfortable and 
 useful than a partial, because the pressure is distributed 
 equally over the whole jaw. — Dr. L. P. Haskell, in Office and 
 Laboratory. 
 
 172. Strengthening Rubber Plates. — After the flask 
 is separated, cut a piece of rolled gold wire, No. 60, to reach 
 the bicuspids on either side, indent slightly with plate 
 shears, and bend so it will lay on top of pins of the anterior 
 
110 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 teeth, then soft-solder the wire to the camins if single teeth 
 are used, or to the bicuspid blocks if gum teeth ; also, to the 
 central incisor pins if thought necessary. The wire can be 
 used in any place where there is a weak point ; for instance, 
 when there is but one tooth, a piece of the wire should be 
 bent to fit closely to the model, and soldered to the pins of 
 the teeth. I anneal the wire and brighten it with powdered 
 pumice-stone before using. Different sizes of wire, 60 to 70, 
 to be had of jewelers. — J, M. Ovenshire, in Dental Mirror. 
 
 173. Oil for Flasking. — It is a useless waste of time 
 :and material to varnish and oil a plaster investment, besides, 
 I am sure in almost every case where rubber crawls away 
 from the teeth or pins, during vulcanizing, it is always trace- 
 :able to the presence of oil. It does not matter if but little 
 is used in the flasking ; this little will reach out and cover a 
 ^ood deal of surface, when the flask is heated for closing. 
 "When the lower half of the flask is filled, set, and made 
 smooth, wet a small brush in soft water, rub it on a cake of 
 of castile soap till lathered ; coat the plaster investment with 
 the soap ; put on the top half of the flask, pour as usual. — 
 'Wm. H. Steele, D.D.S. 
 
 174. A New Molding Material. — A nice molding 
 material for making dies, casting plates, and various cast- 
 ings, can be made : Mix pumice-stone with a suitable quan- 
 tity of glycerin, this material is always ready for use and 
 will stand the heat of melted steel. — H. P. Osborne, D.D.S. 
 
 175. Useful Hints on Rubber Plates. — Sometimes, par- 
 ticularly with a partial rubber denture, the plate will be as 
 snug as desirable part of the time, but sometimes very 
 loose. To avoid this, before casting your model make the 
 grooves in the impression, caused by the ruge of the mouth, 
 much larger, as in some mouths these vary in size at inter- 
 vals. — I. Douglas, in Items of Interest. 
 
 176. Soldering Tubes and Nuts. — In soldering tubes 
 or nuts to receive screws to their attachment, chuck the end 
 
USEFUL HINTS. Ill 
 
 of your Icacl-pencil in the holes and solder ^vill be kept out. 
 — Western Journal. 
 
 177. Imperfections in Metal Dies. — To prevent imper- 
 fections or bubbles in the palatal portion of metallic dies, it 
 is not necessary to dry the mold after it is formed, or to use 
 more than ordinary precaution as to the heat of the metal. 
 I find the best result is obtained when the plaster model is 
 quite thick and the mold consequently deep. This is then 
 tipped forward, raising the back part of condyles to the high- 
 est point possible ; pouring the metal in at the front slowly, 
 and lowering the mold at the same time till the palatal 
 portion is covered, and the mold filled to the top. I have 
 advised the above in many cases, and have not yet seen a 
 failure. — F. E. Sprague, in Cosmos. 
 
 178. A Lathe "Drip." — Having tried several appli- 
 ances for keeping corundum wheels Avet, all of which were 
 more or less annoying, I hit on the following plan, which 
 may be of service to others: Take a Squibb ether can (there 
 are usuallj^ plenty of them lying about the office), and solder 
 to it, near the bottom, a tin tube, about one-quarter of an 
 inch in diameter; then perforate the can through the tube 
 with an old excavator, pointed so as to make a hole about 
 the size of a pin. Fill the tube lightly with absorbent cot- 
 ton or sponge, allowing it to protrude so as to rub against 
 the stone ; then fill the can with water and cork it with a 
 good, soft cork, and it is complete. AVhen it is tightly 
 corked there will be no flow ; loosen the cork, and the water 
 will flow, much or little, as you desire. Mine works very 
 nicely, and is always ready for use. Of course, the appliance 
 should have legs to raise it to the proper height. — A. Mors- 
 man, in Cosmos. 
 
 179. Bowl for Mixing Plaster. — A smooth glazed bowl 
 is best for mixing plaster. If some of the plaster dries in 
 the bowl, it will come oft' easilv when water is poured in. — 
 Items of Interest. 
 
112 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 180. Lower Gold Plates. — In making gold plates for 
 the lower jaw where one or more teeth remain, the following 
 plan may not be generally known : 
 
 We will suppose the case to be minns the bicuspids and 
 molars, the six front teeth remaining. Instead of cutting a 
 pattern in one piece, let there be two ; one to extend on one 
 side around in front to where the lirst bicuspid would be on 
 the opposite side, and vice versa for the other pattern. Use 
 1^0. 30 plate, and 20-karat gold looks the best, used with 
 the same fineness in solder. This will give a plate that can 
 be easily swaged. Swage separately with each half on a 
 good, sharp zinc die. Select one-half to go next the teeth, 
 and the other to lap over it. Drive the under one sharply 
 around and between the teetli with a softened nail, having 
 its point prepared for the purpose. Anneal and place both 
 on the zinc, and swage again. Now notice how nicely they 
 tit one to the other. Catch them with a bit of solder and 
 swage again. Then apply clean, creamy borax thoroughly 
 between the plates (and perhaps the best way is with a 
 camel's-hair pencil), then put on solder and run them 
 together. This will give a sharp, strong plate, and more 
 strength may be added by placing a gold wire (No. 18) at 
 the lower inner edge. It also relieves the sharpness. 
 
 Whether plate or rubber teeth be used, this, if finished 
 handsomely, will give a most desirable plate, providing the 
 minor details have received their due attention. — Theodore 
 Ledyard, in Archives. 
 
 181. Stamping Plates by Hydraulic Pressure. — A de- 
 scription of a case in hand will be the best means of giving 
 my method. In the present instance an impression was 
 taken with Stent's material, and' all the rest of the work was 
 done by my friend and assistant, Mr. Fred. Collett. The 
 impression was chilled with cold water, and sculptor's clay 
 was built up around the margins to the height of one-half 
 inch. A paper could have been wrapped around equally 
 well. The impression then was coated with a solution of 
 soap and water. In this impression, thus prepared, Spence 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 113 
 
 metal,* just before the point of solidification, was poured. 
 This Spence metal was chilled immediately on touching the 
 Stent's composition, so that all contraction took place from 
 the top of the center downward. 
 
 The small die thus made was then provided with three 
 legs made of pins heated and pressed in the metal. These 
 pins held it at just the required height, so that the die, being 
 placed in the middle of the iron ring in which the pressure 
 was to be given, stood at the height required for an additional 
 quantity of Spence metal to be poured in the concavity and 
 around this little die up to the required level. This die, 
 being quite cold, is covered with whiting, and a counter-die 
 of "Wood's fusible alloy f is poured over it. This fusible alloy 
 melts at a still lower temperature than Spence metal, and it 
 is poured over the male swage by using the heavy iron rino- 
 in which the counter-die must remain during the swao-ing 
 process. This first set of swages being completed, duplicates 
 are made, if required, by taking the impression of the male 
 die and repeating the process of casting the swages as often 
 as may be required. 
 
 The Spence metal is exceedingly brittle, so nothing but 
 steady pressure must be permitted. If it should be found 
 necessary to strike blows on the swage, others must be made 
 of some other material. In the present instance a Bab- 
 bitt's metal swage with a tin counter-die w^as made on 
 which to break up the plate. The flat plate may be placed 
 between the dies with a bit of glove-kid or rubber-dam 
 between the plate and the counter-die, and the flask contain- 
 ing it placed directly in the press. The screw at the top of 
 the press being turned down to give such pressure as is pos- 
 sible from above, the second screw connected with the plunger 
 at the side is then gradually turned inward by means of the 
 large driving-wheel. The manometer is watched, as indi- 
 
 *This substance is sulphur and iron. It melts at about the boiling- point of water, 
 and in process of cooling a stage is reached, just before solidification takes place, at 
 which the mass becomes exceedingly fluid. At this stage it can be poured in an impres- 
 sion of plaster, or even Stent's composition. 
 
 t Composed of fifteen parts of bismuth, eight of lead, four of tin, and three of cad- 
 mium. This forms a silvery-white, granular alloy, which becomes soft at 135° F. = 570 
 C, and fuses at about 145° F. = 63° C. 
 
114 
 
 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 eating the amount of pressure that is being given; four 
 hundred pounds to the square centimetre is generally enough, 
 though I have as an experiment run it up to twelve hundred. 
 
 During the swaging process the plate should he fre- 
 quently annealed. When filially down, close to the duplicate 
 swao-es, it receives its last trimming, its last annealing, and 
 is then put on the original die that was made directly from the 
 impression. When taken from the press after this final pres- 
 sure, the fit is more perfect than any struck swages can make it. 
 
 For suction plates it is generally necessary to scrape the 
 center of the plaster impression and not to put in an air- 
 chamber, the fit of the hydraulic press plates seeming to be 
 as o-ood as the impressions from which they are made. — Dr. 
 E. A. Bogue, in International Journal. 
 
 182. Self-closing Flask Clamps. — JSTearly every oflice 
 has one or more of these useless appliances standing around, 
 representing from two to five dollars' worth of misplaced con- 
 fidence. The self-closing flask press, for closing the flask 
 either by steam pressure or by spring pressure, is a failure. 
 The most reliable machine for the purpose is the direct pres- 
 sure screw clamp, to be used with the flask in a water bath. — 
 Wm. H. Steele. 
 
 183. To Make a Plate Hold. — The cut will show how 
 I managed a ease in a mouth which presented difiiculties in 
 the way of holding a 
 plate. The case was that 
 of a patient fifty-five 
 years old, whose teeth 
 had been out for years 
 That part of the mouth 
 shown at A was a perfect 
 callus. Over this part 
 on the cast I laid four 
 sheets of tin, so that 
 when removed it would prevent a bearing on the callus, with 
 chambers on the sides and back part of the plate, as shown 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 115 
 
 in cut. I made a failure three times, but finally succeeded 
 in this way in getting a good, snug-holding plate. This was 
 eight years ago. — S. M. Oviatt, D.D.S., in Cosmos. 
 
 184. Colored Soap Suds for Impressions. — Colored 
 soap suds can be easily made by adding a little red analine 
 dye to the water used in making the lather. A very convenient 
 arrangement is to take a beer mug and place a piece of cas- 
 tile soap in it and use an ordinary lather brush ; brush the 
 impression with the soap suds, let stand a few minutes, 
 then wash oiF. This will give a smooth pink surface. Also 
 treat the model with the suds, which will give it a smooth 
 colored exterior. — H. 
 
 185. Investment for Soldering. — In using sand and 
 plaster to invest soldering cases, I find three of sand and 
 one of plaster does better than if less sand be used ; it is not 
 so liable to crack and warp, especially if the plaster be very 
 coarse and the sand sharp. It is only necessary to have 
 sufficient plaster to hold the particles of sand together. 
 More than this is too much and leads to cracking. — Theo. 
 Ledyard. 
 
 186. To Repair Soldering Investment. — Occasionally, 
 in soldering, a portion of our investment breaks off, exposing 
 a part of a tooth. "We can ill afibrd the time to patch the 
 break and wait for the plaster to harden again. The exposed 
 portion of the porcelain may be perfectly protected by cover- 
 ing it with a thick paste of chalk and water. This mixture 
 may also be used to fasten small pieces of gold to the solder- 
 block while soldering. — B. A. R. Ottolengui, in Interna- 
 tional. 
 
 187. Englarging the Holes in Artificial Teeth. — I fre- 
 quently find it convenient to alter the shape of the holes in 
 pivot and porcelain teeth. At first I used a piece of copper 
 
Il6 DEPARTMENT B, 
 
 wire with emery-powder, getting the idea from the SI 
 glass-cutters. Now, however, I find that the time re- 
 quired can be reduced to one-third by using a piece of 
 hardened steel of an oval, square, or half-round shape 
 (see illustration), made to revolve rapidly in the oflB.ce 
 lathe, and kept covered with coarse corundum moistened 
 with glycerin. To show how rapidly this will cut, it is 
 only necessary to say that a common Bonwill crown can 
 have the hole enlarged enough to admit of two pins as 
 for a bicuspid in ten minutes. — "W. II. Rollins, in Cosmos. 
 
 188. To Prevent Modeling Compound from Sticking 
 to the Teeth. — In taking impressions, take a large pellet of 
 cotton, dip it in glycerin and thoroughly oil the teeth ; then 
 take impression before the patient closes the mouth. — Abiel 
 Bowen, Medina, N. Y. 
 
 189. To Renew Plaster. — Don't throw away your old 
 plaster that has become air-slacked and slow setting. Pat it 
 in a pan, and put in the oven or over a slow fire, stirring it 
 thoroughly till heated all through ; put in a can, cover air- 
 tight. Plaster treated in this way will often be stronger 
 and quicker setting than when first received from the de- 
 pot.— Wm. H. Steele. 
 
 190. Clean Joints. — I have seen many inquiries and 
 suggestions in our journals in regard to making sightless 
 joints in putting up sets of section teeth on rubber, or when 
 rubber is used as an attachment, but in all I have never seen 
 any suggestion to the following method, which I have adopted 
 with success, and give for the benefit of the readers of the 
 Archives : When the case is flasked and ready for packing, I 
 first cover each joint with a strip of No. 30 gold foil, one- 
 fourth of an inch in width, burnishing it down evenly, and 
 holding it in position with a small piece of pink rubber. I 
 then pack as usual, and find, after vulcanizing, the joints 
 perfectly clean, as no rubber can be forced through the gold 
 strips in them. — Dr. B. Q, Stevens, in Archives. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 117 
 
 191. Resetting Pinless Teeth on Gold Plate. — Occa- 
 sionally a gold plate is brought to us with a tooth broken 
 off, the pins, of course, remaining in the backing. It may 
 be that a good match cannot be found, or you may be in a 
 hurry, so that you wish the same tooth could be used. Pro- 
 ceed as follows : Boil the tooth in acid, to get the stump of 
 the pins remaining as clean as possible ; invest it as for a 
 backing ; lay a bit of pure gold over each broken pin, and 
 point a fine iiame with the blow-pipe till a tiny gold ball is 
 made on each broken pin. These may be filed up, and will 
 be sufficiently long to allow backing the teeth, using plati- 
 num foil and gold of a lower karat. — Dr. B. A. R. Ottolengui, 
 in International Journal. 
 
 192. Hint on Sandpapering Plates. — Cut a piece of 
 felt the size of your paper disks, and use them together to 
 sandpaper a plate. You will be surprised at the result. — 
 H. H. Buck. 
 
 193. Vulcanite and Gelluloid Combined. — When it is 
 desirable to employ plain teeth placed on the natural gum 
 in front partial pieces, and at the same time to take advan- 
 tage of the clasping qualities of vulcanite, the objection to 
 such a combination which lies in the unnatural appearance 
 of the interdental spaces may be overcome by simply using 
 a little celluloid in these spaces ; select some of the right 
 pinkness ; run wax in the spaces, continuing it in conformity 
 with the natural interdental gum of the adjoining teeth, 
 allowing no wax on the palatal surface of the plate ; invest 
 in flask, separate, remove wax, and also cut away the vul- 
 canite from between the teeth, so as to form a " dove-tail " 
 to retain the celluloid ; heat, etc., as usual. If it is desired 
 that the celluloid gum sink slightly in the natural mem- 
 brane, this may be best produced by paring the original 
 model so that the wax, rubber, and celluloid will each, in 
 turn, assume the desired shape. — S. J. S., in Cosmos. 
 
 194. A Method of Flasking. — How to flask a full upper 
 and lower set, and two or three partial sets in one flask. 
 
118 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 Directions. — After having prepared the upper and lower sets 
 for the flask in the ordinary way, cut the lingual portion of 
 the lower set out somewhat like the letter U, also the pala- 
 tal portion of the upper set a very little ; then place one 
 condyle of the upper set as near as possible in the U-shaped 
 gap of the lower set. JSTow put them into the flask in this 
 position, so that the centrals of the upper-set point to or near 
 the top corner of the flask, and the centrals of the lower-set 
 point to the right lower corner of the flask ; then flask, let- 
 ting the plaster come up to the wax in the lower part of the 
 flask in the same manner as is usual with an ordinary full set. 
 The rest of the procedure is the same as in any other method. 
 
 An upper and lower partial set may be flasked by this 
 method, by allowing the plaster to come over the teeth, and 
 then proceeding as usual. 
 
 Slight fractures of partial sets, when the rubber can be 
 packed on with a hot knife, can be placed in the lid of the 
 same flask, while the plaster is soft. In this wa}'' four or 
 five cases may be vulcanized in one flask. A little practice 
 is required. — L. Arndt, D.D.S., in The Dental Practitioner. 
 
 195. To Mend a Rubber Plate.— Put a thin film of 
 wax over the broken surface of one piece, hold the parts . 
 above the flame of a small spirit lamp, and, when the wax is 
 melted, press the parts together, and cool a moment. This 
 forms a cement that holds the broken plate in perfect posi- 
 tion. The lingual surface may be strengthened with melted 
 wax, and a cast obtained in the usual way. — W. L. Reed. 
 
 196. Shellac for Felt Wheels and Cones. — How many 
 find their felt cones and wheels get out of shape, and wear 
 out and break in a short time ? If they are soaked in 
 shellac varnish that is about as thin as water, and then 
 allowed to dry thoroughly before being used, they will keep 
 their shape, and last a long time. This is specially advis- 
 able with the cones as they are very apt to break in two 
 before they are worn out. It is not so necessary for wheels. 
 — Dr. J. H. Beebee, in Items. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 119 
 
 197. Adding New Teeth to Old Plates.— Dry the 
 plate and stick on a piece of soft wax opposite where each 
 tooth is to be added. Replace the plate in the mouth. If 
 the case be one Avhere the teeth to be added are to replace 
 some which have been extracted, press the soft wax up over 
 the gum. This gives you an impression of the part with 
 the plate in place. "While the wax is still soft have the 
 patient close the mouth. This gives you an articulation 
 opposite where the teeth are to be added. While the mouth 
 is shut, see that the wax is not forced away from the gum 
 by the occlusion. Then with a pledget of cotton, dipped in 
 cold water, the wax can be hardened in a moment. You 
 may now dismiss the patient. Remove the plate and run 
 cast. As soon as hard, turn over, and run a little plaster in 
 the articulation, letting it extend to a couple of the teeth on 
 the plate. "When this is hard, lift off, and remove the wax. 
 The teeth may now be ground and articulated. This method 
 saves much time for patient and operator and ensures ac- 
 curacy, and may all be done by the laboratory assistant, ex- 
 cept the taking of the impression and articulation. — R. E. 
 Sparks, in Dominion Journal. 
 
 198. Rubber-dam in Closing Flasks. — In closing flasks, 
 either by simple pressure or by boiling, use rubber-dam wet 
 with soap water instead of muslin, and you will be delighted 
 with the result. — Geo. M. Merritt, in Items. 
 
 199- Cores for Casting Undercut Models. — To prepare 
 cores for undercuts of models, when making dies ; a good 
 method consists in thoroughly mixing common flour in the 
 proportion of about ten per cent, to ninety per cent of mold- 
 ing sand ; or, what is better, marble dust. This is first mixed 
 dry, and then, on being moistened with water somewhat 
 more freely than the sand alone is moistened, placed in the 
 undercuts, and while the model is being prepared the paste 
 has sufliciently hardened to be gently removed and placed in 
 an oven, or otherwise exposed to gentle heat. When these 
 cores are dry they can be safely handled, and on withdrawing 
 
120 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 the model they can be readily replaced in their position. — 
 Dental Review. 
 
 200. Starting Amalgam in DifBcult Cavities. — Fillings 
 in cavities difficult of access can be nicely started by saturat- 
 ing a pellet of cotton with sandarac varnish and, touching 
 to a piece of amalgam, carry it in the cavity, wipe off the 
 surface with alcohol, condense with pellet of cotton or bibu- 
 lous paper and continue as desired. — Off. and Lab. 
 
 201. What an Impression Should Embrace. — ^The nec- 
 essary condition to be obtained in the adaptation of the den- 
 ture to the tissues, is to have it embrace the alveolar ridge 
 and extend backward on the palate to an extent that the 
 entire periphery will impinge on and slightly displace lax 
 soft tissue. This can only be definitely accomplished by 
 securing an accurate impression of the surfaces of these lax 
 soft tissues, which calls for an impression of more of the 
 surface of the mouth than it is ordinarily considered neces- 
 sary to obtain. 
 
 It is important that the impression material should pass 
 upward between the alveolar ridge and the lip and cheeks to 
 the greatest extent possible, without putting the lip and 
 cheeks on more than a slight tension. It must be carried 
 accurately to the extreme height of the space at the outer 
 side of the tuberosity, when such a space exists; and it 
 should extend on the tissue posterior to the tuberosity for a 
 short distance, and on the soft palate for a sufficient distance 
 to allow of locating on the model ; the line of attachment of 
 the soft palate to the posterior margin of the hard palate. 
 — W. B. Ames, in Review. 
 
 202. Engraving the Ruge. — The manner of producing 
 the ruge on the surface of an artificial denture is as follows : 
 First take off the wax from the flasked case, then draw lines 
 on the part of the investment which is to be at the lingual 
 aspect of the roof of the mouth when the cover and the receiver 
 of the flask fit together, and engrave the lines with a suitable 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 
 
 121 
 
 knife, then fill in the rubber, and vulcanize. Thus we can 
 get the projections as we desire.— I chigoro Nakahara (Japan), 
 in Cosmos. 
 
 203. Copying Models. — In copying a model in sand or 
 marble dust, when it is difficult to remove it and leave a 
 perfect impression on account of undercuts, or any other rea- 
 son. Dr. A. W. Freeman recommends covering the model with 
 heavy tin foil. The model can then readily be withdrawn, 
 leaving the foil in the sand or marble dust, and thus enabling 
 one to secure a good copy. — The Dental Review. We have 
 •done this long ago, often, and know it to be a good plan.— 
 Ed. in Office and Laboratory. 
 
 204. Combination Celluloid Aluminum Plate.— Take 
 the impression ; make the cast and metal die as usual. Make 
 the die and counter in such shape as to leave a depressed mar- 
 gin, with raised rim aboutone-quarter inch from outside edges 
 ■of the alveolar ridge of the plate. JSTow cut the aluminum 
 for plate one-quarter inch larger than the pattern all around, 
 -except at the posterior margin. In swaging keep well an- 
 nealed and gradually turn the gum margin rim as shown in 
 the cut (1 and 1). When the plate is swaged, cut an alum- 
 inum collar (2 and 2). Put it 
 on the die and swage so it will 
 fit the plate, and reach close 
 up to the palatine surfaces of 
 the.teeth (when mounted) ; fit 
 to place and solder. ISText 
 take the bite, place in articu- 
 lator and mount the teeth on 
 wax as usual. Invest in a 
 large size celluloid flask ; 
 when fully set, open and wash 
 out the wax; take a lower 
 celluloid blank, of as near the 
 
 size as possible, and trim it with lathe bur till about right 
 to fill the place of the wax gums. Put in place, and care- 
 
 t^.2 
 
122 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 fully close in a dry or moist air celluloid machine. When 
 cool, open up and finish as usual. In setting the teeth, if the 
 collar (2 and 2) should interfere, trim away with hur or file 
 to let the teeth go to place. This method gives a beautiful 
 aluminum plate, with just sufficient celluloid for gums and 
 attachments ; the rim and collar (1 and 2) firmly holding 
 the celluloid edges to place ; when the ridge — that part of 
 the plate between the collar and rim — is properly roughened 
 it is impossible to remove the celluloid or rubber attachments 
 from the metal plate. This plate can be made with vulcan- 
 ite base and pink rubber giim facings, or the swaged base- 
 plate can be made of gold, platinum or silver. — William H. 
 Steele, in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 205. Sandpapering Plates. — An excellent device for 
 holding the sandpaper when smoothing off" the rubber plate 
 is a piece of rubber-tubing about an inch and a half long and 
 three-eighths of an inch thick, the sandpaper rolled around 
 the tubing. The rubber holds the sandpaper with just 
 sufiicient firmness, and allows the paper to fit and accommo- 
 date itself to the contour and depressions, or, to use a mining 
 phrase ; dips, spurs and angles to a nicety. — L. A. Teagu'e^ 
 in Pacific Coast Dental. 
 
 206. Second Soldering. — When it is desired to solder 
 a piece that has been soldered in another place, most gold 
 workers consider it necessary to use a softer solder, which 
 shall flow at a lower temperature than that first used, that 
 the unsoldering of the previous work may be avoided. This 
 is needless, if the solder used in the second case be placed in 
 mercury till the surface is slightly amalgamated. If it be 
 then used it will fiow very readily, while the appearance of 
 the finished piece is not injured, as the mercury is sublimated 
 in the heating, leaving the solder as it originally was. — Bar- 
 rett, in Office and Laboratory. 
 
 207. Practical Cheoplastic Plate. — Proceed as usual 
 with impression ; model may be poured of plaster, but plas- 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 123 
 
 ter with asbestos or whiting is safe. To this fit accurately a 
 piece of piano wire, No. 14 or ISTo. 16, standard gage, along 
 the arch, so as to leave the arch about opposite the first 
 molar; after fitting this wire to the arch, bend each end 
 inward at right angles with the body of the wire ; then about 
 one-quarter inch from first bend make a second, by bending 
 wires upward, forming an obtuse angle. This is done so that 
 the wire will be held firmly in the plaster of the upper half 
 of the flask ; take a file and make a notch on each side of 
 the wire in the first bend of each end ; this is done so that 
 the wire will break in the proper place and easily, when 
 wanted ; sandpaper the wire, to remove all dirt from surface, 
 and dip first into muriate of zinc, then into melted tin ; this 
 is done so that the metals used for the plate will flow along 
 and become attached to the wire. The wire prepared, cover 
 the model to just the extent that you wish the plate to cover 
 the ridge when done. It is now necessary to decide whether 
 to use a solid plate of metal or a rubber attachment. In 
 nearly all cases, if full lower, and if partials, with much 
 absorption, I use the latter, and have taken such a case for 
 description. 
 
 "Warm the tinned wire, and press in place ; cover the 
 scar with new wax ; the case is now ready to flask. For 
 this I find the Watt's flask most convenient. In flasking,. 
 care must be used to have sufiicient plaster under the ends 
 of the wire to hold them firm, and without breaking, in the 
 upper part of flask. With sharp knife make a groove around 
 the edge of plate in upper part of flask, just where edge of 
 rubber will finish to ; this is done so as to furnish a more 
 secure attachment for the rubber, and a larger surface of 
 metal next to the mouth. 
 
 For a more secure attachment, especially in full cases, I 
 make several pits, about one-half inch deep in full cases, in 
 upper part of flask, over the ridge ; these can be made with 
 an old excavator sharpened like a screw-driver. Now cut 
 a gate from each angle ; this I make ample, as it can do no 
 harm, and proves a great convenience. 
 
 The two halves of flask are now dried separately in a 
 
124 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 temperature that will not calcine the plaster ; the oven of an 
 ordinary heating stove is a convenient place. When a mirror 
 held over a warm flask will not gather the slightest moisture, 
 they will do to pour. When dry, the surface of the model 
 should be rubbed with a piece of base plate wax, to smooth 
 the surface and also act as a flux for the metal. The mold 
 should be warm, and the metal but little above melting point 
 when pouring; it should be cooled slowly, to obtain a 
 smooth casting. After separating, the wire should be broken 
 ofl:' with the finger. It will break just below the surface, if 
 the notches were made as described. The small hole where 
 wire is broken off is to be filled with same metal as that of 
 which the plate is made, with a soldering copper (not tinned). 
 To do this, moisten the surface of plate about the hole with 
 H C^ or chlorid of zinc, and place a piece of metal over it 
 and melt in place with warm copper. iTow, with a file, 
 smooth off plate in a rough form, and fit to mouth ; after fit- 
 ting, take the antagonism, using plate you have just made 
 as a base plate, then proceed as usual with rubber attachment. 
 Should you wish to make a solid plate after fitting the wire, 
 proceed as usual with cheoplastic plates, excepting that after 
 the case is on the articulator the wire is to be put in place 
 before the teeth are ground. Any of the alloys of tin in use 
 may be used for construction of this plate. While I have 
 tried them all, I like fifteen parts silver to eighty-five 
 of tin, though the addition of three per cent of bismuth 
 makes a good plate. — C. W. Staples, D.D.S., in Ohio Dental 
 Journal. 
 
 208. Holding a Broken Plate. — To hold in place the 
 broken pieces of a denture preparatory to mending, fill a 
 lower impression cup with softened modeling compound as 
 to take an impression. Press the teeth of plate in this, 
 and bring the edges of the fracture together accurately. 
 When the compound has become hard, dip the plate in 
 water, and fill as when making a model. As soon as the 
 plaster is hard soften the compound and remove it, and pro- 
 ceed as the case requires. — W. D. Tickner, in Items. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. • 125 
 
 209. English Pinless Teeth on Rubber. — Dr. H. C 
 Boyd uses these teeth with rubber, running gold pins through 
 the holes in the teeth, allowing the ends to project far enough 
 to solder a continuous band to the ends of the pins, investing 
 in plaster and asbestos for soldering. The teeth are then 
 waxed up and the piece invested, well vulcanized as usual, 
 making a strong but not cumbersome piece. — Items of 
 Interest. 
 
 210. For Leaking Vulcanizers. — To prevent leakage 
 of vulcanizers, take plaster of Paris, mix it thin and run it 
 around the inside of the cover, and while soft screw it to 
 place, letting it stand a short time before putting over the 
 heat. — Dr. E. A. Schillinger, in Items. 
 
 ^» 
 
 211. Sandpaper Mandrel for Plates. — Take a quarts 
 
 taper cork ; trim up in cone shape on the lathe ; make a slit 
 through apical end of cone, half-way down, with a dental saw ; 
 insert in this a piece of sandpaper a little wider than the 
 opening; bend back at one end for retention, and you have a 
 hand sandpaper for use on rubber plates which conforms 
 with the depressions and works admirably. — Dr. Barnes. • 
 
 212. Teeth Changing Color in Soldering. — The chang- 
 ing of color in solderino- teeth is due to not knowins; how to 
 use the blow-pipe properly. We will find that every man 
 who is not accustomed to the use of the blow-pipe puts on a 
 fine flame blow-pipe, because he is afraid. When you use the 
 blow-pipe for the full force, heat it till it flows of itself, 
 then you need not be afraid of the teeth changing color. 
 The changing of color is because you put too much strain on 
 a certain place. — Dr. Nels l^elson, in Review. 
 
 *213. Soldering "Without Investment. — I observe in the 
 article by Dr. Essig, in the April number of the Dental Cos- 
 mos^ that he speaks of investing bands for the purpose of 
 soldering thereon hooks and short tubes. With me there is 
 a much easier and simpler plan. I join all bands in the mak- 
 ing with high-grade solder — 20 or 22k. To attach a hook 
 
126 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 or tube to a band, first hold the latter with a pair of mod- 
 erately thick pliers at the point of union. That this may 
 be kept below melting point and from danger of unjointing, 
 place a little flux and 18k. (or lower) solder on the spot 
 where attachment is to be made, and melt with a fine flame 
 of the blow-pipe. If a bit of tubing is to be placed, take a 
 piece of M'ire six or eight inches long, or any slender instru- 
 ment, the point of which will fit within, having this covered 
 with a thin coating of a thin mixture of whiting (or rouge) 
 with water, to prevent a flow of solder inside the tube or 
 possible sticking to the wire or point which we are to use 
 as a holder in making the attachment. . Il^ow, with a rea- 
 sonably steady hand, holding the band as before with 
 pliers, the tube, fluxed on the joint side, may be quickly and 
 accurately fastened to the band over a small gas flame ; a 
 piece of wire may be attached in the same manner, leaving 
 it long enough to serve for its own handle, and cutting off to 
 proper length after soldering, or the hook may be held with 
 jewelers' fine pliers. 
 
 Another method, and a good one, is to punch a hole in 
 the band just large enough for the close insertion of the end 
 of the wire, which should be fluxed, when it may be securely 
 fastened with a bit of solder. This is an excellent way to 
 attach screws of the '" Angle " jackscrew sort. 
 
 Speaking of this reminds me that the so-called " pipes " 
 of the " Angle set " are identical with those kept in stock 
 by the wholesale jewelers under the name of "joint wire," in 
 three or more sizes, and sold at about a cent an inch, German 
 silver. The large size is available for jackscrew and traction 
 purposes, with No. 18 gage wire screws ; the smaller for use 
 in connection with spring wire for rotating teeth in mal-tort. 
 This "joint wire " is also available for tubular posts in crown- 
 work, — being very strong and made with absolute accuracy. 
 — Garrett iN^ewkirk, in Cosmos. 
 
 214. Retaining Lower Plates with Gold Posts. — 
 
 Extract the teeth, being very careful not to break the labial 
 or buccal plates of the alveolar process, for if this should 
 
USEFDL HINTS. 127 
 
 happen you will ultimately have shorter pins than where 
 the process is preserved in its entirety. ISText make pivots 
 of gold (pivot wire), a trifle shorter than the roots of the ex- 
 tracted teeth, which have been kept for measurement. The 
 following day take the impression, modeling your case in 
 wax, and see that all is right after the bite has been prop- 
 erly adjusted ; then add the two gold pins, one on each side 
 where most suitable, that they may enter, not the center of 
 the sockets (as I said in my first paper), but rather toward 
 the posterior walls of the sockets of two of the extracted 
 teeth — the first bicuspids or canines are the most suitable. 
 The pins should be as long as possible, because if too short 
 they cause irritation, and, consequently, absorption. Having 
 fixed the pins to the wax denture, again try in the mouth, 
 to make sure the pins do not hurt, and that they run paral- 
 lel to each other ; then cut a slit in the model wide enough 
 not to disturb them, fasten them with plaster, and proceed 
 to vulcanize in the ordinary way. 
 
 When repairing a denture with pins attached, place a 
 small hickory pin in each of the holes in the jaw. These 
 can easily be removed, either by yourself, when replacing 
 the denture, or by the ]3atient, if it is sent home. 
 
 You will notice particularly that absorption does not 
 take place so rapidly when you adopt this method, as it keeps 
 the denture steadily in position ; and, as you know, wherever 
 there is friction there is always more absorption. — W". Dall, 
 in Jour. British Asso. 
 
 215. To Obtain a Correct Articulation. — It is not only 
 essential, but absolutely necessary, that we should have a 
 perfectly natural close of the mouth, and a correct articula- 
 tion, when constructing an artificial denture ; otherwise it 
 will be worse than useless to the wearer. It is almost im- 
 possible to get a natural close of the mouth if one depends 
 on a first bite (or any number of bites) and wax rims only. 
 I have followed the method given here for ten years with- 
 out failure. For illustration : We will take a full upper. 
 Get a perfect impression ; make a cast and pattern plate, as 
 
128 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 usual ; try the plate in the mouth, and trim till it fits easily 
 to place ; remove and put on it a rim of softened wax ; have 
 just sufficient to receive the remaining natural lower teeth. 
 Put the plate and wax in the mouth ; have the patient throw 
 back the head, swallow, and close the teeth in the wax ; 
 remove the bite, pour the teeth, and mount in an articulator ; 
 that will allow of the bite being changed in all directions ; 
 when the plaster is set, open up and remove the wax ; now 
 mount the six anterior teeth in the correct positions, and try 
 in the mouth ; have the patient laugh, talk, and smile, get- 
 ting the different expressions ; if the teeth are not correctly 
 mounted, reset and try till they are right. Now build up 
 with wax on each side where the lower bicuspids will strike, 
 also extending behind the upper cuspids, so the lower cus- 
 pids will touch it ; build the wax high enough, so the lower 
 bicuspids will bed the cusps in w^hen the mouth is closed ; 
 smooth the top, and put in the mouth. After the plate has 
 been in position a few minutes, tell the patient to swallow, 
 at the same time gently close the mouth till the lower ones 
 dent in the wax ; remove the plate and put it on the cast. 
 Now close the articulator carefully ; if the lower bicuspids 
 and cuspids close exactly in their proper places in the wax 
 there is no need of a change, but if they do not, try the plate 
 in the mouth till sure of having corrected the bite ; then . 
 loosen the set screws of the articulator, adjust the plaster 
 teeth in their proper places in the wax, and tighten the 
 screws.— Wm. H. Steele, in Items. 
 
 216. Clicking of Artificial Teeth. — Clicking and rattling 
 of full sets of artificial teeth is caused by poor articulation, 
 by ill-fitting plates, and by the teeth being too long. In 
 nearly all full sets, when first tried in mouth, the molars and 
 bicuspids are found to be too long ; and to bring the incisors 
 near enough, the cusps are ground, making them flat and 
 smooth, with no indentations, thus allowing them to slide 
 about. To prevent this, preserve the cusps or points un- 
 ground, thus allowing them to interlock, and, therefore, less 
 liable to " clatter." Another great benefit of this method is. 
 
USEFUL IIII^TS. 129 
 
 that uneven surfaces coming together cut or divide food 
 better. — A. A. Hazeltine. 
 
 217. To Prevent Plaster from Adhering to Flask. — 
 Dr. A. W. Buckland paints the inner surface of flasks for 
 vulcanite work with a solution of whiting, which allows the 
 plaster to be removed easily and protects the flask from cor- 
 rosion. 
 
 218. Soldering Bands to Plates. — A great saving of 
 time iseflfected by using casting sand, as an embedding ma- 
 terial, instead of sand and plaster. It is also claimed for this 
 that the relative position of the band to the plate is better 
 maintained. Mix your sand with water to the consistency 
 of cream ; place the plate, with band waxed to it, on a pum- 
 ice or asbestos block ; drop the sand around band, and a little 
 to fix plate, much as you would with plaster and sand. The 
 asbestos soaks up the water, so that the sand "sets" almost 
 at once. Now warm up the sand. This is most important. 
 When that is warm, burn the wax off ; then borax and solder. 
 ■ — British Journal Dental Science. 
 
 219. To Make Strong Partials. — I have a suggestion 
 to make about partial dentures. It is assumed that anybody 
 can make a rubber plate, and it seems like wasting time to 
 talk very much of what we should do in the manufacture of 
 partial dentures of rubber. I adhere to a few general prin- 
 ciples, one o'f which is, I always use plain teeth, when pos- 
 sible. In partial plates of gold, I have been very much 
 bothered in years past about the teeth breaking off. The 
 correction of that difficulty is an excuse for my talking at 
 this time. I make the teeth, as I would make a dummy in 
 a bridge case. I select porcelain facing the same as I use in 
 brido-e-work, then I select an artificial tooth, for making 
 solid gold cusps. You will find the cusps of natural teeth 
 are so pronounced that they are not practical to use ; but 
 take an artificial tooth and produce a solid gold cusp, back 
 up your facing, and grind it to place on the model, and then 
 
130 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 set it against your gold cusj). Invest it and fill the space 
 behind as you would a dummy, grind again up to your plate 
 and solder ; your metal will never break, and it will be a 
 beautiful case. There is no danger of the porcelain break- 
 ing off. — Dr. E. J. Perry, in Review. 
 
 '220. Flask Bolts. — Bo not try to economize by using old 
 worn-out, or gummed-up flask bolts. Many porous plates, 
 faulty articulations, etc., are caused in this way. — Wm. II. 
 Steele. 
 
 221. Flask Heater. — A good rubber heater is easily 
 constructed by taking a shallow, round tin pan and soldering 
 a cover on it, leaving a water space of less than an inch ; 
 through this top make a round hole, to which a short tin 
 tube is soldered for the escape of steam. 
 
 It will keep your rubber warm sufficiently for packing 
 in the flask much longer than on a disk of tin, and there is 
 no danger of burning it either. — "W. "W. Davisson, in Items. 
 
 222. Aluminum Hints. — I agree with Dr. Haskell, 
 that aluminum is an excellent substitute for rubber ; and my 
 experience proves it to be far superior, in every way, for 
 either full or partial dentures. 
 
 The aluminum plate used must be absolutely pure, and 
 must be worked so as to keep it pure during the entire pro- 
 cess. 
 
 If the plate contains the slightest traces of iron, or 
 silica, it is unfit for dental purposes. The die should be 
 covered with thin, tough India tissue, during the process of 
 swaging, and a couple of thicknesses folded over the plate, 
 to keep it from coming in contact with the metal of the 
 counter. 
 
 Do not use salt, or anything of the kind in the invest- 
 ment ; and do not have zinc in the boiler when vulcanizing 
 the rubber attachments. — Wm. H. Steele, in Ohio Dental 
 Journal. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 131 
 
 223. Resetting Pins in Artificial Teeth.— Teeth or 
 blocks that have broken off from plates, and the pins remain 
 in the rubber, can be used again as follows : Remove the old 
 pins from the plate, and if they are perfect use them ; if not, 
 select from your stock of old pins the ones needed (save up all 
 old pins for this purpose), without flaws, and with good heads. 
 With a small diamond drill, deepen the holes a trifle, where 
 the old pins broke out. Wax the new ones in position, in- 
 vest in asbestos cement and plaster, or marble dust and 
 plaster ; remove the wax. Select some small pieces of opaque 
 glass as near the tooth shade as possible, and fuse around 
 the pins with blow-pipe.-r-Wm. H. Steele. 
 
 224. Something New in Rubber Plates.— One of the 
 features introduced as a novelty, at the late meeting of the 
 Mad River Valley Dental Society, was a method of making 
 vulcanite plates without the teeth attached ; in other words, 
 vulcanizing the rubber on the plaster model, using the plate 
 or plates thus obtained instead of a wax base-plate for secur- 
 ing a bite, and finally attaching the teeth by a second process 
 of vulcanizing. The idea is original, we believe, with Dr. 
 Bradley, of Dayton, Ohio. The advantages claimed for the 
 method are such as apply to swaged metallic plates, viz. : 
 Greater accuracy in securing a " bite " in diflacult cases ; the 
 opportunity of determining at an early stage of the operation 
 whether a good fit has been secured ; also the advantage of 
 allowing the patient to wear and accustom himself to the 
 plate before the teeth are attached. Dr. Bradley thinks the 
 method of special advantage in all partial lower cases. The 
 narrow ruT^ber band at the lingual base of lower anterior 
 teeth may be strengthened by cutting a groove with a fissure 
 or wheel-bur, fitting in this a brass wire, and vulcanizing 
 rubber over it. For attaching the teeth, the surface of the 
 plate is treated with a solution of persulfid of carbon, 
 after which, the teeth being in position, more rubber is 
 applied, and the piece again vulcanized. 
 
 Dr. Adams, of Dayton, stated to the Society that the 
 packing of the rubber, when the plate is first made, may be 
 
132 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 done as ordinarily, with the fingers and a blunt burnisher, 
 after which the surface is covered with tin foil, the case in- 
 vested and vulcanized. He dispenses with the wax base- 
 plate, and consequently with the various steps of varnishing 
 and oiling, and a second pouring of plaster in the flask. To 
 be more explicit, the rubber strips are packed on the face 
 of the model before flasking at all, and then the model is in- 
 vested at one operation and immediately vulcanized. It will 
 be seen from this, that no pressure is brought to bear on 
 the rubber in closing the flask. — Medical and Dental Journal. 
 
 225. To Gild Artificial Teeth. — Any dentist can stain 
 and gild artificial teeth by using the proper tube colors, such 
 as are used by china decorators. A small furnace or even a 
 good blow-pipe may be used. — D. Y. Beacock, in Ohio Den- 
 tal Journal. 
 
 226. To Improve Shaw Engines. — Cut ofii" enough 
 from the tube of your Shaw engine (if you use one) to allow 
 the shaft to run, say three-quarters of an inch further 
 through, this will enable you to put on a small wire brush 
 to clean burs. — D. Y. Beacock, in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 227. Use of Cores in Casting Dies. — The making of 
 metal lowers where the incisors and canines are standing is 
 one of the most difficult things for a mechanic to do. There 
 is nearly always a great ridge standing out at the internal 
 alveolar edge which renders the casting of the model a very 
 difficult, in fact almost an impossible task. I for my part 
 always cast first what is called a core. Make the model as 
 smooth as possible, then take some thin tin foil and cover 
 the inside of the model, pressing the tin very closely to the 
 plaster ; then take flour and casting sand in the proportion 
 of 20 of flour to 100 of sand, mix these well together first 
 day ; then moisten the mixture slightly to about the same 
 extent one would ordinary casting sand, and press it well on 
 to the model with the fingers ; bury a piece of strong wire in 
 it, leaving a piece standing out at the back as a handle, if you 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 133 
 
 like, then fill up to the top of the undercut only ; then, when 
 this is firmly pressed together (leaving no bits overhanging), 
 draw it out- in the antero-posterior direction of the mouth ; 
 or, in other words, draw it out at the back, and then place 
 the core in the oven till it is baked perfectly hard and dry. 
 (Two or three should be made, in fact a fresh core should be 
 used for every zinc casting.) When dry, place the core 
 (having cut off the handle at the back perfectly level with 
 the sand) in the model, and then cast in the ordinary manner ; 
 the undercut will lift out the core when the model is taken 
 from the sand ; it can then be removed from the plaster from 
 behind and placed back in the sand, and then the zinc 
 poured in. The casting when cool will require very little 
 trimming, and the undercut will be found almost perfect. 
 This only requires a little practice to produce an excellent 
 model. — Dr. D. W. Parsons, in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 228. Jumping Solder. — In placing foil scraps in a crack 
 where you wish to span solder, use scrap mat gold, it will 
 stay where put and not ball but make a satisfactory joint. — 
 Dr. H. Prescott Wilcox. 
 
 229. New Method of Working Continuous Gum. — 
 
 After glancing at the older methods of supplying the deficien. 
 cies of teeth, Mr. Hooten said he had been engaged for years 
 at great personal labor in elaborating a system to make por- 
 celain teeth on gum substance which would neither shrink 
 nor crack in burning. His labors had resulted in the find- 
 ing of such a " body " which fulfilled these requirements. 
 The appliance which he had to describe was designed with 
 the object of molding the teeth and gum substance in a 
 manner which would be universally applicable to any form 
 of teeth or gum, and with a series of matrices of different 
 types of teeth it was possible to adapt the one to the other 
 by one process. The process was applicable alike to gold 
 plates and to vulcanite, without need of platinum; thus 
 partial or complete sets could be molded as easily as vul- 
 canite. 
 
184 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 (1) The molds or matrices are made by mounting sets 
 of teeth of various types and sizes in wax ; seven or eight 
 types being sufficient for ordinary work. These wax patterns 
 are not fitted to any gum outline, but are contoured to the 
 form of an upper or lower maxilla, and are made flat on 
 what would be the gum surface ; in other respects they are 
 exactly what a set of artificial teeth would be. These form 
 the " male " part of the mold, w^hich is cast in plaster of 
 Paris in two parts. These are trimmed in shape so as to 
 be reproduced in brass or gun metal, so as to be clamped to- 
 gether by pins, and on the upper surface a metal plate is cast 
 like the lid of a vulcanizing flask, except that it has three 
 countersunk holes and a central hole through which a screw 
 passes, and on this a winged nut works which clamps the 
 whole. This apparatus is thus worked : A universal articu- 
 lator is prejDared, and in it is fixed a zinc model of the case 
 to be treated ; on this is placed a wax bite of the dimensions 
 of the required plate. A soft brass plate is adapted around 
 outside of this, being molded to take the external outline. 
 The wax bite is removed and a wax counterpart of the inside 
 of the brass mold made. This is adapted to the zinc model 
 by heating. Before the zinc is heated the articulator is re- 
 moved, but it has to be replaced before the wax counterpart 
 is run down. The wax bite is thus outlined with teeth and 
 gums, but with its gum surface the counterpart of the zinc 
 model, and it is then returned to the brass mold and fusible 
 metal melted and poured in through one of the three holes 
 in the lid, which are countersunk. The matrix is quickly 
 opened by withdrawing the pin, and the wax removed. It 
 is necessary that parallel holes be drilled in the lower part 
 of the matrix for the pins. Slits are also sawed in the 
 mold behind the canines on each side, so that strips of thin 
 brass can be slipped in to divide the mold in three parts. 
 In the pin holes are inserted pieces of steel knitting pins 
 of pivot wire gage, and on them are fitted platinum tubes 
 wherewith to line the pin holes in the gum blocks. A plate 
 of copper is put under the matrix to prevent dropping out of 
 the pins. The mold is now clamped, with the exception of 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 135 
 
 the lid, the " body " being packed in moist ; then the lid is 
 added and hammered down and screwed home. The mold 
 is heated over gas till the fusible metal runs out ; next, the 
 outer part of the mold and the lid are removed, and the 
 blocks trimmed and removed ; the gum surface is then 
 painted and the teeth tinted. The blocks having been dried 
 for half an hour, are then placed in the muffle, which should 
 not be closed till the oil and starch are driven off. In ab- 
 stract it is not possible to give more than an outline of Mr. 
 Hooten's interesting communication, which should be read 
 in extenso in order to do it full justice. — Ex. Jour. Brit. Asso. 
 
 230. Flasking Pink Rubber. — When investing a case 
 where pink rubber is to be used for the gums, be careful and 
 not imbed the wax gum rim in the plaster below its upper 
 edge ; for if the parting point between the upper and lower 
 half of the flask should be anywhere on the gum, the surplus 
 rubber of the body of the plate will be forced through the 
 pink, and cause an unsightly spot. — -Wm. H. Steele. 
 
 231. Impressions of Soft Pendulous Gums. — I have 
 seen many ingenious methods of taking impressions of the 
 mouth where the gums were soft and pendulous, but have 
 treated a number of bad cases as follows : Take impression as 
 usual, with plaster a little thick. Press up hard and in such 
 manner as to force loose gum outward as much as possible. 
 Make model, and you will find the soft gum has made a 
 ridge on the model, projecting outward. Trim this off boldly 
 till your model has the shape it would have if the loose 
 gum were dissected away. The amount that can be trimmed 
 off without harm is surprising ; and we have never failed of 
 a fit by treating as above. — Dr. H. R. Keeper, in Archives. 
 
 232. Treatment of Broken Impressions. — That portion 
 of the impression coming away with the tray is placed on a 
 blotting pad, and the pieces as they are removed are placed 
 by. the side of the tray ; those belonging to the right side of 
 the mouth at the right of the tray, and those of the left to 
 
136 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 the left. This blotting pad, you will see, answers a three- 
 fold purpose : of a nice clean piece of paper on which to 
 lay the impressions, to keep the instrument bracket clean, 
 and something on which to carry the impression to the labo- 
 ratory ; and it also assists in the hardening of the plaster by 
 absorbing the moisture, so that in a few minutes it may be 
 handled without fear of breaking in the process of putting 
 together. — E. C. Moore, in Dental Journal. 
 
 233. Soldering Bands, Clasps, etc. — Split an Irish 
 potato, imbed the porcelain, leaving the parts to be soldered 
 just above the surface of the potato, close up the split in the 
 potato, holding it together with binding wire, proceed to 
 solder, no danger of cracking the teeth. The mountings of 
 the finest stones can be mended in the same way without in- 
 jury to the stone. — James T. Melton, in Items. 
 
 234. Reswaging a Metal Plate. — The adage, " Neces- 
 sity is the mother of invention," proved itself true in my 
 practice recently. 
 
 I made a gold plate for a patient. It carried one central 
 incisor and the bicuspids and molars. It seemed to come out 
 of the investment beautifully, but when I went to fit it in, I 
 found it raised up from the palate badly. I determined to 
 try an experiment. I placed the plate on the die, removed 
 it and marked the die around, about where the palatal side 
 of the artificial teeth would stand. I then cut away the 
 metal where any of the teeth would be likely to touch the 
 die. I then built up a ring of putty outside of where I had 
 marked the die. I ran a lead counter in my putty ring. I 
 replaced th« plate on the die and formed the counter to fit 
 the palate without touching the teeth. A few blows with a 
 hammer on the lead, while an assistant held the plate firmly 
 on the die, brought it in very good shape. — R. E. Sparks, in 
 Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 235. To Replace Broken Block on Rubber Plate. — 
 
 ^here a broken block is to be replaced by a new one, cut 
 out as much rubber as possible without cutting through, 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 137 
 
 make proper undercuts, etc., then fit your block between the 
 others, and cement in position with oxyphosphate mixed 
 thin. It is not necessary to have a perfect fit above gum. 
 Out a piece of heavy tin foil large enough to cover upper 
 half of block and rubber rim ; place this in position and 
 cover with cement ; mix enough cement to cover whole front 
 of block and part of adjoining two, and hold in position till 
 it has set. This will support the block while under pressure. 
 You can now invest, and use plenty of rubber to force it in 
 all interstices. After vulcanizing, you will find a nicely pol- 
 ished front. Instead of using wax to fill up my undercuts, I 
 fill with tissue paper moistened. This can be taken out 
 easily after flasking. — J. E. Ward, in Items. 
 
 236. Swaging Plates for High Arches. — In the Ala- 
 "bama Dental Society, Dr. Eosser, spoke of the difliculty of 
 swaging an upper plate when the arch is very high. He ad- 
 vised swaging it in two parts, the roof of the mouth and the 
 alveolar ridge, and soldering them together afterward. — 
 Items of Interest. 
 
 237. To Prevent Teeth From Cutting In Upper Plate. 
 — A patient wearing an upper plate has the anterior lower 
 teeth in place, but will not wear a lower plate, the lower 
 teeth often cut out the rubber, exposing the pins of the upper 
 teeth. To prevent this, fit small triangular pieces of gold or 
 aluminum against the lingual surfaces of the upper front 
 teeth. The lower teeth striking against the metal prevents 
 exposure of the pins. — Dr. C. L. Boyd, in Items. 
 
 238. A Plate Retainer. — The following plan has been 
 in use in my practice for several years, and has proved a per- 
 fect success in overcoming those difiicult cases where we have 
 
 a soft alveolar ridge in connection with a 
 very firm, hard palate : Take the im- 
 pression with Teague's compound, and 
 make cast as usual ; after the cast is hard 
 enough for the base plate, examine the 
 mouth carefully and locate the margins 
 
138 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 of the hard palate ; cut a pattern from heavy paper, the 
 proper size and shape to cover this part of the mouth ; now 
 place this pattern on a piece of tin of the proper thickness, 
 and cut out Si, facsimile of the paper ; fit this on the plaster 
 cast exactly in the same position that the pattern was fitted 
 to in the mouth ; press it firmly to place, and fasten with 
 cement, or a couple of pins. ISTow make the base plate, and 
 mount in the articulator as usual ; in grinding up be careful 
 to get a 'perfect articulation ; invest as usual, remove the wax 
 and pack with best maroon or black rubber till there is just 
 enough for the plate. Then cut a piece of the cloth which 
 comes with the rubber large enough to fully cover the cast^ 
 and lay over it in order that the flask may be easily opened ; 
 bring the flask entirely together. Open, remove the cloth 
 and the tin pattern from the cast. Fold sheets of black 
 %oit ■palate rubber, till it is one-half thicker than the tin ; lay 
 the pattern on this and cut the rubber same shape and size. 
 Place this piece of rubber in the depression made in the rubber 
 by the tin pattern. Close and vulcanize as usual. When the 
 plate is all finished, pit the surface all over as sbown in the 
 cut, with a ]^o. 7 round bur, while doing this, the rubber 
 and bur must be kept wet. The soft rubber should follow 
 the hard ridge entirely back to the heel of plate, as shown in 
 cut. The thickness of the soft rubber should be governed 
 by the variation in difference between the hard and soft tis- 
 sues, and often the tin pattern should be thinned with a file 
 in some parts before fastening to cast, in order to make the 
 soft rubber thickest in the hardest part of the arch. See cut. 
 — Wm. H. Steele. 
 
 239. Spoon for Mixing Plaster. — If you use a spoon 
 to mix plaster, see how much more useful it will be if you 
 place the bowl of the spoon on the anvil and flatten it out. 
 It will take up dry plaster just as well, and will prove a very 
 good spatula. — Dr. W. S. Elliott, in Items. 
 
 240. Burnishing in Amalgam. — We all believe amal- 
 gam should be burnished in the cavity for which it is 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 139 
 
 iutended ; an absolutely sure way to accomplish tins is by 
 use of ball burnishers in the engine, the amalgam can thus 
 be forced in the tooth structure^ rendering the filling very 
 perfect. — H. Prescott Wilcox, D.D.S. 
 
 241. To Replace Tooth in Gum Block. — To repair a 
 broken gum-block, grind out the broken part and fit a plain 
 tooth neatly. — D. V. Beacock, Ohio Journal. 
 
 242. Removing Impressions. — Referring generally to 
 all kinds of impressions, a difficulty is sometimes experi- 
 enced in removing them from the mouth owing to suction. 
 In this case, request the patient to cough slightly. The 
 effort will elevate the soft palate letting the air between, 
 rendering the removal no longer difficult. — F. Molloy, in 
 Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 243. For Wetting Corundum Wheels. — Keep your 
 corundum wheels wet with water containing a few drops of 
 alcohol. If they have become gummed, soak in a solution 
 of caustic potash, afterward washing in weak alcohol. The 
 treatment is old, but none the worse on that account. — Odon- 
 tological Journal. 
 
 244. Lining Rubber Plates with Metal. — When you 
 have the case in the flask clean and ready to pack, cover the 
 male flask with liquid silex to make it smooth, then lay 
 over the center of the cast ISTo. 40 tin foil about one-quarter 
 of an inch larger than the "central cavity." And put 
 no other central cavity. ISTow cover the entire male cast 
 with jSTo. 4 chemically pure tin foil, and rub it down smooth 
 with a piece of cotton batting, l^ow fill the other part of 
 the flask with rubber and fill it full. 
 
 Take the piece of cloth that comes between the sheets 
 of rubber and wash out the starch, and lay it over the rub- 
 ber and press the two parts together to within one-eighth of 
 an inch. Now take the flask apart and wet the cloth and 
 take it off". The cloth being woven open, will leave little 
 
140 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 elevations on the rubber to hold the fibrous material. Trim 
 oS the surplus rubber nearly to the edge of the plate, then 
 lay Robinson's Fibrous Material on the rubber bed, lapping 
 the edges and it will not move. ISTow press the flask to- 
 gether with dry heat till it is tight enough to keep out 
 the water, make the flask sissing hot. Then boil it tight 
 together and vulcanize 320 — forty-five minutes, then run the 
 thermometer to 340 and shut it ofi". When vulcanized, wash 
 the plate in bicarbonate of soda till it is bright, and burnish 
 with a soft steel burnisher ; now finish up the rubber part of 
 your plate, and then finish the lining with a soft wheel- 
 brush in a lathe with whiting. 
 
 "We have seen several cases pronounced by good dentists 
 as unable to wear rubber, who now rejoice in a healthy 
 mouth, caused by using a rubber plate lined with Robinson's 
 Fibrous Material. — Ed. in Dental Review. 
 
 245. To Prevent Weighted Rubber Irritating. — To 
 prevent the metal in weighted rubber from irritating the 
 gums, I use ?2ow-weighted rubber for the last layer when 
 packing my flasks. Thus I get a smooth gum-surface with 
 the desired weight. — John K. Morse, D. D. S. 
 
 246. To Prevent Flasks Staining Hands. — To prevent 
 iron flasks from smutting the hands, put a piece of un- 
 slacked lime, the size of a peanut, in the boiler while vul- 
 canizing ; the spiut will be there just the same but has 
 undergone a chemical change, which keeps it from sticking 
 to the hands and washes off" very easily. — D. W. Barker, 
 M.D.S. 
 
 247. \A^hen Pouring Impressions. — When filling im- 
 pressions and articulating models use a sheet of glass for base 
 as the plaster does not stick to it ; makes a smooth surface 
 and it may be handled and turned around without disturb- 
 ing the plaster. — D. W. Barker, M.D.S. 
 
 248. To Make Rubber Plates Smooth. — Give the cast 
 a heavy coat of liquid silex (if the cast is very dry dip in 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 141 
 
 water first), then place immediately in tlie warming oven ; 
 then after a few minutes — depending on the temperature — 
 cover the cast with a piece of rubber and watch closely. 
 Just as soon as the surface of the cast becomes hard, remove 
 from the oven and pack. Herein lies the secret, for. if the 
 silex becomes too dry it will rough up and become worse 
 than useless, the rubber, however, prevents too rapid, evapo- 
 ration and avoids this mishap. — J. M. Overshire, D.D.S. 
 
 249. Lower Partials. — I have prepared these cases, 
 using gold for partial lower dentures where the incisors are in 
 position, and sometimes the first bicuspid, the object being 
 to prevent the plate from pressing to the back part of the 
 mouth. They are used when there is no molar to prevent 
 the plate being driven posteriorly. The plate is swedged 
 in the usual way, the band extending around the ridge just 
 below the incisor tooth, and the whole put in the mouth 
 and filed nicely to fit. An impression is then taken, and 
 the whole invested and soldered in that way. The purpose 
 is to get a band of gold broad enough to prevent cutting 
 in the ridge running around the front of the tooth, or the 
 ridge just below the teeth. One of the advantages is to 
 prevent the necessity of using clasps. It is rarely that a 
 bicuspid can be clasped with satisfaction, as it is not adapted 
 for it, and I think this method secures better results than 
 clasping. It avoids the band that Dr. Genese speaks of, 
 and makes a very firm and substaintial plate. — Dr. Kichol, 
 in Odont. So. International. 
 
 250. Vulcanizer Wrench. — If, instead of the old 
 methods in which perhaps we have jammed our hands, and 
 have felt like breaking a commandment, we have a long- 
 handled malleable iron wrench, which a village blacksmith 
 can make, for the top of the boiler, and place this in posi- 
 tion and lay the vulcanizer on its side on the bench, and hit 
 the long handle of the wrench a smart blow or two with a 
 hammer, the work is done without friction to hands or feel- 
 ing. — W. H. Wright, D.D.S., in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
142 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 251. Fusion of Gum Sections. — The teeth are ground 
 up and articulated the same as any other case, with this pro- 
 vision, that they must have wide V-shaped joints to allow 
 for the rapid flowing of the flux or enamel. Then after the 
 teeth are arranged in position and articulated properly, there 
 is an investment with half plaster, and platinum wire is laid 
 across the platinum pins, and that is fused with the blow 
 pipe, which gives it an added strength. Then take that and 
 the skeleton and invest the joints with this enamel material, 
 putting it in the oven, or rather on the slide. There are 
 three different movements in the gradation of the heat, as it 
 gradually comes to the fusing point. In three minutes it 
 is raised one-third more of the distance, and at the end of 
 three more close it. When you get it in the oven allow it 
 to remain there fifty-five seconds. This same operation 
 with gas will take about five minutes, so you can see there is 
 quite an item in the amount of time saved. This operation 
 gives quite a respectable appearance to a set of teeth on 
 rubber. It gives the plebian base quite a patrician appear- 
 ance, and it has almost the appearance of continuous gum. 
 — Dr. Brimmer, Extract Beview. 
 
 252. Hint on Articulating. — It is often difficult to 
 make a full upper denture work satisfactory when the 
 patient has only the four or six lower anterior teeth. I 
 always try to impress on the patient the value of a partial 
 lower plate to be used in connection with the upper. But 
 if only the upper one is to be made, in adapting the teeth to 
 conform to the circle of the lower teeth, leave plenty of room 
 for the lower teeth to pass inside of them without touching, 
 thus preventing tipping at the back. Have the lower teeth 
 bite on a floor or shoulder of rubber built on the upper plate 
 from the pins of the teeth back about one-eighth of an inch 
 or thereabouts. Also regulate the length of the bite with 
 this shoulder, building it down toward the points of the teeth, 
 as the case admits. — W. E. Dadmum, in Minn. So., Review. 
 
 253. Uselessness of Air Chambers. — Air chambers 
 cause unnatural formations in the roof of the mouth, in pro- 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 143 
 
 portion to the size and depth of the chamber used on the 
 plate ; and the thickness to which a plate must be made to 
 permit such a depth of the suction, often impedes rather than 
 facilitates the enunciation, to say nothing of the unpleasant 
 sensation of constant drawing or sucking, till the membrane, 
 drawn in the chamber, becomes callous and lifeless. How 
 much better, for humanity sake, it would be for all dentists 
 to make their plates the shape of the mouth and abandon 
 the useless air chamber. 
 
 I wish to say here how every dentist can satisfy himself 
 in five minutes of the inutility of the air chamber. 
 
 When you have fitted the teeth to the mouth you say 
 to yourself, " What a good suction the air makes to this 
 plate," but remove the plate from the mouth and fill the air 
 chamber with soft beeswax and have it so it will not bear on 
 the roof of the mouth, and you will find, perhaps to your 
 satisfaction, the same suction that there was before. My 
 method is to make three or four ridges across the back part 
 of the roof of the mouth on the plate by scratching gullies 
 in the model. If the gum is soft I make these from one side 
 to the other, across the entire model, but if it is hard (as the 
 model shows) then I do not make them entirely across, but 
 only on each side of the median line. — Lee Stephen, in Ohio 
 Dental Journal. 
 
 254. New Lining for Vulcanite Plates. — Rubber-dam 
 as a lining for vulcanite plates cannot be surpassed. You 
 proceed as usual with your case and when ready for packing, 
 first pack round the pins and flange ; then cut a piece of red 
 rubber the shape and size of your cast, large enough to come 
 up as high as you will require your case when finished. 
 Then lay a new, clean, thin piece of rubber-dam over this and 
 cut out a piece to fit ; remove and paint your red plate all 
 over with good red or black rubber solder or cement on one 
 side, being careful that it is all covered well with the cement. 
 ISTow take the piece of dam and place it smoothly on the 
 painted side of your plate ; press well down ; make it quite 
 smooth, being sure that there are no air bubbles. If your 
 
144 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 dam has stretched, which it will, trim the edges to the red 
 plate. Place your plate in the flask so that your dam will 
 come next your cast. When you close your flask, be sure 
 and see that the plate comes well up around the flange so as to 
 hug close to the model and not allow any red rubber to be 
 forced inside. Close your case by dry heat. Use paper 
 vacuums and not tin, as the dam will not harden over tin. 
 
 Rubber-dam is better than gold for a lining, as it is a non- 
 conductor, prevents sore mouths and makes a very tough 
 plate almost impossible to break ; so you can make a thin, 
 light piece of work. — L. Crouther, in Aynerican Journal. 
 
 255. To Prevent Polishing ^Vheels Splitting. — 
 
 Brush wheels, etc., with wood center should not be left in 
 water longer than necessary, nor should they be left on the 
 mandrel. Being put on dry, then soaked, the wood swells 
 and something must split or warp out of shape. Many a 
 wheel is condemned when it is not the fault of the make-up 
 but of its user and abuser. — A. Secor. 
 
 256. Refitting Rubber Plates. — In rubber plates, where 
 absorption has taken place after the plate has been worn, 
 and the articulation is still perfect refit them as follows : 
 
 Take a new impression, and make the model as usual ; 
 heat the model in hot water, place soft wax around oh the 
 ridge, and press the plate firmly down over this. Now 
 invest the case as usual, separate, pack, and vulcanize and 
 your plate will come out a perfect fit with but little work. 
 This method can also be used where teeth do not articulate 
 correctly ; by just cutting them out of the rubber, place in 
 their proper position in the w^ax, and proceed as above. — C. 
 L. Smith, D.D.S. 
 
 • 257. Strong, Thin Celluloid Plates.— In making cellu- 
 loid plates by the Seabury method, dry out the case in the 
 press for two hours, then mold at 300° F., cool the press 
 down with a sponge and cold water till the thermometer 
 indicates 240° ; then close the door of the press and let alone 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 145 
 
 till cold. A thin plate made in this manner on a metal 
 cast will outlast a rubber one of twice its thickness. — Dr. 
 W. F. Johnson. 
 
 258. Partial Plate ^Vith Bands. — There is one other 
 little point I should like just to mention, it is in connection 
 with those very awkward cases in the .upper jaw where the 
 six front teeth alone remain standins; all close tosrether. 
 Suction is generallj' difficult to obtain, so it becomes neces- 
 sary to make a gold plate with bands round the front of the 
 canines. The patient very naturally complains of their 
 showing. A good way to get over the difficulty is to cover 
 the band, if broad, with white rubber ; or if narrow and near 
 the gum, with pink. The band should be nicked with a 
 very fine saw along both borders, the cuts being made close 
 together and not more than one-thirty-second of an inch 
 deep. The rest of the surface being barbed with a sharp 
 pointed graver, in alternate directions, paint over the band 
 with chloro-rubber and press a fragment of warmed rubber 
 well down over this, flask and vulcanize. 
 
 Should it be afterward necessary to tighten the band, 
 gently warm it before doing so. — N". Reeve, Extract British 
 Journal. 
 
 259. To Remove Teeth From Rubber Plates.— When 
 it is necessary to remove teeth from an old rubber plate, 
 place the case in a small dish; cover with glycerin and 
 place over your burner till quite hot. The glycerin will 
 soon soften the rubber, so the teeth can be easily removed 
 with but little force and without endangering the pins or 
 teeth ; wash the teeth in water, which will remove all traces 
 of the glycerin. Should there be stains on the teeth after 
 removal, or small pieces of rubber between the pins, im- 
 merse them in nitric acid for a short time, which will 
 remove all stains and rubber. — C. W. Sylvester, D.D.S. 
 
 260. To Get Cast of Broken Lower Plate.— Hold the 
 
 pieces together so the inside or the outside edges of the 
 
146 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 plate at the break fit closely together ; then drop melted 
 touffh wax over break and let cool, Brinsi; the other edares 
 together and treat the same. Take a stiff bar of cold wax 
 just long enough to reach across the plate, from second molar 
 to second molar, fasten the bar to plate with melted wax. 
 When cold the cast can be poured without danger of dis- 
 placing. — A. Secor. 
 
 261. To Strengthen Poor Plaster. — If so unfortunate 
 as to have a batch of plaster that will not set hardy a little 
 fine ground common stucco mixed with it will make it good 
 at a cost of a few cents. Better to mix them as needed, as 
 too much stucco will make a cast rough, while more can be 
 added for flaskino-.— A. Secor. 
 
DEPARTMENT C. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 149 
 
 DEPARTMENT C 
 
 262. Articulation of Gold Crowns. — For the making 
 and articulation of gold crowns I find no plan more simple, 
 or more perfect, than one I have been making for the past 
 two years. After having made the band and contoured it 
 with pliers, or otherwise ; select from a collection of molar 
 dies the die nearest the size of the band, and swage the 
 grinding surface of 22-k. gold very thin— 34, 35, or 36 gage 
 on a block of lead or soft wood. Now stick this to the band 
 with the smallest particle of solder. Trim the cap, particu- 
 larly proximal sides, so that it will pass readily between the 
 teeth. The band is now placed in position.' If force, suf- 
 ficient to bend the grinding surface, is required to get the 
 band in position, place under the cap an ordinary foot 
 plugger, and push the band in its place. The patient is 
 directed to close the jaws, and owing to the thinness of the 
 gold grinding suface the impression of the opposing tooth 
 is easily made, thereby securing the correct bite. The crown 
 is now removed. The cap and band are held together by 
 the ordinary soldering pliers, and the cusps are filled with 
 2Q or 18-k. solder, which, of course, unites the band and cap. 
 The crown is now finished in the ordinary way. This is as 
 good a crown as can be made, and recommends itself because 
 it is so quickly made. — Gordon White, in Items. 
 
 263. Quick Method Making Counter-Die for Gold 
 Crowns. — Make of sheet brass, using hard solder, a cup 
 three-fourths of an inch in diameter and half an inch deep, 
 having a spur on one side by means of which it can be held 
 in a pair of pliers ; fill it with Melotte's fusible metal. 
 Select a natural or an artificial tooth for a model ; fill the 
 soft rubber ring that comes with Melotte's Moldine with 
 plaster, and invest the tooth so that the cusps project out of 
 
150 i DEPARTMENT- C. 
 
 the plaster as far as it is desired to copy them ; when dry 
 remove the riibher ring. Melt the metal in the cup, and 
 just before it hardens in cooling press the cusps of the tooth 
 in it. The surplus metal will run over the sides of the 
 cup, and a sharp and perfect counter-model will be secured, 
 in which the gold plate can be swaged after the method 
 of the die-plate^ using the lead hubs or bullets. I also 
 use for the purpose sheet lead one-sixteenth of an inch 
 thick, cut in strips two and one-half inches long and one- 
 quarter to one-half an inch wide, one end of which is folded 
 on itself two or three times letter S fashion, the other end 
 being long enough to hold it by. As it becomes flattened in 
 swaging, it can be folded back and forth over the gold plate. 
 By having one or more of these cups and a sufficient 
 selection of teeth already invested in plaster, it is but a 
 moment's work to select the size desired, and make the 
 counter-die. Should it lose its finer lines in swaging, it can 
 be remelted and an exact duplicate obtained in less than a 
 minute. — Dr. C. H. Eobinson, in Dental .Review, 
 
 264. A Gold Bicuspid Crown. — Remove all foreign 
 substance, treat antiseptically, and fill pulp canal. Grind 
 away all bulging portions of crown, shaping it so that a 
 band can be perfectly fitted to the gum margin. Use fine 
 gold, gage 26. Cut a strip a third wider than the finished 
 crown will be. Make a simple band, secure the joint with 
 20-k. solder. Now build up the root or remnant of crown 
 with wax or modeling compound to the required shape, ex- 
 cept that the proportions must be thinner and shorter than 
 a proper occlusion calls for. Eeturn the band to the root, 
 supposing it to have been previously fitted, and be careful 
 not to disturb the wax. 'Bow mix a little plaster to suit- 
 able consistency and fill the projecting end of the band, 
 pressing the plaster against and around the wax. When 
 set, remove the band from the root. If the wax comes with 
 it, melt it out with hot water. We have now an impression 
 of the ideal tooth surrounded by the band. Allow the plas- 
 ter to dry by holding it over an alcohol flame. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 151 
 
 Have at baud an iron ring about one incb in diameter 
 and an inch or more deep. Fill tbis with prepared molding 
 sand ; take the band and bury it in the sand — open end up- 
 ward — all but about a thirty-second of an inch of the free 
 edge. Mix some whiting with alcohol to a thick creamy 
 consistency^ and with a camel's-hair brush paint the inside 
 of the band and the outside of the exposed edge. Allow to 
 dry. Over the iron ring stretch a two-inch section of heavy 
 rubber tubing. (These appliances are known as Melotte's 
 and are sold at the depots.) We have now a completed 
 matrix in which we will cast fusible metal. When cold, 
 Tift from the ring, and wash away all sand and plaster. It 
 will be seen, now, that we have a metallic tooth surrounded 
 by the band, the cervical end of which is clamped by the 
 metal, so that no change can result through subsequent 
 manipulation. The cusps are formed by slitting the free 
 end of the band in three or four places, and with a suitable 
 mallet folding the sections inward on each other; at the 
 same time the band is contained on the metal die. At this 
 juncture the crown can be easily removed from the die and 
 carried again to the mouth for trial. Before completion, 
 however, a few pieces of 18-k. solder with flux should be 
 melted inside of the crown to bind all the folds tos-ether. 
 Then the inequalities of the cusps can be finished with file 
 or corundum disks, and the occlusion perfectly adjusted. A 
 little practice will show the simplicity of the manipulation. 
 —W. S. Elliott, D.D.fe., in Items. 
 
 265. Contouring Bicuspid and Molar Gold Crowns. — 
 
 Select (for instance) a bicuspid natural tooth, perfect in 
 form, from your collection, fasten its root firmly in a vice — 
 saw the crown from the root at the neck. Invest the cusp 
 surface of this crown in a batch of plaster of Paris, allowing 
 all of the crown to project from the plaster except the cusps 
 or that part that would correspond to a swaged or molded 
 cap (see Fig. 1). 
 
 From this make, with the aid of molding sand, a zinc 
 die. A variety of these dies, consisting of upper and lower 
 
152 
 
 DEPARTMENT C. 
 
 molars and bicuspids should be had. These are to be used 
 for contouring in the following manner: 
 
 Prepare stump of tooth in the mouth according to jour 
 accustomed plan ; take measurement of same with binding 
 
 Fig, I. 
 
 FiG. 2. 
 
 wire or otherwise ; from this measurement make a cylindri- 
 cal gold band ; then select one of the zinc dies whose cir- 
 cumference at the neck of tooth is equal to or a little less 
 than measurement of root in^ mouth, then force the band 
 slowly over that part of the die, representing tooth, tapping 
 and adjusting as it is driven down. The band will take the 
 exact form of the cast of the natural tooth. It is now ready 
 to adjust on the root or stump in the mouth and articulate 
 in the usual waj'. 
 
 You will find this a convenient and effective method of 
 making a gold crown. Anatomical m form, such a result 
 can not be brought about with contouring forceps. 
 
 Another method that I have found to be of almost equal 
 value is the following: 
 
 Place on a semi-conical j^iece of wood (or other material) 
 two inches long and five-eighths of an inch at base, a natu- 
 ural tooth crown by means of hard wax, as seen in Fig. 2, 
 buccal surface of tooth upward. The fine lines in Fig. 1 
 marked a, represent the part of tooth imbedded in plaster^ 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 153 
 
 and a in JSTo. 2 the part of tooth imbedded in hard wax. 
 With zinc cast of No. 2, stamp the band before it is bent 
 in a circle and soldered. 
 
 The buccal surface is thus contoured as nature would 
 have it. and the remaining portion of band can be formed 
 with pliers and fitted, articulated and finished in the usual 
 way. — H. S. Lowry, Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 266. Enameling Gold Crowns. — After the gold crown 
 is made and fitted to the tooth in the mouth, the sides prop- 
 erly stifiened, the cusps or incisive edge strengthened, it is 
 boiled in acid and then adjusted in the mouth, and the por- 
 tion of the labial section which is exposed is outlined on the 
 surface of the gold. The crown is then removed, the 
 marked area ground quite thin, and then perforated with a; 
 spear-pointed drill. The crown is again adjusted in the 
 mouth, and the thin labial section depressed to make all the 
 room required for the inlay. The crown is then removed, 
 and glass filling material of the proper shade is mixed with 
 water to the consistency of paste, a small portion of which. 
 is spread over the depressed surface of gold. The surplus 
 moisture is then extracted with a napkin, and any dry par- 
 ticles of the material which may have fallen on the gold 
 remove with a camel's-hair brush. The crown is then 
 placed with the enamel upward in a small platinum muffie 
 having a depression in its base to hold the crown steadily. 
 'The inside of the muffie is coated with whiting. The 
 muffle is then placed on a charcoal soldering-block, and 
 gradually heated up with a gas blow-pipe, blowing the 
 flame against the closed end. A light red heat will fuse the 
 enamel. The crown is then removed, sufficient enamel 
 added to give proper form to the part, and the fusing re- 
 peated. The surface of the enamel is then ground level and 
 smooth, the edges finished and the dust removed, after 
 which any pits or inequalities are filled in, the surface being 
 coated by means of a brush with enamel material mixed, 
 quite thin, and the fusing again repeated, the heat being 
 carried to a higher point than at the previous fusings. The 
 
154 DEPARTMENT C. 
 
 result is a dense, smooth inlay of enamel. The enamel is 
 applied in successive layers, and the color is very well con- 
 trolled, though not perfectly ; but the result is not so objec- 
 tionable in the mouth as a gold crown or a discolored tooth. 
 The melting of the crown is avoided by turning the open 
 end to the operator, and directing the heat at the back of 
 the crown. You will probably melt a crown or two at first 
 in finding out just how to manipulate it, but a little practice 
 makes perfect. The alloy used is three or four per cent of 
 platinum to gold of .997 to .099. — Dr. George Evans, Amer- 
 ican Society. 
 
 267. Crown Grinder. — Some one during the meetiug-^ 
 of the Southern Dental Association at Old Point Comfort,. 
 Ya., in August, 1888, presumably Dr. G, S. Staples, of Sher- 
 man, Texas, described his method of grinding Logan tooth 
 crowns substantially as follows : Take a 
 hollow mandrel like l^o. 305, and while 
 in the hand-piece heat the end and 
 mount on it a corundum wheel such as 
 No. 00, beinsr careful to make its outer 
 face run true. The neck of a Logan crown can then be 
 ground without any risk of grinding the post, which enters 
 and is protected by the smooth socket of the mandrel. — W. 
 S. H., in Cosmos. 
 
 268. Crown Dies of Watt's Metal. — Watt's metal 
 makes an excellent die for striking up gold crowns by Dr. 
 Melotte's method, using the Melotte metal for the counter. 
 — Exchange. 
 
 269. Double Backing for Richmond Crowns. — Use 
 pure gold about No. 38 to 40, standard gage. After grind- 
 ing the tooth to fit the ferrule cut out of a piece of gold, 
 leaving it long enough to cover the tip of the tooth at an 
 angle of 45 degrees ; cut the second piece a little longer, so 
 the solder will not join the two ; do not rivet the pins, but 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 155 
 
 use sticky wax to hold the backings in place till the crown 
 is in the investment, and then solder in the usual way. This . 
 rule is found, when followed out, to give good satisfaction 
 after using it over a year, having had no trouble with checked 
 teeth. — Items. 
 
 270. To Prevent Porcelain Checking from Heat. — Fire 
 checking of porcelain facings has been a great annoyance to 
 me ever since I have undertaken to make a bridge or crown 
 with porcelain facings. By the following method I have 
 overcome this difficult}" : 
 
 First, back your facing with very thin platinum, gage 
 36 (standard); and second backing, gage 30 (standard). 
 i^Tow, before placing this over the pins in the facing, put on a 
 thin piece of gold foil, three thicknesses of Xo. 4, then the 
 thinnest platinum, ]!s^o. 36, coat very thinly with borax, then 
 place on the ^o. 30, press tightly down to the facing and 
 bend the pins over to hold in position ; then trim ail off, not 
 allowing any of the backing to lay over the facing, but keep- 
 ing them independent of each other, and before final backing 
 see that they do not touch ; leaving a very small space be- 
 tween each backing, ^ow invest, remove all wax around 
 the teeth and the space left between the first backing ; pack 
 closely with gold foil ; be sure not to let any borax come in 
 contact with the facing, and this is overcome by packing in 
 all the space between the caps. The foil being packed in 
 this manner, the solder will flow all over alike as it makes a 
 connection and leaves no places for the solder to jump, but 
 makes it nice and solid with the gold foil. Also place a 
 small roll of foil between the porcelain facing and the cusps, 
 and force it down tight, and there will be no space left on 
 the top of the facing after the bridge is flowed, and also 
 allows for the expansion of the metals, as the soft foil is 
 between the porcelain facing and the solid cusp. — J. L. Har- 
 kinson, in Odoniologkal Journal. 
 
 Til. Porcelain Tooth-Crown with Gum. — Fit a plat- 
 inum collar and cap to the root-end, and perforate the cap 
 
156 
 
 DEPARTMENT C. 
 
 to allow a platinum post to be pushed through in the root 
 and project a little from the cap. Select a pinless, plate, 
 rubber, or other porcelain crown ; fit, articulate and 
 wax it to the cap and post, and remove for vertical 
 investment in just enough plaster and marble-dust 
 or asbestos to hold the parts together. When set, 
 remove the wax and fill with porcelain body, dry 
 thoroughly, and biscuit about three minutes in the 
 furnace. So soon as cool enough to handle, carefully cut the 
 investment away from the crown and the cap, add body to 
 fill the cracks, and fuse in the furnace. If the gum has re- 
 ceded from about the neck of the root, gum-enamel can be 
 modeled over the collar, and the final firing (with but one 
 investment) will produce a very artistic restoration of both 
 crown and gum, to be mounted with cement as usual. — W. 
 M. Sharpe, in Cosmos. 
 
 -I desire to sug- 
 
 272. Tool for Bending Crown Pivots. 
 gest a plan which I have used, whereby the barbed pivot, 
 with the screw on the end (which had been secured in the 
 root with amalgam) may be bent without danger of defacing 
 or injuring the screw. A small instrument may be easily 
 made of a piece of iron M'^ire, as will be better understood by 
 the following figures : 
 
 The sectional view represents a screw-thread cut on the 
 inside. The slot "A" is made to facilitate the cutting of the 
 screw-thread witkin, which for amateurs is somewhat difli- 
 cult without it, the thread corresponding to the one used on 
 the pivot. When desirous of bending the wire or pivot at 
 the proper angle, screw the instrument on to the pivot, and 
 the bending may be done without fear of bruising the threads, 
 which, on the platinum wire used for the pivot, is very easily 
 done, as that metal is quite soft. Two of these, instruments 
 will be required, one for the thread used on large centrals 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 157 
 
 and cuspids ; the other for small centrals and laterals. — Theo- 
 dore F. Chupein, D.D.S., in Cosmos. 
 
 273. Temporary Crown. — Grind broken stump of 
 natural tooth down, to near gum border ; take an English 
 plate tooth that suits the space, and for a post, a stiff piece 
 of roughened wire flattened at one end. At the flattened end 
 file two small notches in opposite edges, for the pins of the 
 tooth to be bent in to hold the wire firm. This makes the 
 crown, and can be set with gutta-percha or '" absorbent cot- 
 ton" wrapped about the wire and put up the root canal ; the 
 swelling of the cotton holds it firm in the root, and can be 
 easily removed and reset each time we have to treat the root. 
 Any of my patients who have had to wear this crown have 
 been well satisfied with it. The first one I used was in the 
 case of a gentleman who had just broken off a dead root cen- 
 tral. I set him one, and in thirty minutes he was back at 
 work in his store. — J. F. Simpson, in Dominion Journal. 
 
 274. Rapid Fitting Crown Bands. — After shaping end 
 of root take the measure with a loop of fine wire held in pin 
 vise and twisted till tight, remove and slip it down on an old 
 mirror handle or other tapering, elongated, conical-shaped 
 piece of wood or iron, working it carefully as far as it will 
 go ; mark its position by scratch with a knife passing around ; 
 remove it, cut open, straighten ends, cut strip of gold slight!}^ 
 shorter, bend around and solder to form band, and slip band 
 down on the stick or mandrel. It should be found a trifle 
 smaller than the circumference at the mark. If larger it 
 will, of course, be necessary to. cut open and shorten it. If 
 much too small, slip over end of your small anvil or handle 
 of some instrument, plugger for instance, and tap carefully 
 with riveting: hammer till stretched to desired size. I use 
 my gold 29 gage, 23k., and cut the strip from one-half to one 
 line short, thus always permitting a little hammering to 
 stretch band to required size. The band when complete to 
 fit to root should reach just above the mark, never quite to 
 it, or past it, to allow for stretching of wire in removing it 
 from root and slipping on to the mandrel, and will almost 
 
158 
 
 DEPARTMENT C. 
 
 always be found to lit at once, and tightly, thus saving your 
 patient the annoyance and pain of repeated trials, and your- 
 self a considerable amount of time. The cap and pin are com- 
 pleted in the usual manner. It seldom requires more than one 
 to one and one-half hours to complete cap and pin, to the point 
 of taking the impression. — ^Vincent Fischer, in Dental Review. 
 
 275. The Yoke Crown.— Dr. George T. Baker, at the 
 American Academy of Dental Science, exhibited a device 
 w^hich he uses to insert a tooth, temporarily, when one has 
 been extracted. It consists of a yoke of thin platina wire, 
 the two arms of which bend over the teeth adjoining the 
 space to be filled. A plate tooth is ground to fit the gum 
 and rest on the yoke ; the tooth is backed with platina and 
 soldered, and finally tied in place with floss silk. — Items. 
 
 276. To Repair Pivot Crown. — It sometimes happens 
 that an artificial tooth crown mounted on a pivot breaks off, 
 leaving the pivot firmly fixed in the root, from which it may 
 be for several reasons impracticable to remove it. In such a 
 case I employ an engine trephine (Fig. 1) to bore a groove, 
 C, in the root end A, Fig. 2, around the pivot, B, to a depth 
 consistent with the strength of both the pivot and the root. 
 A hole, D, is then drilled in the palatal part of the root end 
 to the same depth as the groove around the pivot. From a 
 gold or platinum tube of the size of the trephine, a section. 
 
 Fig. 
 
 Fig. 
 
 Fig. 4. 
 
 C, Fig. 3, is cut and soldered to 
 a piece of platinum wire, D', which 
 just fits the hole D in the root A, 
 Fig. 2. The tube and wire are 
 •then put in place, and the tube 
 made flush with the pivot and root 
 end, A plain tooth, E, Fig. 4, is selected, 
 ground, and backed with platinum, F, so 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 159 
 
 that a part of the backing may be bent and cut as shown at 
 G, to the shape of the root end, and drilled at d to fit over 
 the wire D', Fig. 3. Hard wax is then melted to unite the 
 backing to the wire, so that all may be withdrawn from the 
 root, invested, and soldered to form a contour which, when 
 subsequently finished, will make a strong, smooth crown-back, 
 H, Fig. 5, which shows in section the several parts of the 
 crown as reset with suitable thin cement on the pivot and 
 root before described. It is obvious that such a crown is 
 secure in its seat, and a number of them so set have proved 
 the method to be a success. — Emil Amend, D.D.S., Metz, 
 Germany, in Cosmos. 
 
 277. Making a Double Cap Crown. — After adjusting a 
 gold crown on a tooth remove it and wind around it a piece 
 of paper, which fasten with a clamp or string. Slipping the 
 paper band off, pour in Mellotte's fusible metal and immerse 
 it in cold' water to cool ofi^, and have a die on which to ad- 
 just a telescoping cap. On this wind ]^o. 30 to 32 pure gold 
 w^ire, one piece being left higher than the rest, and which 
 bind over the top of the crown. 
 
 Remove this and solder, adjusting it to the crown- 
 like die. Outside of this solder a narrow strip of No. 32. 
 If there is any fear of the solder getting inside of the 
 telescopic cap, it can be painted with whiting which prevents 
 the solder from flowing where you don't want it. When all 
 is ready, melt a little fusible metal in a cup, and drop the 
 crowned-die in it, and the gold crown will float to the sur- 
 face. Pick it out, and if a little of the fusible metal still 
 adheres, immerse it in nitric acid, which will remove the last 
 particle. It is then ready to be adjusted to the crown in the 
 mouth. This will be found a clean and most accurate method.. 
 — G. Evans, in Southern Journal. 
 
 278. Varnishing Teeth Before Crowning. — Dr. C. V; 
 Rosser uses shellac varnish on live teeth to be crowned to 
 overcome sensitiveness. — Items of Interest. 
 
160 DEPARTMENT C. 
 
 279. Perfect Fitting Gold Crown. — The whole crown 
 is cut oft' almost even with the gum ; there will still be a thin 
 portion of the enamel left surrounding the root, and this can 
 easily be removed by using the No. 2 and No. 3 scalers. 
 
 Around this conically shaped root (the removal of the 
 enamel alone will generally shape it sutRciently) fit a 22k. 
 gold band so as to come in contact w^ith all parts of the 
 conical portion of the root, which gives us a conical band. 
 To make this band, make a tin-foil model. From this an 
 absolute shape in gold is obtained more quickly, and a sav- 
 ing of gold results. This band is soldered with 22k. solder, 
 then placed in position and its free margins ground down 
 even with the root end. 
 
 Next prepare the band for a pure gold floor by taking a 
 Butler corundum point and hollowing out the upper or small 
 end by beveling from the inside edge, so as to allow room for 
 the solder. Though only an infinitesimal amount of solder 
 runs inside, still we must have a place for that little to flow ; 
 otherwise the band could not go back in place, on account 
 of the solder flowing inside, and we must have the solder to 
 flow inside in order to make a complete cone externally. 
 Now take a piece of pure gold (No. 34 American gage) and 
 cut just a little larger than the band, anneal it and adapt it 
 perfectly, then place the two in a No. 7 Melotte soldering 
 clamp, and be sure they do not move ; place borax all around 
 the overlapping edge of pure gold, place a small piece of 
 22k. gold solder at the junction of the band and floor. 
 
 Now make the pivots (of platinum and iridium wire), 
 and roughen them before placing them in position. Drill 
 holes corresponding with the root-canals, place the pivots in 
 position and fasten them to the floor with prepared hard 
 wax. Now remove carefully and invest pivots, floor, and 
 band in equal parts of plaster and marble-dust, and after re- 
 moving the wax with boiling water, solder the pivots to the 
 floor with 22k. gold. Now cut down the overlapping pure- 
 gold floor exactly even with the band, also cut down the 
 projecting ends of the pivots. This constitutes the foun- 
 dation for a solid gold crowui Never make pivots for 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 161 
 
 canals which cannot be thoroughly filled with cement. It 
 is better to shorten the pivot somewhat and make it thicker, 
 and depend for anchorage only on the lower part of the 
 canal. 
 
 !N'ow put the foundation in its position in the mouth, 
 (upper jaw, for example), and take an impression of the 
 whole upper jaw in modeling compound ; also take an im- 
 pression of the whole lower jaw. l^ext remove the foun- 
 dation, and place it with great care exactly in its i)roper 
 matrix in the impression just taken, then stay it to the 
 modeling compound with wax in two or three places ; be 
 careful not to move it with the wax-knife, dry the pivots 
 and band on the inside, and cover the pivots with a film of 
 wax ; also run a film of wax around the band on the inside, 
 but be sure to remove all Avax from the edge of the band, 
 because we want that to rest firmly on the plaster. Now fill 
 the impression with plaster to make a model. 
 
 After separating the model, remove the crown-founda- 
 tion from the model by making a hole, usually on the pala- 
 tal surface, with a pocket-knife, through the plaster to the 
 apical end of the pivot. ISTow place the model and founda- 
 tion in hot water, and with a little pressure on the end of 
 the pivot the whole foundation is easily removed. Syringe 
 out all wax from the model and foundation, and replace the 
 foundation on the model. 
 
 ISText make the stamp for a grinding surface ; use for 
 this pure gold, 34 American gage. The molar or bicuspid 
 stamp is made in the usual way by placing the pure gold, 
 always well annealed, on a piece of lead and striking a few 
 light blows on the die, which gives a perfect grinding surface. 
 
 ISText trim ofif all surplus gold. The cusps are next 
 filled with 22k. solder. The reason we use 22k. solder is, 
 when we fill in the whole space between the grinding-sur- 
 face and the foundation with 20k. solder, there is no dauger 
 of the ■22k. being melted out of the cusps, and consequently 
 no dauger of having an air-bubble just under the grinding 
 surface of No. 34 pure gold, which, of course, would make 
 itself visible after a few days' use. 
 
162 DEPARTMENT C. 
 
 Having taken a full impression of both upper and lower 
 jaws, we are able to get an absolutely correct articulation. 
 We now add wax to the foundation, which can be removed 
 from the plaster, till we get an exact articulation wdth the 
 pure-gold grinding surface. After having gotten this with 
 hard wax so that it may be manipulated without disturbing its 
 position, w^e continue to build out the tooth to its anatom- 
 ically correct contour w4th wax, frequently trying it in place. 
 After the foundation is removed from the plaster, the plaster 
 is cut away from between the foundation and the adjoining 
 teeth without disturbing the plaster on which the band 
 rests. When this plaster is removed, Avax is added up to 
 the very edge of the band, so that the entire anatomical 
 contour can be restored with gold, including even that of the 
 enamel chipped oif at the cervical margin. The w^ax tooth 
 should always be tried in the mouth, to be sure that CA^ery- 
 thino- pertaining to form, contour, and position is just right. 
 This was the object of removing the foundation from the 
 plaster model at the outset, as it is a great advantage and 
 particularly^ so with facings, to always just at this time trj^ 
 the tooth in the mouth. 
 
 Kow from a piece of tin foil (No. 60) a model is cut so 
 as to fit the wax exactly. We cut the gold on the palatal 
 surface from the height of foundation, thereby enabling us 
 to join the free ends at the cervico-palatal surface. The 
 large ends of gold we turn out and back, so as to stay it in 
 the investment of plaster and marble-dust. The gold can be 
 cut a little long, so as to allow of bringing the cervical ends 
 together. This cervical margin is very important. This 
 gold band must fit just under the edge of the grinding-sur- 
 face stamp, and in perfect contact with it, so as not to allow 
 the grinding surface to move. This little thickness of pure 
 gold, ISTo. 34 American gage, must be allowed for when we 
 wax up the tooth. 
 
 Now we have the wax tooth thoroughly boxed in, ex- 
 cepting the palatal surface. Before taking the next step, be 
 sure that the pure gold band for boxing is in contact with 
 the cervical margin of the foundation band. At the point 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 163 
 
 of junction here, and at the grmding surface, place a little 
 wax, and then cut all possible surplus away, leavino; only 
 the very junction filled ; also be sure no wax gets on the in- 
 side of the cervical margin of the foundation band. Now 
 place the tooth in water and invest it in plaster and marble- 
 dust, covering the whole tooth except the palatal surface of 
 the crown; the plaster must just cover the narrow gold 
 joined at the cervical margin. After the plaster sets, boil 
 out the wax and cut the investment as small as possible, 
 leaving the plaster only about one-eighth of an inch all 
 around. JSTow dry thoroughly, but not in contact with a 
 flame; have something — a top of a tin box for instance — 
 between the flame and the tooth. After it is dry, place it 
 in the flame of a small Bunsen burner. To hasten the heat- 
 ing-up process, a foot blow-pipe may be used to get it red-hot 
 very quicklj^, but, nevertheless, the heating-up is to be done 
 cautiously, and during this time we still have the little 
 Bunsen flame under it. N'ow, by applying the flame of the 
 Knapp blow-pipe, the gold flows with the greatest ease in all 
 parts and in all directions, like melted butter. Here we use 
 20k. solder. We about half fill the molar with gold, usino- 
 borax as a flux, before we use the Knapp blow-pipe. 
 
 It should be observed that we have the solder almost to 
 the melting point, everything is red-hot, and a hot flame 
 beneath the investment, so that when we gently apply the 
 Knapp blow-pipe flame the gold simply drops, and while in 
 this molten condition we add the rest of the solder, never 
 allowing it to cool for one moment, for if it does air bubbles 
 will result. Here the gold boxing band at the cervico-pala 
 tal margin does its work beautifully ; the gold flows freely 
 all around, with no danger of solder running inside the 
 foundation from the palatal side. The plaster and marble- 
 dust should always be worked as stifif as possible, so as to 
 always have the gold in contact with plaster, which will 
 not be the case if the investment is mixed thin. The ne- 
 cessity of having everything firmly held, so that the gold 
 solder will not pull it in and change the entire shape of the 
 crown, becomes, evident when the large amount of solder 
 
164 DEPAETMENT C. 
 
 used is considered. This being a solid crown, we put it in 
 water to cool it, and next in sulfuric acid very dilute, and 
 gently heat it to remove adhering oxid. IN'ow we can shape 
 the gold to anatomically correct contour lines, and bring the 
 cervical margin down to a feather-edge, so that w^hen again 
 placed on the root we have an absolute junction without a 
 lodging-place for acids, and the whole tooth restored to a 
 state of perfection. — LeHand N. T. Shields, in Cosmos. 
 
 280. Removable Bridge. — In the anterior teeth we 
 utilize only the root, trimming down in the ordinary manner 
 for setting a Richmond crown, Avith one exception, and this 
 is the advisability of slanting the root frofn the labial to the 
 lingual surface, to allow of as high a ledge in the rear as 
 circumstances will permit, trimming the band on the labial 
 surface to almost the gum margin. ISText we solder a flat 
 cap over the band and trim down the edges accurate]}^ We 
 next enlarge our pulp canal as large as possible to still retain 
 suflicient strength, and turn our attention to the pin, which 
 is made of either gold clasp metal or platinum and gold. 
 Taking a heavy wire, bend about double, and inverting 
 the loop end down, add 20 or 22k. gold to the loop by 
 melting till we have quite a ball or knob as large as 
 the top of our root will admit, trimming this pin up to 
 loosely fit the root. We next make a tube of JSTo. 30 plat- 
 inum to fit the pin accurately, soldering the tube with pure 
 gold. Puncturing the cap of one root protection we drive the 
 pin and pin-covering through as far in the root as possible. 
 We will have a little surplus of the platinum sheath or tube, 
 which we split in several places and burnish down to the 
 cap. Next carefully removing the pin to not displace the 
 tube, we remove the root protection with the tube, and 
 invest upside down, being careful to fill the tube with 
 the investment, and thereby keep the solder out, heat- 
 ing up the investment solder altogether. We now proceed 
 to make a Richmond crown for the platinum covering of 
 the root, being careful not to let the band impinge on the 
 gum, as its removal and subsequent replacement a number 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 165 
 
 of times daily would start up a serious gum irritation. We 
 do not consider the pin at all in making the crown, but 
 make it pinless, and when the whole piece is complete trim 
 the top of the pin to a round center, and thread in your 
 screw plate, and place in the root tube, drop a piece of wax 
 in the center of the crown, press to place. This will mark 
 the position of the pnn, and allow you to take a drill the size 
 of the screw and drill a hole in the crown, and then thread 
 the hole same as the pin. "We can now screw our pin in and 
 rivet at the top, and an}^ subsequent repairs made with very 
 little inconvenience. 
 
 In the posterior attachment we allow the inner band of 
 platinum to extend nearly as high as the natural tooth was, 
 leaving only sufficient space between the band and articulat- 
 ing teeth to allow of quite a heavy solid gold cap, capping 
 the band in the usual manner, flat. Make the pin as heavy 
 as possible and cover with the tube as described for the 
 anterior crowns. 
 
 "With the exception that we make the ball at the top 
 much heavier and the pins separated much more, and make 
 a partition wall in our tube to fit between the two prongs of 
 the pin, proceed to connect the tube and root covering as 
 described, and, after polishing, set with cement to place. I 
 neglected to state that this tooth covering should always be 
 made smaller at the top than at the gam margin. 
 
 "We next make a telescope crown of 20 or 22k. gold 
 to fit this inner platinum sheaf, trimming ofl" flat at the 
 top, and next mold a solid gold cap to make a thorough 
 articulation with the corresponding teeth. 
 
 A very nice method of obtaining a perfect articula- 
 tion being to pound a bullet in your die-plate, on the tooth 
 you desire, file flat and lay on top the cap, and allow tlie 
 patient to close the jaws firmly. The opposite teeth will press 
 in the lead easily, and allow you to trim down with a knife. 
 
 When perfect, drop a little sticky wax on a round stick 
 and place the lead on it, and proceed to mold your cap in 
 the cuttle-fish bone as usual. By this method you have no 
 grinding of the cap after finished. 
 
166 
 
 DEPARTMENT C. 
 
 Soldering the cap now to the telescope band, we have 
 onr anchor complete, with the exception of the pin in the 
 cap, which we screw and rivet to place. 
 
 We are now ready to consider the attachment of the 
 intervening or bridge teeth. Here we are allowed a variety ot 
 methods. The only stipulation I would make is that the gum 
 should be saddled to allow it to assist in standing the strain. 
 
 We can swage a rim of gold to fit the gum quickly by 
 taking a plaster impression and drying out ; flow in fusible 
 metal and proceed to burnish the rim to place, which can 
 readily be done by annealing a few times. Soldering the 
 saddle to the two anchors, and a few cleats on the saddle, 
 proceed to vulcanize the teeth to the saddle in the ordinary 
 manner of attaching to a gold plate. 
 
 Again, in the lower jaw, we make a very inexpensive 
 case by attaching the dummies together with Watt's metal, 
 and soft solder this to the two anchors. 
 
 Again, by simply soldering a strong bar of gold or plat- 
 inum between the two anchors — vulcanize the teeth between. 
 
 If you want more elaborate and extensive work, swage 
 your rim, back your teeth and solder to the saddle, rim the 
 labial surface, and you have a whole gold case. — Yan Fossen. 
 
 281. New Porcelain Crown. — The accompanying il- 
 lustration shows an easy but strong way of constructing a 
 crown. A good strong screw is an- 
 chored in the root in the usual way 
 and snipped off to suit the articulation 
 of the occluding tooth ; then a thin 
 ~T^ tubing of iridio-platinum is slipped 
 down over this screw, and a piece of 
 thin platinum (K) of sufficient size to 
 slightly more than cover the end of the 
 root, with small hole cut in the center, 
 is slipped down over the tubing, and 
 burnished to nicely fit the root and 
 over the edges, and caught to the tubing 
 with a little plaster and sand ; when hard, slip the two off 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 167 
 
 together, in their relative positions, and solder. Place them 
 "back again on the root, the soldering process having softened 
 the metal, complete the burnishing to a nicety, and get an 
 impression in plaster with tubing and plate in position. Be- 
 fore filling the impression place a piece of German silver wire 
 in the tubing, of sufficient size to fit snugly, leaving the end 
 projecting one-half to three-fourths of an inch — this to pre- 
 vent the disturbing of the tube or crushing it in bending 
 the pins in tooth (H), around it ; from this impression you pro- 
 cure a model with the tubing in exact position. Now grind 
 and fit the artificial tooth (H) to this, wax fast, invest, bend 
 pins around the tubing, and solder. Having removed the 
 German silver wire, the enlarged portion of the tube at the 
 grinding surface to receive the circular nut (J) is made by 
 using a larger piece of tubing, and placed in the proper 
 position after the first baking, and the body placed about 
 it to hold while baking, and the second baking completes 
 the crown, as shown in cut (H); the artificial tooth, and (I) 
 the porcelain added. This when cemented to the screw and 
 root, and the nut driven home while the cement is still in a 
 yielding condition, makes a very strong and substantial 
 crown. — E. C. Moore, D.D.S., in Archives of Dentistry. 
 
 282. Crown Holder. — A handy contrivance for hold- 
 ing a shell crown while filing, shaping, etc. Take a piece ot 
 round wood of suitable length and size ; melt and drip on 
 the end a few drops of sealing wax. When desired for use, 
 warm the crown and force it in the wax. The crown can 
 thus be held firmly and will not get out of shape. — Wm. IT. 
 Steele. 
 
 283. A New Crown Band. — A new method in making 
 a band. Use platinum gage 30 to 36: the band is made 
 wider than necessary after it has been fitted and soldered 
 with pure gold, the portion projecting beyond the end of the 
 root is clipped and bent over, so as to cover the end, being 
 neatly malleted with a plugger, to properly fit the root. It 
 can then be soldered to any pin-tooth by simply pressing the 
 
168 DEPARTMENT C. 
 
 pin through the platina, orit can also be used without solder- 
 ing it to the tooth, as the cement will hold it in place. — Dr. 
 E. Parmley Brown, in Items. 
 
 284. Alloy Crowns. — Prepare the canals as carefully 
 as for any crown ; firmly anchor two Howe screw posts (with ' 
 
 cement) in the roots, having them long enough 
 so they will extend to within 1-16 inch of the 
 articulating surface of the crown (Fig. 2). Now 
 fit to the roots a thin platinum band, which 
 3 " should be wide enough on the buccal portion to 
 
 reach above the posts. Xext, before the band is perma- 
 nently adjusted, scflder to it a T-shaped bar [see sectional 
 view of band 3], and solder to band as shown in cut; this 
 should be long enough to embrace both screw posts. Be sure 
 that the band fits the tooth closely in all parts, just below 
 the gum-line ; then set it firmly in position, with the T 
 grasping the screw posts. 'Now mix about one- third enough 
 "white gold and platina alloy" for the crown; do not 
 squeeze out too dry. Begin filling by working the alloy well 
 in around the edges, around the posts, and cross bar. !N^ext 
 mix enough alloy to complete the crown, squeeze as dry of 
 mercury as possible, and complete the work (Fig. 1). At a 
 subsequent sitting, thoroughly dress, and polish the entire 
 crown. — William H. Steele, in Dental Tribune. 
 
 285. Bridge for Close Bite. — Perhaps the simplest ex- 
 pression of the bridge is the one constructed of solid gold. 
 Where the bite is close, there is nothing that acts so well for 
 strength and cleanliness as a bridge of this character. 
 
 We will take, for illustration, the lower jaw, as we sel- 
 dom make them for the upper. Having prepared the indi- 
 vidual solid-gold crowns previously described, place them in 
 position on the roots and take an impression of the whole 
 jaw. Place the crowns in their matrices in the impression 
 and stay them to place with wax. Pour the model with 
 plaster and marble-dust. You now have the crowns firmly 
 held in position. Take also an impression of the upper 
 
USEFUL HIXTS. 169 
 
 jaw, place the models together, and you will have an exact 
 articulation. ISText make the grind ing-surface stamps for 
 the teeth to serve as dummies, and fill in these with 22k. 
 solder. From a piece of !N"o. 60 tin foil cut a pattern for 
 a pure gold floor. Place this gold far enough away from 
 the gum to allow for convenient cleansing. This gold floor 
 should exactly fit the space between the abutments of the 
 bridge. Also have enouo-h thickness between this floor and 
 the superior teeth for strength. Stay the floor with hard 
 wax to the crowds to be used as abutments, flowing the wax 
 above and below the floor at its attachments to them. 'Now 
 place the grinding-surface stamps in position, getting the 
 proper articulation by raising them and filling in with wax. 
 "Wax up accurately to form, and place a strip of pure gold 
 along either the buccal or the lingual surface. Do not fail 
 to have the stamps cut with projecting edges on the buccal 
 and lingual surfaces for the purpose of staying them in the 
 plaster investment, which will prevent their falling. Also 
 leave the edge of the floor somewhat exposed, so that it will 
 not rise luhen soldered. The gold strip which was placed on 
 either the lingual or buccal surface, as the case may be, 
 answers a valuable purpose if nicely adjusted, not only to 
 make the gold flow in all parts, but to hold the floor and 
 stamps exactly in position. 
 
 The adjustment of this strip depends on the side 
 chosen for the soldering. It is to be applied to the buccal 
 side if the soldering is done lingually, or vice versa. Now 
 cut the plaster away, except that which holds the bridge, 
 make a ring, and invest in plaster and marble-dust. Roughen 
 the plaster model and soak it in water before investing any 
 further, to secure a firm attachment of the investment added 
 to the model. Next wash out the wax with boiling water 
 and dry thoroughly. As the crowns are soldered with 
 20k. solder, the entire space between the crown stamps 
 and the fioor must be soldered with 18k. The solder flows 
 in the position occupied by the wax, which was placed 
 above and below the pure gold floor in staying it to the 
 abutments, and it will finish like the inside 'of a watch- 
 
170 DEPARTMENT C. 
 
 case. The bridge here described will give permanent ser- 
 vice and be altogether comfortable. We use this method 
 where the bite is close and where porcelain facings would 
 be neither necessary nor expedient. — Extract Cosmos. 
 
 286. To Enlarge Hole in Pivot Crowns. — To drill or 
 enlarge the hole in pivot crowns, I use a copper mandrel with 
 corundum powder and glycerin. — G. Y. Beacock,in Domin- 
 ion Journal. 
 
 287. To Make Natural Crown Dies. — As you meet 
 with a patient, or one possessing a complete set of natural 
 teeth, of medium size and normal development, beg the 
 privilege of an impression of both jaws in modeling com- 
 pound. Make a plaster cast of each, and trim so that dupli- 
 cates can be made in zinc or hard brass counters in lead or 
 tinner's solder. From these dies gold caps can be swaged,. 
 anatomically correct for every tooth. Two or three of these 
 cheap dies, will meet almost every requirement. — W. S. Elli- 
 ott, in Items. 
 
 288. Porcelain Tips. — A porcelain tip made from a 
 plate- tooth, properly selected as to color, ground to fit the 
 edge of the natural tooth in such manner as to give the pro- 
 per outward appearance, a platina pin fitted to extend up 
 in the roots and attached to the porcelain tips, the palatal 
 surface filled in to proper contour with backing, and solder 
 or porcelain body baked on them, the tooth cavities filled 
 with gutta-percha, and the tips heated and pressed home 
 have given me good satisfaction. This I feel to be a con- 
 servative operation much preferred to cutting off the whole 
 crown down to the roots, and crowning by any of the methods 
 usually employed. — Gr. Y. I. Brown, in Review. 
 
 289. Crown Holder and Pin Protector. — In the 
 process of grinding the neck of the Logan crown to adapt 
 it to the root, one is apt to grind also the pin. To avoid 
 this I place over the pin a tube like that of the nut- 
 driver (Dr. Howe's pattern) shown in the accompany- 
 ing cut. The crown is held on the thumb with the 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 
 
 171 
 
 forefinger over the end of the tube, which protects the pin 
 from chance contact with the engine corundum wheel while 
 the crown is being ground in the usual way.— F. A. Roy, 
 M.D., D.D.S., in Cosmos. 
 
 290. Cutting Off Teeth For Crowning.— A rapid and 
 easy method of cutting off teeth preparatory to mounting 
 crowns, is to open in the pulp canal ; then with a sharp 
 oval bur revolved by the engine, cut from within, outward, 
 on the line with the gum margin, rotating the hand piece, so 
 as to cut equally as possible in every direction from the 
 pulp canal. Most of the after-work on the end of the root 
 can be done more rapidly with this bur, than with stones.— 
 W. T. Martin, D.D.S. 
 
 291. Burning Holes in Crowns.— Some one complains 
 that in preparing one of the Rynear's crowns he burnt a 
 hole through the gold in trying to spread the solder. Those 
 who are familiar with the use of gold solder on gold will 
 know this is possible with any solder and gold. For in- 
 stance, when solder flows within the Rynear crown, at a 
 point where it is not desired, and a further effort is made to 
 displace it by reheating, so that it will flow to the place 
 originally intended, the effort will be futile; for the solder 
 having once flowed becomes a part of the crown itself, and, 
 to flow again, it must of necessity result in the melting of 
 the portion of the crown to which it has been attached.^ 
 Items. 
 
 292. Rubber Porcelain Crown. — This is, as far as I 
 know, original with myself; but be that as it may, it makes 
 but little difference, the crown has given good satisfaction 
 where it has been tested. For purpose of illustration, 
 we will take a lower molar. When the canals have been 
 properly cleansed and prepared, trim and shape the root 
 as for any other band crown. Then take measurement 
 with binding wire, and make a narrow gold or platnia 
 band. (Figure 1.) Adjust the band to the tooth ; it should 
 
172 DEPARTMENT C. 
 
 be a good close fit and extend ju3t below the free margin 
 of the gum. Fill the band with wax, keep it dry and 
 
 take a bite. In removino; the bite, 
 the band should come away with 
 it ; but if it does not, replace in its 
 position in the wax, and mount in 
 the articulator in such a way as to 
 retain the band in place after the wax 
 bite is removed. When the plaster 
 sets, warm and remove wax. With base-plate wax for the 
 body, and a porcelain cusp (Fig. 2), for the articulating sur- 
 face, build a perfect crown. When shaped to suit, take the 
 model carefully from the articulator, being careful to keep all 
 in proper position. Flask the model, so it will open, with 
 porcelain cusp in one-half of flask, and band in the other ; 
 wash out the wax and pack with Ash-white, or the pure un- 
 colored rubber, and vulcanize. This crown can be mounted 
 either with posts fixed in the roots, or with posts vulcanized 
 in the crown. If the former, set the posts in the roots per- 
 manently, and with a bur cut a place in the rubber crown to 
 receive them, and mount with cement as usual. If to be 
 mounted with fixed posts, the posts should be placed in 
 position, removed with bite and band ; flasked and vulcan- 
 ized in the crown. Fig. 3 shows the crown comj^lete and 
 mounted. — Wm. H. Steele, in 0. Dental Journal. 
 
 293. Preparing Root for Crown. — In preparing a root 
 for a porcelain-faced crown I have been much pleased in the 
 use of a little instrument devised by Dr. Taggart, and that 
 is an ordinary fissure bur with a round shoulder soldered 
 just far enough down to give required width of gold band. 
 This is for the purpose of cutting through the alveolus on 
 the proximal sides of the root, thus permitting the band, 
 when made, to extend further up under the free margin of 
 the gum, and when the crown is completed no gold whatever 
 is in sight. — A. W. McCandless, in Ohio Journal. 
 
 294. Narrow Bridges. — In a great many narrow 
 bridges, where you want a very little plate, but still a very 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 
 
 173 
 
 stiff appliance, a large flow of solder over a platinum and 
 iridium wire, finished round or half-round, makes a very 
 stifl:" and rigid plate. — Dr. Moffat, in 0. Journal. 
 
 295. Band Attachments for Bridges. — When a bridge- 
 piece is to be attached to an anterior tooth, the crown of 
 which is so sound that excision and crowning are not justi- 
 fiable, I make a baud as described in the accompanying 
 illustration : 
 
 Fig. A represents a cuspid, to which I wish to anchor 
 one end of my piece. B, the same with cusp squared and 
 sides ground to receive the band. The dotted lines repre- 
 senting the band fitted at the neck of the tooth. The labial 
 side cut out, and the sides and back extending so far below 
 the cutting edge that when the ends XX (Fig. E) are bent 
 in they will exactly meet at G. 
 
 Fig. E shows the palatal side of the band, properly cut 
 for correct adaptation. The ends XX are gently malleted 
 to position, using long handle plugger (Xo. 304) and lead 
 mallet. YY are then bent and malleted forward to overlap 
 the ends XX, and Z to overlap all. 
 
 The band is now carefully removed and large pieces of 
 20k. gold solder are placed over the joints on tlie inner side 
 and fused in the flame of a spirit lamp, the solder sinking 
 and leaving the inner surface of the band comparatively 
 smooth. Contour the outside with a small, fine, corundum 
 wheel, and you will have a beautiful shell or semi-cap shown 
 at Figs. F, C and Gr, useful alike on incisors or cuspids. In 
 preparing the tooth, grind cusp and sides, part way up, 
 square. Cut out labial side of band so as to leave the ends 
 
174 DEPARTMENT C. 
 
 XX extended slightly forward of the labio-cutting corners. 
 Split the band, between X and Y, at the palato -cutting cor- 
 ners and a trifle above the end of the tooth. Make the " Y," 
 at the back, full wide ; because the flap Z will cover any 
 :space. — Grant Mitchell, D.D.S., in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 296. Fitting Post Crowns. — I have found it an advan- 
 tage in making a close joint in the mouth, to place on the 
 pin a disk of tin plate, then driving the tooth to place, the 
 jjoint of contact is indicated on the disk, and the crown can 
 he ground accordingly. — H. Lowry, in Review. 
 
 297. To Repair Bridges Without Soldering. — In re- 
 pairing broken porcelains in bridge-work without soldering, 
 'drill holes through the backing from the front, and counter- 
 sink the palatal surface; then, with a special instrument a 
 •screw thread is cut on the pins of the porcelain facing, and 
 the same securely held, when placed in position, by imts on 
 the countersunk side. — Dr. T. A. Bryant, in Ohio Dental 
 Journal. 
 
 298. Fitting Collars for Crowns. — Take single-rooted 
 teeth, to which a porcelain-faced crown is to be attached. 
 We would, before attempting to trim the root, shorten it 
 :almost as much as necessary, and then with safe-sided files, 
 sandpaper, disks, corundum points, and the various forms of 
 scrapers give the root the desired shape. "With Wo. 34 soft 
 iron wire now take an accurate measure of the root. From 
 this a band can be made, and if we have remembered the 
 ■shape of the measure as it came from the tooth, it can be 
 made to proximate the desired shape with slender pliers. 
 This can now be forced on the stump, and such portions as 
 would go too far under the gum can be cut away, so that it 
 •extends beneath the gingival at every point alike ; and if the 
 root has been properly shaped, the extreme edge of the crown 
 will fi,t the closest. The stump and band may now both be 
 ground down together, using a stone that will cut the proxi- 
 mal sides as well as throusfh the center of the tooth.. The 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 175 
 
 reason for not shortening the stump to the necessary height 
 at the start is that the difficulty of an accurate measure 
 would be greatly increased. 
 
 The procedure in fitting the band for an all-gold crown 
 is necessarily much the same, though itis well to contour the 
 band till there is sufficient knuckle to touch the adjoining 
 teeth after the crown is finished, thereby preserving the 
 interdental space. 
 
 One word more about the preparation for gold crowns 
 of teeth which need little or no trimming, as they taper from 
 gum to grinding surface. Something more than the thick- 
 ness of the collar should be cut from the buccal surface of 
 the tooth, and after the collar is properly fitted, small Y- 
 shaped pieces may be clipped from the end that is to be closed, 
 and the edges of the gaps brought together so as to touch. 
 These will easily solder up as the grinding surface is being 
 attached. In this way glaring gold will be less conspicuous. 
 
 In cases of molar teeth, where there is enough recession 
 to expose the depression between the roots, a groove may be 
 cut from depression to grinding surface that will permit us 
 to bend in the collar with pliers, out of the mouth, and then 
 put it in place. If the teeth are too sensitive for this, 24k. 
 gold may be used for the band, as this can the more easily 
 be burnished in the depressions as the crown is being set. 
 
 Would that I could always make such accurate fits, like 
 f5ome whom I have heard discuss this subject, that a piece of 
 silk would not catch on the edge of the collar. Many bands 
 go too far under the gum, and if we err either way it would 
 be better for the tooth if the collar stopped just a little 
 short than to go too far. 
 
 The farther we get beneath the gum the harder it is, 
 generally, to obtain good adaptation, and the more liable are 
 we to have the band standing off" at some point, thereby be- 
 coming a constant source of irritation, and, as a consequence, 
 in a short time there is the swelling and tenderness charac- 
 teristic of the pinched gum pedicle, and we being unable to 
 relieve this permanently without removing the cause, our 
 work is likely to prove anything but a joy. 
 
176 
 
 DEPARTMEKT C. 
 
 Wherever collars or partial crowns are used for the sup- 
 port of bridge-work, the less of the tooth that is covered, to 
 secure the necessary strength, the better it is for that tooth. 
 
 Too much cannot be said in condemnation of lettins: 
 such collars extend beneath the gum like ordinary crowns, 
 to become, in a short time, a source of irritation by jumping' 
 up and down on the teeth. For instance, a gap on the upper 
 jaw, extending from the first molar to a sound cuspid. On 
 the attachment to the molar all are agreed, but when it 
 comes to the cuspid there is a diversity of opinion. A per- 
 fect-fitting collar, slightly broader on its lingual than its 
 labial surface, extending just to the largest portion of the 
 tooth, is indicated almost every time. These may be made 
 by burnishing a piece of gold directly on the tooth which 
 has been previously pinched around it by flat-nosed pliers, 
 taking out small pieces where it is inclined to pucker. But 
 what looks to be a better way is to make a perfect die of the 
 tooth, and around this shape the collar to fit. — W. K. Slater, 
 in Headlight. 
 
 299. Moving Roots Before Crowning, — This is a de- 
 vice by Dr. Sillito for regulating, or changing the position 
 of a root that was to be crowned. The device consisted of a 
 small piano-wire spring, anchored to the root, by means of a 
 Howe screw post, and exerting pressure on the adjoining 
 tooth in the direction desired. 
 
 The particular case on which Dr. Sillito used the ap- 
 pliance is illustrated by Fig. 1. 
 A central incisor root -which 
 crowded the adjoining central 
 was to be crowned ; the lateral 
 was missing and the space par- 
 tially filled by the cuspid com- 
 ing forward. To crown the root 
 in its crowded position would 
 have necessitated grinding the 
 mesialface of the central. To ob- 
 viate this. Dr. Sillito inserted a ^i 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 177 
 
 Howe screw post (b) in the root's canal; cut off the screw 
 head, and constructed a small spnng (a). The drawing shows 
 the appliance in position. By this means he succeeded in 
 .moving the root to the position desired. — Ohio Denial 
 Journal. 
 
 300. An Original Bicuspid Crown. — The following 
 way of making a permanent crown (porcelain) for broken- 
 down bicuspids is original with me : 
 
 Prepare root as in Richmond crown ; fit band and solder 
 top on it, making a small cap over root. Punch a hole in 
 this cap large enough to allow the pin of a Logan bicuspid 
 crown to enter. Grind porcelain to set close to cap, making 
 a good joint, then solder in place. Mount as a Richmond. 
 You have a strong, artistic piece of work. — J. Harbin Pallock, 
 D.D.S., in Items. 
 
 301. Setting a Genese Crown. — Prepare the root and 
 canal in the usual manner, take an impression so as to obtain 
 a model that will give accurate articulation. 
 
 Fig. 1. Choose the crown suited in form and color to the 
 
 case. Select a post (Fig. 1) that will fit the canal 
 easily and tightly. Having the model prepared, grind 
 the crown to fit the root and articulate with the oppo- 
 post. site tooth. 
 
 Fill the apex of the root with any substance which 
 the operator has found to be the most serviceable, to pre- 
 vent the cement from being forced through the apex. Place 
 the post in the canal and try the crown on the root with the 
 post in position ; if the post be too long file it off till the 
 platinum lining of the crown and the post touch with the 
 tooth in the desired position. 
 
 Dry the tooth and post. Fill the platinum cup in the 
 tooth with Fowler's Sticky Wax. Warm the post, tap it 
 in place in the tooth, and finally adjust as you desire. Cool 
 the tooth with water, so as to harden the wax in the cavity, 
 and then carefully remove the tooth and post. 
 
178 
 
 DEPARTMENT C. 
 
 Mix any investing material, press the tooth in it, and 
 
 with it cover the tooth, except the cavity, letting the holder 
 
 ^^'^- -• (Fig. 2) support the tooth invested in 
 
 [Hiii k . ^^^ the lower part, .the end of the post 
 
 lilii^ "^^llil^ ^^^^ investing material over it, the post 
 
 and tooth will be held securely in place. 
 This will leave the end of the tooth 
 
 Fig. 3. 
 
 Tooth invested, 
 sbOAVing use of holder. 
 
 Copper Holder. 
 
 as illustrated in Fig. 3 
 and post clear to view. 
 
 When the investment is dry, j^our boil- 
 ing water over the wax, to remove it from 
 the cavity, which should then be clean and 
 dry. Add the flux. Put thhi strips of 
 solder around the post touching the plati- 
 num lining. Gradually heat the investment, 
 and when thoroughly dry, solder. 
 
 When the crown and post are ready for 
 cementing in position, dry the root canal. Rub up some 
 amalgam dry ; mix a sufficient quantity of oxyphosphate of 
 zinc; add to this an equal bulk of the amalgam and work 
 up together. This will give a slow setting cement of great 
 density, and one impervious to moisture. 
 
 These teeth will not crack on rapid cooling, and are 
 ready for inserting five minutes after soldering. They may 
 be ground in any form, and repolished. 
 
 The post may be barbed, and it may be found" advan- 
 tageous to insert a wooden point in a plugger or any 
 mallet, and with it give a few taps, which will drive home 
 the crown securely, and in the right direction. 
 
 A frail root can be successfully crowned by 
 using a disk of gold or platinum cut in star 
 shape with a center hole slipped over the post 
 and soldered in place (Fig. 4). This will 
 steady the post and crown without undue 
 pressure on the sides. The fine part of the 
 pL^itton.'^^^^^'^ '" P^^^ ^i^^ reach the apex, and the collar will sup- 
 B-sectioiiai^v^WpQ^^ the base of the root. The openings in the 
 ^rts t'he^post^^' collar will allow the escape of surplus cement. 
 
 Fig. 4. 
 
 A B 
 
 A. — Frail root with 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 179 
 
 A band (Fig. 5), can be put on these crowns in the 
 shortest space, having no overlays on the crowns, 3'et soldered 
 so thoroughly as to leave no weak point or space for entrance 
 of moisture. 
 
 If desired to band instead of pivot, fit the ^^^'J' 
 
 band to root, having the crown adapted also. 
 (ISTo need of the band overlapping the crown.) 
 
 Take a plain disk of soft platinum or gold 
 larger than the root, place it over the end of i^—crojn banded. 
 
 " ' ■•- _ B — Sectional view 
 
 the crown and burnish it on, puucturino; the "f ,A< showing 
 
 ' J- o platinum cup. 
 
 center and turning it in the platina cup. The 
 
 band is then placed on and waxed in position, invested, 
 
 and the band, disk and tooth soldered together. 
 
 When trimmed up, the lower edge of the band is flush 
 with the top edge of the tooth, leaving the crown clear of 
 metal, and only the narrowest band required on the root, 
 with no possibility of moisture entering the space. 
 
 If the root canal is curved, use flexible drills for cleaning. 
 Anneal the pivot post, apply a little vaselin, and gently tap 
 it in place ; it will conform to the direction of the canal, 
 and can be withdrawn for soldering. 
 
 If the platinum lining is filled with wax before grind- 
 ing it prevents moisture or dirt from getting in it ; and 
 when warmed for fixing, the post is sure to be held tightly 
 in position. 
 
 By making the investment high, it becomes easj^ to 
 direct the flame around the tooth, making it hottest flrst, 
 thereb}' forcing the flow of the solder in the cup. — Items. 
 
 [I consider this one of our best all porcelain crowns. — • 
 Author.] 
 
 802. The Downey Crown. — The process of making is 
 as follows : The tooth root is prepared as for a Richmond 
 crown, and a band of platinum fitted to the root and sol- 
 dered with pure gold. 
 
 The band is made wide enough to project a little beyond 
 the end of the root, as shown in cut. Fig. a ; the dotted lines 
 representing location of end of root. The platinum band is 
 
180 DEPAKTMBNT C. 
 
 then notched, as represented at 6, replaced on the root and 
 the protudin^ points bent in and burnished over the end of 
 the prepared root, as represented at c. A tooth of suitable 
 
 size, shape and shade is next selected (either an ordinary 
 vulcanite tooth, or a so-called plate-tooth may be used), and 
 an iridio-platinum pin, to extend in root canal, is fastened 
 to the tooth by bending tooth pins around it. This is rep- 
 resented at d. The band and tooth are then adjusted to the 
 root, and sticky wax used to hold the parts in position. 
 Band and all are then removed from root. Fig./, invested as 
 usual (powdered silex being preferable to marble dust), wax 
 thoroughly boiled out, porcelain body applied, molded to 
 shape of crown desired, and baked. The porcelain enamel is 
 extended over the band so that when completed it is one of 
 the most cleanly and natural looking crowns made. This 
 same method may be employed for anchoring bridges. — Dr. 
 L. L. Barber, in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 303. Hint on Anchoring Bridges. — Where I have used 
 a metal cap for the anchorage of a bridge at one end, instead 
 of cementing the bridge in at the other end, supported by a 
 cuspid, for instance, I have cut the tooth and put in a very 
 hard gald-filling, making just a little depression. Drill a 
 little cavity in the cuspid, and pack the gokl very hard; 
 countersink ; point, and let it rest right in there. There is 
 no chance of its decaying the tooth. It has worked very 
 nicely in every case that I have tried. — F. A. Peeso, in 
 Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 304. Perfect Occluding Gold Crowns. — Often cases 
 present that irregularity of occlusion which renders the 
 ordinary use of the various dies in the market useless. 
 Among the various expedients in such cases the following 
 rbay suffice : 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 181 
 
 Fit the band to root and trim on the occluding edges, 
 with flat file, to line where side walls begin to curve on 
 occluding surface. Return band to root and fill to overflow- 
 ing with plaster of Paris well-mixed, so as to set quickly. 
 Have patient close teeth together naturally. When plaster is 
 hard, remove band and trim, so as to make presentable sur- 
 face retaining the imprint of the occluding cusps. Use this 
 model for making an impression in Mellotte's Moldine, from 
 which make a fusible metal die. Perfectly adjust to the 
 band, the resulting swaged cap, and solder. Finish. Aperfect 
 occluding crown will be the final result. ' 
 
 Another Way. — Fill band with moldine or plaster and 
 proceed to get " bite " as before, then insert this model, in 
 fusible metal almost cold, and drive gold-plate in this mold 
 with lead.— W. H. Whitslar, M.D., D.D.S., in Ohio Dental 
 Journal. 
 
 305. Crowns Where Roots are Missing. — The inser- 
 tion of a crown where the root is missing ; without a plate; 
 clasps; destroying nerves in adjoining teeth, or resorting to 
 modern bridge-work, may seem hard to accomplish, but can 
 be done in the following manner: A gold-plate is swedged 
 to cover the space and made long enough to lap well over on 
 labial and palatine surfaces of the gum. Prongs are then 
 soldered to the sides of the plate opposite the adjoining teeth, 
 and the post for the crown in its proper position. 
 
 If there are fillings in the adjoining teeth, remove them. 
 If no cavities, make them. 
 
 Thin dam is adjusted, leaving no gum exposed. Floors 
 of gold are laid covering the cervical walls of the cavities. 
 The plate is placed in position with the prongs projecting 
 well in the cavities. With a forked instrument held in the 
 left hand straddle the post and press the plate firmly against 
 the gum, and hold in position till the operation of filling 
 the cavities is completed. After the fillings are nicely fin- 
 ished, the dam is removed and a Bonwill crown adjusted in 
 the usual manner. 
 
 In this operation there are no backings to interfere with 
 
182 DEPARTMENT C. 
 
 the articulation, and where properly done it is practical. — C. 
 M. Sharp, D.D.S., in Practitioner. 
 
 306. Slipper Shell Crown for Bridge-work. — This 
 crown is used mostly for incisors, but can be adapted to 
 cuspids or bicuspids. Take measurement of tooth with 
 wire and make a plain tube, solder in the back only as far 
 as the tooth is straight ; now take an impression of the tooth 
 in plaster, and run a fusible metal die. Place the tube on 
 this die, and burnish the loose flaps down to the tooth ; or 
 by previously cutting out a V-shaped piece in the back, you 
 can place it on the natural tooth or die, and work out with 
 a sharp instrument that part of the labial or buccal surface 
 you wish to remove. Now with curved scissors cut this 
 portion out, and also all the proximal sides which extend 
 below the end of the tooth, which should ordinarily be 
 one-eighth inch. Now burnish the back or lingual flap 
 up over the cutting edge, and it will, if done properly, 
 make the only perfect fitting slipper crown with the least 
 amount of labor. "Where incisors are badly decayed on 
 both proximal and lingual sides, I build the tooth to proper 
 contour with good cement, and make the above style crown, 
 which shows a great deal less gold than it would were the 
 cavities properly prepared, and filled with gold. This is 
 often advisable, where the tooth is very frail or brittle, and 
 you do not wish to devitalize and crown with a Richmond 
 or Logan.— C. L. Smith, D.D.S. 
 
 307. Alloy-gold Cap Crowns. — Many frail bicuspids 
 and molars (decayed below gum line, Fig. 1) are extracted 
 every day without any attempt to save them ; that by the 
 
 following plan could be made permanently 
 serviceable. After getting the tooth and nerve 
 canal in a healthy condition, seal up the apex 
 of the root with a gutta-perch point, drill out 
 the canal and set two Howe screw posts with 
 cement (see Fig. 1), dress away all ragged edges of the cavity 
 and shape for filling. Now put on a matrix metal band as 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 188 
 
 described above ; mix the alloy, and before squeezing out 
 the mercury, divide the mass and squeeze one portion much 
 drier than the other; begin the filling with the part contain- 
 ing the most mercury, and complete with the dr3^ At a 
 subsequent sitting remove the band, and shaj^e the tooth for 
 a gold cap crown, fit the cap and mount with cement as 
 usual ; being sure to let the gold cap extend below the gum 
 line (see Fig. 2). A crown mounted in this way is durable 
 and strong enough to carry a reasonable amount of bridge- 
 work. — Wm. H. Steele. 
 
 308. Backing and Soldering. — To avoid cracking, 
 never leave any angles on back of facing such as {A A, Fig. 
 1), but grind them off rounding something like (Fig. 2). In 
 
 this manner you avoid the uneven 
 expansion and contraction of porce- 
 lain, and also in tipping do not bur- 
 nish or allow gold or backing to ex- 
 tend up over face of tooth, but to 
 entend out straight as (Fig. 3) the contraction breaks the 
 facing at A. 
 
 Press pins on common cardboard till they leave a 
 print, then punch holes with plate punch, put on tooth, trim 
 for pattern, then cut gold (24k. 28 gage) and press with 
 rounded instrument to saucer shape ; place backing on tooth, 
 cut off pins with nippers, split in center and rivet on ; after 
 placing on cork or some soft substance, i^ow grind, file 
 and burnish backing to desired shape and position, invest 
 and flow solder. Make investment thin and solder on char- 
 coal ; heat and cool slowly ; always heating investment 
 nearly to fusing point of solder before directing flame on 
 solder or backing. Another important point is to place 
 your borax on, in solution, before you begin to heat up. 
 Slightly scratching surface of metal with sharp instrument 
 makes solder take hold more readily. — C. L. Smith, D.D.S. 
 
 309. A Holdfast For Porcelain Inlays. — Methods hith- 
 erto adopted for holding porcelain and glass inlays in their 
 
184 DEPARTMENT C. 
 
 place having failed, the following plan was carried out to my 
 'satisfaction. But first let me say the etching with hydro- 
 fluoric acid held good, and for a long time, put in irregular 
 inlays and contours, but it was likely to burn off the fine 
 edges or etch the surface where not properly protected by 
 wax, a difiiculty not always overcome. I now adopt thd 
 following plan: Get my impression of the cavity and edges 
 with number 30 to 60 gold foil, when thoroughly fitted, fill 
 with hard wax, heat by spatula, and press to fit tightly. Re- 
 move and invest in Teague's Compound as lightly as possi- 
 ble. When dry, burn out the wax by laying the imprint 
 wax down on a piece of plaster to absorb the wax as melted ; 
 this leaves a true mold of the cavity and edges, and no force 
 to displace the mold, (No need to have the investment 
 outside the gold over lap.) Now take some waste gold foil, 
 roll it up to forin a pellet that will lay inside the cavity 
 about one-half depth. Put the porcelain or glass mixture 
 in quite wet, and press and dry with bibulous paper, then 
 burn it in the usual way, each firing till perfectly formed 
 and full enough. It should be a little below absolute 
 fusing point or enough to thoroughly shrink the porcelain 
 witho.ut vitrifying it till the last layer. On removing 
 the investment and pealing off the gold, the little pellet 
 can be picked out, and a nice depression, with undercut 
 edges, will be formed for the cement to enter and firmly 
 hold the inlay in i:)lace. — Dr, D, Genese, in Ohio Dental 
 Journal. 
 
 310. An Original Crown. — The root is prepared as 
 usual for an ordinary porcelain crown. With a very fine 
 drill, preferably one with a gage, a series of holes is drilled 
 as near as practicable to the circumference of the root, and 
 the interspaces cut out, forming a groove in the face of the 
 abutment. A band of 28 or 30 gage, 24k. gold, is fitted 
 to this groove and ground off' to the base of the root. 
 
 To the band is soldered a flat cap of pure gold, 34 gage, 
 using as little solder as possible, 20k. This is replaced 
 in position and burnished to the face of the root. It is then 
 
USEFUL HINTS. * 185 
 
 pnnchtd and a platinum post placed in positi( n, secured 
 with hard wax, inverted and soldered, the cap being trimmed 
 accurately to the outlines of the root end. A plate tooth 
 is then backed with gold as follows : The tooth is ground 
 at the gingival end to fit the cap and beveled from pins 
 to cutting edge. From 34 gage, 24k. gold, a backing is 
 cut slightly longer than the tooth which is punched, placed 
 in position in the tooth, and held by bending the pins. The 
 gold is burnished thoroughly to the tooth and slightly over 
 the square end of bevel of cutting edge. 
 
 Another backing is cut, long enough to burnish over the 
 articular edge to thicken the gold at this point, in which a 
 number of holes are punched to insure perfect union in sol- 
 dering. 
 
 All the parts being placed in position, it is ^carefully 
 waxed up and inserted as usual for soldering. 
 
 It can be claimed for this crown that it is less bulky 
 and more shapely than the old ferule crown; exposes no gold 
 at the gum margin ; allows a much more favorable and ac- 
 curate adjustment with regard to other teeth ; can be used 
 when convergent or divergent roots are to serve as abutments 
 for bridges ; is especially adapted to conically shaped roots ; 
 causes less pain in adjustment, and will not irritate the 
 pericemental membrane. It is extremely cleanly as the joint 
 between gold and tooth ; can be made aboTit perfect. The 
 band and cap may be made of platinum and a porcelain back- 
 ing baked, producing a highly esthetic crown. — Dr. J. H. 
 Crossland. 
 
 311. To Remove a Waxed-up Bridge. — To remove a 
 waxed-up bridge from the mouth, without changing the 
 position of the teeth or the articulation, or bending the 
 piece when there are several dummies, fill a bridge-work 
 impression tray with quick-setting plaster, and invest it 
 over the bridge as it is in position in the mouth, removing 
 the bridge in the plaster. It is then held in perfect posi- 
 tion, invested, ready for soldering. Always place a pillow 
 or cushion of wax, first of all, from one cap crown to the 
 
186 ■ DEPARTMENT C. 
 
 other, on the ridge, lettmg the teeth hear on the wax, and 
 preventing the suspended crown from sinking down and 
 bearing on the ridge. — Dr. Crenshaw, in Items. 
 
DEPARTMENT D. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 189 
 
 DEPARTMENT D. 
 
 312. Selecting and Keeping Dental Medicines. — 
 
 While there may be many other things to modify the action 
 of drugs, or the result of their application, we believe many 
 times negative results come through the use of inferior 
 medicaments. There are many impure drugs in the market, 
 especially in the smaller towns ; drugs that are either adul- 
 terated or have undergone a change from exposure or long 
 keeping. 
 
 Some of the dental medicaments that have been found 
 adulterated are : 
 
 Arsenious acid, adulterated with lime salts, chalk and 
 other substances. 
 
 Creasote. — It is very difficult to obtain a pure beech- 
 wood creasote. Much of the so-called creasote has been 
 found to consist of crude carbolic acid, to which has been 
 added creasote and phosole. 
 
 Essential oils are often adulterated with fixed oils, oil 
 of turpentine, chloroform, alcohol, or essential oils of an 
 inferior grade mixed with those of a better quality. 
 
 Aconite tincture is one of the most uncertain remedies 
 in regard to strength that w^e use. The commercial article 
 may be strong, weak or sometimes almost inert. This varia- 
 tion is due to varying quantities of the alkaloid used in its 
 preparation. That prepared from the root is many times 
 more powerful than that prepared from the leaves. The 
 officinal tincture U. S. P. contains 40 per cent aconite 
 strength; Fleming's tincture has 79 per cent; the German 
 10 per cent; the British 16 per cent; the French 20 per 
 cent ; so that care should be used in the selection and use of 
 this remedy. 
 
 Terebene^ as found in the shops, is often contaminated 
 with resin, turpentine, etc. 
 
190 DEPARTMENT D. 
 
 Cocain salts may contain organic or other impurities. 
 
 Zinc Salts. — These may contain impurities of lead, 
 copper, iron, aluminum or alkaline earths. 
 
 Hydrogen ijeroxid has been found to contain varying 
 quantities of sulfuric or hydrochloric acids ; some samples 
 contain also boric acid and barium. The purer the solution 
 the less liable is it to decompose, and this is in a degree 
 independent of the strength of the solution and the tempera- 
 ture at which it is kept. Solutions of the commercial article, 
 however, are very unstable and should be kept in glass stop- 
 pered bottles, protected from light and heat. Hydrogen 
 peroxid, ordinarily obtained, gives up a jDart of its oxigen 
 at a temperature of about 34° F., and the amount is increased 
 in proportion as the temperature is raised. Hence the 
 necessity of keeping in a cool place, such as an ice-chest or 
 water-cooler. 
 
 Among other drugs used in dentistry that are affected 
 by light, heat or exposure may be mentioned : 
 
 Bichlorid of 3Iercury-^'^o\u.t\on's,. — They are gradually 
 decomposed on exposure to light or in contact with organic 
 matter. 
 
 Aristol is decomposed by exposure to light and moisture. 
 
 Eurojphen is affected in the same manner. 
 
 Dialyzed iron is affected by age ; thickens, etc. ; the 
 solution not remaining potent after being kept for five or 
 six months. 
 
 Amyl nitrate is a very volatile liquid, and its alcoholic 
 solutions rapidly deteriorate. 
 
 Myrtol evaporates at ordinary temperatures. 
 
 lodin slowly volatilizes at ordinary temperatures if 
 ■exposed to light and air. 
 
 Eugenol^ exposed to the air, becomes darker in color 
 and resinous. 
 
 Terebene, if exposed to the air, absorbs oxigen and is 
 changed. 
 
 Cocain solutions are unstable, and soon decompose on 
 exposure to light. 
 
 Tannic acid, exposed to moist air, gradually changes. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 191 
 
 and aqueous solutions, when exposed to air, mold, fer- 
 ment and are converted to gallic acid. 
 
 Permanganate of 'potassium, in the presence of moisture, 
 gives up the oxigen it contains and becomes binoxid of 
 manganese. 
 
 Essential oils, if pure, are not affected by exposure, but 
 those ordinarily obtained thicken and become resinous on 
 exposure to air. 
 
 Ethyl chlorid is volatile at the ordinary temperature. 
 
 Nitrate of silver is somewhat affected by exposure to 
 light and air. 
 
 Glacial ijhospkoric acid, if exposed to air, absorbs moist- 
 ure and is changed in consistency. 
 
 Sulphate of zinc is slowly effervescent in dry air. 
 
 Aqua ammonia, if exposed to air, readily deteriorates.. 
 
 Thus we realize the necessity of keeping medicaments 
 in well-stoppered bottles and in a dark, dry and cool place, to 
 preserve them. If we are careless in this matter and allow 
 our drugs to deteriorate, we cannot expect satisfactory 
 results from their use. — Ohio Journal. 
 
 313. Incompatibility of Medicines. — This subject can 
 onl}' be glanced at here. The following simple rules may 
 help the burdened memory of the practitioner : 
 
 Ils'ever use more than one remedy at a time, if one will 
 serve the purpose. ISTeveruse strong mineral'acids in com- 
 bination with other agents, unless you know exactly what 
 reaction will ensue. They decompose salts of the weaker 
 acids and form ethers with alcohol. Select the simplest 
 solvent, diluent, or excipient, you know of, remembering 
 that the solvent power of alcohol and water, for their par- 
 ticular substances, decreases in proportion to the quantity 
 of the other added. ITever combine free acids with hydrates 
 or carbonates. 
 
 Generally, do not combine two or more soluble salts. 
 
 The following variably insoluble salts will be formed 
 whenever the materials of which they are composed are 
 brought together in solutions: The hydrates, carbonates. 
 
192 DEPARTMENT D. 
 
 phosphates, borates, arseniates, and tannates of most earthy 
 and heavy metals and alkaloids, and the metallic sulfides ; 
 the sulfates of calcium, of lead, and of the subsalts of 
 mercury ; the chlorids, iodids, and bromids of bismuth, 
 silver, lead, and subsalts of mercury; the iodids of quinin, 
 morphins and most alkaloids. 
 
 Alkalies^ precipitate the alkaloids and the soluble non- 
 alkaline metallic salts, and (also metallic hydrates and car- 
 bonates) neutralize free acids. 
 
 Silver nitrate^ lead acetate, corrosive sublimate potassium 
 iodide, should nearly always be prescribed alone. The first 
 with creasote forms an explosive compound. Aconite should 
 never be given except in a solution with water. 
 
 Silver nitrate, and lead acetate and subacetate, though 
 incompatible with almost everything, may be combined 
 with opium ; the latter forming with opium a compound 
 which, though insoluble, is therapeutically active as a 
 lotion. 
 
 Corrosive sublimate is incompatible with almost every- 
 thing, and should be given in simple syrup ; even the com- 
 pound syrup of sarsaparilla is said to decompose it. 
 
 Tannic acid, and substances containing it, are incom- 
 patible with albumen and gelatin. Tannic acid, iodin, and 
 the soluble iodids are incompatible with the alkaloids and 
 substances containing them, and with most soluble metallic 
 salts. Vegetable in fusions are generally incompatible with 
 metallic salts. 
 
 Glucosides, such as santonin and colocynthin, should 
 not be prescribed with free acids or emulsion. 
 
 Dangerous compounds, because poisonous, are : Potassic 
 iodid with potassic chlorat ; hydrocyanic acid or potassium 
 cyanid with metallic hydrates, carbonates, subchlorids, as 
 bismuth carbonate, or nitrate, or calomel. 
 
 Explosions would result from the combination of power- 
 ful oxidizers with readily oxidizable substances, as potassium 
 chlorat or permanganate with tannin, sugar, sulfur, sulfides, 
 vegetable powders, glycerin, alcohol, tinctures or ether. — 
 Potter, in Items. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 193 
 
 314. Formula for Compound Investment. — 
 
 Take by measure 1-16 part, pulverized soapstone ; 
 3-16 Plumbago ; 
 5-16 Asbestus, [grade No. 3,] 
 7-16 Plaster of Paris. 
 Mix thoroughly. 
 
 The above is the best known investing material for all 
 purposes. — R. E. Zellers, D.D.S. 
 
 315. Antiseptic Spray. — 
 
 R. — Antiseptic pastilles (Carl Seiler's Formula Pastilles) . . iss. 
 
 Aq. pura ^ i. 
 
 Sol. Hyd. chlor. cocain, 4 per cent .^ ss. 
 
 Glycerine ad qs. 5 ii. 
 
 Sig. — Use as spray. 
 
 Crush and dissolve the pastille Urst in water, boiling 
 water is quicker, then add cocain. It will turn milky and 
 cloudy. Add glycerin, which will immediately make the 
 liquid clear. Spray nose, month and throat, and you will 
 be safe. This spray is admirable to benumb sensitive gums, 
 before using the gilling-twine to hold rubber-dam in place. 
 It is exceedingly useful also in allaying irritability of soft 
 palate in taking impressions. — Dr. A. C. Hewitt, in Ohio 
 Dental Journal. 
 
 316. Hamamelis in Dentistry. — The medicinal prop- 
 erties of this drug are anodyne stypic, and mild astringent. 
 I have found it one of the safest and best preparations for 
 all inflammatory conditions about the mouth, that I have 
 ever used. As a mouth wash after bridging: crowning; 
 removing tartar from the teeth, etc. In a strength of one 
 part hamamelis to two parts water it is valuable for tender 
 bleeding gums — it may be used one part water to one part 
 hamamelis. For hemorrhage following extracting, it is my 
 first remedy, and nearly always'controlls the trouble without 
 resorting to anything stronger. I prefer Pond's Extract, as 
 I found it the most uniform and reliable.- — Wm. II. Steele. 
 
194 DEPARTMENT D. 
 
 317. — A Good Anodyne. — Dr. J. W. Jungmann recom- 
 mends the following as an excellent obtunder for odontalgia 
 caused from pulp exposure, after extraction, pain, etc. 
 
 R.— Menthol crys gr. v. 
 
 Tine aconit gtt. xx. 
 
 Chloroform ^ qs. 5 ij. 
 
 M. Sig. — Apply on gum over the seat of trouble with a pad of 
 
 bibulous paper. — Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 318. Naphthol. — B. Kaplithol is superior to carbolic 
 acid or creasote as an injection in the sac of an alveolar 
 abscess, and as a dressing for suppurating pulps. Its com- 
 parative freedom from odor and the absence of unpleasant 
 after effects, if it comes in contact with the gums or lips, are 
 strong points in its favor. — William Herbert Rollins, in 
 American Journal Dental Science. 
 
 319. Trichloracetic Acid for Canker. — I am specially 
 pleased to report, so far as my experience goes, that we have 
 in trichloracetic acid an unequaled remedy for apthous stom- 
 atitis, or canker sore mouth. These mucous patches are often 
 quite painful and annoying to both patient and operator. 
 Ordinarily, one or two applications will be sufficient. In 
 extensive cases, patients may be given a smsill bottle, and 
 apply it for themselves. It seems to me that we can do the 
 medical profession no better service than to call their atten- 
 tion to this remedy as a " specific " in this class of lesions. 
 One application is sufficient to stop further progress, if used 
 ADn first appearance of the lesion. I say this with consider- 
 able confidence, because I have succeeded where the physician 
 has failed. — J. A. Dunn, in Cosmos. 
 
 320. To Prevent Nervousness in Operating. — 
 
 R.— Potassium bromid gr. xx. 
 
 Cinnamon water .» '. . ,^ ij. 
 
 Administer thirty minutes before operating. 
 
 — Jno. S. Marshall, in Items. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 195 
 
 321. Compound Listerin Obtundent. 
 
 R.-— Sol. hyd. cocain, 4 per cent fl. 5 iij. 
 
 Glycerin fl. 5 ij. 
 
 L'steriu ad fl. 3 iv. M. 
 
 — Dr. A. C. Hewett, in Review. 
 
 322. Solutions of Corrosive Sublimate. — 'A neat and 
 convenient way to handle corrosive sublimate for making 
 antiseptic solutions, is to dissolve three grains in one fluid 
 drachm of alcoliol, which, added to a pint of listerin, 
 makes 1-2000, and undergoes no chemical change. — Ohio 
 Journal. 
 
 323. To Make Hands Soft and White.— Clean, soft 
 hands, whether old or new, are still useful. Tlie successful, 
 busy dentist must sometimes handle flask, file, forge, etc. 
 His hands get soiled. Soap will not always whiten. The 
 following is excellent : 
 
 R. — Pulv. acidnm boracicum lb. i. 
 
 " Sodac carb lbs. ii. 
 
 " Pumice lb. i. 
 
 Glycerin q. s. to form paste. 
 Sig. — Use as a soap. 
 
 — Dr. Hewitt, in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 324. Formula for Dentists' Headache. — For this we 
 know of nothing better than Trosseau's formula for head- 
 ache, which is composed of laurel water and cyanid of po- 
 tassium. 
 
 R. — Potass, cyanid grs. iv. 
 
 Aque lauro cerasi o i^- 
 
 Ft. solut M 
 
 S. — Poison. Moisten a compress and apply to seat of pain. 
 
 — Ohio State Journal. 
 
 325. Soldering Fluid. — Chlorid.of zinc, so mncli used 
 in soldering, has, besides its corrosive qualities, the draw- 
 back of beins: unwholesome. A soldering mixture has been 
 found which is free from these defects. It is made bv mix- 
 
196 DEPARTMENT D. 
 
 ing one pound of lactic acid with one pound of glycerin 
 and eight pounds of water. — Office and Laboratory. 
 
 326. Detective Antiseptics. — One of the great desider- 
 ata of modern surgery has been an antiseptic which would 
 tell us when a part is antiseptically clean. This is especi- " 
 ally so in the surgery of cavities, which can not be seen, as 
 sinuses, normal canals, etc. We have two preparations which 
 we can rely on as faithful detectives of the " we never 
 sleep " variety. Marchland's peroxid of hydrogen, and 
 potassium permanganate. The former, used in the fifteen 
 volume solution, will cause violent effervescence if pus be 
 persistent, and will continue to do so till all the pus has 
 been destroyed. Potassium permanganate in a ten-grain so- 
 lution (10 grs. to 1 oz. aqua), will turn from a bright pur- 
 plish red to a dirty brown color in the presence of any dis- 
 organized organic matter. It is also available for testing 
 the purity of water for domestic uses. The brown stains of 
 the skin caused by contact with the solution can easily be 
 removed by scrubbing with a weak solution of oxalic acid, to 
 which a few drops of hydrochloric acid have been added. — 
 Medical Examiner. 
 
 327. Sulphate of Zinc as an Escharotic. — Bartholow 
 says that dried sulphate of zinc, made in a paste by the 
 addition of a little starch and water, is a valuable excharotic, 
 and free from the danger that attends many excharotics. — 
 Ohio Journal. 
 
 328. Lime Water for Sensitive Teeth. — Lime water 
 is another excellent remedy, given teaspoonful doses three 
 or four times a day ; it will aflbrd relief to very sensitive 
 teeth perceptibly. Another remedy with which I have ob- 
 tained most happy results is bicarbonate of soda. This 
 may be given in doses (compressed tablets) of from five to 
 twenty grains three or four times a day, for a general alka- 
 line effect. Locally it may be used in solution, two drams 
 to eight ounces of water, or the soda itself may be applied to 
 
USEFUL HI^'TS. 197 
 
 sensitive teeth three or four times a day. Tlie most grati- 
 fying relief, in cases of extremely sensitive dentine, is thus 
 obtained. — Frank Abbott, r).D.S.,in Practitioner. 
 
 329. Creasote and Oil of Cloves. — Equal quantities 
 by bulk, is a polychrest remedy that I keep always in case 
 for application to aching teeth, painful gums, ulcerous sur- 
 faces, and also where pulps are exposed. When a cavity is 
 prepared for filling ; I wipe out to saturation, the cavity, with 
 this agent ; being careful not to make it too dry before fill- 
 ing ; leaving it as a disinfectant and coagulant in the bottom 
 of the cavity, before the provisionary or permanent filling 
 is inserted. — Dr. Shattuck, in Archives. 
 
 330. Pyrozone for Inflammation. — AVhen the mucous 
 membrane of the mouth or throat is inflamed, rinse the 
 mouth and gargle the throat with pj^rozone, then use to fol- 
 low, a solution of boro-glycerin 1 to 10. This is effectual, 
 and is a great soother. — Revieio. 
 
 381. Collodion and its Uses. — Collodion is a saturated 
 solution of gun-cotton in sulfuric ether. There are two 
 forms which the pharmacien provides for us ; the one con- 
 tractile, the other non-contractile. The contractile is that 
 one composed of gun-cotton and sulfuric ether with a 
 little alcohol, and the other is made of collodion, Canada 
 turpentine and castor oil. They are very useful protections 
 to irritable surfaces, such as are present in phlegmonous 
 abscesses and sloughing ulcers. Where the inflammation 
 runs high and the tenderness is great, we prefer to paint, 
 with a camel's-hair pencil, the entire surface with the flex- 
 ible, or second form of collodion. Where the inflammation 
 is on the decline and we desire compression, we use the con- 
 tractile, or first form of collodion, applied in successive lay- 
 ers with a camel's-hair pencil, till a suflficient amount of 
 contraction has driven the blood out of the capillaries and 
 whitened the surrounding parts sufficiently to satisf}' us 
 that the blood supply will now be controlled, and the pa- 
 tient have a comfortable time till the next visit. — Archives. 
 
198 DEPARTMENT D. 
 
 332. lodin with Glycerin. — Tincture of ioclin mixed 
 with glycerin is claimed by Dr. Hammond to prove more 
 effective as a local application than the plain tincture. This 
 is due to the retardation of the dissipation of the iodin or, 
 more likely, to the skin remaining soft, and hence in a bet- 
 ter condition for absorbing the drug. — Western Dent. Jour. 
 
 333. Local Anesthetic for Lancing, etc. — I have also 
 found the following good in minor surgical operations, such 
 as lancing a felon, or removing a small tumor from the scalp 
 or face : Take any quantity of alcohol, and add menthol 
 till you have obtained a saturated solution, then add twenty 
 drops of chloroform for each ounce of alcohol. Apply with 
 a small piece of cotton, or spunk, allowing the air to get to 
 the parts freely for from three to five minutes. Then op- 
 erate. — Dr. C. H. Gillman. 
 
 334. Vinegar and its Uses. — Vinegar is another polj^- 
 chrest that I always keep in my medicine case; not so much 
 for its direct action as vinegar, as for being a dilute acetic 
 acid, and a solvent of carbolic acid and creasote, wherever 
 they have been used in excess of our desire for their action 
 on the tissues. Wherever we dress -fistulous openings with 
 tents on which we have used caustic paste, carbolic acid, or 
 creasote and oil of cloves, after pushing the tent in the depth 
 of the cavity and excising it at the mouth, we swab out the 
 excess about the mouth of the listule with a strong vinegar, 
 so as to prevent sloughing of the territory beyond that im- 
 mediately confined to the fistule that we desire to enlarge 
 for further exploration. — Dr. Shattuck, in Archives. 
 
 335. lodid of Zinc has been used for more than two 
 years to disinfect pockets of pyorrhea alveolaris, in solution 
 of 12, 24, 36 or 48 grains to one ounce of water, once in four 
 days till pus has ceased to flow on pressure or can be de- 
 tected by HjOo. The granular is used to sprinkle on apthous 
 ulcers, to repair the gingival margin when ragged, slit or 
 fungous ; apply in full strength. — Ibid. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 199 
 
 336. For the Toothache.— 
 
 R.— Chloroform lo drops. 
 
 Carbolic acid, ninety-five per cent lo 
 
 Glycerin ^° 
 
 Morpbin igrain. 
 
 M. — Use on cotton. 
 
 —J. E. Morse, M.D. 
 
 337. Treatments for First Dentition.— According to 
 
 Dr. Uonti{Bevuede 3IaL de V Enfance^oW interference with 
 primary dentition should, as a general rule, be proscribed. 
 Accordingly, he considers as injurious the ordinary prac- 
 tices, as, for example, biting on hard objects, bathing the 
 gums with so-called emollient substances, etc. 
 
 The only necessary measure of precaution is to keep the 
 buccal mucous membrane in a state of perfect cleanliness. 
 It is best, then, during dentition, to wash the mouth several 
 times daily, either with pure water or antiseptic solutions. 
 Among the latter, the most efficacious are the following: 
 
 R.— Acidi boracici 3.00 grammes (gr. xiv). 
 
 Aque distillate 200.00 grammes (.^ vij o vj). 
 
 Tinct. myrrhe 2.00 grammes (111 ^iv). M. 
 
 Or, 
 
 R .— Sodii salicylatis 3-oo grammes (gr. xiv).^ 
 
 Aque distillate 200.00 grammes {- vij o vj). 
 
 Tinct. myrrhe 3 00 grammes (1TL xiv). M. 
 
 When the milk teeth have appeared they should be 
 cleansed with a very soft brush, using either one of the pre- 
 ceding solutions, or a suitable dentifrice. The following, 
 recommended by Zsigmomdy, gives excellent results: 
 
 R .— Magnesii carb. 
 
 Pulv. saponus aa 10.00 grammes (o iiss). 
 
 Pulv. ossis sepie 10.00 grammes (5 iiss). 
 
 Essentia menthe gtt. iv. M. 
 
 In very young children the following mixture may be 
 better : 
 
 R.— Magnesii carb 5-00 grammes (gr. Ixxv). 
 
 Crete preparat., 
 
 Sodii salicylatis aa 15. co grammes (o iij gr- xiv). 
 
 Essentie menthe g1-t- iv. ^^' 
 
200 DEPARTMENT D. 
 
 When the milk teeth commence to decay they should 
 he filled at once, that they may be preserved as long as pos- 
 sible. — Journal des Sciences Medicates de Lille ^ October 4th, 
 1889, p. 341. 
 
 338. Aromatic-Chloro Aristol for Dead Teeth. — For 
 the treatment of dead and infected teeth or roots of teeth, also 
 for alveolar abscesses with or without fistula, is the name I 
 have given to the following combination : 
 
 Aristol I drachm. 
 
 Chloroform ^ ounce. 
 
 Oil of cassia lo minims. 
 
 Owing to its gummy nature, it cannot be used with a 
 syringe, but with a smooth broach wrapped with cotton 
 fibers it can be very readily forced through the root-canal, 
 after properly enlarging it. 
 
 A blind abscess at the apex of a root can thus be suc- 
 cessfully treated, even where there is no drainage; in fact, 
 there is no need of drainage, one or two applications being all 
 that IS needed. I have treated teeth by this method now for 
 over ten months, and I have the first failure to find or hear 
 of. One application is all that is needed for an infected root- 
 canal, and I find it a capital dressing for an exposed nerve 
 before capping it. 
 
 Where I use the preparation for abscesses, I do not use 
 anything else ; there is no need of anything further. Be sure 
 to get it through the apex of the root. When you want to 
 apply the treatment the second time, pack the root-canal 
 with cotton saturated with the remedy till the next sitting, 
 and finally fill the root with chloro-percha, using cotton 
 fibers that are damp with the preparation as a carrier for 
 the chloro-percha. Should it go through the apex a little, it 
 is better than to not quite fill to the end of the root. I shall 
 be pleased should it prove to be as useful to my colleagues 
 as it has been to me.— S. Clippinger, D.D.S., in Cosmos. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 201 
 
 339. Formulas for Pyorrhea. — . 
 Dr. Riggs' formula is as follows: 
 
 K. — Carbolic acid i part. 
 
 Tinct. iodin i " 
 
 Glycerin lo parts. 
 
 Rub well in a mortar, and gradually add chlorid soda, 6 parts. 
 
 Formula of Dr. N. Dodge, of jSTew York, is as follows : 
 
 R . — Acid sulphuric 5 j • 
 
 Water ,^ ij . 
 
 Soda biborate .^ iv. 
 
 Formula of Dr. F. Y. Clark : 
 
 R. — Carbolic acid 3 v. 
 
 Alcohol ,0 iv. 
 
 Glycerin • 3 j. 
 
 Oil pimentos , § iij • 
 
 Sal. red aniline 3 ij . 
 
 The above remedies are used on pledgets of cotton same 
 as other formulas, but care should be used in the Dodge 
 formula to protect the surrounding tissues, as it is liable to 
 produce eschar. 
 
 " I have tried several other remedies, but found these the 
 best, A number of my patients keep Dr. Riggs' prescrip- 
 tion in their house, and many use it often, and would not be 
 without it in their family, as it keeps the gums healthy and 
 well when used according to directions. — L. Betts, in Items. 
 
 340. Antiseptic Adhesive Pomade. — This is a very 
 useful protector dressing for wounds of the face, etc, : 
 
 R. — Oxid of zinc gr. x. 
 
 Chlorid of zinc gr. xiv. 
 
 Gelatin 5 x. 
 
 Water 3 ij. 
 
 — Scienlific Arh. 
 
 341. For Pains After Extracting. — A potent and reli- 
 able remedy for the immediate after-pains of teeth extrac- 
 tion is amyl nitrit, the patient to inhale the preparation 
 about three or four seconds, and then to sit still in the chair 
 for about five minutes, or till the amyl nitrit has spent its 
 
202 DEPARTMENT D. 
 
 primary force. The remedy should be kept in every office^ 
 dental and medical, where anesthetics are used. A single 
 drop of nitro-glycerin, one per cent solution, in half a glass 
 of cold water, is even better than amyl nitrit, and more last- 
 ing in its effects. — Dr. E. H. Bowne, in Cosmos. 
 
 342. Remedy for Hemorrhage. — For stopping hem- 
 orrhage after extraction, the following is a safe and efficient 
 remedy : Pack powdered slippery elm in socket, where 
 tooth has been removed, as compact as possible. If necessary 
 apply a compress. It is a good styptic. It has controlled^ 
 hemorrhage after all other remedies have failed. — Elwood 
 Tate, D.D.S. 
 
 343. Cosmoline for Root Filling. — We, in Brooklyn,, 
 have been converted by Dr. Van Wert to his method of fill- 
 ing root canals. He uses : 
 
 R.— lodol 3 j 
 
 Oxid of zinc 3 i j 
 
 Cosmoline q s. 
 
 Make into a stiff paste ; it requires dexterity to make it so. 
 
 — Internation cd. 
 
 344. Blowing Powders in Roots. — A small, pointed 
 insufflator furnishes the best means of blowing powdered 
 medicines in root canals or in the "pockets "around necks 
 of teeth, left by the removal of tartar. — Archives of.Denti&try. 
 
 345. Chloralamid. — It is said to be a reliable hypnotic 
 to quiet the nervous system and induce sleep after surgical 
 operations. It has no anodyne properties, and gives prompt, 
 reliable results with absolute freedom from evil after-effects. 
 It is prepared by combining two parts of chloral hydrate 
 with one of formamide. — Items. 
 
 346. Acid Phosphate Bad for Teeth. — I have been 
 noticing for a year or two past that something has been 
 making fearful ravages in the teeth of my patients. I found 
 that on every occasion of this my patient was an ardent 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 203- 
 
 lover of " acid phosphate." I felt there must be some con- 
 nection between this drug and the trouble with the teeth, so 
 I determined to investigate the matter. To do this I got 
 a supply from a druggist and dropped a. tooth in it, and 
 found that in thirty minutes it had formed a thin film on 
 the outside of the tooth and the whole enamel was softened. 
 In two days the enamel was as soft as the other part of the 
 tooth, and the whole tooth could be crumbled away. 
 
 Such being the case, I thought it best to report it to this 
 society, that others having patients using this drink might 
 warn them of its deleterious effects. — Dr. Head, in In- 
 ternational. 
 
 347. Aceto Tartrate of Aluminum. — This is another 
 salt of aluminum possessing antiseptic, astringent, and hem- 
 ostatic properties. It is a strong coagulator of egg albumen. 
 It is useful for controlling hemorrhage after extraction of 
 teeth, irrigating cavities, abscesses, infected wounds, as an 
 application to congested gums, pyorrhea pockets, etc. — L. 
 P. Bethel, .M.D., D.D.S., in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 348. Gutta-percha Cajeput Formula. — Cajeput oil is 
 said to be an excellent solvent of gutta-percha, and, if pre- 
 pared according to the following formula, will be found use- 
 ful for lining cavities and smearing root canals : 
 
 R.— Cajeput oil, 
 
 Chloroform aa 
 
 Gutta-percha q.s. 
 
 — Items. 
 • 
 
 349. Eucalyptus and Thymol. — Eucalyptus and thy- 
 mol is a preparation containing borate of soda, benzoic acid,, 
 thymol oil of eucalyptus, oil of wintergreen, oil of thyme, 
 oil of peppermint, and fluid extract of wild indigo. It may 
 be used externally or internally. It is a non-coagulator of 
 egg albumen. It may be freelj'- used as a mouth-wash, root- 
 dressing, general detergent, for cleansing the hands, and 
 Avherever a good antiseptic is desired. It may be used 
 
204 DEPARTMENT D. 
 
 freely about the mouth, as it is non-poisonous, non-irritating 
 and not injurious to tooth structure. — Items. 
 
 350. The Best Local Anesthetic : — 
 
 Cocain 5 gr. 
 
 Ext. witch hazel ^ i. 
 
 Ivisterin 5 ss. 
 
 Aqua, distilled 5 ss. 
 
 Inject with a clean hypodermic syringe. Safe and ef- 
 fectual. — Dr. W. F. Johnson. 
 
 351. Antiseptic Bath for Instruments: — 
 
 R— Alcohol 5 ij. 
 
 Hydronapthol grs. xx. 
 
 Keep in, quinin bottle, or one similar. Dip instruments 
 in and lay away to dry. Will not tarnish. — A. W. Harlan, 
 in Items. 
 
 352. Acetic Acid. — A 7 per cent solution of acetic 
 acid is a more effective germicide thanbichlorid of mercury. 
 — Items. 
 
 353. Hints on Using Cocaine. — 1. Amount of cocain 
 used must be in proportion to extent of surface it is desired 
 to anesthetize. In no case should the quantity exceed one 
 and three-quarter grains. 
 
 2. Cocain should never be used in cases of heart dis- 
 ease, pulmonary disease, or in persons of highly nervous tem- 
 perament. 
 
 3. In injecting cocain, the intradermic method it pref- 
 erable^ to the hypodermic. By injecting in, not under, 
 mucous membrane or skin, the risk of entering a blood-ves- 
 sel is avoided. 
 
 4. During injection, the patient should always be in a 
 recumbent position ; in operations on the nose and throat, 
 the head should not be raised till anesthesia is complete. 
 
 5. It is of great importance that cocain should be pure, 
 since its combinations with certain other alkalies result in 
 poisonous compounds. — Brooklyn Medical Journal. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 205 
 
 354. Disinfecting Power of Essential Oils. — The es- 
 sential oils are classified according to their strength as germ- 
 icides, thus: Cinnamon, fennel, lavender, cloves, thyme^ 
 mint, anise, eucalyptus, turpentine, lemon and rose, the last 
 two being very weak in disinfecting power. — Bad. World. 
 
 355. To Control Dental Hemorrhage. — In all hemor- 
 rhao-e in which the bleeding vessels are to be reached throusfh 
 the circulation, gallic acid is the most efficient, as its chemi- 
 cal affinities do not affi3rd the impediments to its absorption 
 as those of tannin, etc. My favorite prescription is : 
 
 Gallic acid, .' dr. i. 
 
 Cinnamon water, dr. ii. 
 
 S. — Tablespoonful every hour till bleeding is arrested. 
 
 Two or three doses usually suffice to produce a clot, and 
 all the trouble is then over. 
 
 In connection with the above, the tooth socket should 
 be gently but securely packed with tannin. For this pur- 
 pose I use a saturated solution of tannin in water, saturating 
 a pledget of cotton in the solution, and packing it firmly in 
 the socket. 
 
 Persulphate of iron, either in solution or salt, should 
 positively be discarded from the list of styptics as unreliablej 
 on account of the frail clot it produces and the tendency to 
 secondary hemorrhage following its use. — Dr. Otto Arnold, 
 in Ohio Journal of Dental Science. 
 
 356. Sulphate of Copper. — Treaiment of Pyorrhea. — 
 The writer suggests the following plan of treating pyor- 
 rhea alveolaris : Bind a copper wire . around the tooth or 
 teeth afl:ected and allow it to remain till a cure is brought 
 about. The action of the sulfuric acid in the mouth will 
 cause a slow but constant formation of sulphate of copper, 
 which will settle in the pockets, and thus produce a cure by 
 its ceaseless action both day and night. The wire can also 
 be so arranged as to close the mouth of the pocket, and thus 
 prevent the accumulation of the foreign substances which 
 always so much retard successful treatment. If necessary 
 
206 DEPARTMENT D. . 
 
 tlie patient can moisten the wire with a sufficiently weak 
 dilution of sulfuric acid twice a day. — J. "W. Whipple, D.D.S. 
 
 357. Paste for Destroying Nerves. — We have to de- 
 pend largely on the prepared pastes sold at the depots. The 
 •difficulty in preparing a nerve paste consists in the insolu- 
 bility of the arsenic, or the preparation of an impalpable 
 powder. Experiments which I have made with an expert 
 ■chemist, have only resulted in our getting a fine powder by 
 ■dusting it through a cloth, after long pulverizing in a mor- 
 tar. With one part of this powder I rub two parts of anti- 
 pyrin and lanolin, to form a stiff paste. The lanolin, in a 
 dry cavity., seems to penetrate the tissue, and to cause the 
 antipyrin and arsenic to act, the first reducing actual 
 inflammation of the part, and j)reventing further pain dur- 
 ing the action of the arsenic. 
 
 A combination of — 
 
 Arsenic i part, 
 
 Antipyrin 2 parts, 
 
 Lanolin 2 " 
 
 makes a painless devitalization possible. — Dr. Bryan, Office 
 •and Laboratory. 
 
 358. Silico Fluorid of Sodium. — In my contact with 
 the manufacturers, I am always on the look-out for new 
 points of interest to the dental profession, and a year ago 
 I presented to you an article, the silico-fluorid of sodium. 
 It is non-poisonous, and can be given internally in doses of 
 from five to ten grains, three times a day, without any in- 
 jurious eftect. That it prevents acid fermentation is also an 
 established- fact. Since I presented it, a year ago, it has 
 been in constant use by the manufacturers of syrups for 
 soda fountains, as it keeps them perfectly sweet. Lately, 
 there has been a successful effort made to prepare them in 
 tablet form, and, by the addition of the essential oils, to 
 prepare a substitute for carbolic acid for use in the mouth. 
 These now come in tablets, so that one dissolved in two 
 ounces of water gives you the right strength to use as a 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 207 
 
 ■stimulant antiseptic mouth-wash. This is a vei\y convenient 
 form for use. — Dr. W. X. Sudduth, in Mass. So. 
 
 359. Sozoiodol. — Sozoiodol is a white crystalline sub- 
 stance freely soluble in water and alcohol. It contains 
 iodin, carbolic acid and sulfur. It is free from odor and 
 non-irritating. At present it takes high rank as a para- 
 siticid, and ought to become useful in dental practice as a 
 microbe destroyer. — Dent. Revieio. 
 
 360. Root Dressing Formula.-^— 
 
 R. — Iodoform 40 parts. 
 
 CoflFee (roasted) 10 " 
 
 Vaselin 50 " 
 
 Used as a root dressing. — Review. 
 
 361. Formulas for Fusible Alloys. — The following 
 :alloys melt in boiling water, and can be poured in plaster of 
 Paris impressions without any more drying out than is re- 
 quired for varnishing with sandarac or shellac varnish : 
 
 ]^ewton's. 
 
 Tin 3 parts. 
 
 Lead 2 " 
 
 Bismuth 5 " 
 
 Melts at 100 degrees Cent. 
 
 Rose's. 
 
 Tin 3 parts. 
 
 Lead S •' 
 
 Bismuth 8 " 
 
 Melts at 95 degrees Cent. 
 
 Erman's. 
 
 Tin I part. 
 
 Lead i " 
 
 Bismuth 2 parts. 
 
 Melts at 93 degress Cent. 
 
 Wood's. 
 
 Tin 2 parts. 
 
 Lead 4 " 
 
 Bismuth 7 " 
 
 Cadmium i part. 
 
 Melts at 70 degrees Cent. 
 
 # 
 
208 DEPARTMENT D. 
 
 Erman's alloy can be easily made by taking equal parts 
 of Plumber's half-and-half solder and bismuth. ^ 
 
 This is very much like Mellotte's alloy, which is com- 
 posed of 
 
 Tin 5 paits. 
 
 Lead 3 " 
 
 Bismutli 8 " 
 
 — Dr. John G. Harper, in Dental Review. 
 
 362; Colorless Tincture of lodin Formula. — 
 
 lodin ; 10 parts by weight. 
 
 Hyposulphite of soda 10 " " 
 
 Distilled water 10 " " 
 
 Spirit of ammonia 16 " " 
 
 Alcohol 75 " 
 
 Mix the iodin,the hyposulphite and the water together, 
 and digest them at a gentle heat, shaking occasionally, till 
 solution is effected. Then add the spirit of ammonia, and 
 after a few minutes' shaking, the alcohol. Finally, set the 
 mixture aside for three days in a cool place, and filter. — 
 Herald of Dentistry. 
 
 363. Iodoform Cotton Formula. — This preparation, 
 which has recently come in somewhat extensive use, is 
 best made in the following manner. Take each ingredient 
 exactly in the proportions given : 
 
 Iodoform 2 parts. 
 
 Ether 10 " 
 
 Strong alcohol 20 " 
 
 Glycerin 10 " 
 
 Purified cotton wool 3° " 
 
 Dissolve the iodoform in the ether and alcohol mixed ; 
 add the glycerin to this solution, and saturate the cotton 
 wool with the liquid. Let it dry by exposure to the air. 
 Draw the cotton out and keep it in glass-stOppered bottles, 
 with wide mouths, closing well. — Herald of Dentistry. 
 
 364. Medicated Cement Fillings. — In this paper I 
 advise, after an experience of two years in capping exposed 
 pulps," the admixture of various medicants with the filling 
 
USEFUL HINTS. * 209 
 
 material. The medicants used are: 1, creasote and oil of 
 cloves ; 2, eugenol ; 3, deliquesced carbolic acid ; 4, oil of 
 cinnamon ; 5, oil of cloves ; 6, creasote pure ; 7, creasote, oil 
 of cloves and iodoform ; 8, creolin ; 9, campho-phenique ; 
 10, potassium chlorate powder ; 11, salicylic acid ; 12, cam- 
 phor pulvis ; 13, stick sulfur pulvis; 14, iodoform ; 15, oil of 
 wintergreen. 
 
 The principle of medicinal action of the mixture, is the 
 principle that, on the crystallization of the oxyphosphate, 
 no further change takes place, hence the remedy may exert 
 some of its remedial action. I employ mostly the first 
 mixture (creasote and oil of cloves). When the medicament 
 is a liquid, I add about an equal quantity of medicament 
 and phosphoric acid, and when solid, about equal parts of 
 medicament and oxid. These proportions may be varied as 
 required. I believe that in this way the remedial agent is 
 constantly exerting its effect on the walls of the cavity, 
 thus resisting germ-action. — Dr. Charles B. Atkinson, in 
 Americcm Dental Association. 
 
 365. Antiseptic Varnish. — For lining a cavity, after 
 disinfection, and before filling; it is the antiseptic on which 
 I rely. The preparation being : 
 
 Tincture gum benzoin, 
 
 Acid carbol aa 
 
 This applied to the dry walls of a cavity forms an impervi- 
 ous antiseptic varnish, while it cauterizes and seals up the 
 canaliculi. — Dr. Alfred T. Peete, Am. Jour. Dent. Sei. 
 
 366. Creolin. — I have lately been using creolin as a 
 substitute for carbolic acid, for washing instruments and for 
 general disinfecting purposes, and as a surgical dressing. I 
 like it very much, as it is free from the disagreeable odor of 
 the acid and is not poisonous. T am now using creolin gauze 
 as a dressing for an antrum on which I operated lately, 
 curretting a large patch of pyogenic membrane from the 
 under surface of the infra-orbital plate. It keeps the wound 
 
210 DEPARTMENT I). 
 
 perfectly antiseptic and free from odor. It is used exten- 
 sively throughout Continental Europe. 
 
 Creolin is a by-product in the manufacture of carbolic 
 acid." It is produced by the addition of resin and soda to the 
 creasote after removal from the latter of all carbolic acid. 
 
 It forms a dark-brown syrupy fluid, with a peculiar 
 odor, somewhat resembling tar. Its taste is at first aroma- 
 tic, and at last burning. 
 
 It is readily soluble in alcohol and ether. With water 
 it is insoluble, but is suspended in the form of emulsion, 
 producing an opaque milky appearance. The most com- 
 plete emulsion possible is two and one-half per cent. 
 
 Creolin belongs to the most powerful antiseptics and 
 disinfectants. As a deodorizer it is unsurpassable. It has 
 hemostatic properties and promotes granulations. It is 
 non-irritating, and internally is non-poisonous. It is used 
 in form of gauze, ointment, soap or emulsion. — Dr. Fille- 
 brown, Odoniological Society of Pennsylvania. 
 
 367. Sanitas. — In " sanitas " we have the ideal disin- 
 fectant, and experiments appear to have sufliciently estab- 
 lished its great power as a germicide. It is the most rapid 
 of deodorizes, is harmless, can be given internally, has a 
 pleasant odor and does not stain clothing. Its great value 
 is shown in the fact that analysis shows a large percentage 
 of peroxid of hydrogen, thymol, eucalyptol, camphoric 
 acid, etc. It has considerable bleaching power. 
 
 I use sanitas oil for disinfecting all cavities to be filled, 
 especially root canals. When first penetrating a pulp cham- 
 ber I inject sanitas fluid freely, as also in root canals, by 
 means of a bent hj^podermic needle, a device shown to me 
 by Dr. Wright. For treatment of ulcers,where an escharotic 
 is not indicated, sanitas gives the best of results. But it 
 has manifold uses. The sanitas toilet fluid is a delightful 
 mouth wash, deodorizing the oral cavity without substi- 
 tuting any other odor. Used in a common atomizer, either 
 of the fluids will remove all odors from the operating-room, 
 rendering the atmosphere fragrant as that of the pine woods. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 211 
 
 They will keep clean and fresh jonr spittoons and all vessels 
 about the office.— Dr. Alfred T. Peete, in American Journal 
 of Dental Science. 
 
 368. For Sensitiveness After Crowning. — It is said 
 that europlien, when applied to gingival sensitiveness, 
 caused by the setting of crowns or bridges, the soreness and 
 irritation subsides promptly. — Ohio Journal. 
 
 360. To Increase Solubility of Salicylic Acid.— To 
 
 increase the solubility of salicylic acid in water, the addi- 
 tion of one part of acid to one hundred parts of glycerin 
 and one hundred and fifty parts of w^ater gives the most 
 satisfactory results.— OAzo Journal. 
 
 870. Oxycyanid of Mercury. — The comparative 
 merits of oxycyanid of mercury and corrosive sublimate 
 are to be summed up as follows : Its solution has a slightly 
 alkaline reaction, and precipitates albumen only slightly. 
 It is less irritant than solutions of corrosive sublimate, and 
 solutions of the chemical 1-1500 do not attack, except 
 slii^htly, the materials used in surgical instruments. AVhen 
 tested by the power of preventing decomposition of soup, its 
 antiseptic power proved to be six times greater than that of 
 bichlorid of mercury; whilst tested as to its power to 
 destroy the micrococcus pyogenes aureus, the advantage lay 
 somewhat in favor of the sublimate, 1-1400 of the former to 
 1-1300 of the latter. When employed on suppurating sur- 
 faces, or to render mucous surfaces antiseptic, it furnished 
 much better results than the bichlorid, because of its much 
 greater tolerance by the tissues and of the small amount 
 absorbed thereby.— Com^^es Rend, cle la Soc. de Biol. 
 
 371. Alumnol. — An aluminum salt. It is a white 
 non-hygroscopic powder, readily soluble in water, and suita- 
 ble for application in various forms. Solutions maybe from 
 1 per cent to 10 per cent. It arrests suppuration and secre- 
 tion, and hastens the closing of wounds. Its use is indicated 
 
212 DBPAETMENT D. 
 
 in the irrigation of cavities, abscesses, infected wounds, as 
 an application in pyorrhea pockets, etc. It is an antiseptic, 
 astringent, a strong coagulator of egg albumen, and possesses 
 hemostatic properties. — Dr. L. P. Bethel, in Ohio Dental 
 Journal. 
 
 372. Black's 1-2-3-Antiseptic. — Various combinations 
 have greater value than any of the constituents. Thus Dr. 
 Black's favorite " 1-2-3." 
 
 Carbolic acid i part. 
 
 Oil of cassia 2 parts. 
 
 Oil of wintergreen 3 " 
 
 has a range of antiseptic value greater than carbolic aciil 
 alone, without its evil effects. — Dental Office and Laboratory. 
 
 373. Burns and Scalds. — 
 
 li . — Acidi salicylici i dram. 
 
 Olei Olive 8 fl. ounces. 
 
 M. Sig. — Apply to burn, covering with linen or lint. 
 
 — Bartholow. 
 
 374. Salicylic Acid for Root Dressing. — 
 
 R. — Salicylic acid 40 parts. 
 
 Vaselin 60 " 
 
 Used as a root dressing. 
 
 — Exchange. 
 
 375. Carbonate of Magnesia. — Carbonate of mag- 
 nesia, from ten to twenty grains, three times a day, will be 
 found very efficacious. Milk of magnesia is another pleas- 
 ant preparation for an antacid effect ; it may be given in 
 teaspoonful doses three times a day. If a laxative is de- 
 sired, give a tablespoonful. It is a very excellent thing to 
 mix a teaspoonful of this preparation with half a glass of 
 water, and rinse the mouth several times a day with it. — 
 Dr. Frank Abbott, in Dental Practitioner. 
 
 876. Permanganate of Potash. — Another preparation 
 which is quite a powerful antiseptic is permanganate of pot- 
 ash, five grains to an ounce of water. It may be used very 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 
 
 213 
 
 much weaker than that with a germicide effect as well. As 
 a deodorizer, permanganate of potash has no equal. You 
 have here a solution strong enough to destroy living germs ; 
 not only that, but if there is any had odor about the mouth 
 or teeth, give.it to your patient, very much diluted, to rinse 
 the mouth with, and the odor is gone almost instantly. If 
 you open a tooth the smell of which is offensive enough to 
 drive you out of the office, you can destroy the odor in- 
 stantly by simply applying to the tooth a little permanga- 
 nate of potash solution.— Dr. Frank Abbott, in Dent. Pract. 
 
 377. Powdered Resin. — Resin powdered fine and 
 sprinkled on a fresh cut or wound, and wrapped in a clean 
 rag dipped in cold water, will prevent inflammation and 
 cause it to heal kindly. . 
 
 Powdered resin can be used in some cases for filling the 
 roots of teeth, by working in the root and moisten or dis- 
 solve with alcohol, it is antiseptic and insoluble in the mouth. 
 
 Resin is very useful in the dental offlce for many things, 
 such as putting around the necks of teeth to keep the rub- 
 ber-dam from slipping, also for keeping the belts doing 
 the same on the engine and laboratory lathe. — Dr. D. Y. 
 Beacock, in Ohio Dent. Jour. 
 
 378. Carbolate of Camphor.— Carbolate of camphor 
 is made by adding one part, by weight, of carbolic acid to 
 three parts of camphor, setting aside for twenty-four hours, 
 and straining through gauze. It is a permanent liquid, 
 with a specific gravity of 990. It is thoroughly antiseptic, 
 and possesses unsurpassed germicidal powers. Locally ap- 
 plied to wounds, by means of cotton or gauze, it prevents 
 suppuration. "When kept in contact with the skin for 
 several days it produces an eruption, which can, however, 
 be prevented by mixing the liquid with oil. Injected hypo- 
 dermically it gives the best results in aborting abcesses or 
 boils and relieving imm.— TJierapeutic Gazette. 
 
 379. Nitro-Muriatic Acid is useful to the dentist, in its 
 full strength as aqua-regia, as an obtundent of sensitive dentine 
 
214 DEPARTMENT D. 
 
 at the necks of the teeth and as a controller of pain and as a 
 solvent of apthous ulcerous patches in the mouth and mucous 
 membrane; and as a corrective of the gastric juice in anemic 
 and dyspeptic patients it scarcely has an equal, when admin- 
 istered from a phial in full strength, dropping from five to 
 ten drops in a wineglass of sweetened water, just enough to 
 make a nice kind of lemonade. It will control pain in the 
 stomach ; and indigestion, when followed persistently for 
 from five to ten days, or till the digestion has so responded 
 as to make one forget they needed a remedy. I merely men- 
 tion this as a fact worthy of attention and adoption, rather 
 than going into the philosophy of supplying the proper di- 
 gestive fluids necessary to induce the proper ferment to per- 
 fect digestion in the stomach and prima via. — Dr. Shattuck, 
 in Archives. 
 
 380. Tincture of Chlorid of Iron is useful to the den- 
 tist as a hemostatic and as an escharotic, applied to ulcerous 
 patches, and never disappoints me, nor disturbs my conscience 
 when I use it, even though it does come in contact with the 
 enamel of the teeth ; some of our brethren have been fearful 
 of the ravages supposed to follow its contact with the teeth 
 when administered by medical men as a tonic. — Dr. Shat- 
 tuck, in Archives. 
 
 381. Salicylate of Soda is one of the remedies that 
 will assist us very much when we have neuralgic and rheu- 
 matic patients, especially those whose neuralgia depends on 
 a rheumatic diathesis. For inflammatory rheumatism it 
 probably has no equal, when given sufliciently heroically to 
 produce excessive diaphoresis and absence of pain and sleep. 
 It may be well to state that there are some patients whose 
 hearts are very much disturbed by heavy doses of salicylate 
 of soda, and those who administer it should make observa- 
 tions, so as to either reduce the quantity or omit altogether 
 its administration to such subjects. — Dr. Shattuck, in 
 Archives. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 215 
 
 382. Sulphite of Soda is a ver}' pleasant, convenient and 
 innocent remedy ^^'hicll should always be at hand to correct 
 unpleasant odors in the mouth and throat, using it as a gar- 
 gle ; and when the stomach is out of order, a little of it may 
 be swallowed with benelit. — Dr. Shattuck, in Archives. 
 
 383. An Excellent Varnish. — Procure a piece of clear 
 amber, scrape or powder it, dissolve in Squibs' chloroform, 
 which will take some time, add a little absolute alcohol to 
 delay evaporation, and you have a varnish so hard that it 
 will resist almost anything. — C. F. Ives, in International. 
 
 384. Formalin and its Uses. — It is useful in chronic • 
 peridontitis and total necrosis, also in mouth operations, 
 where the soft parts are concerned. In very sensitive pd!- 
 tients, where tannin, iodoform or cocain were used, which 
 showed unpleasant side effects, formalin showed no such 
 action. A three per cent, solution, or mixture with pulv. 
 guramis arabici or mastic is recommended in taking impres- 
 sions and habituating to dentures. In its chemical composi- 
 tion it is nearest to antifibrin, and promises to become a use- 
 ful local anesthetic in dentistry. — Dr. Arkovy. 
 
 385. Suggestions for Using Pyrozone. — The manufac- 
 turers of pyrozone, in order to more clearly identify these 
 efficient preparations of peroxid of hydrogen, have adopted 
 the general name of pj' rozone, and designate their respective 
 strengths by the percentage of peroxid of hydrogen which 
 each contains, and one may be guided in their administra- 
 tion by this percentage value alone, as these pyrozones will 
 be found to be uniformly true to their named values. The 
 three per cent solution of pyrozone is aqueous, and so nearly 
 neutral as to resist ordinary tests. Its mnge of use is as a 
 mouth wash and gargle, and as an irrigating and detergent 
 wash in abscesses, sinuses and ulcerating surfaces. 
 
 Of the methods for the exhibition of pyrozone may be 
 named for the three per cent — in bulk one dram to one ounce 
 or more, as the extent of territory demands, followed by an 
 
216 DEPARTMENT D. 
 
 equal bulk to twice the bulk of an alkaline solution, as soda 
 bicarbonate one-half dram to water one ounce — also by in- 
 jection per syringe, spray and inhaler, bearing in mind that 
 all instrument surfaces in contact with the pyrozone must 
 be of glass, hard rubber, platinum or gold. 
 
 About the necks of teeth and in pyorrhea pockets the 
 five per cent may be dripped from an ordinary glass dropper, 
 a drop at a time till sufficient eflfect is produced. An at- 
 tenuated glass rod or even a tapered wooden probe may serve 
 to carry a drop to place. In fistulas of alveolar or other 
 abscesses cotton or other tents may be placed to carry the 
 pyrozone well within the tract and avoid the distension 
 produced by violent injection from a syringe. 
 
 The range of use of both five per cent and twenty-five 
 per cent is suggested as follows, the choice between the two 
 strengths being made from a basis of depth or rapidity of 
 action desired, or occasionally the five per cent may displace 
 the twenty -five per cent when the mucous membrane proves 
 unusually irritable, when the five per cent will be much less 
 painful than the twenty-five per cent. 
 
 Selection between these two strenths may also be made 
 because the site may be minute or difficult of access, that is 
 to say, where the pyrozone is to produce a deep influence 
 through diseased tissue, or where the desire is to more 
 rapidly clean a surface, or where the diseased site is small or 
 more difficult to reach, the twenty -five per cent will usually 
 better serve than the five per cent. 
 
 The general use of these ethereal pyrozones is in abscess 
 pockets, fistulas or sinuses, fistulous roots, discolored teeth, 
 pyorrhea pockets, removal of discolored and other surface 
 deposits, catarrhal congestion of the throat, nasal passages 
 and more remote mucous tracts and cavities by injection, 
 spray, tampon or swab. Ulcerations yield kindly to the 
 spray or swab. It is especially recommended to use a wash 
 of bicarbonate of soda one-half dram to one ounce, to thor- 
 oughly bathe all mucous surfaces that have been acted on 
 by pyrozone or other peroxid of hydrogen solutions, that 
 no remaining surface acidity due to its activity may succeed. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 217 
 
 Small quantities of the ethereal pvrozone should be used 
 at a time. The hand Avill heat the instrument at times suffi- 
 ciently to volatilize the ether and result in emptying the full 
 charo;e of the instrument, sometimes to one's chao;rin. — Chas. 
 B. Atkinson, in Ohio Dented Journal. 
 
 386. Cement for Mending Casts. — Excellent cement 
 for broken casts and models is made by mixing glycerin 
 and litharge.-*-Genese, Off. and Lab. 
 
 387. Glacial-Phosphoric Acid. — This is an agent that 
 enters in our oxyphosphate fillings, and has considerable 
 action on the dentine tissues ; one of which is at first to 
 cause an unpleasant twinge, after which the cavity is so 
 obtunded as to permit excavation with but little pain. From 
 five to ten grains in a glass of sweetened water, is a grand 
 tonic to a tired operator; when he is nervous and irritable; 
 repeated every thirty minutes till he is supported, and 
 may be well worthy our attention. — Dr. E. E. Shattuck, in 
 Archives. 
 
 388. Solder and Flux for Aluminum. — A solder for 
 aluminum is made as follows : . 
 
 Tin 8o parts. 
 
 Zinc 20 " ' 
 
 To be used with a flux composed of — 
 
 Ssearic acid So parts. 
 
 Zinc chlorid lo " 
 
 Tin chlorid lo " 
 
 — Engineering and 31ining Journal. 
 
 389. Nerve Capping Formula. — Dissolve sufficient 
 gutta-percha in chloroform to half fill an ounce bottle. Add 
 oil of cloves, 20 minims ; tannin, 10 grains ; carbolic acid, 
 20 minims. Seal and shake till satisfied of a perfect mixture ; 
 then open and allow the chloroform to partially evaporate. 
 There will remain a putty-like mass, which is always ready 
 for application. — Dr. G. C. Anthony, in Ohio Journal. 
 
218 depaetme^;t d. 
 
 390. Sodium Fluorid as a Sterilizer. — Sodium fluorid, 
 the more it is used as a sterilizer, the more satisfactory 
 it becomes. A saturated solution for instruments and 
 broaches. — Dental Review. 
 
 391. Phenate of Cocain, Local Anesthetic. — Phe- 
 nate of cocain is a preparation of phenic acid and cocain 
 in nearly equal parts, and for convenience of further dilution 
 is sold in 50 per cent alcoholic solution. This association 
 of the carbolic acid with the cocain indicates against its 
 hypodermic use. In its 50 per cent strength it will coagu- 
 ulate albumen, and its topical application to mucous surfaces 
 will be followed by a slight slough. This may often be 
 avoided by wiping glycerin over the dried gum surfaces be- 
 fore applying the 50 per cent phenate. The phenate 50 per 
 cent may be diluted to any extent desired by adding alcohol 
 and water equal parts. A solution thus made of 25 per cent 
 strength will not coagulate. 
 
 Phenate of cocain is a local anesthetic of considerable 
 service in extracting teeth. It is applied full 50 per cent 
 strong (or diluted, if desired), on the dried gum about the 
 tooth. A pledget of cotton forms a convenient means of 
 placing it about the tooth,. where it should be left in contact 
 from three to five minutes at a time, to be repeated if anes- 
 thesia be not sufficient The patient should be cautioned not 
 to swallow, and so avoid numbness in the throat, as the phe- 
 nate promptly produces this condition in all mucous tissues. 
 The phenate of cocain is more especially useful in operating 
 in soft tissue, as opening abscesses, removing tumors, treating 
 exposed pulps and kindred operations. It has the merit of 
 being a powerful analgesic without the danger of constitu- 
 tional impression. — Charles B. Atkinson, in Ohio Journal. 
 
 392. Soothing Applications for Aching Pulps. — Zinc 
 oxid, carbonate of lime, and cocain, make a soothing ap- 
 plication to an aching pulp, which hardens in a perfect 
 capping for exposed pulps. — Genese, in Office and Labor- 
 atory. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 219 
 
 393. Chlorid of Zinc. — This is one of the best germi- 
 cides' that we have, and is an antiseptic. It is the fluid in 
 which the oxid of zinc is mixed for temporary fillings, so- 
 called. Its special use is as a root filling, the object being 
 to secure aseptic conditions of the cavity, enabling us to fill 
 the balance of the cavity with whatever we please, and pro- 
 long the usefulness of the tooth. — E. E. Shattuck, in Archives. 
 
 394. Sodium Peroxid for Bleaching Teeth. — For bleach- 
 ing discolored teeth I have used sodium peroxid in two dif- 
 ferent ways. First, by saturating the dentine with a strong 
 solution, following this by treatment with a dilute acid. 
 Second, by first neutralizing the sodium peroxid with an 
 acid and afterward saturating the dentine with this neutral 
 solution. The first has yielded the best results. — E. C. Kirk, 
 in Cosmos. 
 
 395. Saponaceous Tooth Wash. — 
 
 White castile soap 3 ozs. 
 
 Oil of orauge peel lo tnins. 
 
 Oil of ciunamon 5 mins. 
 
 Water 4 ozs. 
 
 Alcohol 12 ozs. 
 
 Shave the soap in ribbons ; melt with the water in a 
 water bath, adding the alcohol while still warm. Continue 
 the heat if necessary till solution is efiected. When cold, 
 dissolve the oils in the liquid. — Dental Office and Ijcihoratory. 
 
 396. Celluloid for Filling Roots. — Dr. George Allen 
 uses celluloid dissolved in alcohol and ether as a root canal 
 filling. .He states that it has o-iven much satisfaction. 
 
 397. Uses for Thurlington. — This is effective in sore 
 mouth, pericementitis, sometimes following the filling of 
 teeth. 
 
 How to use it. — Fold a piece of bibulous paper several 
 times, saturate it with the remedy, full strength, and lay it 
 on the gum as nearly over the apex of the root as possible, 
 
220 DEPARTMENT D. 
 
 keep it there twenty or thirty minutes. If the gjiims are 
 spongy and bleed easily, apply it with a brush or mop* and 
 wait a few minutes before rinsing the mouth. If there is 
 general inflammation, dilute one part thurlington with three 
 parts of water — of this take- one teaspoonful and wash the 
 mouth. If the throat is sore, gargle with it. The wash is 
 excellent for soreness caused by plate — it is equally good for 
 burns and bruises. — Dr. E. Parsons, in Dental Office and Lab- 
 oratory. 
 
 398. Aqueous Solution of Essential Oils.— It has been 
 found by Bergmann that while mixtures of the fixed alkali 
 soaps with hydrocarbons and essential oils form only emul- 
 sions in water; under separation of the respective oils, a 
 mixture of an ammonia soap with the essential oil will form 
 a clear solution in water, especially in presence of an excess 
 of ammonia {Chem. Zeit., ISTovember 6th). Turpentine oil, or 
 some other essential oil, is first mixed with castor oil, or a 
 mixture of it with some other fat oil; the mixture is then 
 subjected to the action of concentrated acid, and the product, 
 after being washed with a solution of salt, is saturated with 
 ammonia in excess. Of the fat acids may be first separated 
 by treatment of the fatty oil with concentrated acid, then 
 washed with salt solution, and the essential oil added either 
 before or after saturation with ammonia. The preparation 
 thus obtained is said to form a clear solution, and not only 
 to possess the properties of soap, but also to exercise, in 
 aqueous solution, the solvent action of an essential oil, — 
 Pharm. Journ. 
 
 399. Sulpho-carbolic Acid. — Laplace has found that a 
 mixture of twenty-five per cent crude carbolic acid, with an 
 equal quantity of concentrated crude sulfuric acid, gives a 
 thick, syrupy, dark-brown mass which possesses great dis- 
 infectant power; inferior only to a five per cent carbolic 
 solution or a one-thousandth acid solution of bichlorid of 
 mercury. ISTo equally cheap, attainable, and effective disin- 
 fectant is known. — International. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 221 
 
 400. Tannic Acid Styptic. — A saturated solution in 
 glycerin, is valuable as a styptic and astringent. I fre- 
 quently saturate a pledget of cotton with it and compress 
 hypertrophy of the gums, occurring frequently between the 
 teeth caused by accumulations of tartar or proximal fillings 
 extending beneath the gums. Instruct the patient to re- 
 move after twenty-four hours. — John G. Harper, m Archives' 
 
 401. Prepared Chalk. — This is used for polishing pur- 
 poses and is the principal ingredient in tooth powder. I fre- 
 quently prescribe in pyorrhea alveolaris equal parts of pre- 
 pared chalk and flowers of sulfur. In cases where the 
 calcic deposits are great, a prescription containing equal 
 parts of prepared chalk, flowers of sulfur and pulverized 
 soapstone, flavored with oil of wintergreen is prescribed. 
 It is claimed that the soapstone prevents the formation of 
 tartar, but I have not used it long enough to test this claim. 
 — John G. Harper, in Archives. 
 
 402. Flavor for Tooth Washes. — A good flavor for 
 almost any kind of a tooth or mouth wash, can be made of 
 peppermint 30 parts, spearmint 15 parts, clove 5 parts. — 
 Wm. H. Steele. 
 
 403. Spray for Inflamed Mucous Membrane. — 
 
 Sodii bicarb 5 viij. 
 
 Sodii bibor o viij. 
 
 Sodii benzoate, 
 
 Sodii salicylate aa gr. xx. 
 
 Eucalyptol, 
 
 Thymol aa gr. x. 
 
 Menthol gr. v. 
 
 Ol. gaultheria gtt. vj. 
 
 Glycerin 5 viiiss. 
 
 Alcoholis ^ ij> 
 
 Aque q. s. 16 pints. 
 
 This formula gives a solution which is sufiiciently alka- 
 line to dissolve the thickened secretion adhering to the nasal 
 raucous membrane, and as it is of the proper density, it is 
 
222 DEPARTMENT D. 
 
 bland and unirritating, leaving a pleasant feeling in the 
 nose. At the same time it is antiseptic and acts as a de- 
 odorizer, being in this respect far superior to Dobell's solu- 
 tion or any other non-irritating deodorizer and antiseptic. 
 As it is, however, inconvenient for many patients to have so 
 large a quantity of solution on hand, one of our Philadel- 
 phia druggists made the solid ingredients in a compressed 
 tablet, so that one, when dissolved in two ounces of water, 
 will make a solution identical in its effects with the solution 
 made after the above formula, and my patients prefer the 
 tablets to the solution. — From a Beprint. 
 
 [This solution forms a most excellent mouth wash in 
 stomatitis and ulitis from any cause. — Ed.] 
 
 404. Cocain for Sensitive Palate. — If a 4 per cent 
 solution of cocain be painted on a sensitive palate there 
 will be no trouble in taking an impression. — H. H. Buck. 
 
 405. Ive's Gutta-percha Varnish. — Make of virgin rub- 
 ber 30 grains, in half an ounce of chloroform ; gum damar 
 and sandarac, each 20 grains, in half an ounce of chloroform ; 
 dissolve and make an ounce. It makes a very strong, solid, 
 and somewhat opaque varnish. This is undoubtedly the best 
 preparation in use for varnishing cavities preparatory^ to in- 
 serting- gutta-percha fillings. — Author. 
 
 406. Sodium Ethylate for Blunted Gums.— A 2 per 
 
 cent solution of sodium ethylate painted on the blunted gum 
 septum every other day, will reduce its thickness in about 
 eight days. — Review. 
 
 407. Glycerole of Tannin for Gingivitis. — In the hope 
 that it may prove as useful to others as it has in my hands, 
 I desire to state that for this troublesome affection I have 
 •employed with satisfactory results the glycerole of tannin, 
 touching with it the affected gums twice daily. — T. M. U., 
 in Cosmos, 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 223 
 
 408. Resorcin for Pus Pockets. — 
 
 Resorciu gr. x. 
 
 Oil cinnamon ^- v. 
 
 Alcohol ITL. Ix. 
 
 Water .^ij 
 
 Inject in pus pockets around roots of teeth: — Revieic. 
 
 409. Tropacocain as a Local Anesthetic. — As a local 
 anesthetic I have emploj-ed tropacocain thirty-seven times, 
 without using, however, more than one-half grain at a dos3 
 The preparation which I have used is the following : 
 
 Tropacocain hydrochlorate, 2 grs. 
 
 Distilled water, M gtt. i (50). 
 
 S. — gtt. X for one local anesthesia. 
 
 The injections are made as in the case of cocain. The 
 root or tooth to be extracted, or region to be operated on 
 is surrounded by a series of injections of one or two drops of 
 the above liquid, till the ten drops have been used. 
 
 I have been able to extract roots, penetrate the alveolus, 
 and remo-ve a sequestrum without the least complaint on the 
 part of the patient, the injection itself being painless. The 
 local anesthesia produced is much more rapid than with 
 cocain, and commences forty-five seconds to one minute after 
 the beginning of the injection. The anesthesia lasts longer 
 and appears more developed than with cocain. But one point 
 on which we must insist ; that is, that this injection be not 
 made suddenly ; at least one minute should be employed in 
 injecting the dose. In this respect let me mention a method 
 which I have used with success in several cases of cocain 
 accidents, and that is, that as soon as toxic symptoms ap- 
 pear I introduce a lancet in the injected region, so that 
 the flow of blood may wash out the part of the injected 
 liquid which may not have yet passed in the blood current, 
 and so reduce the chances of too severe poisoning. 
 
 1. Used in an equal dose sufficient to produce local an- 
 esthesia, the new drug is much less toxic than cocain, and has 
 a very slight action on the vital functions of the economy. 
 
 2. It produces a local anesthesia more rapid and more 
 pronounced than cocain, and of at least as great a duration. 
 
224 DEPARTMENT D. 
 
 3. The solution of the salt being an antiseptic, can be 
 kept for several months without decomposition, while after 
 a few days a cocain solution is worthless for injection. — 
 Hugenschmidt, Extract Cosmos. 
 
 410. Dr. Harlan's Tooth Paste. — Below we give the 
 formula for this preparation : 
 
 I}. — Crete precip., 
 
 Pulv. orris rad aa 5 ii. 
 
 Pulv. saponis Cast, alba ^ ss. 
 
 Pulv. OS. sepia 3 ii. 
 
 Pulv. myrrhe 5 i. 
 
 Pulv. sacch. alba., 
 
 Pulv. boracis aa 5 i. 
 
 Carmine grs, x. 
 
 01. gaultheria 3 i. 
 
 Glycerin, 
 
 Honey aa 1 i. 
 
 M. Ft. paste. 
 
 West. Dent. Jour. 
 
 411. Dental Uses of Thymol. — In the Deutsche 
 Monatsschrift far Zahnheilkunde, January and April issues 
 for 1892, A. J. Hartmann calls attention to the value of 
 thymol as a medicament in the treatment of acute pulpitis, 
 claiming for it an antiseptic and germicidal action which is 
 sufficient to arrest the inflammatory process resulting from 
 microbic infection without exerting any escharotic effect 
 on the pulp-tissue. He cites cases of pulpitis with ex- 
 posure successfully treated by thymol in substance, and 
 recommends it as decidedly superior to carbolic acid as a 
 preliminary treatment to the capping operation, which he 
 asserts may be successfully performed after a sufficient treat- 
 ment with thymol. 
 
 A limited series of experiments made with this drug 
 fully substantiate the claims which Hartmann makes for it. 
 The application may be made either by applying a small 
 crystal or a powder of the drug directly to the pulp, and 
 sealing it in under a suitable temporary stopping. A satu- 
 rated solution of thymol in chloroform may be used on cotton, 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 225 
 
 or the drug may be melted in a small capsule of metal or 
 porcelain, and a pellet of cotton or small disk of blotting 
 paper dipped in the fluid thymol and applied. The drug 
 possesses the peculiar property of remaining fluid long after 
 its temperature has fallen below its fusing-point, which gives 
 ample time to apply it to the pulp-exposure before solidifi- 
 cation takes place. In every instance so far as tried, relief 
 of pain instantly follows the application. In deep-seated 
 caries with great sensitiveness of dentine, where it is pro- 
 posed to temporarily fill with gutta-percha, very satisfactory 
 results have followed from touching the warmed and plastic 
 gutta-percha to the surface of a thymol crystal, which 
 slightly softens the surface of the gutta-percha by its solvent 
 action, renders it adhesive as does chloroform or cajeput oil, 
 and when inserted exerts an antiseptic and obtundent eflect 
 on the dentine. Its use in this way suggests the possibil- 
 ity of its value as a component part of the gutta-percha 
 temporary-stopping material in the preliminary treatment of 
 cavities with sensitive dentine. — Edward C. Kirk, in Cosmos. 
 
 412. Sandarac Varnish. — Put a quantity of gum san- 
 darac in a bottle, and cover with alcohol ; use a wide mouth 
 bottle. It should be shaken from time to time till all the 
 shellac is dissolved. As there are, however, quite a quantity 
 of little sticks, bark and other foreign matter in the globules 
 of this gum, a little dift'erent manner of procedure, to make 
 this varnish, will be indicated. The alcohol having been 
 poured on the gum, it is shaken for two or three days (or 
 more), till the gum is dissolved. The varnish thus made 
 is now strained through some fine muslin to free it of foreign 
 matter. Like shellac varnish, it may be made thicker or 
 thinner by the addition of gum or alcohol ; and like it, also, 
 it should be kept in a stock bottle, while that needed for 
 constant use kept in a smaller wide-mouth bottle fitted with a 
 good cork and brush. — Dr. Cheupin,in Office and Laboratory. 
 
 413. Toothache Cotton. — Melt white wax or sper- 
 raacetti, two parts, and when melted add carbolic acid crys- 
 
226 DEPARTMENT D. ' 
 
 tals, one part, and chloral hydrate crystals, two parts, stir 
 well till dissolved. While still liquid, immerse thin laj^ers 
 of carbolized absorbent cotton-wool, and allow them to dry; 
 when required for use, a small piece may be snapped oiF and 
 slightly warmed ; when it can be inserted in the hollow 
 tooth where it will solidify. The ease produced by this 
 simple method is really very great. — Medical Record. 
 
 414. Local Anesthetic for Small Operations. — 
 
 Chloral hydrate, 
 
 Gum camphor aa 2 drams. 
 
 Morphia sulphate » }4. dram. 
 
 Chloroform i " M. 
 
 This may be painted with a camel's-hair brush over the 
 area to be incised ; allowed to dr}' and repeated as necessary 
 to render the part insensible. — Med. News. 
 
 415. Chloroform Water. — This application, which is 
 much employed in Paris, is prepared as follows : An excess 
 of chloroform is poured in a bottle, three parts filled with 
 distilled water, and, after repeated shaking, the mixture is 
 allowed to stand till the excess of chloroform is deposited 
 and the liquid quite clear. The transparent portion is then 
 to be removed by a syphon, forming a saturated solution of 
 ten grams of chloroform per liter. Applied on compresses, 
 either in its pure state, or diluted with a half or whole 
 weio-ht of water, it is found to relieve superficial pains ; but 
 when these are more deeply situated, a very hot linseed meal 
 poultice is first applied, which is afterward replaced by the 
 compress of chloroform water. Active revulsion is thus 
 produced which relieves the pain. Associated with a weak 
 solution of opium it relieves vague dental pain. — Medical 
 
 Tiynes and Gazette. 
 
 416. Test Capping for Exposed Pulp. — 
 
 Boric acid, 
 
 White wax aa i part. 
 
 Oil sweet almonas, 
 
 Paraf&n aa 2 parts. 
 
 — H. Milling, in Items. 
 
.USEFUL HINTS. 227 
 
 417. A Fine Tooth Wash.^ 
 
 White castile soap 3 ij. 
 
 Alcohol ^ iij. 
 
 Honey .? j. 
 
 Perfume for above : 
 
 Asarum canaden?e, 
 
 Orris root aa 5 j . 
 
 Strong alcohol O j . 
 
 Make a tincture and add 
 
 Tincture musk. . . . : ■ 3 j. 
 
 Essence of millefleurs 3 ss. 
 
 Essence of patchoulli TTLxx. 
 
 Dissolve the soap in alcohol, add lioney and four ounces 
 of the i^erfum.e.—Excha7ige. 
 
 418. To Retain Dressing in Teeth. — A piece of rubber 
 tubing slipped over a tooth is good to keep in a dressing 
 when the shape of the cavity is such that it is not retensive, 
 especially when the tooth is isolated or standing alone. — Dr. 
 D. Y. Beacock, in Dominion Dental. 
 
 419. Phenyl Acetic Acid. — Internal antiseptic in ten- 
 drop doses ; dissolved 1 to 6 in alcohol in 1 oz. water. Used 
 
 ocally to paint ulcers and patches in the mouth. — Denial 
 Review. 
 
 420. Eugenol. — -Acetamide is a new anesthetic, which 
 will be unique in its class on account of its form of a dry, 
 micro-crystalline powder ; it is claimed that the application 
 causes perfect anesthesis of the mucous membrane of the 
 tongue, and the action is free from irritating by effects. — 
 Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 421. Acid Cinnamic— CeH„ C, H, C, N, C, 0, OH. Sol- 
 uble in hot water, alcohol ether. Insoluble in cold water. 
 Used as a spray in five per cent alcoholic solution, or in 
 emulsion in a neutral oil. — Dental Review. 
 
 422. Eulyptol. — An antiseptic proposed by Dr. 
 Schmelz, its composition being: 
 
228 DEPARTMENT 3. 
 
 Carbolic acid i part. 
 
 Oil of eucalyptus i " 
 
 Salicylic acid 6 parts. 
 
 It is liquid, has an aromatic odor, dissolves readily in 
 ether, alcohol, alkaline solutions; but in water to a very 
 limited extent. — Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 423. Richardson on Local Anesthetics. — He uses a 
 mixture of 100 g. ether and 0.4 g. <;arbolic acid preferably 
 to ether alone. Its action is more intense and of longer 
 duration. He recommends as a spraying solution : Men- 
 thol, 1; chloroform, 10; and ether, 15. jSTeudorfer employs a 
 solution of 0.59 cocain hydrochlorate in 50 g. of bitter 
 almond water. The combination of cocain and cyanogen 
 should be very eifective. Steever uses cocain hydrochlo. 
 rate, 1 ; antipyrin, 3 ; and water, 20. — Corres.f. Schw. Aerzte 
 and Ph. Central, 
 
 424. Formula for Dorsenia. — This is about the only 
 obtunding preparation the merits of which do not depend 
 on cocain. It is said to be composed as follows : 
 
 Listerin and water in quantity. 
 
 Carbolic acid 3 parts. 
 
 Camphor 2 " 
 
 Alcohol 3 " 
 
 Glycerin 2 " 
 
 —Ex. 
 
 425. Lysol for Mouth Washes, etc. — Half ounce of 
 lysol in sixteen ounces of water may be still further diluted 
 to use as a mouth wash. The writer takes of this stock so- 
 lution, six drams to four ounces of water for washing 
 scalers, exca.vators, forceps, etc. — Dental Review. 
 
 426. To Toughen Wax. — To toughen wax, stir in the 
 melted wax a small quantity of Venice turpentine. — L. S. 
 Keagle. 
 
 427. Antifebrin for Periodontitis. — Dr. Elliott says 
 out of fifty cases he has been successful in reducing within a 
 
USEFUL HIXTS. 229 
 
 few hours, forty-five cases of pain of advanced periodontitis, 
 by two doses of ten grains each of antifebrin (acetanilide.) 
 
 428. Temporary Filling Formula. — For closing cavi- 
 ties temporarily the following preparation has been recom- 
 mended: Best gum mastic 2 grams, chloroform 5 grains. 
 Dissolve and add balsam Peru 2 grams. — Ex. 
 
 • 
 
 429. Formula for Metal Base. — It is said that to take 
 silver 4 parts, and platina 1 part, will make a very good den- 
 tal alloy for plates — that it works easily in swaging; does not 
 tarnish in the mouth; can be soldered with 18k. gold solder, 
 and that rubber can be attached the same as on a gold-plate. 
 —Dr. Buck. 
 
 430. Metal for Casting in Plaster Mold. — Dr. Rich- 
 mond says the following may be poured in a plaster im- 
 pression without generating steam. Tin, 20 ; lead, 19 ; Cad- 
 mium, 13 ; Bismuth, 48, by weight. It melts at 150° F. 
 
 —Ex. 
 
 431. Reid's Antiseptic Liquid Dentifrice. 
 
 Thymol 2 grs. 
 
 Carbolic acid . . . .' 2 drops. 
 
 Oil sassafras 8 " 
 
 Oil wintergreen 8 " 
 
 Oil rose geranium (Turk) 8 " 
 
 Oil eucalyptus 3 " 
 
 Glycerin 2 ozs. 
 
 Alcohol 4 j^ ozs. 
 
 White castile soap 2 drs. 
 
 Dist. water, q. s. to 16 ozs. 
 
 Calcium Phosphate q. s. 
 
 Color, 
 Caramel, 
 
 Tinct, cudbear aa q. s. 
 
 Dissolve the soap in 5 ozs. warm water. Dissolve the acid and oils 
 in the alcohol and add to the soap solution. Filter through paper con- 
 taining a small quantity of calcium phosphate. Add glycerin. 
 
 — Pharmaceutical Era. 
 
 482. Parting Fluid for Impressions. — Some one has 
 said that equal parts of castor oil and coal oil, colored with 
 
230 DEPARTMENT D. 
 
 aniline red, make an excellent parting compound for plaster 
 impressions. — Odontographic Journal. . 
 
 433. Use of Phytolacca. — In . April Items was an 
 article on phytolacca (poke root) that I want to add a word 
 to. That is*. It is the best remedy for quinsy extant ; used 
 in small doses, and stronger as a gargle. In fact, if used 
 when the premonitory symptoms set in, it will abort the 
 disease. According to Burt's " Materia Medica," it comes 
 nearer to being a specific for diphtheria than any other 
 drug. — P., in Items. 
 
 434. Hypodermic Solutions. — Hypodermic solutions 
 should be prepared with the utmost care, so as to exclude, as 
 much as possible, all micro-organisms. If possible, the dis- 
 tilled water, vials, and everything coming in contact with, 
 them during the preparation, should previously be sterilized 
 by a sufficient degree of heat. If this is not convenient the 
 solution, prepared with distilled water, should be filtered 
 through a small pellet of pure absorbent cotton, pushed in 
 the neck of the funnel. These solutions should be prepared 
 only in small quantities, as they are liable to deteriorate by 
 keeping. Many of them may be preserved for a considera- 
 ble time by the addition of 15 to 20 per cent of alcohol or 
 glycerin, or by the addition of boric acid (about five grains 
 to one fiuidounce) or by using chloroform water instead of 
 plain distilled water for solution. The last named agent is 'par- 
 ticularly useful. Preservatives should, however, not be 
 added, except by direction, or with the knowledge of the 
 prescriber. As soon as the slightest change is noticed in any 
 hypodermic solution it should be rejected. — Prescription. 
 
 435. Cavity Varnish. — For closing cavities tempora- 
 rily, the following preparation has been recommended : 
 
 Best gum mastic 2 grams. 
 
 Chloroform 5 " 
 
 Dissolve and add : 
 
 Balsam pera 2 grams. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 231 
 
 After 12 'to 15 hours the liquid is to be filled in 
 bottles. — Exchange. 
 
 436. New Preparation of Gutta-percha. — In setting 
 crowns of porcelain with platina pins extending in the 
 roots, and for setting gold crowns and caps, I find a filling 
 made of vermilion and gutta-percha of service. 
 
 This is made by mixing with heat and careful working 
 one part of gutta-percha and three parts of vermilion. This 
 combination resists the destructive action of the mouth 
 much better than the usual combination of gutta-percha and 
 oxid of zinc. For buccal cavities, where the ordinary 
 gutta-percha filling softens on the surface, it is of value. A 
 whole list of gutta-percha stoppings can be prepared with- 
 out the use of oxid of zinc, which are interesting as experi- 
 mental, and I shall hope at some future time to report on 
 these. The combination of iron oxid with gutta-percha is 
 one of these, and favorable results seem to have been obtained 
 with this mixture, but it takes years to determine their rela- 
 tive value. — "W. H. Rollins, in International. 
 
 437. Celluloid Cement.-;-One part shellac dissolved 
 in one part spirits of camphor and three parts of 90 per 
 cent alcohol. The cement should be applied warm, and the 
 broken parts securely held together till the solvent has 
 entirely evaporated. — Scientific American. 
 
DEPARTMENT E. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 
 
 235 
 
 DEPARTMENT E- 
 
 438. Forming Cavities in Porcelain Teeth.— Every 
 one who has occasion to place a filling in a porcelain tooth 
 has experienced the unsatisfactory working. of the diamond 
 drill. The objections are, first, from the length of time 
 consumed, as a diamond drill cannot he hurried ; second, 
 from the. expense, owing to the frequent breaking of the 
 drill; and third, the -unsatisfactory edge produced. 
 
 The method I would advocate is as follows : To form 
 a cavity in a central on the mesio-labial surface ; first take 
 an ordinary corundum Avheel with round edge and of suf- 
 ficient thickness to give the required length of cavity,— 
 that is, from as near the cervix to the cutting edge Fio. i. 
 as is desired. Now cut from the mesial surface 
 directly in the tooth till you have the cavity 
 deep enough to show the filling when in place, / ; j 
 the desired amount on the labial surface. The la- Vi..-i-^^ 
 bial aspect of the tooth will present the appearance seen in 
 Fig. 1, with a well-formed edge ; the lingual aspect the form 
 shown in Fig. 2, giving a distinct shoulder at a and b. 
 Now, with a copper disk, fairly thin, cut in at a and hii\ 
 the directions of c and d respectively. In this way the fill- 
 ing may be held from falling out either upward, downward, 
 or° toward the labial surface. To prevent its ^. 2. 
 moving backward, make undercuts, still using 
 the copper disk, just anterior to a and b re- 
 spectively. The undercut made anterior to a 
 will be entirely on the mesial surface, and is 
 represented at/. Fig. 3. It will be covered by the rubber 
 when in place. That at e may be cut well in, finishing off 
 the filling in the concavity on the lingual side just below 
 the shoulder, which is beneath the pins. This method of 
 
236 
 
 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 retaining the filling is essentially a system of dovetails. It 
 is advisable to bend the pin, proximating the cavity, back 
 out of danger of injury by the grinding. After Fig. 3. 
 forming the cavity, invest in plaster, for conveni- 
 ence in handling, and fill, Then take out of plas- 
 ter and finish. A filling put in by this method will 
 be firm in place and present a perfect edge, which 
 latter it is quite impossible to obtain by means of the dia- 
 mond drill. Of course the edge, posteriorly, will be irregular 
 in outline, but that is covered by the rubber when the tooth 
 is vulcanized in place. — H. A. Keely, D. M. D., Internafl 
 Journal. 
 
 439. Cast Aluminum Plates for Regulating. — Dr. F. 
 Abbott says : I have used cast aluminum plates to good 
 advantage for these purposes. The plate is cast over the 
 model and fits more accurately than most other plates. Then 
 you can insert screws, if you choose, as the metal is not 
 hard, yet strong enough to hold them. The plate can be 
 firmly held in ]:>lace by running the metal over the molar 
 teeth as far as the necks, and driving it solidly down. — The 
 Ohio Journal. 
 
 440. Home-made Cavity Drier. — Get an ordinary 
 
 c h i p - b 1 o we r, and 
 hard solder a heavy 
 piece of copper to it 
 as shown in cut (A). 
 The copper may be 
 dressed out in two sections ; nicely fitted to the tube ; bound 
 to place with binding wire, and well soldered. Thus for 
 fifty to sixty cents you have a good cavity drier. — Wm. H. 
 Steele. 
 
 441. Cleaning Office Glassvyare. — Wipe your office 
 glassware with muriatic acid ; it removes all water stains, 
 and keeps the patient's nose in a normal condition. — E. W. S. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 
 
 237 
 
 442. An Economical Electric Motor. — I believe the 
 electric motor one of our most useful appliances in the den- 
 tal office, and it would have been in almost universal use 
 to-day, were it not for the fact that the 
 manufacture and sale of them has been 
 so conducted that practitioners of ordi- 
 nary means thought them a luxury and 
 entirely out of their reach ; and so they 
 would be if bought as advertised and 
 sold by dental depots generally, viz.^ 
 throw away your engine and engine mal- 
 let, then buy a complete electric plant 
 for each special purpose, at a total ex- 
 pense of from §125 to $225. 
 
 One motor, if a good 
 make, will answer all pur- 
 poses, and can be made to 
 run the engine, engine mal- 
 let, fan, laboratory lathe, and 
 a dynamo for electro crown- 
 and bridge- work, or gold and silver plating if desired. The 
 base of the motor will not be heavy enough for this pur- 
 pose as it comes from the maker; it will be necessary to 
 have a hard wood base made like 1 (see cut B); to this 
 have a strong piece of hard wood turned upright (2) fitted, 
 of proper height and size, so that your engine standard 
 will fit firmly on to it. By this means you will not need 
 to throw away the engine, and can instantly change from 
 wheel to motor. The battery (if local or storage) should 
 be placed just inside the laboratory door, with wires run- 
 ning up through swivel hangers in the top of the casing. 
 When needed in the laboratory, slip ofi" the standard, carry 
 the motor in and place it on the bench or floor ; with 
 four screw-eyes, through the corners of 1, fasten it down 
 firmly, put'on the belt and go to work. A fan can be put 
 up in front of the operating chair and run with the motor 
 at the same time in conjunction with the engine, by having 
 two grooves on the pulley. The current for running the 
 
238 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 motor can be taken from electric light wires, furnished by a 
 storage battery, or (where there is no electric light plant) by 
 a self-generating battery. A motor, suitable for this pur- 
 pose, can be got for $18 to $22, and if in a city where there 
 is no electric power, it can be run with a local battery of 
 four to six cells, costing from $2.50 to $3 per cell, or with 
 a storage battery. Buy only of some reliable dealer; always 
 specify what kind of current the motor is to be run by, as 
 it has to be wound to suit the current it is to be driven with. 
 A much nicer and cheaper way to get a motor is to put it 
 up yourself, and any one who is capable of doing a nice 
 piece of crown- or bridge-work will have no trouble to ac- 
 complish the work in a satisfactory manner. The Scientific 
 American publishes a little pamphlet that furnishes all in- 
 structions, and teaches the principles on which the motor 
 works. There are several electric houses that supply at a 
 cost of from $3 to $6 the iron work for the armature, frame, 
 the wire and all other material used in constructing the 
 motor. — Wm. H. Steele, in 0. Denial Journal. 
 
 443. Cushions for Tired Heels. — For tired heels Dr. 
 Spence has found great help from the simple operation of 
 placing inside the shoe, and below the wearer's heel, a 
 cushion formed of soft and thin leather, made into a pocket 
 and stuffed with hair. The natural springiness of hair pre- 
 vents this pad from ever flattening down verj^ hard, and 
 thus avoids the occlusion of the ball of the heel with those 
 prominences of the leather often found in this location. By 
 means of this, the irritating discomfort of tired heels can 
 be largely banished from the dental profession. — Items. 
 
 444. Refining Gold. — The scraps must be spread on 
 paper or glass, and a strong magnet passed over and 
 among them repeatedly, to take out as much iron and steel 
 as possible before putting in the crucible. This is a very 
 simple method, and it will often save one or two remeltings, 
 if attended to before commencing operations. Or the filings 
 may be placed in a tall bottle, covered with a solution of one 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 239 
 
 part of sulfuric acid to eight of water, shaken uj) and al- 
 lowed to stand for some time. The acid will dissolve out 
 the iron, steel, tin, copper and zinc filings, leaving the noble 
 metal untouched. When all is dissolved, throw away 
 the solution and Avash the filipgs several times with pure 
 water. Then dry and heat them as before described. It is 
 best to waste the solutions and wash the filings through 
 filter paper, in order to avoid the loss of very fine particles 
 of gold floating in the liquids. 
 
 By thus remelting scrap separatel3^,the refiner can come 
 reasonably near to a homogeneous alloy to start with, and he 
 can then raise or reduce the quality, or color it much more 
 easily and certainly, than if attempting to mix scrap, filings 
 and new gold at one operation. 
 
 Plumbago crucibles should be used, as they are far the 
 best for melting metals requiring a high degree of heat, and 
 with care they will stand from twenty to fifty heatings. If 
 using a new crucible, a little powdered charcoal should be 
 put in it along with the metal. This will coat the surface 
 of the plumbago, and prevent the melted metal from stick- 
 ing to it. 
 
 The pouring of the gold in the ingot mold requires 
 some dexterity and practice. It must not be done so slowly 
 as to allow the stream of metal to run down the sides of the 
 crucible ; neither should the stream be so small as to. chill 
 the metal before entering the mold, or imperfect castings 
 will result, and give trouble in rolling the ingot. On the 
 other hand, the stream should not be allowed to strike with 
 force enough to slop over the mold, making rough and un- 
 even castings. The flux floating on the surface of the metal 
 should be prevented from passing in the mold with the 
 metal by using a thin piece of dry flat wood, held with the left 
 hand at the lip of the crucible while pouring. Po2:)lar is the 
 best, as it burns very slowly. The warming and greasing of 
 the ingot mold should also be attended to carefully. If it 
 is too cold or too hot the metal will spit and fly about on 
 being turned in it. It should be so hot as just to allow 
 touchins: with the hand for a second or two. If these details 
 
240 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 are carefully attended to, smooth, tough and malleable cast- 
 ings are pretty sure to result. 
 
 In melting scrap gold filings, etc., care should be taken to 
 see that it is quite clean, and free from organic matter, etc. 
 It is a good plan to heat the scrap in an iron ladle, till all 
 wax, grease, etc., are removed, before placing in the crucible 
 for melting. Always melt old gold by itself, using sal 
 amoniac and charcoal in equal quantities as a ilux. When 
 the ingot has been cast and cooled, test its malleability by 
 rolling or hammering. If it should split when rolling it is 
 due to the presence of some foreign metal, such as lead, tin, 
 iron, or steel. If the latter, the ingot should be broken up 
 and remelted with two parts of carbonate of potash and one 
 part of nitrate of potash. The flux will combine with the 
 iron or steel, leaving the gold free. Then cast and try the 
 ingot as before. If the impurity be lead or tin, the metal 
 will be very brittle, and when broken the grains will be close 
 and pale. A very small quantity of lead or tin will render 
 gold too brittle to work. It must then be remelted as before, 
 using as a flux two parts of charcoal to one of corrosive sub- 
 limate, breaking the gold in small fragments, and mixing 
 thoroughly with plenty of flux while melting. In this re- 
 melting so often, serious loss in weight occurs, due to the 
 elimination of the foreign metals ; for this reason old gold 
 should be melted and refined separately before using it to 
 make alloy, or otherwise the refiner will be seriously out in 
 his calculations, and the resulting alloy will not be of the 
 grade desired. — Denial Practitioner and Advertiser. 
 
 445. Tempering Mandrels. — Dr. "Wedelstadt, of St. 
 Paul, Minn., says that if screw-headed mandrels are tempered 
 to a straw color they will outwear a hundred untempered 
 ones. Both screw and mandrel should receive the same 
 temper. We all know how soon the thread of the ordinary 
 mandrel screw is worn out. — Ex. 
 
 446. To Reduce Heat of Spirit Lamp. — For reducing 
 the heat of the flame of a spirit lamp introduce a piece of 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 241 
 
 platina wire through the wick, so that it will not melt the 
 edges of gold foil when placed in the flame. — G. Brunson, 
 in 0. Journal. 
 
 447. A Convenient Foil Carrier. — Take a large sewing 
 needle, and with a corundum wheel grind at the head till 
 the eye is reached ; thus a fork will be formed out of the eye. 
 Draw the temper and curve the forked end somewhat : with 
 riveting hammer flatten the point. Fill a cone-socket handle 
 with pulverized shellac ; heat the socket and insert the point 
 of the mutilated needle ; center carefully; with the pencil 
 of the shellac substance add a little more to make the joint 
 perfect, and the instrument is ready to catch gold. — Dr. F. 
 E. Battershell, in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 448. To Flexoize Files. — To flexoize a Froid file, im- 
 merse it in any heavy oil, burning ofl:' the same in a Bunsen 
 flame as one would in temperinglight steel springs. Pumice ap- 
 plied by means of a brush restores the color. — Oclont. Journal 
 
 449. Making a Cotton-Brush. — I have a little device 
 which I call the cotton-brush. It is simply made from an or- 
 dinary penholder and has a wire aluminum screw. I have 
 found it very serviceable in cases w^here the gums have been 
 very much congested and extremely tender, and in such cases 
 children particularly dislike very much to have their gums 
 brushed with a bristle-brush. These cotton-brushes, which 
 simply consist of twisting a piece of cotton around the screw, 
 clean the teeth very nicely indeed. Of course, the cotton is 
 thrown away after it is used. 
 
 I have used these brushes for about eighteen months, 
 and have found they worked YQry well. Take a piece of 
 cotton and twist the screw, and it winds it on tight, and 
 gives a simple method of carrying an astringent or anything 
 else you want in the mouth. In every case where I treat 
 pyorrhea alveolaris, I give the patient one of these, and tell 
 him to dip it in listerin, or whatever else I recommend, and 
 rub the gums well. — J. B. Littig, International Journal. 
 
242 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 450. Conductivity of Filling Materials. — There exists 
 a very simple method for comparing the heat conducting 
 power of metallic bodies : The metals to be compared are 
 shaped in wires of equal length and diameter and coated with 
 a thin cover of stearin. When heated at one end by an 
 alcohol flame the melting stearin drop will travel toward 
 the cool end if the wire is held in an inclined position. The 
 quicker the drop travels the greater is the conducting prop- 
 erty of the wire, and . in this way it is easy to demonstrate 
 this quality of filling materials. — Hans Block, in Dental 
 2 ribune. 
 
 451. Blow-pipe Flames. — Thomas Fletcher, the well- 
 known expert in practical metallurgy, gives the following 
 directions for the use of the blow-pipe : 
 
 The flames may be separated in two classes. Those 
 used for blow-pipe analysis are produced by air jets of small 
 bore, and as smooth as possible inside ; the theoretically per- 
 fect jet is made of glass tube drawn out small, and broken 
 oif where the required bore exists. The advantage of this 
 jet is the perfect smoothness of the bore, which enables the 
 operator to produce perfectly defined flames, with the reduc- 
 ing and oxidizing zones large and clearly defined. The dis- 
 advantage of the glass jet is its delicacy and constant liability 
 to injury. IsText to this comes the platinum tip, which re- 
 mains fairly smooth inside ; and last of all comes the simple 
 and cheap brass nozzle so universally used. The flame in 
 this class of blow-pipe is produced by an air pressure low 
 enough to prevent the breaking up of the blue cone, the tip 
 of which is the hottest part ; inside this blue cone is the re- 
 ducing flame ; beyond it is the oxidizing zone. For brazing 
 and soldering, a heavier air pressure and a larger bore jet 
 is required ; the blue cone is broken up, and the different 
 zones of flame are much less clearly defined, and in practice 
 are much less important. The flame is still roughly divided 
 in a blue, or greenish-blue center, and an outer yellowish 
 mantle, surrounding and projecting beyond the blue. The 
 rough point of the latter is, as before, the hottest part, and 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 248 
 
 this should touch the work to be l)razed. It has a distinctly 
 oxidizing action ; but this is overcome in practice by the 
 protection of the flux used, which must have the power of 
 dissolving oxids. — The Dental Practitioner and Advertiser. 
 
 452. Soldering Tubes to Regulating Appliances. — Dr. 
 "W". H. Gage recommends that before soldering tubes to 
 regulators or other appliances, they should be filled with a 
 few fibers of asbestos to prevent the solder entering them and 
 choking them up. — The Dental Practitioner and Advertiser. 
 
 453. A New Fusible Alloy. — Nature gixQ^ the formula 
 of a new alloy which is specially adapted to many important 
 uses in the art. It melts at the low temperature of 160° F., 
 the temperature of moderately hot water, and considerably 
 below that at which the magic spoons of long ago melted in 
 a cup of tea. Its composition is : Bismuth, 48 ; cadmium, 
 13 ; lead, 19 ; tin, 20. This new alloy will withstand quite 
 a severe pressure. This makes a useful alloy for crown pat- 
 terns, when making electro crowns, and filling metal tubing 
 that is to be bent and shaped. — "Wm. H. Steele. 
 
 454. New Tempering Bath. — Take a suitable quantity 
 of muriatic acid ; dissolve all the zinc the acid will take. 
 Prepare a tempering bath composed of one part of the above 
 zinc acid and one part water. Heat the steel according to 
 its hardness. If high or hard steel, heat till just red, and 
 then temper in the acid bath. If low steel, heat it as hot 
 as you would to temper in water, then temper in an acid bath. 
 After immersing in the acid bath, cool off in water. For 
 lathe and planer tools draw no temper ; but for other tools 
 draw temper. Unlike water tempering, the colors that ap- 
 pear under this method give no clue to the hardness. 
 
 By this process, steel is readily hardened to any desired 
 degree, and may he made to cut glass like a diamond. If 
 desired, an acid bath composed of two parts of muriatic acid 
 and one part water may be used. Mr. Peck, however, pre- 
 fers the zinc acid as being; more dense. 
 
244 
 
 DEPARTMENT B. 
 
 A prominent advantage of this method of tempering is 
 the certainty of its results. It never fails to yield the temper 
 required. It can be relied on for every description of steel 
 or tool. — Scientific American. 
 
 455. Dentists' Leg. — A pecular sensation of numbness, 
 or " pins and needles " in the extremities is frequently ex- 
 perienced by dentists. This condition Dr. George Johnson 
 considers to be due to the combined influence of perverted 
 nerve-function, directly due to a mechanical impediment to 
 the circulation through the rigidly-contracted muscles and 
 their associated nerves, and to direct compression of the 
 nerves by the firmly-contracted muscles. This combination 
 is found in dentists who stand fixed and firm in one position 
 for long periods of time. The obvious means of prevention 
 and of cure consist in rest for the overstrained limb or such 
 a frequent change of position as is equivalent to a certain 
 amount of rest. — The Lancet. 
 
 456. 
 
 Home-made Disk Mandrel. — 
 
 A. — Common* wrought finish- 
 ing nail, 12 or 15 cents per lb. 
 B.— Morse drill. 
 C. — Ordinary tap. 
 
 D. — Blue head screw, 25 or 30 
 cents per doz. 
 
 E. — Mandrel complete. 
 
 E. C. Moore, D.D.S., in Ar- 
 chives. 
 
 U 
 
 457. Recut your old Burs. — Attach a hard-rubber disk 
 to a dental engine, by a bit having a tightening screw, such 
 as is generally used for mounting celluloid disks. 
 
 The bur to be recut should be placed in a stock or hand- 
 vise to hold it firmly. Proceed to recut, as follows : Drive 
 the engine at moderate speed, passing the revolving disk 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 245 
 
 from end to end of each cut in the bur, being careful to omit 
 none • examine the bur under an ordinary magnifying glass, and 
 correct any imperfect edges, till certain that all are well cut. 
 The disk should be used dry, and removed out of con- 
 tact with the bur after a second or two, in order to avoid 
 heatino- by friction, which would spoil both bur and disk. 
 Of coul'se the disk can be reapplied as often as necessary to 
 complete the work. . 
 
 Any ordinary excavating bur may be recut m this man- 
 ner in a few minutes, five or ten, after a little practice, so as 
 to be equal to the higher priced stone-cut burs. Besides, 
 the saving in utilizing old burs hitherto thrown aside, is a 
 
 profitable item. -, -, i^^ i- +i • 
 
 When a disk becomes round-edged and unfat tor tnis 
 purpose, the edge may be sharpened and rebeveled quickly, 
 by revolving it rapidly against a wet, coarse corundum 
 wheel, being careful to move the disk about over the surface 
 of the corundum to avoid cutting grooves m the latter. 
 These disks retail at twenty-five cents, and one will recut a 
 gross of old burs. Try it.-O. Dental Journal. 
 
 458 Hint on the Oil Can.— One of the essential requi- 
 sites of a well regulated dental ofiice or laboratory is an oil 
 can, but one of the most objectional features in its use is the 
 certainty of soiling the hands from the accumulation of oil 
 and dust on the outside of the bowl. Dr. Mathews obviates 
 this by making a cup of tin or brass, half an inch m diame- 
 ter and soldering it about midway of the length of the 
 nozzle; this, filled with spunk or absorbent cotton, serves 
 as a receptacle for the oil which usually trickles down the 
 nozzle and in time spreads over the surface of the bowl An 
 occasional renewal of the absorbent material is all that is 
 necessary to keep your oil can in a condition to be handled 
 without profanity. Try it, and our word for it, you will be 
 delighted.— Dr. Mathews, in Cosmos. 
 
 459. Syringe Needles-to Clean.-Hypodermic or 
 other syringes, when clogged so that a fine wire cannot be 
 
246 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 forced through them, may be cleaned by holding over a 
 spirit flame for a moment, and the foreign matter will be 
 quickly expelled or destroyed, so that liquids may be used 
 immediately. When a wire has rusted in a needle, dip the 
 point in oil, then hold it over a flame, and it can be re- 
 moved. It is well to draw oil through the point, then heat 
 it, and rust will be removed from the interior; afterwards 
 wash with alcohol, and it is ready for use. — Dental Review. 
 
 460. To Make Articulating Paper. — Of course this is 
 a cheap article and will hardly pay one to make it for the 
 money saved ; but occasionally we get caught when it is 
 needed, and we have not the time to order. For black 
 paper, use finest-lamp black mixed with refined unsalted 
 lard, to which has been added (for flavoring) a few drops of 
 oil of gaultheria. This colored paste is to be thoroughly 
 rubbed in the paper with a piece of white flannel. After 
 enough color has been absorbed, take a piece of clean white, 
 flannel and rub till all color ceases to come ofi". " Copying 
 tissue" makes a nice paper for the purpose. If medium 
 tough paper is treated as above, it is very useful for making 
 duplicate copies of orders, letters, etc. The sheets of col- 
 ored paper being placed between sheets of fine linen writing 
 paper, and written on with a hard lead pencil, gives two or 
 three copies at one writing. — William H. Steele, in Items 
 OF Interest. 
 
 461. Articulating Paste. — This can be made hj using 
 the same colors as in making the paper ; the colors being 
 rubbed up with lanolin instead of lard. — William H. Steele, 
 in Items oe Interest. 
 
 462. To Improve W^ood Polishing Points. — Wood 
 polishing points, specially the large wheel-shaped ones, will 
 wear without crumbling if, before using for the first time, 
 they are soaked for several hours in a weak solution of 
 shellac in alcohol, and subsequently given time 1o get quite 
 dry ; say about half a day. — C. D. Cheney, in Cosmos. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 247 
 
 463. Dentists' Hands. — There are some men in the 
 profession who do not realize the importance of properly 
 caring for their hands. A man who operates at the chair 
 should keep his hands clean, soft and white, and his linger 
 nails properly trimmed and cleaned ; for if there is anything 
 that will disgust a refined lady, and cause her to change her 
 dentist, untidy hands and slovenly attire will do it. There 
 are undoubtedly many in the profession who would feel 
 insulted, if told that their hands were unfit to go in a 
 patient's mouth ; but how can one expect to have clean 
 hands and carry a stump of a cigar between their fingers, 
 the greater part of their leisure time. Such fingers are 
 pickled clear through with tobacco, and are disgusting to one 
 who- dislikes the weed. — Etta M. Steele. 
 
 464. Handy Soldering Pliers. — You take the ordi- 
 nary pincers and hold a piece of gold over a Bunsen burner, 
 and, unless you are very quick, your fingers will get very 
 hot and you must drop it. I had a pair of pincers made 
 with each of the points set in a little box of asbestos. I find 
 it very valuable and satisfactory. You can leave it in the 
 burner as long as you please, and the heat will not aftect it ; 
 it is a good thing in the office and in the laboratory. — Dr. 
 George Evans, in International. 
 
 465. To Protect Instruments from Rust. — All kinds 
 of dental or surgical instruments, that are only used occa- 
 sionally, or that are to be laid aside for a time, can be eflect- 
 ually protected from rust by coating them with the following : 
 
 Best quality of cosmoline, | lb.; best yellow wax, 2 ozs.; 
 melted together over a slow fire, and thoroughly mixed. 
 "Wipe the instrument well with chamois skin, and apply a 
 coat of the above with a piece of flannel. — William H. Steele. 
 
 466. Acid on the Clothes. — ^In working with acids 
 in* the laboratory, it sometimes accidentally gets spattered on 
 our clothing. To meet these emergencies, have handy a bottle 
 of spirits of ammonia, and immediately saturate the places 
 
248 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 with it ; this will stop all action of the acid. — William H. 
 Steele, in Items. 
 
 467. Burnt Fingers. — In handling hot flasks, furnaces, 
 etc., we generally get burnt fingers. Petroleum jelly (Chees- 
 brough plain vaselin) applied immediately, will stop pain 
 and cure the burn; bind a piece of linen on, and keep it 
 saturated with the jelly till all soreness disappears. — William 
 H. Steele, in Items. 
 
 468. To Remove Iodoform Odor from Hands. — For 
 the removal of the iodoform odor from the hands and uten- 
 sils, Bienert recommends washing once with linseed oil and 
 water. The odor is said to disappear with surprising quick- 
 ness.— PA«n7i. CenU^alhalle. — Druggists' Bulletin. 
 
 469. Aluminum Wire. — This wire is valuable in 
 strengthening rubber plates — as a carrier for any corrosive 
 agent, making canal points, and many other places where a 
 non-corrosive wire is needed. -r--E!x. 
 
 470. Refining ^A^aste Amalgam. — The question of the 
 easiest and best method of refining amalgam scraps, either 
 those which have been mixed up and not used, or old fill- 
 ings, so that they can be again utilized, is of interest to 
 every practicing dentist. 
 
 It is well known that mercury boils at 357° C. and can 
 be driven off from amalgam by a sufficiently high heat. 
 The other metals present are not very easily volatile, and, if 
 they can be prevented from oxidizing, should be left in a 
 condition to again form an amalgam on the addition of mer- 
 cury. I have made some experiments in this line, and find 
 that this result can be obtained in the following manner : 
 
 The mercury may be allowed to escape, or the process 
 can be conducted so as to preserve it. In the former case 
 the operation should be carried on where there is a good 
 draft to remove the vapors of mercury, so as to escape 
 the danger from breathing them. It is only necessary to 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 249 
 
 heat the scraps in a crucible till the mercury is expelled, 
 usinsj a flux to prevent the oxidation of the alloy. A sand 
 crucible may be employed and a coal-fire, or any heat by 
 which it can be raised to redness. As a flux, borax glass — 
 borax which has been fused to drive ofl^" the water of crys- 
 tallization — answers ver}" well. The amalgam should be 
 placed in the hot crucible in small portions, so that it may 
 not be thrown out by the sudden conversion of the mercury 
 in vapor. Enough borax should be used to form a ring 
 when melted around the button of alloy, and the heat must 
 be maintained till the mass has come to a quiet fusion and 
 the globules of mercury at first seen on the walls of the 
 crucible have disappeared. The metal can then be poured 
 out and the ingot reduced to the necessary fineness by any 
 of the common methods. As a convenient means of doing 
 this I have been accustomed to pour the mass in an 
 unglazed porcelain mortar, which has been heated so that it 
 can hardly be held in the hand, and grinding quickly with 
 a warm pestle. By a little practice the metal can be, by 
 this means, reduced to a fine state. The coarser particles 
 may be sifted out by a fine wire gauze and remelted. As 
 some of the borax will probably remain mixed with the 
 alloy, it is advisable to boil it a few minutes in water that 
 this may be removed if present. After drying it is ready 
 for use. 
 
 If the mercury is to be recovered, the scraps must be 
 heated in a mercury retort or a crucible with a bent tube 
 inserted through the cover. The mercury will distil over, 
 through this, and can be condensed where there is no possi- 
 bility of breathing the vapor. "When as much as possible 
 has been removed in this way the heating should be con- 
 tinued a short time with the crucible open, in order to expel 
 the last traces. The residue can then be treated as described 
 above. — E. TV. R'ockwood, in International Journal. 
 
 471. Clarifying "Wax. — Collect in a basin all your old 
 ^x and add a pint of water containing half an ounce of 
 5xalic acid crystals. Boil slowly for half an hour and set 
 
250 
 
 DEPARTMEUT E. 
 
 aside to cool, giving it plenty of time. Scrape off the refuse 
 wax underneath the cake, and if the light color from the 
 effects of the oxalic acid is not desirable, melt it in a pan 
 without water, and stir in thoroughly a sufficient quantity 
 of liquid butter color or some other pigment. — C. W. Berry. 
 
 472. Use of the Storage Battery. — The use of the 
 storage battery in furnishing power for small motors and 
 light for examining of nasal, oral and pharyngeal cavities, 
 and the teeth ; in furnishing abundance of heat in desensi- 
 tizing dentine ; in drying and sterilizing a root-canal ; in 
 removing painlessly and without hemorrhage epulic and 
 polypoid growths; in cauterizing indolent, ulcerated mucous 
 tissue, makes a storage battery, be it only a small one, an 
 invaluable adjunct to the operating-room. — C. T. Gramm, in 
 0. Denial Journal. 
 
 473. Melting Points of Metals. — 
 
 Metals. Centigrade. Fahrenheit. 
 
 Aluminum degrees 700 degrees 1,292 
 
 Antimony . . . . 
 
 Arsenic 
 
 Bismuth 
 
 Cadmium 
 
 Cobalt 
 
 Copper 
 
 Gold 
 
 Indium 
 
 Iron, wrought. 
 Iron, cast.. . . . 
 Iron, steel. . . . 
 
 Lead 
 
 Magnesium. . . 
 
 Mercury 
 
 Nickel 
 
 Potassium 
 
 Platinum 
 
 Silver 
 
 Sodium 
 
 Tin 
 
 Zinc 
 
 425- 
 
 185. 
 
 264. 
 
 320. 
 1,200 
 1,091. 
 1.381. 
 
 176 
 
 1,530- 
 
 1,200. 
 
 1,400. 
 334- 
 235- 
 
 —40. 
 
 1,600. 
 62. 
 
 2,600. 
 
 1,040. 
 96. 
 
 235- 
 412. 
 
 797 
 365 
 507-2 
 608 
 2,192 
 1,995 8 
 2,485-8 
 348-S 
 2,786 
 2,192 
 2,552 
 617 
 
 455 
 —40 
 2,912 
 
 I43"6 
 
 4,712 
 1,904 
 172-8 
 455 
 773"6 
 
 —JEx. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 251 
 
 474. Laboratory Pads and Holders. — Pads and 
 holders that are non-conducting and will not scorch, are very 
 convenient when soldering, baking, eto. These can be easily- 
 made by any dentist at a cost of a few cents each. Procure 
 at the plumbers, some asbestos paper, such as is used fory 
 covering hot-air pipes ; get some of each, the thinnest and' 
 thickest grades, use the thin for making holders and thick 
 for bench pads, the latter to protect the bench from hot 
 flasks, soldering, etc. Cut the paper in sizes and shapes 
 desired ; now lay these pieces on some heavy flannel ; cut 
 out the pieces of flannel one inch larger on all sides than 
 the asbestos ; turn the edges up over the paper and stitch 
 fast. In using these always have the asbestos side of the 
 holder or pad next to the hot surface. — William H. Steele, 
 in Items of Interest. 
 
 475. Flexible Wrench for Band Matrice. — Dr. Fer- 
 nandez, of Chicago, has a neat little wrench for use with the 
 Brophy band matrix. It is constructed with a flexible shaft 
 and can be used at any angle. The shank of a watch key is 
 soldered to a short piece of steel coil spring, and the opposite 
 end of the spring to a straight shaft of any desired length. 
 It can be made in a few minutes and is very useful. — Inter- 
 national Journal. 
 
 476. To Mount Corundum Disks. — Take a blank man- 
 drel for the denial engine, and with a flle roughen the surface ; 
 or take one such as are sold at the depots, having a gimlet- 
 point; warm the end, so. that when dipped in powdered 
 shellac, enough will adhere to it to thoroughly coat the 
 surface when held in the flame of a spirit lamp. Place the 
 end in the hole in the center of the disk, and allow it to set. 
 Insert the mandrel in a handpiece and warm it sutflciently 
 to soften the shellac; then revolve the disk by the engine, 
 and true up the wheel with the finger as it runs, keeping the 
 disk in motion till the shellac is cool. — S. T., in Cosmos. 
 
 477. Cutting Soft Rubber. — It is quite diflicult to .cut 
 soft, or unvulcanized rubber, as it will stick to the shears. 
 
252 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 To overcome this trouble, dip the shears, or knife in water 
 occasionally. This is equally useful in trimming or sharp- 
 ening bands or other appliances of soft rubber. — ^William H. 
 Steele, in Tribune. 
 
 , 478. Soapstone for Rubber-dam. — Manufacturers of 
 rubber-dam cover the surface with powdered soapstone, and 
 if dentists will do the same after washing and drying, they 
 will find it (the dam) will slip over the teeth " as if it had 
 been greased," and not feel so bad in contact with the face. 
 I keep an individual-pepper filled ready for use. — Abiel 
 Bowen, Medina, IST. Y. 
 
 A ^ 479. A Left-hand Screw Plate from a Right- 
 
 hand Tap. — Take a piece of steel wire and cut on 
 it a right-hand thread. File off the threads on each 
 side, leaving exactly opposite to each other two 
 narrow rows of threads. A is a cross section of the 
 filed tap. B is a j)erspective showing the tap and 
 its unfiled right-hand threads. After hardening and 
 tempering the tap, drill through a piece of steel-plate 
 two holes equal in diameter to the reduced diameter 
 of the tap. Insert the tap with a steady, constant 
 push ; to overcome the regular right-hand lead, turn 
 it to the left. The result will bo a complete left-hand 
 screw-plate. C shows the left-hand screw. With 
 the same tap placed in the other hole, cut a right- 
 hand screw, and harden and temper the plate. Then 
 use the plate to make two right and left taps of the 
 common kind, so that wire-threaded in either hole 
 of the plate will fit a corresponding nut threaded by 
 the right or left-hand tap. 
 
 Dental regulating and other fixtures or appli- 
 ances not infrequently require left as well as right- 
 hand screws, and those can easily be made by the 
 method described. The cut shows clearly the 
 threads of the screw. — J. H. Beebee, in Dental 
 Cosmos. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 253 
 
 480. Polishing Instrument Points. — Put in the pol- 
 ishing cylinder (described below) the excavator points, burs, 
 or other instrument, and put in with them about two tea- 
 spoonsful of the finest flour of emery; close the cylinder; 
 screw it to the lathe, and run at a good speed till all rust and 
 spots are removed ; take off the cover and examine frequently ; 
 when clean, remove from the cylinder, pour out the emery and 
 wipe out. Put in one teaspoonful of crocus, two of clean 
 sawdust, a little olive oil, and the points ; put on the cover 
 and run the lathe till polished to suit ; remove from cylinder, 
 and wipe ofl:' with chamois skin. 
 
 The excavator points should now be sharpened on an 
 Arkansas stone. The engine burs can be nicely sharpened 
 as good as new ; either with a knife-edged Arkansas stone 
 by hand, or with a round knife-edged stone in engine. 
 
 Polishing Cylinder. — To make the cylinder for this work : 
 Take a piece of seamless brass tubing, one and a half inches 
 in diameter, inside measurement, and three inches long. Close 
 one end by fitting in a bottom of heavy brass. Now make a 
 heavy brass nut that will screw on to the lathe head ; then 
 solder this nut to the center of the bottom piece, and place 
 the bottom in the cylinder, solder fast with soft solder. JSText 
 make a tin or copper cover, make it to fit on tightly, so that 
 it will not come off during use. — Wm. H. Steele, in Items. 
 
 481. Keeping Rubber-dam in Water. — How to keep 
 rubber-dam. A grand suggestion. Put it in a glass jar, and 
 fill jar with water ; then close the jar up air-tight, and let 
 stand in a cool dark place for two weeks, and then open the 
 jar and rinse the rubber in clean fresh water. Put the rub- 
 ber back in the jar and fill with water, and keep as before. 
 I have a sample of rubber that I have kept over five years in 
 this way that is as good as new. — Dr. R. R. Rykert,in Items. 
 
 482. The Coupling of Battery Cells. — The diagrams 
 below illustrate ditterent methods of coupling the cells of 
 a battery according as it is desired to produce jpower (force 
 intensity, potential), or for creating a quantity current. In 
 
254 DEPARTMEKT E. 
 
 diagram No. 1 the cells are coupled in series from zinc to 
 carbon — positive to negative. This method of coupling pro- 
 duces what is called a high-tension current, and is that 
 which is employed for power and for illuminating purposes. 
 In this arrangement each cell, whether large or small, gives 
 a definite potential ; and every additional cell gives increased 
 
 No. 1. 
 Battery-Cells Coupled in Series to produce Eleetro-motive Force or Power (potential). 
 
 No. 2. 
 Battery-Cells Coupled in Multiple Arc to produce a Quantity Current. 
 
 intensity to the current produced, the number of cells deter- 
 mining the intensit}', without reference to their size or the 
 depth of immersion of the electrodes in the electrolytic 
 fluid. The number of cells necessary to be employed in a 
 given case depends, therefore, on the amount of resistance to 
 be overcome. The unit of measure of electrical force is ex- 
 pressed by the term volt (as the pressure of steam in a boiler 
 is designated by i)0uuds) ; the unit of the measure of resist- 
 ance is an ohm ; the unit of the measure of quantity is an 
 ampere. In an ordinary bichromate-cell, such as the Grenet 
 ■or a plunge battery in which a single fluid such as the electro- 
 poion is used, one cell gives a potential of a little over one 
 iind three-quarters volts ; two such cells give twice that, and 
 so on according to the number of cells, — six cells, when ar- 
 ranged as in diagram No. 1, producing ten and one-half volts. 
 When a current of electricity passes through a conductor 
 which resists its passage, it heats the conductor to a degree 
 proportionate to the resistance which it meets. The thin , 
 iilament of infusible carbon in the lamp forms a portion of 
 
USEFUL HINTS. ^'-'^ 
 
 an electric circuit, and because of its low c^onducting po.e. 
 
 is heated to iucandcsence by the P^^^.^S^ °/ '''""™f • .^ '^ 
 small lamps employed for examination of the -".O"* ofte. a 
 resistance of about five ohms, requu-mg proximately &^e 
 vot to overcome it. Three cells of an ordinary h.chromat 
 or Bunsen battery producea current of about five vo.ts. The 
 h tensity of the current required depends on he size and 
 charTct Jr of the carbon filament. A current that would be 
 necessary to produce incandescence in a three-candle-powe, 
 lamp would destroy the filament in a one-cand e-power lani^ 
 To increase the intensity of the current by increasing t e 
 number of cells beyond the amount required ^.o^^^^^^^ 
 resistance sufficiently to produce iiicandesence ^^ ]» ^^ *^ 
 destruction of the carbon filament. In lamps of the same 
 size and intended to be alike the resistance is not uniform, 
 owi!"to a diflerence in the size or density, and the carbon 
 may be destroyed in one by a current just sufficient to pro- 
 duce iucandcsence in another. It is therefore ""-y *« 
 employ a resistance device to graduate the flow of the cm 
 rent In diagram No. 2 the cells are coupled from zmc to 
 zinc, carbon to carbon-positive to positive. By this ar- 
 ran<.ement quantity of current is produced, according to the 
 number of electrodes and the amount of their exposure to the 
 
 electrolytic flnid-the larger the electrodes and the deeper 
 their immersion the greater the chemical action. But, while 
 ■ an increased exposure of the electrodes to the fluid increases 
 the amount of electricity generated, it does "<>* --^^^ *^ 
 electro-motive force. If the six carbons and six zincs, coupled 
 as presented in diagram So. 2. were all placed in one cell 
 tnstead of in six, the result would be the same, A quantity 
 current is required for cautery purposes. To summar.z , 
 potential or intensity of a current deP<^'>'i=' *'^*' °" ^^ 
 method of coupling, and secondly, on the number o eel s m- 
 eluded in the series, irrespective of their size and of the 
 depth of immersion of the electrodes ; while the production 
 of a quantity current requires a difi-erent coupling and de- 
 pends on the amount of surface of the electrodes exposed to 
 the fluid, irrespective of the number of cells. 
 
256 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 It should be understood that when the battery is placed 
 at a distance from the lamp, as in the cellar or a room at a 
 considerable remove from the operating-room, the length of 
 the connecting-cord necessary makes an increased resistance 
 to be overcome, and in such case an additional cell will prob- 
 ably be required to produce the same eiFect as when the cells 
 are placed near at hand. — J. W. W., in Cosmos. 
 
 483. To Cleanse Dirty Hands. — For cleaning hands, 
 however dirty, first rub well in warm oil, then sprinkle with 
 powdered borax, and wash off in the usual way. — Old File. 
 
 484. To Make Exploring Needles. — An almost inval- 
 uable thing I have found for making explorations and ex- 
 aminations around the mouth, is to take a package of Sharp's 
 'No. 4 needles, and by the aid of an alcohol lamp and a pair 
 of pliers they can be bent in any conceivable shape, so as 
 to reach all points around or between the teeth. (The rea- 
 son I say Sharp's 'No. 4 needles is, because they appear to 
 me to be the most convenient size.) If a suitable point has 
 not been made previous to an examination that will reach 
 the desired spot, it is only the work of a moment to con- 
 struct one just the shape desired. The said points can be 
 turned at any angle, and made so fine that they will pene- 
 trate almost the finest space and catch in the finest cavity, 
 and by the use of a small file the large ends may be filed 
 rough, so that they will fit and hold firmly in the ordinary 
 nerve broach holder. The heating takes the temper out of 
 the needles, rendering them quite tough. They are inex- 
 pensive, and you have any shape of exploring point desired. 
 — Charles S. Hardy, in Items. 
 
 485. To Renew Zinc. — When used in making dies, zinc 
 gets too thick and loses life ; it can be renewed by placing it 
 in a melting ladle ; melt it and keep the ladle over the heat 
 till the metal shows a dark red, then add of strong hydro- 
 chloric acid — the metal to be stirred constantly while the 
 acid is being put in. — Thomas Fletcher. 
 
USEFUL HINTS, 257 
 
 486. Action of Acids on Cements.— According to the 
 statements of Dr. Brubaker, lactic acid dissolves cement 
 fillings very rapidly, while acetic acid has little or no effect 
 on them. — Exchange. 
 
 487. Dorrence's Alloy. — This alloy is made of silver, 
 1 part ; zinc, 2 parts ; and copper, 3 parts ; (metals must be 
 pure) and is used to alloy gold or silver plate for making 
 solders. It makes a strong, easily flowing and tough solder 
 that follows the color of the plate from which it is made. 
 I prefer it to the solders that I have been able to buy, and 
 can profitably use my plate scraps. If the dental depots 
 would furnish this alloy they would do the profession a 
 service. 
 
 Fragments of roots broken off" in extracting, can often be 
 easily removed b}^ burring away the alveolar process imme- 
 diately surrounding them, thereby avoiding much pain and 
 laceration. It would be an advantage if the dental instru- 
 ment-makers would make some burs with long shanks for 
 this purpose. 
 
 It is sometimes advantageous to make a model of plas- 
 ter and sand, and when the work is adjusted do not remove 
 from the model, but add enough more plaster and sand to hold 
 the parts in position, remove wax and solder. — Ohio Journal. 
 
 Carat, Grains and Percentage. — The word 
 " carat " comes from the Abyssinian name of bean. It cor- 
 responds in weight with a species of East Indian bean, and 
 was originally used only as a weight, in the same manner as 
 our word " grain " comes from a grain of wheat, and has 
 also its averasfe weight. The exact relation of the carat to 
 the grain, Troy weight, is, in round numbers, as 4.608 to 
 1.185 ; or, in other words, 1.185 carats are equal to 4.608 
 grains Troy. By division of the last number by the first, 
 we find for the weight of the carat 3.88 grains very nearly. 
 The carat is the weight by which jewelers sell diamonds. 
 The carat is now only used for weighing precious stones and 
 pearls, because the grain is too small. 
 
258 DEPAHTMENT E. ' 
 
 In ancient times, it was used as the unit of weight for 
 gold, but is now, on account of the greater abundance of 
 that precious metal, superseded by the ounce. In regard to 
 the alloy of gold, it has been accepted to take twenty-four 
 carats of gold or ninety -three grains, very near, as the 
 standard of pure gold, and to call gold in which twenty 
 carats in twenty -four carats are pure gold, gold of twenty 
 carats; when three- fourths is pure, or eighteen carats in 
 twenty-four carats, it is called eighteen-carat gold. So in 
 regard to the alloy of gold, the word carat has become sim- 
 ilar to the expression of a percentage, wHth the difference 
 that twenty-four is substituted for one hundred. So eighteen- 
 carat gold is identical to seventy -five per cent fine ; twelve- 
 carat to fifty per cent fine, etc. That this manner of esti- 
 mating the value is kept up is simply due to the custom of 
 following the duodecimal system in making alloys, which 
 naturally drives us to the expressions, seventy, eighty, or 
 ninety per cent when speaking of the fineness of the most 
 valuable metals. — Exchange. 
 
 489. Soldering without Heat. — This consists of two 
 alloys ; the one of metallic sodium and mercury, and the 
 other of metallic copper and mercury, prepared and used as 
 follows : The flux consists of one part of sodium to fifty parts 
 of mercury. This must be carefully protected from the 
 atmosphere in a glass-stoppered bottle. This has the prop- 
 erty of amalgamating any metal with which it comes in 
 contact, forming an adhesive amalgam even on cast iron. 
 The solder proper is made as follows: Dissolve 10 ounces of 
 sulphate of copper in 2 pints of water, and then precipitate 
 the copper by the introduction of strips of zinc. "Wash the 
 precipitate in hot water two or three times, drain off", and 
 for every ounce of precipitated copper add 2 ounces of mer- 
 cury. Add also a little sulfuric acid (say 15 to 20 drops), 
 to aid in the amalgamation of the metals. The finely 
 divided copper and mercury forms a paste which sets and 
 becomes intensely hard in the course of a few hours. It 
 should be made up, ^vhile soft, in little pellets and put 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 259 
 
 away. "When required for use, first amalgamate the sur- 
 faces to be joined by rubbing them lightly with the flux. 
 This is the equivalent of tinning in the ordinary soldering 
 methods. Then take one (or more, as the case may be) of 
 the pellets, and warm till the mercury begins to exude at 
 the surface. T^^ipe ofl:" the exuded drops with a clean rag, 
 and drop the pellets in a small mortar and rub till smooth, 
 or about the consistency of prepared white lead. Smear 
 this over one of the surfaces to be joined, and apply the 
 other surface to the latter as quickl}^ as possible. The joints 
 set so firmly in the course of two-and-a-half to three hours, 
 that only a hammer and cold chisel (or a degree of heat 
 suflicient to melt ordinary solder) can separate the surfaces. 
 For an even stronger and much quicker setting solder, 
 where expense is no item, take the following to replace the 
 copper and mercury (using the same flux) : 
 
 Silver 8 parts. 
 
 Tin lo " 
 
 Bismuth i part. 
 
 Platinum i " 
 
 Melt together, and cast an ingot. Rasp to filings, or 
 otherwise reduce to small particles. When required for use, 
 mix about 3 parts of filings and 1 of mercury in a small 
 mortar till it becomes a smooth paste. This sets in about 
 fifteen minutes, and can not be made workable again by 
 heat ; it must be mixed just as required. The omission of 
 the platinum reduces the strength of the solder, and length- 
 ens the time required to harden to about one hour. The 
 omission of bismuth makes a more granular mass, which 
 is better for filling up crevices. With bismuth, it is as 
 smooth and plastic as potter's clay, Joints made by this 
 solder are almost inseparable. It is very valuable in repair- 
 ing surgical and philosophical instruments, the brazing of 
 delicate springs, and in all cases where the application of 
 heat would be hurtful or destructive. — National Druggist. 
 
 490, Engine Foot Pad. — A neat and cheap rubber foot 
 pad for the engine, can be made from ordinary hcary rubber- 
 
260 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 dam. Cut a piece of paper, to just fit the foot piece of the 
 engine; lay this on the rubber and cut a piece like it, 
 cement it to the foot piece with Le Page's glue. Such a 
 pad will answer all purposes of one costing a dollar. — "Wm. 
 H. Steele. 
 
 491. New Soldering Fluid. — Chlorid of zinc, so much 
 used in soldering, is, besides its corrosive qualities, un- 
 healthy and disagreeable to use. A soldering mixture has 
 been found which is free from these defects. It is made by 
 mixing one pound of lactic acid with one pound of glycerin, 
 and eight pounds of water. — Off. and Lah. 
 
 492. A Fine Polishing Paste. — Mix ten parts of tin 
 putty, eight parts prepared buckshorn, and twenty-five of 
 spirits of wine, to a paste. Cleanse the article with this, 
 and polish with this and fine blotting paper. — Off. and Lah. 
 
 493. Gutta-Percha Bowl. — Dr. Geo. Evans forms a 
 mass of gutta-percha in the shape of a small bowl, in which 
 is dropped chloroform. The mixture is made immediately 
 for any and all purposes it is to be used. By this method a 
 thin or thick solution can be had at the same time. — Catch- 
 ing^ s Compend. 
 
 494. To make Gold Non-Cohesive. — Ammoniate your 
 gold when you want it non-cohesive ; by annealing, it be- 
 comes cohesive again. Heat will drive oft' any gaseous 
 matters from the surface of gold. — Revieio. 
 
 495. Bunsen Burner; Best Way to Use. — The best 
 way (according to Fletcher) to use a small Bunsen, is to have 
 it mounted with the tube horizontally, or nearly so. In 
 such a position it never gets choked with dirt, and can be 
 turned down safely to the smallest point of flame without 
 the use of the air slide, and without risk of lighting back. 
 — Items. 
 
 496. Dirty Oil-Stones. — Many otherwise clean operat- 
 ing tables contain one of these. Did you ever see a dentist 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 261 
 
 pick up the oil-stone and turn his back to the patient before 
 opening the case? A little piece of cloth, wet in alcohol, 
 and applied with plenty of elbow grease, will keep the stone 
 as clean as new. — "SYm. H. Steele, in Items. 
 
 497. To Spring Temper Broaches. — To give a spring 
 temper to broaches by dipping them in melted lead, keeping 
 them there till as hot as the lead and instantly pluno;:ino; 
 them in hot water. — Dr. C. J. Tibbetts, in Items. 
 
 498. To Clean Obstructed Hypodermic Points. — If 
 
 the. needle of your Iwpodermic syringe is obstructed, and 
 you have no wire fine enough to enter the point, have re- 
 course to a section of braided picture wire; one of the fine 
 strands from this is just the thing needed. — Dr. Vs". S. Elliott, 
 in Items. 
 
 499. Soldering Aluminum Without Flux. — The solder 
 is an alloy of aluminum and tin, suitable proportions bring 
 45 parts tin to 11 parts aluminum. The metals are melted 
 separately, poured together, and then cast in slugs. Xo 
 flux is required. — R. Heaton, in Scientific American. 
 
 500. Materials Used in Artificial Teeth. — The sub- 
 stance of an artificial tooth is made principally of spar and 
 silex; the gum color, of the purple of Cassius and teroxid of 
 gold ; the bluish tint is platina ; the yellowish tint, oxid of 
 titanium. — Items. 
 
 501. Cosmetic for the Hands. — For keeping the hands 
 white and soft Meyer recommends the following, to be rubbed 
 in after a thorough washing and drying : Lanolin 100 parts, 
 paraffin 25, vanillin 0.1, oil of roses sufficient. It is most 
 conveniently kept in collapsible tubes, and is especially suited 
 to the needs of physicians, who must frequently disinfect 
 their hands. — Exchange. 
 
 502. To Barb Nerve Broaches. — When reduced to the 
 desired size the barbino; is easilv done bv taking an enamel 
 
262 
 
 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 chisel, very thin on the edge and very hard. Place the 
 broach in a sliding tube-holder or chuck — same as for hold- 
 ing it securely while cutting down with the corundum wheels 
 — and hold under it a piece of glass or any hard, bright sur- 
 face. Hold the chisel at ninety degrees angle to the broach, 
 commencing near the point, and with the blade of the chisel 
 held on the broach, not directly at right angles with it, but 
 with the right edge or corner of chisel turned farther away 
 from it, so as to throw the barb up the right side of its 
 length, in order to insure its catching the pulp. If cut 
 directly across, at right angles, it will not do so nicely. A 
 slight pressure on the chisel will raise a barb — be it ever so 
 slight — that, if cut to the right will be sure to catch the 
 pulp every time. Do not make more than three or four 
 barbs, and close together at the point, and not so deep as to 
 endanger its main strength. This can be very successfully 
 done by a little practice. — Dr. Bonwill, extract from Inter- 
 national. 
 
 503. Reducing Nerve-Broaches. — For reducing steel 
 piano-wire, evenly tempered, use two corundum wheels kept 
 together by a coiled spring (see cut), and afterwards use 
 paper disks with the soft rubber on either side, for line work. 
 
 Fig. 1. 
 
 Fig. 2. 
 
 Fig. 3. 
 
 BonwiU's devices for making nerve-broaches from Stubs' tempered steel piano-wire, and 
 for reducing Swiss broaches to an infinitesimal size. 
 
9ftQ 
 
 USEFUL HINTS. 
 
 DESCRIPTION OF APPARATUS. 
 
 No 1 consists Of two sharp-cutting corundum wheels, 
 used dry, with one at a slight bevel, as shown m cut. ihe 
 ter on; is screwed fast to mandrel rnade for the prupo- 
 ,„.l the inner one is shellaced to a thin sleeve which moves 
 lengthwise only on the mandrel, and is controlled by a coded 
 spring, the tension of which is regulated by the movable 
 CO la. and screw on the mandrel nearest the chuck ot engine 
 hand.piece or lathe. The collar holding the corundum wheel 
 ■rprevented from turning on the shat^ by a i^n rumiing 
 throuo-h it, and on a flattened surface of mandrel, ih s is 
 foi heavy ;ork of reducing tempered stub wire, but will do 
 
 SO to a very fine broach. ^^ 1 1 
 
 No 2 is a shellac and corundum wheel and a soft rubber 
 disk of plain packing rubber on the inside next to the hub 
 on mancLl, and both secured tightly to keep from turning^ 
 The rubber disk should be of greater diameter o allow the 
 broach to be guided in between them easily. The edge= at 
 the periphery will be slightly apart when screwed up tightly. 
 Both revolve at the same time. 
 
 No 3 is made of two one-inch shellaced corundum paper 
 or cloth disks, coarse or fine,-better meclium f"^ *e l^^*! 
 which is used for very delicate work -and «" b"* ^f ?;° 
 these a half- or three-quarter inch soft rubber d^f - " ' f'"" 
 packing rubber and placed around ; all screwed tightly on 
 mandrel. There is no trouble in making them from the 
 material every dentist has on hand, if it be only the paper 
 
 ^''\ making No. 1 the bevel should be very slight and 
 perfect, as the broach is so small. The inner wheel shoidd 
 have controlling it a very stiti' spiral spring, nicely adjusted 
 to permit the broach to go down between he wheels While 
 the broach or wire is being cut, it ^mild ^^ '■^.^'^f J""" 
 stantly to keep it perfectly round, and the point kept n 
 towai the center if the wheels, in order to more perfect^ 
 point it. They are held by a small chuck l^"™ :P;7? ^^^f^ 
 being cut, and when in use are fastened to a very light handle. 
 • —Dr. Bonwill, extract from International. 
 
264 
 
 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 504. Sandpaper Holder for Hand Use. — Take a quart- 
 taper cork, trim up in cone shape on the lathe, make a slit 
 through apical end of cone half-way down with a dental saw, 
 insert in this a piece of sandpaper a little wider than the 
 opening, hent back at one end for retention, and you have a 
 hand sandpaper mandrel for use on rubber plates, which 
 conforms with depressions and works admirably. — Dr. Barnes, 
 in Items. 
 
 505, 
 
 Mouth Lamp. —Dr. W. H. Trueman exhibited 
 a little device for the removal of crowns which 
 were set in the roots with gutta-percha. It was 
 merely a small vial with a slot in the cork, through 
 which passed a piece of grocer's cotton cord, form- 
 ins; a wick. The cord was moistened with alco- 
 hoi and set on fire. A minute blaze was the 
 result, which was held for a few moments next 
 the crown. The gutta-percha was thus quickly 
 softened, more quickly and effectually than by the 
 application of a heated instrument to the tooth, 
 as is usually the plan adopted, and with no dis- 
 comfort to the patient. The cut represents the 
 appliance. — Office and Laboratory. 
 
 506. Suggestions for Using Diamond Drills. — When 
 drilling a cavity with a diamond drill, oil onl}^ should be 
 used as a lubricant, thus preventing the drill from becoming 
 heated, which would cause it to tear out ; also, when drill- 
 ing a cavity, two drills should be used of different sizes, the 
 larger one to widen the cavity, and the other for the retain- 
 ing points. When properly used, these two drills should 
 last till the steel which holds the diamonds is actually 
 worn away. — A maker of them, in Items. 
 
 507. Rubber-dam Clamps. — Rubber-dam clamps are 
 among the most valuable instruments that a dentist uses ; 
 at the same time they are among the most dangerous. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 265 
 
 Any one who lias used them for a long series of years has 
 had cases where decay came as the result of the injury in- 
 flicted on the enamel by the hard and sharp edges of 
 the steel jaws of the clamp. I have seen many such results 
 in delicate teeth, and have sought for some means to over- 
 come this. In my own practical employ clamps with adjust- 
 able jaws of soft metal or other substances like hard rubber 
 and celluloid. These jaws are easily replaced if injured, 
 and enamel would require to be very soft indeed to receive 
 injury from such clamps. I have never seen a case that 
 showed subsequent decay from the use of my clamps. I 
 describe them here in order to prevent, if possible, some un- 
 scrupulous person from patenting the invention, which con- 
 sists briefly in making clamps with removable jaws ; said 
 jaws instead of being made as at present of hard steel, are 
 constructed of soft metals like tin or rubber or celluloid, or 
 other suitable material ; the object being to provide jaws 
 too soft to injure the enamel of the tooth. These little re- 
 movable jaws can be molded in quantity, and are therefore 
 cheap, and at the same time they are readily bent to fit any 
 special form of the tooth to which they are to be ajipHed ; 
 this is a strong point in their favor. Besides this advantage 
 they require but a few clamps to fit a whole set of teeth, for 
 the jaws, being removable, suitable ones can be selected from 
 a great number, and simply placed in the clamps for use. 
 — William IT. Rollins, in Iniernational. 
 
 508. A Piano Wire Separator. — Another appliance 
 is a little instrument that will not slip, but hold the teeth 
 firmly in getting space. It consists of a small piece of piano 
 wire, with a thread cut on it. One end is flattened, and 
 on the other end is a little nut. A small washer goes on the 
 other side between the teeth. It is a matter of considerable 
 convenience, and in some cases a very serviceable little sepa- 
 rator. It is not applicable to cases where it is liable to slip 
 against the gum. That may be modified by putting a little 
 sandpaper washer under the nut. — Dr. II. ^Y. Gillett, in 
 International. 
 
266 
 
 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 A 
 
 - G 
 
 509. How to Make a Useful Instrument. — Explanation 
 of cut.—A^ celluloid or vulcanite anvil, for the punch to 
 
 strike on. B, rubber 
 cutter or punch. C, 
 ligature cutter, part- 
 ly open and in posi- 
 tion for removing the 
 punch. D, copper jaw 
 of point pliers. E^ 
 shows middle section 
 of rubber punch. F^ 
 points of punch and size of holes. G, reverse end of punch. 
 The little instrument shown in above cut, has been in con- 
 stant use in my office for five years, and has proved souseful^ 
 that I give my method of making it for the benefit of your 
 readers. Procure of some dealer an ordinary nickel-plated 
 card punch, such as used by merchants for canceling sales 
 on credit cards. With a steel punch drive out the cutter, fit 
 in its place a piece of celluloid or vulcanite, having the top 
 rounded, as shown in A. This makes the bed-piece for 
 cutting the rubber on ; the top is rounded for the purpose 
 of stretching the rubber-dam, as the punch closes down 
 on it. 
 
 Next, turn out of a piece of Stubs' best steel drill rod^ 
 the rubber-dam punch (E). The two small ends want to be 
 of difierent size in order to punch the two difi:erent size 
 holes ; the center, or shoulder, should be large enough to 
 give it a firm seat in the jaw of the instrument ; center the 
 small ends and drill in them deep enough to make the 
 cone-shaped holes and cutting edges shown in the cut. Drill 
 a hole in the lower jaw, directly opposite the vulcanite anvil, 
 and entirely through, large enough to take in the largest 
 end of the punch. With a square end drill (or better turn 
 it out in the lathe) enlarge this hole deep enough so it will 
 take in the shoulder of the punch, allowing the top of the 
 shoulder to come flush with the face of the jaw. 
 
 To make the point plier combination, close the jaws of 
 the punch and wind them together firmly with wire; center 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 267 
 
 a twist drill between them, and drill a hole through ; remove 
 the wire with a file, cut a dove-tail mortise and fit in a 
 piece of copper (D). On the side where the ligature cutter 
 shuts in, the copper should be filed down smooth with the 
 face of the jaw sufficient to let the blade close in out of the 
 way when not needed. The balance of the copper should be 
 left high enough to allow the grasping of a cone-socket point 
 without having the rubber punch strike. The next, and last 
 step, is the ligature cutter. Make this from a piece of the 
 very best steel and shape as shown in cut (C). The large 
 end, or shank, should be made concave, with two pointed 
 corners, and should be fastened to the jaw in such a position 
 that one or the other of these corners shall act as a lock to 
 hold the punch in place at all times, except when concave 
 end of the blade is exactly in line with the oval shoulder of 
 the punch (as shown in cut). AYhen in this position the 
 punch can be easily removed arid reversed. Drill a small 
 hole in the jaw and rivet the blade to place. Do not rivet 
 the head so tight but that it can be opened and closed. This 
 instrument can be made by any one at a cost of one dollar 
 to one dollar and twenty-five cents, and will take the place 
 of three instruments costing four dollars and fifty cents. — 
 Wm. H. Steele, in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 510. To Make Cells for Storage Batteries. — Procure 
 a glass bottle, cut a strip of one-sixteenth sheet lead, to fit 
 nicely around the inside ; score this all over on the inside. 
 Now cut two pieces from the same gage lead, almost square, 
 one having a central slit half-w^ay down from above and the 
 other half-way up from below. Score these also on both 
 sides. Put them together, fastening them with a drop of 
 solder, and also attach leaden lug. A similar leaden lug 
 must be attached to the inner coating of the bottle. Is'ow 
 coat the scored lead with red lead and oil of vitrol paste ; 
 allow to dry in a warm place. When quite dry the cell can 
 be filled with a mixture of water, 4 parts ; oil of vitrol, 1 
 part by weight. If carefully put together, this all is ready 
 to receive a charge at once. — Jour. Brit. Asso. 
 
268 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 511. Rubber-dam Holders. — The small clamps sold by 
 clothiers for holding neck scarfs to the shirt front, are con- 
 venient in holding folds of the dam out of the way of the 
 operator. — Dr. H. R. I^Teeper, in Archives. 
 
 512. Annealing Nerve Broaches. — Anneal nerve 
 broaches in a glass tube. — G. P. Terry, in Ohio Dental 
 Journcd. 
 
 513. To Renew Cement Powder. — The powder of 
 " osteo-plastics " by standing, often becomes impaired by 
 absorbing moisture. To remedy this it should be heated 
 over a sand bath in a porcelain dish. — Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 514. Proportions of Mercury and Alloy. — It is said 
 on good authority that the quantity of mercury to use in 
 amalgam fillings is thirty parts of mercury to one hundred 
 parts of amalgam. The less tin in the allo}^, the less mer- 
 cury will be required. — Items. 
 
 515. Smudging of Gold.— The common method of 
 annealing gold mats, pellets, or cylinders, by holding them 
 over or in the flame of an alcohol lamp or Bunsen gas burner, 
 is a practice which, while ordinarily successful, is liable to 
 occasion defects in the fillings. 
 
 The resulting imperfections are not always observable 
 in flush-finished fillings, though some of these subsequently 
 scale at marginal points on their surfaces ; but elaborate 
 building or contour work not infrequently meets with most 
 disappointing disaster, due to the smudging of the gold by 
 the incomplete combustion of the flame fuel. Clearly one of 
 the most important preliminaries to a gold operation should 
 be a careful scrutiny of the annealing flame, to be sure that 
 there is not a trace of smoke ; that the combustion is perfect. 
 The wick of the alcohol lamp is usually too tight in its tube, 
 arid not loose enough in its assemblage of fibers to permit a 
 free flow of the fluid fuel. Of course, the appearance of a 
 single glow-point of a flber-end of the wick is a certain sign 
 
USEFUL 11I^■T5. 269 
 
 of smoke, and should at once be remedied. When a lower 
 grade than 95 per cent alcohol is used, the residual fluid, 
 after a few hours burning, becomes so watery as to lessen com- 
 bustion, and cause the charring of the wick- end. The sight 
 of a blackened wick-end leaves no doubt as to the probable 
 character of the annealing, and the operative work done by 
 the use of that lamp. 
 
 The illuminating gas of diverse cities ditier in quality, 
 and even in the same city varies from time to time in its 
 heat and light-giving properties; therefore the ordinary 
 Bunsen burner is liable to vary in its degree of combustion ; 
 but the habit of closely observing the flame and keeping it 
 regulated to the blue point of complete combustion, will tend 
 to the avoidance of the risk of smudging, the main thing 
 being to be sure that the burner is a good one. It is well to 
 keep at hand a piece of white porcelain — for instance, a 
 small butter-plate — and by occasionally holding it for a 
 minute or two over the flame, gain an assurance of the entire 
 absence of smoke. * 
 
 The mica method of annealing is preferable, as avoiding 
 all risk of a smudge. — W. S. HoAve, in Ohio Dental Journal 
 
 516. Treatment of Syphilis in the Mouth. — As soon 
 as the lesion has been sufficiently studied and observed, and 
 we are sure that it is a syphilitic sore, we are justified in be- 
 ginning the treatment, which consists especially in the in- 
 ternal administration of one of the salts of mercury. 
 
 Later on, on the decline of the secondary period, when 
 the tertiary symptoms make their appearance, the internal 
 administration of iodid of potassium comes in play, and 
 it is really remarkable with what rapidity some of these 
 gummat-ous tumors melt away when the potassium salt is 
 given. In rare instances the iodid alone will not act, but in 
 connection with small doses of mercury it is capable of work- 
 ing wonders. 
 
 Hence, whenever, after having removed all mechanical 
 irritative points, we find that an ulcerative lesion of the buc- 
 cal cavity does not disappear, we must administer from thirty 
 
270 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 to sixty grains of iodid of potassium in twenty-four hours, 
 and continue its daily use for several weeks. After a week's 
 treatment, sometimes, the whole lesion is changed, indicating 
 its nature. 
 
 The mouth must always be kept in as aseptic a con- 
 dition as possible, by the use of antiseptic mouth-washes, 
 such as thymol, boracic acid, chloral solutions; while the 
 lesions may be touched twice a day with the following prep- 
 aration : 
 
 R. — Salol. . 4 grams. 
 
 Iviquid vaselin 30 grams. 
 
 M. — Sig. For external use. 
 
 As to the prophylactic measures to be taken they are of 
 the greatest importance. 
 
 If the father or mother of a family be affected by this 
 disease, he or she must be absolutely forbidden to kiss their 
 children, or to allow any one to use anything that could have 
 come in contact with the infected mouth. All dental instru- 
 mentshaving come in contact with syphilitic patients must 
 be placed in boiling water for at least half an hour before 
 thej are again used. 
 
 We must also be careful to protect our fingers with a 
 napkin, moistened with a strong bichlorid of mercury solu- 
 tion, if we place it so as to guard the mouth against the slip- 
 ping of an instrument. 
 
 Again, after an operation on a syphilitic patient, the 
 hands must be washed for two minutes in a 1-1000 bichlorid 
 solution. — A. C. Hugenschmidt, in Cosmos. 
 
 517. To Make Twist Drills. — Take a piece of fine 
 piano wire, flatten by grinding or otherwise, about half an 
 inch at one end. Do this without drawing the temper. 
 Twist the flattened end to the left, while held in the vise, 
 with a pair of pliers. You will have as nice a twist drill as 
 you can wish for entering the smallest canals. If carefully 
 made they can scarcely be broken while in use, and can be 
 made as fine and small as desired. — D. Y. Beacock, D.D.S., 
 in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 271 
 
 518. Treatment of Cystic Tumor. — "A cystic tumor," 
 says Professor Ingersoll, "should be erupted from its mucous 
 contents by careful puncture at the lowest point, and then 
 collapsed by pressure. This can usually be done by a pad 
 of considerable size dipped in dry tannin and held firmly on 
 the cyst by pressure of the lips or cheek. Mechanical treat- 
 ment," he says, " should be confined to the external surface 
 of the cyst, and consist of the use of stimulants and as- 
 tringents." — Items. 
 
 519. Painless Clamp Attachment. — Dr. Albin Len- 
 hardtson, in the Odontologisk Tidskrlft, recommends, to lessen 
 the pain in adjusting the clamp, that its claws be covered 
 with a piece of rubber skin of corresponding size. In this 
 there is another advantage — the hold on the tooth being 
 stronger on account of the elasticity of the rubber. — Items. 
 
 520. Coloring Wax. — To stain beeswax a bright trans- 
 parent color, melt the wax and add either armatto or tur- 
 meric. The addition of hard paralfin or spermaceti will 
 harden it. — Exchange. 
 
 521. Using Corundum Wheel about the Mouth. — 
 TThen a corundum wheel is used the particles are forced up 
 under the gum ; this is readily removed by a spraying 
 apparatus. I use a spray more than I do a syringe. TThen 
 cleaning the teeth of tartar some pieces will get loose and 
 lodge under the gum : the spray effectually removes them. 
 The same result follows the use of pumice refuse. The 
 patients like it. Every dentist should get a spraying appa- 
 ratus, and he will never be without it afterward. — R. Otto- 
 lengui, in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 522. Hint on Using Disks. — A celluloid disk placed 
 at the back of any sandpaper disk stiffens it materially and 
 is a great improvement. By holding a smooth burnisher on 
 the smooth polished surface of the celluloid when polishing 
 a gold filling, th^ disk can be bent and pressed in any 
 
272 DEPARTMENT E, 
 
 uneven surface without destroying it, thus avoiding the 
 trouble and annoyance of changing so frequently. A cellu- 
 loid disk can be placed between two sandpaper disks, back 
 to back, and used to advantage. — D. V. Beacock, in Items. 
 
 523. Home-made Syringe. — Get the rubber bulb from 
 an ordinary drop tube, and fit a hyjDodermic syringe needle 
 to it by wrapping a strip of dam on the hub of the needle, 
 or by slipping several thicknesses of rubber tubing over the 
 hub, so that by stretching the bulb over the hub with the 
 clamp forceps it will fit entirely air-tight. It is a very ser- 
 viceable device, and its many uses, such as syringing out 
 canals, carrying medicaments to the teeth, etc., will be 
 readily appreciated. By using a needle with a large bore, a 
 cleanly oiler for the engine can be made. — Dr. H. R. jSTeeper. 
 
 52J:. To Make Serviceable Drills. — The most service- 
 able drills we have used are made by grinding fissure burs 
 to a drill point of the desired shape. If they are not sufii- 
 ciently hard, they can easily be tempered harder. They are 
 especially useful in opening proximal cavities through the 
 crown. — Dr. H. R. ISTeeper, in Archives. 
 
 525. To Make Mouth Mirrors. — Dr. Joseph E. Waitt, 
 ^^Boston, Mass., demonstrated a method of making mouth- 
 mirrors by which the cost was reduced to a minimum. It 
 consisted of making three dies, each with a round hole, the 
 first for shaping and the others for finishing the l)acking for 
 the mirror, w^hich backing is made of German silver and 
 stamped in the die by a steel mandrel. The mirrors are cut 
 by a diamond glass-cutting machine, and cemented in the 
 backing. This method is not patented, and was exhibited 
 for the benefit of the profession. — Trans. Mass. Dent. So. 
 
 526. Making Rubber Corundum Disks.— Dr. George 
 A. Maxfield, Holyoke, Mass., showed an ingenious way of 
 making hard rubber corundum disks. The corundum grit 
 is incorporated with the rubber by being passed through a 
 
USEFUL HI^'TS. 273 
 
 clothes-wringer (the quantity of the mineral used influencing 
 the coarseness of the disk), and, after being cut to the required 
 diameter by a mandrel for the purpose, they are vulcanized, 
 beins: struns: on a tine wire, the diameter of the engine man- 
 drel, and separated from each other by a small circular piece 
 of tin, the whole encased in a clamp to press and hold them 
 together. A great many can be made at one time, and at a 
 cost that is not worth mentioning. — Trans. 3Iais. Dent. So. 
 
 527. To Avoid Infection. — A physician recommends 
 the placing in the mouth of a fragment of myrrh if one tinds 
 himself in an infected atmosphere ; he has employed this 
 means with happy results in several epidemics. 'He con- 
 siders myrrh as a specific against infection. Physicians in 
 the East use this means constantly in visiting patients. — Ux. 
 
 528. To Clean Impression Trays. — To clean and 
 brighten impression trays place them in a vessel of water, to 
 which has been added several tablespoonsful of " Pjde's 
 Pearlin," and boil for a few minutes. AVhile hot rub dry 
 with a rough towel, and the trays will be as clean and bright 
 as when new. — R. B. Foster, in Items. . 
 
 529. Drip Tray for Lathes. — Take a suitable piece of 
 sheet zinc, make a small tray 6 J inches long, 3 J inches wide, 
 and J inch deep. When constructing, cut slanting in the 
 corners of the zinc so that when the ends are bent up and 
 soldered, they will lean foward about 20^. Xow solder 
 another piece of zinc across the tray about ^^ inch in front 
 of and parallel to the posterior end. Take a piece of glass 
 7 inches long and of proper width to tit in the space be- 
 tween the double end, place in position and the tray is com- 
 plete. The glass stands at an angle of 20° forward, so that 
 when the tray is placed under the lathe-wheels, brushes, etc., 
 the glass catches all of the drip, and yet does not shut off the 
 lio;ht. The trav beins: of zinc does not rust out. — G. H. 
 "Wilson, in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
274 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 530, Sterilization of Instruments and Cleansing 
 Hands.^ — Before beginning my work in the morning, I 
 cleanse my nails, which are not allowed to become over a 
 m.m. long, with a pen-knife, and then brush the hands, 
 giving, of course, particular attention to the nails, for two 
 minutes with a rather stiff brush, in a warm one to two per 
 cent solution of lysol. Lysol is quite equal, if not slightly 
 superior, to carbolic acid as an antiseptic, and is far less 
 escharotic. It makes a soapy solution, and cleanses the hands 
 beautifully even without soap, though I usually add soap as 
 a matter of habit, as well as to make the cleansing doubly 
 sure. The hands are then rinsed in hydrant water and thor- 
 oughly dried. The whole operation requires about four min- 
 utes. The hands are perfectly clean, but, of course, not 
 absolutely free from germs. If the fingers are rough or 
 cracked, or the nails long, double the time will be requisite 
 to accomplish the same end. A slight odor of lysol clings 
 to the fino^cr=5. but I have not found it disag-reeable to the 
 patients ; on the contrary, they are glad to be reminded of 
 the fact that the dentist takes proper care of his hands. 
 
 Between operations or consultations I wash the hands 
 in soap water, brushiug the nails and fingers from one-half a 
 minute to a minute. 
 
 If, however, I have performed an operation on a filthy 
 mouth, I return to the lysol solution, even increasing its 
 strength according to indications to two and one-half, three, 
 and even four per cent. I have found that a four or five per 
 cent solution of carbolic acid, lysol, or trichlorphenol suffices 
 to completely sterilize mechanically clean instruments in 
 thirty minutes. 
 
 I keep two complete sets of instruments constantly in 
 use, and as soon as I have finished operating for one patient, 
 the whole set of instruments used is removed from the 
 operating table and placed in the antiseptic solution, where 
 it is allowed to remain while the other set is in use, or at 
 least half an hour. Since about four weeks I have substi- 
 tuted lysol for carbolic acid. All instruments, including 
 -^iorundum disks, files and clamps, are subjected to this treat- 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 275 
 
 ment, whereas, those instruments which do not come in 
 contact with the mucous membrane, or do not become soiled 
 in the mouth (gold-pluggers, etc.), are only occasionally 
 sterilized. 
 
 Mouth-mirrors require extra care, and must be carefully 
 brushed before treating with the lysol solution, in order to 
 remove small particles of infectious matter which may have 
 inserted themselves between the glass and the fastening. I 
 keep so many mirrors on hand that I do not require to use 
 any one twice the same day. There is consequently no time 
 lost between patients in cleansing mirrors. 
 
 To be able to place before every patient a glass which 
 at least does not carry any germs from the mouth of a pre- 
 vious patient, I have provided as many glasses as I have 
 patients in a day. These are all placed in a three per cent 
 solution of lysol in the evening, and remain there for over 
 twelve hours. They are then thoroughly rinsed in hj^drant 
 water. — W. D. Miller, in Cosmos. 
 
 531. Suggestions on Storage Batteries. — Locate your 
 battery in a convenient and sufficient light, place so as to be 
 easy of access and inspection. Look at it every day, and 
 always before commencing to charge ; see that the active 
 material in the plates does not fall out and accumulate at 
 the bottom of the cells so as to touch the plates ; this would 
 cause a short circuit and injure the plates, also diminish the 
 power of cells. Use well-insulated copper wire of not less 
 than In'o. 15 B & S gage, and E"o. 12, especially if the 
 battery is located more than twelve or fifteen feet away from 
 your appliances at the chair; the reason for this is that the 
 quantity of your current should not be wasted in traversing 
 an unnecessary length of wire, or the force or voltage of the 
 current reduced by the high resistance of small wire external 
 to the magnet coils of your motor or mallet ; this loss is 
 reduced toward the minimum just in proportion to the in- 
 crease in size of the conducting wires leading from the bat- 
 tery to the motor. — W. W. Vance, in Ex. Review. 
 
276 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 532. Fusible Metals. — 
 
 I<ead. Tin. Bismuth Melts at 
 
 I part I part i part 250° 
 
 I '' I " 2 parts 20° 
 
 10 parts 16 parts 8 " 300° 
 
 16 " 14 " 8 " 280° 
 
 I part I part 2 " add a little mercury. 112° 
 
 — J. E. Davis, in Items. 
 
 533. Watt's Metal for Cast Dentures. — Tin, 40 dwt. ; 
 silver, 8 dwt. ; bismuth, 16 grains. — J. E. Davis, in Items. 
 
 534. Cause of Rubber Sore Mouth. — Many reasons 
 have been given for the disease called rubber disease. Some 
 think that the vermilion in the plate is poisonous ; some 
 claim to prove that free mercury exists in the plate ; some 
 that the closeness of the fit causes a mechanical damming 
 up of the follicles, and still others hold that it is none of 
 these, but that the rubber being a non-conductor, the heat 
 of the tissues is, so to speak, penned up, causing irritation. 
 
 I have but one opinion about it. It is that the porous 
 condition of the rubber plate, for all, even the best of them, 
 are variably less porous, affords a lodging-place for germs 
 which irritate the tissues. It has been well said that prob- 
 ably no culture field is better fitted for the development 
 of germs than a rubber plate ; and of all the dirty things I 
 have ever seen about the mouth an unclean rubber plate is 
 the foulest. And it is remarkable with what perfect inno- 
 cence the plate is handed to the dentist for repairs, with 
 sufficient food clinsfino; to it to afibrd materials for a naked- 
 eyed analysis of what was had for breakfast and possibly 
 for days past. I am sure that in some cases no part of the 
 plate was in contact with the mucous membrane. Only food. 
 Foul, fermenting, filthy, the w^hole thing is superlatively 
 dirty. Even in the mouths of the most careful and fasti- 
 dious patients the rubber plate cannot be kept clean. This 
 condition of affairs is simply impossible with a gold plate. 
 It is only possible w^here a surface, such as a rubber plate has, 
 presents places for attachment for pasty food, mucus, etc. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 
 
 277 
 
 I honestly think that the so-called rubber disease 
 disease mainly of dirt, and that in so far as we get rid of 
 occasion the disease will vanish. — J. B. 
 Hodgkin, in Items. 
 
 535. Light Yellow Tartar. — Light- 
 ish yellow-black tartar is deposited at the 
 gum margin, especially on the exterior 
 next the cheeks. The tartar disposes to 
 caries the points where it is deposited. It 
 is not the tartar in Ihe true acceptation 
 of the word, but an infectious deposit, a 
 fermentous medium, with permanent acid 
 reaction (Viat). Green tartar which, con- 
 trary to the other kinds of tartar deposits, 
 does not come from the salivary glands, 
 but is produced by a parasite from the 
 exterior — the Leptothrix buccalis. — 
 Robin, in Ohio Dental Journal. 
 
 536. Bands and Matrices. 
 — The simpliest and best matrix 
 or band I know of is made from 
 thin stencil cutters German sil- 
 ver, it can be obtained from 
 dealers in stamp makers' sup- 
 plies at a trifling cost. Cut 
 from the sheet a piece the size 
 and shape required, place it 
 around the tooth, draw it tightly 
 
 IS a 
 the 
 
 together, and hold firmly with a pair of jSTo. 6 separating for- 
 ceps, give it a bend as in Fig. C, remove the forceps and bend 
 
278 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 again as in Fig. D. If it is necessary to leave the band on from 
 one sitting to another, this projecting end (Fig. D) can be bent 
 down on the band, and secured by a piece of floss silk tied 
 aronnd the tooth. The Wilmington Dental M'f 'g Co. have 
 recently introduced a pair of plier, invented by Dr. C. E. 
 Esterly, designed especially for fastening matrix bands (see 
 Figs. B and E), and they should be on every operator's table. — 
 Wm. H. Steele. 
 
 537. Origin of Pus. — Inflammation is a disturbance of 
 nutrition of a tissue, causing recurrence to the embryonal 
 condition of the tissue involved. 
 
 The embryonal condition is established by the breaking 
 up of the tissues in those medullary or indifierent corpus- 
 cles, which, at an early stage of normal development, have 
 built up the tissue. 
 
 The medullary corpuscles arise, not only from the pro- 
 toplasmic bodies of the tissue, the so-called cells, but also 
 from the intercellular or basis substance, as these shared in 
 the formation of the basis substance and must in its solu- 
 tion. 
 
 The medullary, or indifi:erent corpuscles, will represent 
 a tissue so long as they remain interconnected and continu- 
 ous. By a simple reappearance of basis substance, the most 
 favorable termination is established — resolution. 
 
 If the inflammatory or medullary corpuscles have 
 largely augmented, a number thereby remaining in original 
 connection, the result will be productive — hypp^plasia. 
 
 If the inflammatory corpuscles spring from previous 
 " cells," basis substance and blood-vessels break asunder, be- 
 come isolated and suspended in an albuminous liquid, and 
 henceforth represent pus corpuscles. 
 
 Pus, therefore, is a destroyed tissue, broken up in its 
 constituent elements, and as such, unfit for the production 
 of new tissue ; though the single pus corpuscles will remain 
 alive and ameboid almost indefinitely, so long as they are 
 sufficiently nourished. — Dr. W. H. Atkinson, in Am. Den. 
 Asso. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 279 
 
 538. Combinations of Metals With Mercury. — 
 
 Silver forms definite crystalline chemical compounds 
 with mercnry. 
 
 Tin unites with mercury in atomic proportions, form- 
 ing a weak crystalling compound. (Kirk.) 
 
 Copper does not form definite compounds with mer- 
 cury : but in the form of crystals is dissolved by it in vary- 
 ing proportions. 
 
 Gold is dissolved by inereury in all proportions ; but 
 does not form a definite atomic compound. 
 
 Zinc unites with mercury in atomic proportions. 
 
 Platinum only unites with mercury when reduced to a 
 spongy condition, 
 
 ^Palladium.— The union with mercury is probably chem- 
 ical.— T. E. Weeks, D.D.S. 
 
 539. Affinity of Metals.— 
 
 Mercury dissolves all metals but iron. 
 
 Silver has affinity for platinum. 
 
 Tin has affinity for gold and platinum. 
 
 Copper unites with zinc in all proportions ; and in some 
 proportions forms definite compounds. 
 
 Gold unites with silver in any proportion ; and is ren- 
 dered very brittle by the least trace of antimony, palladium 
 or lead. 
 
 Zinc unites in all proportions with gold and tin ; forms 
 chemical compounds with platinum. 
 
 Platinum unites in definite proportions with silver and 
 cadmium— T. E. Weeks, D.D.S. 
 
 540. Disk Lubricator.— Put a little petroleum jelly on 
 the coarse polishing or dressing disks and they will not heat 
 the tooth ; but, will catch the particles of gold that would 
 otherwise be lost. It softens the disks, making them more 
 pliable for reaching out of way places ; while they cut just a& 
 well as when drv. — A. Secor. 
 
280 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 541. Properties Imparted to Alloys by Metals. — 
 
 Mercury, being the controlling metal, imparts' its spher- 
 ical tendency to the amalgamated mass ; specially in those 
 alloys which are " solution," or " mechanical mixtures." 
 This tendency is greater with those metals having a low 
 fusing point, cooling slowl}*, and when amalgamated settling 
 slowly, as tin ; and less with those which melt at a higher 
 temperature, cool quickly, and set quickly when amalga- 
 mated ; as silver and copper, 
 
 Silver controls hardening or setting, because of its crys- 
 tallin form and chemical affinity for mercury. It main- 
 tains the bulk integrity of the filling, and should be the 
 largest component of an alloy. The silver sulphide formed 
 by the action of sulphuretted hydrogen is supposed to have 
 prophylactic action against decay. 
 
 Tin should be next in quantity, because it increases 
 plasticity, prevents discoloration, and reduces conductivity. 
 It also retards setting, reduces edge strength, and favors 
 spheroiding; hence should not be used in such proportions 
 as to become the controlling metal. 
 
 Copper diminishes shrinkage, hastens setting, and adds 
 to the present and possibly to the permanent whiteness of 
 the filling. It is also supposed to have greater compatibil- 
 ity with tooth substance and pulp tissue than other metals, 
 and has been shown to have antiseptic action. 
 
 Gold lessens shrinkage, resists corrosion, increases edge 
 strength, increases smoothness and plasticity, and hastens 
 setting ; all these to a greater degree in small quantities than 
 any other metal, 5 per cent to 7 per cent being all that is 
 advantageous to use. 
 
 Zi7ic controls shrinkage, hastens setting, improves color, 
 and imparts a peculiar smoothness in mixing. 
 
 Platinum. — Authorities differ in regard to the influence 
 of this metal ; some claiming that it increases setting, hard- 
 ness, stability, and improves color ; while others contend 
 that it imparts no properties which cannot be obtained by a 
 judicious combination of other metals ; which seems to be 
 true. 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 281 
 
 Cadmium having been proven to be dangerous to pulp 
 vitality, should never be used. 
 
 Antimony blackens so badly that the properties of con- 
 trolling shrinkage and increasing plasticity which it imparts, 
 *do not seem to be of sufficient advantage to "warrant its em- 
 ployment. 
 
 Palladium does not improve alloys, but amalgamated 
 alone with mercury, furnishes an amalgam which does not 
 shrink or discolor, but its expense hinders its universal use. 
 
 It is an open question, whether freedom from discolora- 
 tion is a desirable attribute ; it is certainly true that cavity 
 surfaces under leaky fillings, which have become coated with 
 a black oxid or sulphide, have remained free from decay for 
 years. We hold that unsightliness is the principal objection, 
 unless such chemical compounds are formed as to cause 
 wasting of the filling or be detrimental to the health of the 
 patient.— T. E. Weeks, D.D.S. 
 
 542. To Prevent Blood Adhering to Cuspidor. — After 
 cleaning and drying cuspidor, I wipe with an oiled rag, this 
 leaves an oiled surface. Blood and saliva immediately 
 descend, leaving no trace. — G. Charles Bowles, in Items. 
 
 543. Cheap Rubber. — This is a question that has at- 
 tracted a great deal of attention of late, from the fact that 
 certain manufacturers and dealers have given out claims ; 
 that they offer a low price rubber that is as good as any in 
 the market. This statement is misleading, for the reason 
 that all cheap rubbers contain a large amount of adultera- 
 tion with heavy matter, than does the better grades. The 
 cheap adulterants employed in the transformation of pure 
 Para gum, two grades of rubber can be made; which varj^ 
 in value, directly in proportion to the amount of foreign 
 matter introduced in the fibers of the gum ; it will be 
 readily seen, that if the manufacturer of the rubber, makes 
 his charges in proportion to the cost of manufacturing his 
 product, there is proximately no difference in the price of 
 the rubber; for the reason that the better grade will cover 
 
282 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 more space, and consequently make a large number of plates. 
 For example, take a square foot of the best rubber that can 
 be had, and an equal area of the poorest grade and weigh 
 them ; it will be found that the cheap grade will weigh 
 from fifteen to twenty per cent more than the better grade ; 
 which, figured out, will probably be about the difi^erence in 
 price. And this is not all, while poor rubber costs as much 
 for the surface covered as does the higher grades ; it is much 
 more liable to break the blocks and teeth in vulcanizing, 
 will not take or retain as fine a polish, is heavier, does not 
 make as strong a plate, is far more injurious, and less durable. 
 — Wm. H. Steele, Extract of Paper read at Iowa State Dental 
 Society, Omaha, 1894. 
 
 544. Composition of Human Teeth. 
 
 Cementum. Dentine. Enamel. 
 
 Organic 29.27 28.70 3.59 
 
 Inorganic 7073 7i-30 96.41 
 
 The inorganic portion divides up as follows : 
 
 Dentine. Enamel. 
 
 Phos. cal 66.72 89.82 
 
 Carbon, cal 3.36 4.37 
 
 Phos. Mag 1.08. 1.34 
 
 Salts, etc 83 88 
 
 Organic 28.0 c 3.59 
 
 100.00 100.00 
 
 The totals of the first table give 238.44 parts of inor- 
 ganic, as against 61.56 organic — a proportion of four of in- 
 organic to one of organic in these portions of the tooth. 
 The composition of the enamel, the most important part of 
 the tooth, because most exposed, and least likely to repair, 
 shows a very great preponderence of the inorganic : 96.41 
 inorganic to 3.59 organic ; which last, some writers even 
 question as organized organic matter. — Van Bibra's Dental 
 Register. 
 
 545. Treatment in Odontiasis — It is during the erup- 
 tion of the temporary teeth one observes troubles of a diverse 
 nature, such as salivation, redness (blushing), heat, and swell- 
 
USEFUL HINTS. 283 
 
 ing of the gums, apbthe, ulcerations, slight cough, diarrhea, 
 convulsions, fever with agitation, etc. Then interfere, and 
 make, if there is reason, an opening for the eruption of the 
 teeth. When there is fever, give a solution of bi-carbonate 
 of potash, combined with a little citric acid, to which add 
 some drops of tincture of henbane, in case of agitation. — 
 Dr. Macario, in Nice Medical. 
 
 546. Solubility in Metals. — 
 
 Mercury. — -Soluble in dilute nitric, and hot sulfuric acid. 
 
 Silver— h\ nitric, and hot, strong sulfuric acid. 
 
 Copper — In hot mineral acids ; slowly attacked in air 
 and moisture by vegetable acids, alkalies, and saline solutions. 
 
 Gold — In aqua regia ; not affected by single acids or 
 alkalies. 
 
 Zinc — In dilute acids, and solutions of the alkaline 
 hydrates. 
 
 Platinum is dissolved slowly in aqua regia. — T. E. 
 Weeks, D.D.S. 
 
 547. Oxidation of Metals. — 
 
 Mercury — JSTot affected by air or moisture. 
 
 Silver — Xot acted on by air or water ; but readily by 
 sulfuretted hydrogen. 
 
 Tin oxidizes very slowly. 
 
 Copper — In moist air becomes coated with a green car- 
 bonate ; is tarnished by sulfuretted hydrogen. 
 
 Gold — Unaffected by air, water or sulfur. 
 
 Zinc tarnishes slowly ; is coated with carbonate in moist 
 
 air. 
 
 gen. 
 
 Platinum — Unaffected by air or water. 
 
 Cadmium tarnishes slowly in air and sulfuretted hydro- 
 
 Antimony oxidizes badly when amalgamated. 
 Palladium does not oxidize easilj^ but is acted on by 
 iodin.— T. E. Weeks, D.D.S. 
 
 648. Screw vs. Rubber for Regulating. — I had one of 
 those very trying cases this summer where a bicuspid erupted 
 
284 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 without the arch. There was room enough for its reduction 
 by u slight change of the other teeth, and after a space was 
 made it was merel}^ required to have an instrument to bring 
 it in place. Nature may have accomplished this unassisted, 
 but it had remained in that crowded position for a year and 
 a half, and, therefore, it seemed advisable to force it- in 
 position. I made a plate, putting two hooks on it, and threw 
 an elastic band around the tooth, and brought it in position 
 in one week. Now, what was the harm in taking my elastic 
 band, instead of working with a screw ? Every one who 
 makes a practice of using springs or screws instead of rubber 
 will admit, when he looks over his cases, that it takes, it 
 may be, live months to do that which can be done by con- 
 tinuous pressure in half the time. What may be lost by 
 possible danger to the tooth by moving it rapidly is more 
 than counterbalanced by the comfort of the patient, and in 
 causing the appliance to be worn not more than half the 
 usual time. I think the nerves of the patient are to be con- 
 sidered as much as anything else. Where you can get two 
 molars with anything like a knuckle on them, make a rub- 
 ber wedge and fit that clasp to go to that point and keep 
 them wedged till the appliance is placed, and as soon as it is 
 pressed down you have a point that prevents that clasp from 
 riding up. You can alwaj^s force it up, because half-round 
 wire is alwaj^s wedged-shaped, and it won't slip. — Dr. Otto- 
 lengui, in Items. 
 
 549. Sunlight Injures Instruments. — 
 
 Fine edged tools assume a blue color and lose all temper 
 if exposed for any considerable length of time to the light of 
 the sun, either in summer or winter. — Exchange. 
 
 550. Hard Rubber Corundum Disks. — The most diffi- 
 cult part is the combining the caoutchouc and corundum or 
 emery. Taking a sheet of black rubber, such as we use for 
 making plates, it is softened over a water bath, not by dip- 
 ping in hot water. When softened, one side is covered with 
 the emery (No. 90 if for cutting, No. 100 or 120 for polish- 
 
USEFUL HINTS; 285 
 
 ing), then folded over on itself and passed through a pair 
 of rollers [a common clothes-wringer answers the purpose 
 well], and this repeated till a proper quantity of emery is 
 worked in the rubber. Use four parts of emery or corun- 
 dum to one part of rubber, by weight. The combination 
 of the rubber and emery is not a chemical, but simply a 
 mechanical one. 
 
 After the corundum and rubber are properly combined, 
 laying the rubber on a glass slab, and with a roller made by 
 filling a bottle with boiling water, roll it to the thickness 
 necessary for disks and wheels,* and with the same cutters 
 used for cutting sandpaper disks, cut out the disks or wheels. 
 From scraps from the tin shop may be cut disks of tin 
 plate somewhat larger, and stringing the corundum-rubber 
 disks and tin plates alternately on a wire the size of the 
 screw of the mandrel used in the engine, clamp them 
 together. For this purpose use two square pieces of brass 
 plate about one-eighth inch in thickness, with four holes in 
 each for as many bolts, and screw them only tight enough 
 to make a pressure. They are now ready for the vulcanizer, 
 and are vulcanized the same as a dental plate. As soon as 
 removed from the vulcanizer, drawing out the wire, as it 
 is more easily removed when hot, cool as rapidly as you wish, 
 and when cold there is no trouble in separating the disks. 
 
 If hubs on the disks are desired, take a number of pieces 
 of brass plate, say about three-sixteenths inch thick, drill 
 the hole for the wire, and countersink each side the size 
 you wish the hub. By countersinking both sides you will 
 need only half as many brass pieces, as the tin plate can be 
 used on the flat sides of the disks. To prevent them adher- 
 ing to the brass, place a piece of tin-foil between the disk 
 and brass. After the disks and wheels are vulcanized, true 
 them up by placing them on the mandrel in the engine, and 
 while running it, warm the edge of the disk in a flame of 
 gas or alcohol till it softens, then run it against a piece of 
 glass or porcelain. To make the stub-wheels roll thicker 
 
 * To prevent coruadum-rubber adhering to the roller, dnst a little of 
 the corundum or emery over the surface. 
 
286 DEPARTMENT E. 
 
 than the disks. Disks and wheels of different thickness can 
 be vulcanized at the same time, but to vulcanizfe 
 disks or wheels of different diameters it will be 
 necessary to use heavier plates between them. 
 Large wheels for laboratory use can be made in the 
 same way as small ones. 
 
 Disks and wheels for polishing fillings and 
 teeth can also be made from vulcanite or soft rubber, 
 and as the rubber for dental plates becomes hard 
 rubber when vulcanized, it will be necessary to 
 have a special rubber, one containing less sulfur, for 
 this purpose, as the amount of sulfur added to the 
 caoutchouc, and the length of time vulcanized, con- 
 stitute the difference after vulcanization, between 
 hard rubber and vulcanite or soft rubber. — 
 George A. Maxfield, D.D.S., in Dental Office and 
 Laboratory. 
 
 551. To Prevent Sulfurous Smell in Vul- 
 canizing. — Half grain of coffee, either steeped or 
 fresh, in the vulcanizer, destroys the sulfurous smell 
 so disagreeable, if there is a slight leak where the 
 operating-room and laboratory communicate. Coffee 
 grounds burned in the laboratory are a good de- 
 odorent in case of necessity. — Off. and Lah. 
 
 552. Home-made Canal Drier. — Take a piece 
 of small insulated copper electric bell wire, and dress 
 own to a taper see cut (1). Get a piece of large cop- 
 per rod, and turn down to shape of 2, bore a hole 
 
 ll„l|| through, and hard solder to place ; for handles use the 
 ''■ ordinary ten-cent broach holders. — Wm. H. Steele. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Abscess, Evacuator 
 
 Hunter, 
 
 " New Treatment for 
 
 Jennings, 
 
 " Injecting Alveolar 
 
 Cosmos, 
 
 " Grouse Method of Treating 
 
 Items, 
 
 Acid, Phenyl Acetic 
 
 Den. Rev., 
 
 " Cinnamic 
 
 a a 
 
 " On the Clothes 
 
 Steele, 
 
 " Glacial Phosphoric 
 
 Shattuck, 
 
 " Nitro-Muriatic 
 
 i( 
 
 " Phosphate, Bad for Teeth 
 
 Head, 
 
 Aceto Tartrate of Aluminum 
 
 Bethd, 
 
 Acid, Acetic 
 
 Items, 
 
 " To Increase Solubility of Salicylic 
 
 Ohio Journ., 
 
 " Trichloracetic for Canker 
 
 Dunn, 
 
 " Salicylic for Eoot Dressing 
 
 Exchange, 
 
 Air Chambers, Uselessness of 
 
 Stephen, 
 
 Aluminum, Burnishing 
 
 Hasktns, 
 
 " Plates for Kegulating Cast, 
 
 Ohio Jour., 
 
 Alloy, A New Fusible 
 
 Steele, 
 
 Aluminum Wire 
 
 Exchange, 
 
 Alloy, Dorrance's 
 
 Ohio Journ., 
 
 Alloys, Properties Imparted to, by Metals 
 
 Weeks, 
 
 Alumnol 
 
 Bethel, 
 
 Aluminum Hints 
 
 Steele, 
 
 Amalgam, Burnishing in 
 
 Wilcox, 
 
 " Contouring with 
 
 West, 
 
 " Finisher 
 
 Off. and Lab., 
 
 " That will not Shrink, etc. 
 
 Steele, 
 
 " Eefining Waste 
 
 Rockwood, 
 
 " Starting in DiflScult Cavities 
 
 Off. and Lab., 
 
 Packing in Frail Teeth 
 
 Jennings, 
 
 Amalgo-Gold Fillings 
 
 Clapp, 
 
 Amalgam, Silk for Squeezing Mercury from 
 
 Ohio Journ., 
 
 Anesthetic, Phenate of Cocain, Local 
 
 Atkinson, 
 
 Antiseptic, Adhesive Pomade 
 
 Seien. Am., 
 
 Anesthetic, The Best Local 
 
 Johnson, 
 
 Antiseptic, Bath for Instruments 
 
 Harlan, 
 
 287 
 
 
 A 
 
 34 
 
 A 
 
 48 
 
 A 
 
 66 
 
 A 
 
 83 
 
 D 
 
 419 
 
 D 
 
 421 
 
 E 
 
 466 
 
 D 
 
 387 
 
 D 
 
 379 
 
 D 
 
 346 
 
 D 
 
 347 
 
 D 
 
 352 
 
 D 
 
 309 
 
 D 
 
 319 
 
 D 
 
 374 
 
 B 
 
 253 
 
 B 
 
 154 
 
 E 
 
 439 
 
 E 
 
 .453 
 
 E 
 
 469 
 
 E 
 
 487 
 
 E 
 
 541 
 
 D 
 
 371 
 
 B 
 
 222 
 
 B 
 
 240 
 
 A 
 
 29 
 
 A 
 
 56 
 
 A 
 
 67 
 
 E 
 
 470 
 
 B 
 
 2U0 
 
 A 
 
 89 
 
 A 
 
 103 
 
 A 
 
 14 
 
 D 
 
 391 
 
 D 
 
 340 
 
 D 
 
 350 
 
 D 
 
 351 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Anesthetic, Local for Small Operations 
 Antiseptic Varnish 
 
 " Black's, 1, 2, 3 
 Antiseptics, Detective 
 Anodyne, A Good 
 Antiseptic Spray 
 Articulation, Three Rules for 
 Artificial Teeth, Enlarging Holes in 
 Articulating Paper, To Make 
 
 " Paste 
 
 Articulation, To Obtain a Correct 
 Artificial Teeth, Clicking of 
 Aristol Aromatic-Chloro for Dead Teeth 
 Articulating Hint on 
 
 " Artificial Teeth 
 
 Artificial Teeth, To Gild 
 Band, a New Crown 
 Bands, Rapid Fitting of Crown 
 Base, Formula for Metal 
 Battery, Use of the Storage 
 Battery Cells, Coupling of 
 Batteries, Suggestions on Storage 
 Backing and Soldering 
 Bands and Matrices 
 Batteries, To Make Cells for Storage 
 Bicuspids, Repairing with Porcelain 
 Bites, Watt's Metal Cusps for Short 
 Bleaching Teeth, Sodium Peroxid for 
 Blow-Pipe Flames 
 BlowPipe, Use of the 
 Borax, To Prevent Frothing 
 Bracket Table, Celluloid Top 
 Bridge, For Close Bite 
 Bridges, Narrow 
 Bridge, Removable 
 Bridges, Band Attachment for 
 Broaches, To Spring Temper 
 Bridges, To Repair Without Soldering 
 Broaches, Annealing Nerve 
 Bridges, Hint on Anchoring 
 Bridge, To Remove a Waxed Up 
 Burs, Recut Your Old 
 Burnt Fingers 
 Burnisher, Use of the 
 Burns and Scalds 
 Bunsen Burner, Best Way to Use 
 Casts, Cement for Mending 
 
 Med. News, 
 
 Peete, 
 
 Dental 0. and L. 
 
 Med. Examiner, 
 
 Ohio Den. Jour., 
 
 Hewitt, 
 
 Haskell, 
 
 Rollins, 
 
 Steele, 
 
 Hazeltine,^ 
 
 Ciippinger, 
 
 Dadmun, 
 
 Templeton, 
 
 Beacock, 
 
 Brown, 
 
 Fischer, 
 
 Buck, 
 
 Oramm, 
 
 J. W. W. 
 
 Vance, 
 
 Smith, 
 
 Steele, 
 
 Jour. Brit. Asso 
 
 Smith, 
 
 Steele, 
 
 Kirk, 
 
 Den. Prac. and 
 
 Haskell, 
 
 Gramm, 
 
 Evans, 
 
 Ext. Cosmos, 
 
 Moffatt, 
 
 Fossen, 
 
 Mitchell, 
 
 Tibbetts, 
 
 Bryant, 
 
 Terry, 
 
 Peeso, 
 
 Crenshaw, 
 
 0. Den. Journ., 
 
 Steele, 
 
 Items, 
 
 Bartholow, 
 
 Items, 
 
 Genese, 
 
 Adt 
 
 D 
 D 
 D 
 D 
 D 
 D 
 B 
 B 
 E 
 E 
 B 
 B 
 D 
 B 
 B 
 B 
 C 
 C 
 D 
 E 
 E 
 E 
 C 
 E 
 E 
 A 
 B 
 D 
 E 
 B 
 B 
 A 
 C 
 C 
 C 
 
 c 
 
 E 
 
 C 
 E 
 C 
 C 
 E 
 E 
 A 
 D 
 E 
 D 
 
 414 
 365 
 372 
 326 
 317 
 315 
 171 
 187 
 460 
 461 
 215 
 216 
 338 
 252 
 141 
 225 
 283 
 274 
 429 
 472 
 482 
 531 
 308 
 536 
 510 
 • 22 
 166 
 894 
 451 
 147 
 153 
 
 60 
 285 
 294 
 280 
 295 
 497 
 297 
 512 
 303 
 311 
 457 
 467 
 
 75 
 373 
 495 
 386 
 
INDEX. 
 
 289 
 
 Canal, Nitrate of Silver in 
 Cavities, To Keep Dry 
 
 " Operating on Labial 
 Cavity Varnish 
 Carat, Grains and Percentage 
 Cavity, How to Dry a 
 
 " Drier, Home-made 
 Canal 
 
 Camphor, Carbohite of 
 Celluloid Blanks for Countersunk Teeth 
 Cement, Celluloid 
 
 " Action of Acids on 
 Cements, Hint on Mixing 
 Cement Powders, to Renew 
 
 " Fillings, Medicated 
 
 " Gold Capped 
 Cements, Mixing 
 
 " Effect of Hot Air on 
 
 Chalk, Prepared 
 Chloralamid, 
 Chloroform Water, 
 Clasps, Proper Fitting of 
 Clamp Attachment, Painless 
 Clasps, On Rubber Plates 
 Clamps, Applying Rubber-dam 
 Cotton Brush, Making a 
 Corundum Disks, To Mount 
 Cotton, To Remove from Pliers 
 Collodion and its Uses 
 Continuous Gum, Is^ew Method «f Working 
 Corundum Wheels, For Wetting 
 
 " Wheel, Using About Mouth 
 Cocain, Hints on Using 
 Corrosive Sublimate, Solutions of 
 Crowns, Alloy 
 Crown, New Porcelain 
 
 " Holder 
 Crowns, Enameling Gold 
 Crown, Grinder 
 
 " Dies of Watt's Metal 
 Crowns, Double Backing for Richmond 
 Crown Pivots, Tool for Bending 
 
 " Temporary 
 
 " The Yoke 
 
 " To Repair Pivot 
 
 " Making a Double Cap 
 
 *' Perfect Fitting Gold 
 
 Holmes, 
 
 A 
 
 55 
 
 Items, 
 
 A 
 
 58 
 
 Douglas, 
 
 A 
 
 69 
 
 Exchange, 
 
 D 
 
 435 
 
 li 
 
 E 
 
 488 
 
 Templeton, 
 
 A 
 
 105 
 
 Steele, 
 
 E 
 
 440 
 
 t( 
 
 E 
 
 552 
 
 Thera. Gaz. 
 
 D 
 
 378 
 
 H. S. W. 
 
 B 
 
 156 
 
 Scient. Am., 
 
 D 
 
 437 
 
 Exchange, 
 
 E 
 
 486 
 
 Steele, 
 
 A 
 
 100 
 
 0. Dent. Jour., 
 
 E 
 
 513 
 
 Atkinson, 
 
 D 
 
 364 
 
 Oltramore, 
 
 A 
 
 15 
 
 Humhy, 
 
 A 
 
 8 
 
 Register, 
 
 A 
 
 53 
 
 Harper, 
 
 D 
 
 401 
 
 Items, 
 
 D 
 
 345 
 
 3Ied. T. and G., 
 
 D 
 
 415 
 
 Bonnitl, 
 
 B 
 
 160 
 
 Items, 
 
 E 
 
 519 
 
 McMillen, 
 
 B 
 
 149 
 
 Ottolengm, 
 
 A 
 
 4 
 
 Littig, 
 
 E 
 
 449 
 
 S. T., 
 
 E 
 
 476 
 
 Jari'is, 
 
 A 
 
 77 
 
 Archives, 
 
 D 
 
 331 
 
 Extract, 
 
 B 
 
 229 
 
 Odout. Joiirn., 
 
 B 
 
 243 
 
 Ottoleiigui, 
 
 E 
 
 521 
 
 B. Med. Jour., 
 
 D 
 
 353 
 
 Ohio Jour., 
 
 D 
 
 322 
 
 Steele, 
 
 C 
 
 284 
 
 Moore, 
 
 C 
 
 281 
 
 Steele, 
 
 C 
 
 282 
 
 Evans, 
 
 c 
 
 266 
 
 W. S. H., 
 
 c 
 
 267 
 
 Ex., 
 
 c 
 
 268 
 
 Items, 
 
 c 
 
 269 
 
 Chupein, 
 
 c 
 
 272 
 
 Simpson, 
 
 c 
 
 273 
 
 Items, 
 
 c 
 
 275 
 
 Amend, 
 
 c 
 
 276 
 
 Evans, 
 
 c 
 
 277 
 
 Shields, 
 
 c 
 
 279 
 
290 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Crowns, Contouring 
 
 " Burning Holes in 
 Crown, Rubber Porcelain 
 
 '' Preparing Root for 
 Crowns, Articulation of Gold 
 
 " Quick Method Making Counter-Die for 
 Crown Dies, To Make Natural 
 Creasote and Oil of Cloves 
 Crown Holder and Pin Protector 
 Crowns, Fitting Collars for 
 
 Post 
 Crowning, Moving Roots Before 
 
 " Varnishing Teeth Before 
 
 Crown, The Downey 
 Crowning, Cutting off Teeth for 
 Crown Slipper Shell for Bridge-work 
 Crowns, Perfect Occluding Gold 
 
 " Where Roots are Missing 
 
 '' Alloy — Gold Cap 
 Crown, An Original Bicuspid 
 
 " To Enlarge Hole in Pivot 
 Creolin 
 
 Crowning, For Sensitiveness After 
 Crown, Setting a Genese 
 
 " An Original 
 
 " A Gold Bicuspid 
 Cuspidors, For Offensive 
 Cuspidor, To Prevent Blood Adhering to 
 Dentifrice, Reid's Antiseptic Liquid 
 Dentist's Leg 
 
 Dentition, Treatment for First 
 Dentine, To Sterilize Softened 
 Dentures, Artificial 
 Dentist's Headache, Formula for 
 Dies, Imperfections in Metal 
 Disk Mandrel, Home-made 
 Disks and Strips, Soap on 
 Dirty Oil Stones 
 Dies, Use of Cores in Casting 
 Disks, Hint on Using 
 
 " Making Rubber Corundum 
 Disk Lubricator 
 
 Dies, Preventing Odor in Casting 
 Disks, Hard Rubber Corundum 
 Dorsenia, Formula for 
 Drills,- Suggestions for Using Diamond 
 
 " To Make Twist 
 
 Lowry, 
 
 C 
 
 265 
 
 Items, 
 
 c 
 
 291 
 
 Steele, 
 
 c 
 
 292 
 
 McCandless, 
 
 c 
 
 293 
 
 White, 
 
 c 
 
 262 
 
 Robinson, 
 
 c 
 
 263 
 
 Elliott, 
 
 c 
 
 . 287 
 
 Shattuek, 
 
 D 
 
 329 
 
 Roy, 
 
 c 
 
 289 
 
 Slater, 
 
 c 
 
 298 
 
 Lowry, 
 
 c 
 
 296 
 
 Ohio Den. Jour., 
 
 c 
 
 299 
 
 Items, 
 
 c 
 
 278 
 
 Barber, 
 
 c 
 
 302 
 
 Martin, 
 
 c 
 
 290 
 
 Smith, 
 
 c 
 
 306 
 
 Wh itslar, 
 
 c 
 
 304 
 
 Sharp, 
 
 c 
 
 305 
 
 Steele, 
 
 c 
 
 307 
 
 Fallock, 
 
 c 
 
 300 
 
 Beacock, 
 
 c 
 
 286 
 
 Fillehrown, 
 
 D 
 
 366 
 
 Ohio Jour., 
 
 D 
 
 368 
 
 Items, 
 
 C 
 
 301 
 
 Crossland, 
 
 c 
 
 310 
 
 Elliott, 
 
 c 
 
 264 
 
 Items, 
 
 A 
 
 110 
 
 Bowles, 
 
 E 
 
 542 
 
 Pharin. Era, 
 
 D 
 
 431 
 
 The Lancet, 
 
 E 
 
 455 
 
 Jour, des S. M. de L., 
 
 , D 
 
 337 
 
 Smith, 
 
 A 
 
 104 
 
 Land, 
 
 B 
 
 136 
 
 Ohio Stale Jour., 
 
 D 
 
 324 
 
 Sprague, 
 
 B 
 
 177 
 
 Moore, 
 
 E 
 
 456 
 
 
 A 
 
 108 
 
 Steele, 
 
 E 
 
 496 
 
 Parsons, 
 
 B 
 
 227 
 
 Beacock, 
 
 E 
 
 522 
 
 Trans. 3Iass. Den. So., 
 
 , E 
 
 626 
 
 Secor, 
 
 E 
 
 540 
 
 Den. Trib., 
 
 B 
 
 150 
 
 MaxfieJd, 
 
 E 
 
 550 
 
 Ex., 
 
 D 
 
 424 
 
 Items, 
 
 E 
 
 506 
 
 Bmcock, 
 
 E 
 
 517 
 
INDEX. 
 
 
 
 291 
 
 Drills, To Make Serviceable 
 
 Neeper, 
 
 E 
 
 524 
 
 Electric Motor, An Economical 
 
 Steele, 
 
 E 
 
 442 
 
 Engine, Care of 
 
 i. 
 
 A 
 
 25 
 
 " Foot Pad 
 
 <( 
 
 E 
 
 490 
 
 Engines, To Improve Shaw 
 
 Beacock, 
 
 B 
 
 226 
 
 Eugenol 
 
 0. Dent. Jour., 
 
 D 
 
 420 
 
 Eulyplol 
 
 t( It If 
 
 D 
 
 422 
 
 Eucalyptus and Thymol 
 
 Items, 
 
 D 
 
 349 
 
 Extracting, To Implant 
 
 0. Dent. Jour., 
 
 A 
 
 26 
 
 " For Nervous Persons 
 
 Ptnny, 
 
 A 
 
 72 
 
 " Pioots, Use of Screw in 
 
 Chupein, 
 
 A 
 
 79 
 
 " Imprisoned Wisdom Teeth 
 
 Eubank, 
 
 A 
 
 81 
 
 " For Pains Afterward 
 
 Bowne, 
 
 D 
 
 341 
 
 Third Molar 
 
 Brackett, 
 
 A 
 
 130 
 
 Extraction, Inflammation After, 
 
 Thomas, 
 
 A 
 
 13 
 
 Exploring Needles, To Make 
 
 Hardy, 
 
 E 
 
 484 
 
 Felt Wheels and Cones, Shellac for 
 
 Beebee, 
 
 B 
 
 196 
 
 Filling, A Temporary 
 
 Archives, 
 
 A 
 
 37 
 
 Fillings, Vent 
 
 W. S. IT., 
 
 A 
 
 41 
 
 " Finishing Gold 
 
 North, 
 
 A 
 
 43 
 
 Filling, Formula for Temporary 
 
 Ex., 
 
 D 
 
 428 
 
 Files, To FJexoize 
 
 Odont. Jour., 
 
 E 
 
 448 
 
 Filling Materials, Conductivity of 
 
 Block, 
 
 E 
 
 450 
 
 Fillings, Anchor-Pins for 
 
 S. H. W., 
 
 A 
 
 107 
 
 " Pain Caused by Biting on 
 
 Marshall, 
 
 A 
 
 84 
 
 " Burnishing Cement 
 
 Items, 
 
 A 
 
 87 
 
 " Failure of from Frail Walls 
 
 Welch, 
 
 A 
 
 92 
 
 Fistula, Facial 
 
 ' Off. and Lab., 
 
 A 
 
 99 
 
 Fillings, Polishing Cement 
 
 Steele, 
 
 A 
 
 88 
 
 Finishing Burs, To Prevent Clogging 
 
 Joining's, 
 
 A 
 
 97 
 
 Filling Undercuts 
 
 Grouse, 
 
 A 
 
 28 
 
 Fillings, To Protect Cement or Percha 
 
 Welch, 
 
 A 
 
 109 
 
 " Contour 
 
 Cormany, 
 
 A 
 
 126 
 
 Patching Gold with Alloy 
 
 Mill, 
 
 A 
 
 106 
 
 Filling, Below Gum Margin 
 
 Steele, 
 
 A 
 
 127 
 
 " Large Compound 
 
 " 
 
 A 
 
 121 
 
 Fillings, Facing Alloy with Gold 
 
 Tockwell, 
 
 A 
 
 122 
 
 Flasking, To Prevent Air-holes in 
 
 Chupein, 
 
 B 
 
 158 
 
 Oil for 
 
 Steele, 
 
 B 
 
 173 
 
 Flask-Clamps, Self Closing 
 
 u 
 
 B 
 
 182 
 
 Flasking, A Method of 
 
 Arndt, 
 
 B 
 
 194 
 
 Flasks, Kubber-Dam in Closing 
 
 Merritt, 
 
 B 
 
 198 
 
 Fluid, New Soldering 
 
 Off. and Lab., 
 
 E 
 
 491 
 
 Flasks, To Prevent Plaster from Adhering to 
 
 Bmkland, 
 
 B 
 
 217 
 
 Flask Bolts 
 
 Steele, 
 
 B 
 
 220 
 
 " Heater 
 
 Davisson, 
 
 B 
 
 221 
 
 " To Prevent Staining Hands 
 
 Barker, 
 
 B 
 
 246 
 
292 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Formalin and lis Uses 
 
 Arkovy, 
 
 D 
 
 384 
 
 Forceps, Using Elevating 
 
 Am. Jr. Den. Sci, 
 
 A 
 
 125 
 
 Foil Carrier, A Convenient 
 
 Battershell, 
 
 E 
 
 447 
 
 Fusible Alloys, Formulas for 
 
 Harper, 
 
 D 
 
 361 
 
 Gas, liints on Giving 
 
 Ball, 
 
 A 
 
 21 
 
 " Cylinders Exploding 
 
 I. a, 
 
 A 
 
 74 
 
 " Points on Nitrous Oxid 
 
 Sparroiv, 
 
 A 
 
 124 
 
 Glycei-ole Tannin for Gingivitis 
 
 T. M. U., 
 
 D 
 
 407 
 
 Gold, To Make Stick 
 
 West. Den. Journ., 
 
 A 
 
 23 
 
 " Refining 
 
 Den. Prac. and Adv. 
 
 , E 
 
 444 
 
 " To Make Non-Cohesive 
 
 Mevieiv, 
 
 E 
 
 494 
 
 " Smudgin-g of 
 
 Iloive, 
 
 E 
 
 515 
 
 " Incompatibility of 
 
 Shields, 
 
 A 
 
 119 
 
 " and Alloy, Welding 
 
 Palmer, 
 
 A 
 
 123 
 
 Gum-Sections, Replacing Pinless 
 
 Steele, 
 
 B 
 
 162 
 
 Gutta-percha, New Preparation of 
 
 JRollins, 
 
 D 
 
 436 
 
 Bowl 
 
 Catching' s Comjw.nd, 
 
 E 
 
 493 
 
 " Heater 
 
 Allen, 
 
 A 
 
 111 
 
 Gum Block, To Replace Tooth in 
 
 Peacock, 
 
 B 
 
 241 
 
 " Sections, Fusion of 
 
 Brimmer, 
 
 B 
 
 251 
 
 Gulta percha Cajeput, Formula 
 
 Items, 
 
 D 
 
 348 
 
 Gums, Papillary Growths on the 
 
 Lankester, 
 
 A 
 
 131 
 
 " Warty Growths on the 
 
 u 
 
 A 
 
 132 
 
 " Vascular Growths on the 
 
 11 
 
 A 
 
 18 
 
 Hands, Dentists' 
 
 Steele, 
 
 E 
 
 463 
 
 Iland- piece Protector 
 
 Ennis, 
 
 A 
 
 46 
 
 Hammer, Rubber Head for Riveting 
 
 Peacock, 
 
 B 
 
 165 
 
 Hands, To Remove Iodoform from 
 
 DriKjgists' Pulletin, 
 
 E 
 
 468 
 
 " " Cleanse Dirty 
 
 Old File, 
 
 E 
 
 483 
 
 " Cosmetic for the 
 
 Exchange, 
 
 E 
 
 501 
 
 " To Make Soft and White 
 
 Hewitt, 
 
 D 
 
 323 
 
 Hamamelis in Dentistry 
 
 Steele, 
 
 D 
 
 316 
 
 Hemorrhage, To Control Dental 
 
 Arnold, 
 
 D 
 
 355 
 
 " Remedy for 
 
 Tate, 
 
 D 
 
 342 
 
 Hypodermic Solutions 
 
 Prescription, 
 
 D 
 
 434 
 
 " Points, To Clean Obstructed 
 
 Elliott, 
 
 E 
 
 498 
 
 Impressions, Colored Soap Suds for 
 
 H, 
 
 B 
 
 184 
 
 " Parting Fluid for 
 
 Odont. Journ., 
 
 D 
 
 432 
 
 " What it Should Embrace 
 
 Ames, 
 
 B 
 
 201 
 
 Impressions of Soft Pendulous Gums 
 
 Neeper, 
 
 B 
 
 231 
 
 " Treatment of Broken 
 
 Moore, 
 
 B 
 
 232 
 
 " Removing 
 
 Molloy, 
 
 B 
 
 242 
 
 " When Pouring 
 
 Parker, 
 
 B 
 
 247 
 
 " Perfect Plaster Partial 
 
 Templeton, 
 
 B 
 
 138 
 
 Impression Trays, How to Clean 
 
 Foster, 
 
 E 
 
 528 
 
 " Tray, Insertion of 
 
 While, 
 
 B 
 
 137 
 
 " To Remove from Tray 
 
 PattersheU, 
 
 B 
 
 139 
 
INDEX. 
 
 293 
 
 Inlaj-s, Getting Mould for 
 Instruments, Warm 
 Inlays, Setting Hot 
 Investment, To Kepair Soldering 
 
 " Compound, Formula for 
 
 Inllamed Mucous INIembranes, Spray for 
 Instrument Points, Polishing 
 Inlays, Dressing Down 
 Instrument, How to Make a Useful 
 Infection, How to Avoid 
 Inlays, Hold-fast for Porcelain 
 Instruments, Sunliglit Injures 
 Incisors, Securing Loosened 
 Iron, Tincture of Chlorid of 
 lodin with Glycerin 
 lodid of Zinc 
 
 lodin, Formula for Colorless Tincture of 
 Iodoform Cotton, Formula for 
 Jaw, Replacing Dislocated Lower 
 Joints, Clean 
 Lathe Drip, A 
 
 Laboratory Pads and Holders, 
 Lathes, Drip Tray for 
 Laboratories, Gas Fitting in 
 Light, Mirror for Reflecting 
 Lime Water, For Sensitive Teeth 
 Local Anesthetic for Lancing, etc. 
 " Anesthetics, Richardson on 
 " " Tropacocain as a 
 
 Lysol, For Mouth Washes, etc. 
 Matrix, A New 
 Mallet, Using the Electric 
 Matrice, Flexible Wrench for Band 
 Matrix, for Cement, Celluloid, 
 
 " Metal, How to Use, 
 Magnesia, Carbonate of 
 Metals, Melting Points of 
 Mercury and Alloy, Proportions of 
 Metals, Fusible 
 
 Metal, Watt's for Cast Dentures 
 Mercury, Combination of Metals with 
 Metals, Affinity of 
 
 " Solubility of 
 
 " Oxidation of 
 Mercury, Oxycyanid of 
 Medicines, Selecting and Keeping Dental 
 " Incompatibility of 
 
 Bril. Jrmr., 
 
 A 
 
 .32 
 
 J'o/litii^, 
 
 A 
 
 ?,9 
 
 Jvfernaliondl. Jonrridl, 
 
 A 
 
 0.3 
 
 Oltolcvf/'iii, 
 
 B 
 
 186 
 
 ZeUer.% 
 
 D 
 
 314 
 
 Bcprmt, 
 
 D 
 
 403 
 
 Steele, 
 
 E 
 
 4 SO 
 
 Girdwood, 
 
 A 
 
 114 
 
 Steele, 
 
 E 
 
 509 
 
 Ex., 
 
 E 
 
 .527 
 
 Genese, 
 
 C 
 
 309 
 
 Ex., 
 
 E 
 
 -549 
 
 Davenport, 
 
 A 
 
 20 
 
 Shaliuel; 
 
 D 
 
 .380 
 
 W. Dent. Jour., 
 
 D 
 
 332 
 
 Ibid, 
 
 D 
 
 .3.35 
 
 Herald of Deniktry, 
 
 D 
 
 .3fi2 
 
 Her. of Dent., 
 
 D 
 
 
 Therapeidic Gazette, 
 
 A 
 
 93 
 
 Stevens, 
 
 B 
 
 190 
 
 Morsman, 
 
 B 
 
 178 
 
 Steele, 
 
 E 
 
 474 
 
 Wilson, 
 
 E 
 
 529 
 
 Fletcher, 
 
 B 
 
 135 
 
 Bogue, ' 
 
 A 
 
 78 
 
 Abbott, 
 
 D 
 
 328 
 
 Gillman, 
 
 D 
 
 333 
 
 Bicliardson, 
 
 D 
 
 423 
 
 Hugenschmidt, 
 
 D 
 
 409 
 
 Dent. Bev., 
 
 D 
 
 425 
 
 Steele, 
 
 A 
 
 38 
 
 H D. H, 
 
 A 
 
 68 
 
 Int. Jour., 
 
 E 
 
 475 
 
 Slwhe, ' 
 
 A 
 
 76 
 
 Gormly, 
 
 A 
 
 116 
 
 Abbott, 
 
 D 
 
 375 
 
 Ex., 
 
 E 
 
 473 
 
 Items, 
 
 E 
 
 514 
 
 Davis, 
 
 E 
 
 532 
 
 (1 
 
 E 
 
 533 
 
 Weeks, 
 
 E 
 E 
 
 538 
 539 
 
 « 
 
 E 
 
 54(i 
 
 (( 
 
 E 
 
 547 
 
 Com.pt es Pend , 
 
 D 
 
 370 
 
 0. Jour., 
 
 D 
 
 312 
 
 Potter, 
 
 D 
 
 313 
 
294 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Mirrors, For the Forehead, 
 
 " To Make Mouth 
 Moldine, Uses for Melotte's 
 Models and Impressions, To Duplicate 
 Molding Material, A New 
 Modeling Compound, To Prevent from Sticking 
 Models, Copying 
 Mouth Lamp 
 
 Models, Cores for Casting Undercut 
 Molars, Restoring Articulation of Tipping 
 Napkins in the Office 
 
 " for Excluding Moisture, 
 Naphthol 
 Necrosis-Phosphor 
 Nerve Capping Formula 
 Nerve Broach Reducers 
 
 " Broaches, To Barb 
 Nerves, Capping Exposed 
 
 " Paste for Destroying 
 Necrosis of Superior Maxillary 
 Nervous Patients, To Quiet 
 Obtundent, Compound Listerin 
 Odontiasis, Treatment in 
 Otfice, Health in the 
 
 " Glass Ware, Cleaning 
 Oils, Aqueous Solution of Essential 
 Oil Can, Hint on 
 
 Oils, Disinfecting Power of Essential 
 Operating, To Prevent Nervousness in 
 " " " a Slip in Dental 
 
 Stool, 
 Palate, Cocain for Sensitive 
 Paste, A Polishing 
 Partials, To Make StrdVig 
 
 " Lower 
 Partial Plate, with Bands 
 Partials, Model Plates for 
 Periodontitis Antifebrin 
 Pericemental Inflammation, 
 Phytolacca, Use of 
 Plates, Mending Cracked 
 
 " To Line with Black Rubber 
 
 " Shaping when Muscles Interfere 
 
 " Skeleton 
 
 " Flexible Rubber 
 
 " Thin Rubber 
 
 " To Remove Teeth from 
 
 Rollins, 
 
 A 
 
 24 
 
 Trans. Mass. Den. i 
 
 S:K, E 
 
 525 
 
 F.B., 
 
 B 
 
 164 
 
 Templeton, 
 
 B 
 
 167 
 
 Osborne, 
 
 B 
 
 174 
 
 Botven, 
 
 B 
 
 188 
 
 Off. and Lab., 
 
 B 
 
 203 
 
 U li « 
 
 E 
 
 505 
 
 Den. Review, 
 
 B 
 
 199 
 
 Walton, 
 
 A 
 
 98 
 
 Steele, 
 
 A 
 
 94 
 
 Ottolengui, 
 
 A 
 
 6 
 
 Rollins, 
 
 D 
 
 318 
 
 Jacobs, 
 
 A 
 
 52 
 
 Anthony, 
 
 D 
 
 389 
 
 Bonwill, 
 
 E 
 
 503 
 
 a 
 
 E 
 
 502 
 
 Steele, 
 
 A 
 
 128 
 
 Bryan, 
 
 D 
 
 357 
 
 Friedenwuld, 
 
 A 
 
 17 
 
 Dwinelle, 
 
 A 
 
 7 
 
 Hewelt, 
 
 D 
 
 321 
 
 Macario, 
 
 E 
 
 545 
 
 Noble, 
 
 A 
 
 1 
 
 E. W. S., 
 
 E 
 
 441 
 
 Pharm. Journal, ' 
 
 D 
 
 398 
 
 Mathews, 
 
 E 
 
 458 
 
 Bad World, 
 
 D 
 
 354 
 
 Marshall, 
 
 D 
 
 320 
 
 Newkirk, 
 
 A 
 
 9 
 
 Steele, 
 
 A 
 
 95 
 
 Buck, 
 
 D 
 
 404 
 
 Off. and Lab., 
 
 E 
 
 492 
 
 Perry, 
 
 B 
 
 219 
 
 Nichol, 
 
 B 
 
 249 
 
 Reeve, 
 
 B 
 
 258 
 
 Steele, 
 
 B 
 
 144 
 
 Elliott, 
 
 D 
 
 427 
 
 Sedgwick, 
 
 A 
 
 10 
 
 P-, 
 
 D 
 
 433 
 
 Abbott, 
 
 B 
 
 152 
 
 Yant, 
 
 B 
 
 155 
 
 Case, 
 
 B 
 
 157 
 
 Gantz, 
 
 B 
 
 159 
 
 Stowell, 
 
 B 
 
 161 
 
 Dick, 
 
 B 
 
 168 
 
 Odont. Jour., 
 
 B 
 
 169 
 
INDEX. 
 
 295 
 
 Plates, Strengthening Rubber 
 " Useful Hint on Rubber 
 " Lower Gold 
 " Stamping by Hydraulic 
 " Hint on Sandpapering 
 " Adding New Teeth to Old 
 " Sandpapering 
 " Sandpaper Mandrel for 
 " Retaining Lower with Gold Posts 
 " To Mend a Rubber 
 " Something New in Rubber 
 Plaster Bowl, For Mixing 
 Plate, To Make Hold 
 Plaster, To Renew 
 
 " Mold, Metal for Casting in 
 Plate Celluloid, Aluminum 
 " Practical Cheoplastic 
 " Holding a Broken 
 " Reswaging a Metal 
 " Retainer, A 
 
 " To Replace Broken Block on Rubber 
 " To Prevent Teeth Cutting into Upper 
 Plaster Spoon, for Mixing 
 Plates, Lining Rubber with Metal 
 Plate, To Make Rubber Smooth 
 Plates, New Lining for Vulcanite 
 " Refitting Rubber 
 " To Remove Teeth from 
 Plate, To Get Cast of Broken Lower 
 Plaster, To Strengthen Poor 
 Plates, Strong, Thin Celluloid 
 Plate, To Restore Color to Black Rubber 
 Plaster, Suggestions About 
 Plates, To Finish High-Arch 
 " Obtaining Even 
 " To Make Gold Without Dies 
 Polishing, Diamond Powder for 
 Porcelain, To Prevent Checking from Heat 
 
 " Tooth-Crown With Gum 
 
 Polishing Points, To Improve Wood 
 Porcelain Tips 
 Potash, Permanganate of 
 Protector, Tooth and Gum 
 Prosthetic Dentistry, Axioms of 
 Pumice Carrier 
 Pulp Canal, Hint on Treating 
 Pus Pockets, Resorcin for 
 
 Overshire, 
 
 B 
 
 172 
 
 Douglas, 
 
 B 
 
 175 
 
 Ledyard, 
 
 B 
 
 180 
 
 Bogue, 
 
 B 
 
 181 
 
 Buck, 
 
 B 
 
 192 
 
 Sparks, 
 
 B 
 
 197 
 
 Teague, 
 
 B 
 
 205 
 
 Barnes, 
 
 B 
 
 211 
 
 Dull, 
 
 B 
 
 214 
 
 Reed, 
 
 B 
 
 195 
 
 Sled, and Dent. Jour 
 
 ,B 
 
 224 
 
 Items, 
 
 B 
 
 179 
 
 Oi'iatt, 
 
 B 
 
 183 
 
 Steele, 
 
 B 
 
 189 
 
 Ex., 
 
 D 
 
 430 
 
 Steele, 
 
 B 
 
 204 
 
 Staples, 
 
 B 
 
 207- 
 
 Tickner, 
 
 B 
 
 208 
 
 Sparks, 
 
 B 
 
 234 
 
 Steele, 
 
 B 
 
 238 
 
 Ward, 
 
 B 
 
 235 
 
 Boyd, 
 
 B 
 
 237 
 
 Elliott, 
 
 B 
 
 239 
 
 Dent. Reviev:, 
 
 B 
 
 244 
 
 Overshire, 
 
 B 
 
 248 
 
 Cronlher, 
 
 B 
 
 25 1 
 
 Smith, 
 
 B 
 
 256 
 
 Sylvester, 
 
 B 
 
 259 
 
 Secor, 
 
 B 
 
 260 
 
 <i 
 
 B 
 
 261 
 
 Johnson, 
 
 B 
 
 257 
 
 Burns, 
 
 B 
 
 145 
 
 Otloleagui, 
 
 B 
 
 133 
 
 Ohio Dent. Jour., 
 
 B 
 
 140 
 
 Brit. Jour., 
 
 B 
 
 142 
 
 Browne, 
 
 B 
 
 143 
 
 Evans, 
 
 A 
 
 59 
 
 Harkinson, 
 
 C 
 
 270 
 
 Sharpe, 
 
 C 
 
 271 
 
 Cheney, 
 
 E 
 
 462 
 
 Browne, 
 
 C 
 
 2SS 
 
 Abbott, 
 
 D 
 
 376 
 
 Jennings, 
 
 A 
 
 96 
 
 Haskell, 
 
 B 
 
 134 
 
 Southern Journal, 
 
 A 
 
 44 
 
 Pract. Adv., 
 
 A 
 
 51 
 
 Rev., 
 
 D 
 
 408 
 
296 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Pulps, Soothing Application for Aching 
 
 " Caps, Copper 
 Pulp, For Inflammation of the 
 Pulp-Stones, Detecting 
 Pulps, Treatment for Wounded 
 Pus, Origin of 
 
 Pulp, Test Capping for Exposed 
 Pyorrhea Alveolaris and its Treatment 
 
 " • Formula for 
 Pyrozone for Inflammation 
 
 " Suggestions for Using 
 Pkigger Points, Broken Instruments as 
 Pluggers, On the Use of 
 ReguLating Twisted Wire for 
 " White's Plate for 
 
 " Studs 
 
 " Screws vs. Rubber for 
 
 Kesin, Powdered 
 Eiglit Angle Points, Useful 
 Roots, Treatment of Fractured 
 
 " To Fill with Chloro-percha 
 Root Canal Dryer 
 
 " Canals, Removing Points from 
 Roots, Celluloid for Filling 
 
 " Cutting off" with Saws 
 Root Canal, Oil Dressing for 
 
 " " Treatment 
 
 " Canals, Determining Curves of 
 
 " Filling, Cosmoline for 
 Roots, Blowing Powder in 
 Root Canals, For Drying 
 
 " Dressing Formula 
 Rubber-dam, To Stop Holes in 
 " " Burning Ploles in 
 
 Rust, To Protect Instruments from 
 Rubber, Cutting Soft 
 Rubber-dam, Soap Stone for 
 
 " " Keeping in Water 
 
 Ruge, Engraving the 
 Rubber-dam, Ajjplying to Labial Cavities 
 Rubber Flasking, Pink 
 Rubber-dam Clamps, 
 Rubber, To Prevent Weighted Irritating 
 Rubber-dam Plolders 
 Rubber Sore Mouth, Cause of 
 
 " Cheap 
 Rubber-dam, Application of 
 
 Genese, 
 
 D 
 
 392 
 
 Parlcer, 
 
 A 
 
 82 
 
 Williams, 
 
 A 
 
 86 
 
 Tliomas, 
 
 A 
 
 102 
 
 Spaulcliiig, 
 
 A 
 
 113 
 
 Atkinson, 
 
 E 
 
 537 
 
 Milling, 
 
 D 
 
 ,416 
 
 Arringion, 
 
 A 
 
 12 
 
 Belts, 
 
 D 
 
 339 
 
 Review, 
 
 D 
 
 330 
 
 Atkinson, 
 
 D 
 
 385 
 
 Merriil, 
 
 A 
 
 33 
 
 Ejc. Rev. 
 
 A 
 
 101 
 
 Davenport, 
 
 A 
 
 50 
 
 Inlernai. Journal, 
 
 A 
 
 70 
 
 Shaw, 
 
 A 
 
 73 
 
 Ottolengai, 
 
 E 
 
 548 
 
 Beacock, 
 
 D 
 
 377 
 
 Baitershdl, 
 
 A 
 
 16 
 
 Barifield, 
 
 A 
 
 30 
 
 Roijce, 
 
 A 
 
 62 
 
 Office and Lah,ralory, 
 
 A 
 
 49 
 
 Williams, 
 
 A 
 
 36 
 
 Allen, 
 
 D 
 
 396 
 
 Rollins, 
 
 A 
 
 80 
 
 Harlan, 
 
 A 
 
 64 
 
 Wc^t, 
 
 A 
 
 35 
 
 Shields, 
 
 A 
 
 90 
 
 Intcrnaiional 
 
 D 
 
 343 
 
 Arckiives, 
 
 D 
 
 344 
 
 3Iitchell, 
 
 A 
 
 112 
 
 Review, 
 
 D 
 
 360 
 
 Beacock, 
 
 A 
 
 27 
 
 Thompson, 
 
 A 
 
 31 
 
 Steele, 
 
 £ 
 
 465 
 
 u 
 
 E 
 
 477 
 
 Bowen, 
 
 E 
 
 478 
 
 Rijkert, 
 
 E 
 
 481 
 
 JSiakahara, 
 
 B 
 
 202 
 
 Beacock, 
 
 A 
 
 91 
 
 Steele, 
 
 B 
 
 230 
 
 Rollins, 
 
 E 
 
 507 
 
 Horse, 
 
 B 
 
 215 
 
 Neeprr, 
 
 E 
 
 511 
 
 Jlodykin, 
 
 E 
 
 534 
 
 Steele, 
 
 E 
 
 543 
 
 Ottolengui, 
 
 A 
 
 3 
 
INDEX. 
 
 207 
 
 Rubber-clam, Ligation of 
 Sanitas, 
 
 Sandpaper, Holder for Hand Use 
 Screw Plate, a Left-hand 
 Separator, A Piano Wire 
 iSilk, Substitute for Floss 
 Soldering, Small Pieces 
 " Tubes and Nuls 
 
 " Investment for 
 
 Sodium Ethylate, for Blunted Gums 
 Soldering, Tubes, To Eegulating Appliances 
 
 " Pliers, Handy 
 
 Solder and Flux for Aluminum, 
 Sodium Fluorid as a Sterilizer, 
 Soldering, Second 
 
 " Without Heat 
 
 Soda, Salicylate of 
 
 " Sulphite of 
 Soldering, Without Investment 
 
 " Teeth Changing Color in 
 
 '' Bands to Plates 
 
 " Aluminum without Flux 
 
 " Bands, Clasps, etc. 
 
 Solder, Jumping 
 Sodium, Silico Fluoiid 
 Sozoiodol, 
 Soldering Fluid, 
 
 Spirit Lamp, To Reduce Heat of 
 Styptic Tannic Acid, 
 Sterilization of Instruments, 
 Sulphate of Copper — Treatment of Pyorrhea, 
 Sulpho-Carbolic Acid, 
 Swaging, Manilla Paper for 
 
 " Plate Springing in 
 
 Swaging Plates for High Arches 
 Swedging with Screw Press 
 Syringe Needle, Before Introducing 
 " To Clean 
 
 " Home-made 
 Syphilis, Treatment of, in the Mouth 
 Tartar, Light Yellow 
 Teeth, Forming Cavities in Porcelain 
 
 " To Remove Stains from 
 
 " Capping 
 
 " Palm for Separating 
 
 " To Detect Dead 
 
 '■ Polishing After Cleaning 
 
 <( 
 
 A 
 
 5 
 
 Peete, 
 
 D 
 
 367 
 
 Barnes, 
 
 E 
 
 504 
 
 Beebee, 
 
 E 
 
 479 
 
 Gillett, 
 
 E 
 
 50S 
 
 Barher, 
 
 A 
 
 lis 
 
 Liltixj, 
 
 H 
 
 1G3 
 
 West. Jom\, 
 
 B 
 
 176 
 
 LedyanI, 
 
 B 
 
 185 
 
 Eev., 
 
 D 
 
 406 
 
 Dental Prac. and Adv 
 
 ,E 
 
 4o2 
 
 Evans, 
 
 E 
 
 464 
 
 Eng. and Min. Jour., 
 
 D 
 
 388 
 
 Dent. Rev., 
 
 D 
 
 390 
 
 Barrett, 
 
 B 
 
 206 
 
 Nat. Dnuj(jist, 
 
 E 
 
 489 
 
 Shatluch, 
 
 D 
 
 381 
 
 a 
 
 D 
 
 382 
 
 Neivkirk, 
 
 B 
 
 213 
 
 Nelson, 
 
 B 
 
 212 
 
 Brit. Jour., 
 
 B 
 
 218 
 
 Heaton, 
 
 E 
 
 499 
 
 Melton, 
 
 B 
 
 233 
 
 Wilcox, 
 
 B 
 
 228 
 
 Sadduth, 
 
 D 
 
 358 
 
 Dent. Reviiw, 
 
 D 
 
 359 
 
 Off. and Lab., 
 
 D 
 
 325 
 
 Brunson, 
 
 E 
 
 446 
 
 Harper, 
 
 D 
 
 400 
 
 Miller, 
 
 E 
 
 630 
 
 Whipple, 
 
 D 
 
 356 
 
 International, 
 
 D 
 
 399 
 
 E.rchanc/e, 
 
 B 
 
 170 
 
 Bartlett, 
 
 B 
 
 151 
 
 Items, 
 
 B 
 
 236 
 
 Leech, 
 
 B 
 
 148 
 
 Hoff, 
 
 A 
 
 54 
 
 Den. Rev., 
 
 E 
 
 459 
 
 Neeper, 
 
 E 
 
 523 
 
 Hwjenschmidt, 
 
 E 
 
 516 
 
 Robin, 
 
 E 
 
 535 
 
 Keeky, 
 
 E 
 
 438 
 
 Brit. Jour., 
 
 A 
 
 42 
 
 Gilmore, 
 
 A 
 
 45 
 
 Her. of Den. 
 
 A 
 
 47 
 
 Heitzmann, 
 
 A 
 
 61 
 
 Steele, 
 
 A 
 
 65 
 
^98 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Teeth, Rubber Overcoat for Sensitive 
 
 " On Gold Plate, Resetting Pinless 
 
 " Sensitive to Changes 
 
 " on Rubber, English Pinless 
 
 " Resetting Pins in Artificial 
 
 " Materials Used in Artificial 
 
 " Splint for Supporting 
 
 " To Remove Deciduous 
 
 " Composition of Human 
 
 " To Retain Dressing in 
 
 " Gold Backing Eroded 
 
 " Protecting While Erupting 
 
 '' Separating 
 Tempering Mandrels 
 
 >' Bath, New 
 
 Thymol, Dental Uses of 
 Thurlington, Uses for 
 Tired Heels, Cushions for 
 Tin, For Filling, Preparing and Using 
 Tooth, To Rotate a 
 
 " " Splice a Broken 
 
 •' Paste 
 Toothache Cotton, 
 Tooth Washes, Flavor for 
 
 " Wash, Saponaceous 
 Toothache, For the 
 Tooth Wash, A Fine 
 Tumor, Treatment of Cystic 
 Varnish, Sandarac 
 " Gutta-percha 
 
 '• An Excellent 
 Yioegar and its Uses 
 Vulcanite and Celluloid Combined 
 Vulcanizers, For Leaking 
 Vulcanizer, Care of the 
 Vulcanizing, to Prevent Sulphur Smell 
 Vulcanizer Wrench 
 Wax, To Toughen 
 
 " Clarifying 
 
 " Coloring * 
 
 Wedges, To Prevent Slipping 
 W^heels, To Prevent Polishing Splitting 
 Zinc, Chlorid of 
 
 " Sulp., as an Escharotic 
 
 " To Renew 
 
 Edicards, 
 
 A 
 
 71 
 
 Ottolengui, 
 
 B 
 
 191 
 
 Items, 
 
 A 
 
 85 
 
 ti 
 
 B 
 
 209 
 
 Steele, 
 
 B 
 
 223 
 
 Items, 
 
 E 
 
 500 
 
 Angle, 
 
 A 
 
 115 
 
 Eames, 
 
 A 
 
 120 
 
 Von Bihra 
 
 E 
 
 541 
 
 Beacoek, 
 
 D 
 
 418 
 
 Dodge, 
 
 A 
 
 19 
 
 Perry, 
 
 A 
 
 11 
 
 Oltolengid, 
 
 A 
 
 2 
 
 Ex., 
 
 E 
 
 445 
 
 Scien. Amer., 
 
 E 
 
 454 
 
 Kirk, 
 
 D 
 
 411 
 
 Parsons, 
 
 D 
 
 397 
 
 Items, 
 
 E 
 
 443 
 
 Darby, 
 
 A 
 
 129 
 
 International, 
 
 A 
 
 40 
 
 Bogue, 
 
 A 
 
 57 
 
 Harlin, 
 
 D 
 
 410 
 
 Med. Bee, 
 
 D 
 
 413 
 
 Steele, 
 
 D 
 
 402 
 
 Den. Off. and Lab., 
 
 D 
 
 395 
 
 Morse, 
 
 D 
 
 336 
 
 Ex., 
 
 D 
 
 417 
 
 Items, 
 
 E 
 
 518 
 
 Chupein, 
 
 D 
 
 412 
 
 Ives, 
 
 D 
 
 405. 
 
 <( 
 
 D 
 
 383 
 
 Shatiuek, 
 
 D 
 
 334 
 
 'S J. S., 
 
 B 
 
 193 
 
 Schillniger, 
 
 B 
 
 210 
 
 Snoiv, 
 
 B 
 
 146 
 
 Off. and Lab., 
 
 E 
 
 551 
 
 Wright, 
 
 B 
 
 i50 
 
 Keagle, 
 
 D 
 
 426 
 
 Berry, 
 
 E 
 
 471 
 
 Ex., 
 
 E 
 
 520 
 
 Barker 
 
 A 
 
 117 
 
 Secor, 
 
 B 
 
 255 
 
 Shattuck, 
 
 D 
 
 393 
 
 0. Jour., 
 
 D 
 
 327 
 
 Fletcher, 
 
 E 
 
 485 
 
^m 
 
 
 !j/j6^D^yE 
 
 ^